Schneider Electric TSX57 Hardware PLC Implementation User Manual

Modicon Premium

PLCs

TSX 57

User Manual

Edition October 2003

General safety advice for users

____________________________________________________________________________

1 General

This manual is intended for personnel technically qualified to install, operate and maintain the products which are described herein. It contains all the necessary information for correct use of the products. However, for advanced use of our products please contact your nearest sales office for additional information.

The contents of this manual are not contractual and cannot under any circumstance extend or restrict contract warranty clauses.

2 Qualification of personnel

Only qualified personnel are authorized to install, operate or maintain the products. Any work performed by a unqualified person or non-observance of the safety instructions in this document or attached to the equipment may risk the safety of personnel and/or cause irreparable damage to equipment. The following personnel may be regarded as being "Qualified" :

• those involved with application design. Design office personnel familiar with control system safety concepts (for example, design engineers, etc),

• those involved with equipment installation. Individuals who are familiar with the installation, connection and startup of control system equipment (for example installers or wiring technicians working during the installation phase, technicians setting up the equipment, etc),

• those involved with operation. Personnel trained to operate and manage control system equipment (for example, operators, etc),

• those performing preventive or corrective maintenance. Personnel who are trained and experienced in the adjustment and repair of control system equipment (for example, installation engineers, after sales service engineers, etc).

3 Warnings

Warnings serve to prevent specific risks encountered by personnel and/or equipment. They are indicated in the documentation and on the products by different warning symbols, according to the severity of the risk :

Danger or Caution or Attention

Indicates that not following instructions or ignoring the warning may cause serious personal injury, death and/or serious damage to equipment.

Warning or Important or !

Indicates that not following a specific instruction may lead to minor injury and/or damage to equipment.

Note or Comment

Highlights important information relating to the product, its operation or its accompanying documentation.

___________________________________________________________________________

1

General safety advice for users

___________________________________________________________________________

4 Conformity of use

The products described in this manual conform to the European Directives (*) to which they are subject (CE marking). However, they can only be used correctly in the context of the applications for which they are intended (described in the various documents) and when connected to approved third party products.

As a general rule, if all handling, transport and storage specifications are observed, and all instructions for installation, operation and maintenance are followed, the products will be used correctly, with no danger to personnel or equipment.

(*) DEMC and DLV Directives, concerning Electromagnetic Compatibility and Low Voltage.

5 Installing and setting up equipment

It is important to observe the following rules when installing and starting up equipment. In addition, if the installation includes digital links, it is essential to follow the basic wiring rules given in the user's guide, reference TSX DG GND, or in manual TSX DR NET, part C.

• safety instructions must be followed meticulously. These instructions are in the documentation or on the equipment being installed and set up.

• the type of equipment defines the way in which it should be installed :

- a flush-mountable device (for example, a process control terminal or a cell controller) must be flush-mounted,

- a device which is to be built in (for example, PLC) must be placed in a cabinet or enclosure,

- the casing of a laptop or portable device (for example, a programming terminal or a notebook) must remain closed,

• if the device is permanently connected, its electrical installation must include a device to isolate it from the power supply and a circuit-breaker to protect it against overcurrents and isolation faults. If this is not the case, the power socket must be grounded and be easily accessed. In all cases, the device must be connected to the protective mechanical ground PG using

green/yellow wires (NFC 15 100).

• low voltage circuits (even though they are low voltage) must be connected to the protective ground so that dangerous voltages can be detected.

• before a device is powered up, its nominal voltage must be checked to ensure that it has been adjusted to conform with the supply voltage.

• if the device is supplied with 24 or 48 VDC, the low voltage circuits must be protected. Only use power supplies which conform to the standards currently in force.

• check that the supply voltages remain within the tolerance ranges defined in the technical characteristics of the devices.

• all measures must be taken to ensure that any power return (immediate, warm or cold) does not lead to a dangerous state which may risk personnel or the installation.

• emergency stop devices must remain effective in all the device's operating modes, even those which are abnormal (for example, when a wire becomes disconnected). Resetting these devices must not cause uncontrolled or improper restarts.

• cables which carry signals must be located where they do not cause interference with the control system functions by capacitive, inductive or electromagnetic interference.

• control system equipment and their control devices must be installed in such a way as to ensure that they are protected against unintentional operation.

• appropriate safety measures must be taken for the inputs and outputs, to prevent improper states in the control system device, if no signal is received.

___________________________________________________________________________

2

General safety advice for users

____________________________________________________________________________

6 Equipment operation

The operational safety and availability of a device is its ability to avoid the appearance of faults and to minimize their effects if they occur.

A system is said to be fail-safe if the appearance of faults never causes a dangerous situation.

A fault inside the control system is known as :

• passive, if it results in an open output circuit (no command is sent to the actuators).

• active, if it results in a closed output circuit (an command is sent to the actuators).

From the safety point of view, a given fault is dangerous or not depending on the type of command given during normal operation. A passive fault is dangerous if the normal command is the operation of an alarm. An active fault is dangerous if it maintains or activates an undesirable command.

It is important to note the basic difference between the behavior of an electromechanical relay and an electronic component (for example a transistor) :

• there is a high probability, approximately 90%, that the failure of a relay will cause an open circuit (control circuit powered off).

• there is a 50% probability that the failure of a transistor will cause either an open circuit or a closed circuit.

This is why it is important to correctly estimate the types and consequences of faults when automating a system using electronic products such as PLCs, including when relay output modules are used on PLCs.

The system designer must use devices external to the PLC to protect against active faults inside the PLC, which are not indicated and are judged to be dangerous to the application. This may require solutions from various different technologies such as mechanical, electromechanical, pneumatic or hydraulic devices (for example, directly wiring a limit switch and emergency stop switches to the coil of a movement control contactor).

To protect against dangerous faults which may occur on output circuits or preactuators, it is sometimes beneficial to resort to general principles and use the large processing capacity of

PLCs, for example by using "inputs to check the correct execution of commands requested by the program".

7 Electrical and thermal characteristics

Details of the electrical and thermal characteristics of devices are given in the associated technical documents (installation manuals, service instructions).

___________________________________________________________________________

3

General safety advice for users

___________________________________________________________________________

8 Environmental conditions

In industry, the micro-environmental conditions of electronic devices can vary greatly. For this reason, programmable controllers and associated modules must conform to the following two types of installation :

• installation in an enclosure with IP54 protection for protecting devices from metallic dust amongst other things. Two guidelines are associated with this enclosure type of installation :

- direct access to electronic modules should be strictly reserved to maintenance staff (see section 2), with access keys,

- the selection of a metallic enclosure must be considered, since it serves as extra screening against the latent risk of electromagnetic interference.

• direct installation without protection for TSX Premium PLCs and associated systems (power supply modules, etc) which themselves have IP20 protection.

This type of installation applies to areas with restricted access and low pollution levels (not exceeding 2), for example stations or control rooms which have neither machines nor any activity generating metallic dust or other metallic particles. The external walls hence serve as the PLC enclosure.

9 Preventive or corrective maintenance

Availability

The availability of a system is its ability, in terms of its combined reliability, maintainability and maintenance logistics, to be in a state to perform a required function, at a given moment and within a defined time period.

Availability is therefore specific to each application, since it is a combination of :

• the architecture of the automatic system,

• the reliability and maintainability : intrinsic characteristics of the equipment (PLCs, sensors, machine, etc),

• maintenance logistics : characteristic intrinsic to the user of the control system (software structure, fault indication, process, on-site replacement parts, training of personnel).

Troubleshooting procedure

• control system equipment should only be repaired by qualified personnel (after sales service engineer, or technician approved by Schneider Automation S.A.). Only certified replacement parts or components should be used.

• before performing any operation on equipment (for example opening an enclosure), always cut the power supply off (disconnect the power plug or open the power isolation switch).

• before performing any "mechanical" operation on equipment on site, cut the power supply off and mechanically lock any moving parts.

• before removing a module, a memory cartridge, a PCMCIA card, etc, check in the manual whether this should be done with the power off or if it is possible while the device is powered up. Meticulously follow the instructions given in the manual.

• on positive logic outputs or negative logic inputs, take all necessary precautions to prevent a disconnected wire from coming into contact with the mechanical ground (risk of undesirable command).

Replacement and recycling of used batteries

• if these are replaced, use batteries of the same type and dispose of defective batteries in the same way as toxic waste.

Do not throw lithium or mercury batteries into a fire, open or recharge them, or attempt to solder them.

___________________________________________________________________________

4

TSX Premium

Installation

TSX Premium PLCs

General presentation A1

Terminal port communication A2

A

Discrete I/O : TSX DEY iiii

/ DSY iiii

modules B

Analog : TSX AEY iii

/ ASY iii modules C

Communication : TSX SCY 21600 module and PCMCIA cards D

Counting : TSX CTY 2A / CTY 4A modules

Axis control : TSX CAY 21/ CAY 41 modules

Stepper control : TSX CFY 11/ CFY 21 modules

Startup/Diagnostics/Maintenance

Standards and installation conditions

Process supplies

E

F

G

I

H

J

_

_

_

_

_

Index

P

G

H

E

F

C

D

A

B

K

L

M

J

I

N

O

P

___________________________________________________________________________

B / 2

TSX Premium PLCs Contents

General presentation Part A1

___________________________________________________________________________

A1

Section

1 Presentation

1.1

Component parts

1.1-1 Basic elements

1.1-2 Discrete I/O

1.1-3 Analog I/O

1.1-4 Counting

1.1-5 Axis control

1.1-6 Stepper control

1.1-7 Communication

1.1-8 Weighing

1.1-9 Fan modules

1.2

The various types of station

2 TSX RKY i i

standard racks & TSX RKY i i

E extendable racks

2.1

2.2

Presentation

2.1-1 General

2.1-2 Physical description

Installation / mounting

2/1

2.3

Functions 2/4

2.3-1 Composition of a PLC station

2.3-2 Addressing racks in a PLC station

2/4

2/5

2.3-3 Module addresses 2/6

2.3-4 Installing power supplies, processors and other modules 2/7

2.4

Accessories 2/8

2.4-1 TSX CBY ii

0K BusX extension cables 2/8

2.4-2 TSX TLY line terminator 2/9

2.4-3 TSX RKA 02 protective cover for an unoccupied position 2/9

2.4-4 Marking 2/10

2/1

2/1

2/2

2/3

Page

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/2

1/3

1/3

1/4

1/4

1/5

1/6

1/6

1/7

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/1

A1

TSX Premium PLCs

General presentation

Contents

Part A1

Section

3 TSX P57-10 / P57-20 processors

3.1

Presentation

3.1-1 General

3.1-2 Physical description

3-2 Catalog

3.3

Installation/mounting

3.3-1 Installation

3.3-2 Mounting

3.4

Auxiliary functions

3.4-1 Terminal port

3.4-2 Slot for PCMCIA communication card

3.4-3 Memories

3.4-4 Processor RESET pushbutton

3.4-5 Display

3.4-6 Realtime clock

3.5

Characteristics

3.5-1 General characteristics

3.5-2 Electrical characteristics

4 TSX PSY iiii

power supplies

4.1

Presentation

4.1-1 General

4.1-2 Physical description

4-2 Catalog

4.3

Auxiliary functions

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/2

4/1

4/1

4/1

4/2

4/3

4/4

Page

3/1

3/4

3/4

3/4

3/5

3/5

3/5

3/6

3/7

3/8

3/9

3/11

3/11

3/12

3/1

3/1

3/2

3/3

TSX Premium PLCs Contents

General presentation Part A1

___________________________________________________________________________

A1

Section

4.4

Installation / insertion

4.4-1 Installation

4.4-2 Insertion / connections

4.5

Characteristics

4.5-1 Characteristics of AC power supplies

4.5-2 Characteristics of DC power supplies

4.5-3 Characteristics of the alarm relay contact

4.6

Power consumption table for selecting a power supply module

Page

4/6

4/6

4/6

4/7

4/7

4/8

4/10

4/11

4.7

Definition of protection devices at the head of the line 4/15

5 Mounting

5.1

Installation rules

5.1-1 Positioning the racks

5.2

Dimensions

5.3

Mounting/fixing racks

5.3-1 Mounting on a 35 mm wide DIN rail

5.3-2 Mounting on panel or Telequick pre-slotted plate

5.4

Mounting modules and terminal blocks

5.4-1 Inserting a module in a rack

5.4-2 Fitting a screw terminal block on a module

5.5

Fitting/removing the RAM memory backup battery

5.6

Inserting/removing the PCMCIA memory card

5/1

5/1

5/1

5/2

5/3

5/3

5/4

5/5

5/5

5/6

5/7

5/8

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/3

A1

TSX Premium PLCs

General presentation

Contents

Part A1

Section

6 Connections

Page

6/1

6.1

Ground connections

6.1-1 Grounding the racks

6.1-2 Grounding the modules

6/1

6/1

6/1

6.2

Connection of power supplies

6.2-1 Rules for connection

6.2-2 Connection of AC power supply modules

6.2-3 Connecting DC power supply modules via an AC supply

6.2-4 Sensor and preactuator power supply interlocking

6/2

6/2

6/4

6/6

6/10

7 Functions

7.1

Addressing discrete I/O channels

7.2

Setting the PLC to RUN/STOP

7.3

Single task application structure

7.3-1 Cyclic execution

7.3-2 Periodic execution

7.4

Multitask application structure

7.4-1 Control tasks

7.4-2 Event-triggered tasks

7.5

User memory structure

7.5-1 Application memory

7/1

7/1

7/2

7/3

7/3

7/5

7/7

7/8

7/10

7/12

7/12

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/4

TSX Premium PLCs Contents

General presentation Part A1

___________________________________________________________________________

A1

Section Page

7.6

Operating modes of the PLC on start-up 7/15

7.6-1 Cold start

7.6-2 Warm restart

7.6-3 Operation following power supply failure and return

7.6-4 Operation after insertion/removal of a

7/15

7/16

7/16

PCMCIA memory card 7/18

7.6-5 Operation after pressing the processor RESET button 7/18

7.6-6 Operation after pressing the power supply RESET button 7/18

7.6-7 PLC response to cold start 7/19

7.7

Behavior on insertion/removal of a module when powered-up 7/20

7.8

Behavior of the I/O on downgraded operating mode 7/20

7.8-1 Safety value of discrete and analog outputs 7/20

7.8-2 Discrete and analog outputs switching to fallback mode 7/21

7.8-3 I/O faults 7/21

7.9

Loading the operating system (OS) 7/22

8 Appendix

8.1

Fan modules

8.1-1 General presentation

8.1-2 Physical presentation

8.1-3 Catalog

8.1-4 Dimensions

8.1-5 Mounting

8.1-6 Installation rules for racks with fan modules

8.1-7 Connections

8.1-8 Characteristics

8/1

8/1

8/1

8/2

8/2

8/3

8/4

8/5

8/6

8/7

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/5

A1

TSX Premium PLCs

General presentation

Section

8.2

Performance

8.2-1 MAST task scan time

8.2-2 FAST task scan time

8.2-3 Response time to an event

Contents

Part A1

Page

8/8

8/8

8/14

8/14

___________________________________________________________________________

A1/6

1 Presentation

1.1

Component parts

1.1-1 Basic elements

TSX Premium PLCs are entirely modular. A PLC station is constructed around the following basic elements :

• Standard racks with 6, 8 and 12 positions ( see part

A1 - section 2). They can make up a PLC station

limited to a single rack.

• Extendable racks with

6, 8 and 12 positions (see part A1 - section 2). They can make up a PLC station containing a maximum of 8 racks, distributed on the bus

(known as BusX). Bus continuity between the various racks is provided by bus extension cables whose total length should not exceed 50 meters.

6-position extendable rack

8-position extendable rack

A1

12-position extendable rack

• Power supply modules

(see part A1 - section 4)

Each rack requires a power supply module determined according to the distributed supply (AC or DC) and the power required at rack level

(standard format module or double format module) standard format power supply double format power supply

1/1

A1

• Processor modules (see part A1 - section 3)

Each station has a processor, which is selected according to the processing power required :

- TSX P57-10 processor

This can run a PLC station comprising a maximum of 1 standard rack or 2 extendable racks, 512 discrete I/O, 24 analog I/O, 2 application-specific modules (counter, axis control, etc).

- TSX P57-20 processor

This can run a PLC station comprising a maximum of 1 standard rack or 8 extendable racks, 1024 discrete I/O, 80 analog I/O, 6 application-specific modules (counter, axis control, etc).

1.1-2 Discrete I/O (see part B)

A wide range of discrete I/O modules enables users to match their particular requirements.

These modules vary in :

• Modularity : 8, 16, 32 and 64 channels.

• Type of inputs :

- modules with DC inputs (24VDC, 48VDC).

- modules with AC inputs (24VAC, 48VAC, 110VAC, 240VAC).

• Type of outputs :

- modules with relay outputs.

- modules with DC solid state outputs (24VDC / 0.1A - 0.5A - 2A, 48VDC / 0.25A - 1A).

- modules with AC solid state outputs (24VAC / 130VAC / 1A, 48VAC / 240VAC / 2A,

• Type of connections : screw terminal connections and HE10 type connectors, for connection to sensors and preactuators by means of the TELEFAST 2 prewiring system.

HE10 connections Screw terminal connections

64 I / 64 Q 32 I / 32 Q 16 I 8 I-16 I / 8 Q-16 Q

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

Presentation 1

A1

1.1-3 Analog I/O (see part C)

The range of analog I/O modules covers the majority of requirements. These modules vary in :

• Modularity : 4, 8, 16 channels.

• Performance and signal ranges on offer : voltage/current, multirange (thermocouple, temperature probe, voltage/current).

• Type of connections :

- screw terminal connections,

- 25-pin SUB D type connectors, for connection to sensors by means of the

TELEFAST 2 prewiring system.

25-pin SUB D connections Screw terminal connections

16 I non-isolated between channels

Voltage / Current

0...10 V,

±

10 V

0...5V, 1...5V

0...20 mA, 4...20 mA

12 bits

8 I non-isolated between channels

4 I isolated between channels

Voltage / Current

0...10 V,

±

10 V

0...5V, 1...5V

Multirange

0...10 V,

±

10 V

0...5V, 1...5V

0...20 mA, 4...20 mA 0...20 mA, 4...20 mA

Temperature probe

Thermocouple

12 bits 16 bits

4 Q isolated between channels

Voltage / Current

±

10 V

0...20 mA

4...20 mA

11 bits + sign

1.1-4 Counting (see part E)

TSX Premium PLCs offer the principal counting functions (downcounting, upcounting, up/down counting) using

"counter" modules.

There are two modules :

• 1 module containing 2 channels,

• 1 module containing 4 channels.

These modules can be used to count pulses at a maximum frequency of 40 kHz on 24 bits + sign.

2-channel module 4-channel module

___________________________________________________________________________

1/3

A1

1.1-5 Axis control (see part F)

By means of "axis control" modules, TSX

Premium PLCs can be used to manage movement control applications, controlled by servomotors where the speed reference is an analog value (

±

10 V)

There are two modules :

• a 2-channel module which can be used for servo loop positioning with two independent axes (limited linear).

• a 4-channel module which can be used for servo loop positioning with four independent axes (limited linear).

2-channel module 4-channel module

1.1-6 Stepper control (see part G)

By means of "stepper control" modules,

TSX Premium PLCs can be used to manage movement control applications, controlled by transporters where the speed reference is a frequency.

There are two modules :

• a single channel module which can be used to control a transporter.

• a 2-channel module which can be used to control two transporters.

Single channel module 2-channel module

___________________________________________________________________________

1/4

Presentation 1

A1

1.1-7 Communication (see parts A2 & D)

TSX Premium PLCs can be used for a number of communication modes :

• Communication via terminal ports (see part A2)

TSX Premium PLC processors have two terminal ports, (TER) and (AUX),

RS 485 non-isolated serial link, UNI-

TELWAY or character mode protocol.

These terminal ports can be used for connecting :

- a programming terminal and/or a manmachine interface terminal (UNI-

TELWAY master mode),

- the station to a UNI-TELWAY multidrop link (UNI-TELWAY master or slave mode),

- a printer or a terminal in character mode.

Note : the user-defined communication protocol is identical for both ports.

• Communication via a communication module (see part D)

This module, which can be integrated in all TSX Premium rack PLCs, has :

- an integrated communication channel

(1), isolated RS 485 serial link, multiprotocol (UNI-TELWAY,

MODBUS/JBUS, character mode).

1

- a slot (2), which can take a PCMCIA format communication card (see below).

2

• Communication via PCMCIA cards which can be integrated in the processor or

the communication module (see part D)

The processors and the communication module both have a slot which can take a PCMCIA format communication card :

- multiprotocol cards (UNI-TELWAY,

Communication module

MODBUS/JBUS, character mode) : non isolated RS 232 D serial link isolated RS 485 serial link current loop link,

- FIPWAY network card

- FIPIO Agent bus card (1)

(1) only on the processor.

Processor module PCMCIA cards

___________________________________________________________________________

1/5

A1

1.1-8 Weighing (see manual TSX DM ISP Y100E)

By means of the "weighing" module, TSX

Premium PLCs can be used to manage weighing applications : batching, multiproduct batching, sorting by weight, flow control, weight totalizing, etc.

This module has a measurement input for

8 sensors maximum, 2 fast discrete outputs and a serial link for an extension display.

1.1-9 Fan modules (see part A1- section 8)

Depending on the rack modularity (6, 8 or

12 positions), one, two or three fan modules can be installed on top of each rack in order to help cool the various modules by forced convection.

These fan units should be used in the following cases :

• Ambient temperature in the range 25

°

C...60

°

C : forced ventilation increases the lifetime of the various TSX Premium PLC components (25% increase in MTBF),

• Ambient temperature in the range 60

°

C...70

°

C: since the ambient temperature is limited to 60

°

C without ventilation, forced ventilation is used to decrease the temperature inside the modules by 10

°

C, bringing the internal module temperature to the equivalent of an ambient temperature of 60

°

C.

There are three types of fan module :

• fan module with 110 VAC power supply,

• fan module with 220 VAC power supply,

• fan module with 24 VDC power supply.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/6

Presentation 1

A1

1.2

The various types of station

The maximum capacities of a TSX Premium PLC station are defined according to the type of rack (standard or extendable) and the type of processor (TSX P57 10 or

TSX P57 20) selected.

• TSX 57-10 stations : based on a TSX P57 10 processor

Station with standard rack

Station with extendable racks

Maximum configuration :

• 1 standard rack with 6, 8 or 12 positions

• 1 TSX P57 10 processor, processing capacity :

- 512 discrete I/O,

- 24 analog I/O,

- 2 application-specific modules

(counter, axis control, etc).

Maximum configuration :

• 2 extendable racks with 6, 8 or 12 positions

• 1 TSX P57 10 processor, processing capacity :

- 512 discrete I/O,

- 24 analog I/O,

- 2 application-specific modules

(counter, axis control, etc).

• Maximum length of bus extension cable to the second rack limited to

50 meters.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/7

A1

• TSX 57-20 stations : based on a TSX P57 20 processor

Station with standard rack

Station with extendable racks

Maximum configuration :

• 1 standard rack with 6, 8, or 12 positions.

• 1 TSX P57 20 processor, processing capacity :

- 1024 discrete I/O,

- 80 analog I/O,

- 6 application-specific modules

(counter, axis control, etc).

Maximum configuration :

• 8 extendable racks with 6, 8, or 12 positions.

• 1 TSX P57 20 processor, processing capacity :

- 1024 discrete I/O,

- 80 analog I/O,

- 6 application-specific modules

(counter, axis control, etc).

• Total length of bus extension cables limited to 50 meters.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/8

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii

Section 2

2 TSX RKY i i standard racks & TSX RKY i i

E extendable racks

2.1

Presentation

2.1-1 General

TSX RKY

iii racks constitute the basic element of TSX Premium PLCs.

These racks provide the following functions :

• mechanical function :

They are used for fitting all PLC station modules (power supply modules, processor, discrete/analog I/O, application-specific modules).

They can be fitted in enclosures, on the machine frame or on panels.

• electrical function :

The racks have an integral bus, called BusX which distributes :

- the power supplies required for each module in the same rack,

- the service signals and data for the whole PLC station if it comprises a number of racks.

So as to match user requirements more closely, there are two families of racks, each available in 3 versions (6, 8 and 12 positions).

• Standard racks : These are used to make up a PLC station limited to a single rack.

• Extendable racks : These are used to make up a PLC station which can contain a maximum of 8 racks. These racks are distributed on a bus known as BusX, whose maximum length is limited to 50 meters.

Bus continuity from one rack to another is provided by a bus extension cable, with special characteristics.

A1

Standard racks Extendable racks

TSX RKY 6

(6 positions)

TSX RKY 6E

(6 positions)

TSX RKY 8

(8 positions)

TSX RKY 8E

(8 positions)

TSX RKY 12

(12 positions)

TSX RKY 12E

(12 positions)

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1

A1

2.1-2 Physical description

• Standard racks

4 3 1

6

8

6

7

6

9

5

• Extendable racks

10 4 3

2

1

11

6

8

11

6

7

6

9

5 2

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 2

9

6

9

6

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii

E extendable racks 2

A1

1 Metal plate acting as :

• support for the BusX electronic card and protection for the bus against EMI and

ESD interference,

• module support,

• mechanical reinforcement for the rack.

2 Apertures for anchoring the module pins,

3 48-pin female 1/2 DIN connectors for connecting the rack to each module.

When the rack is supplied these connectors are protected by covers which should be removed before the modules are installed.

The connector located furthest to the left and marked PS is always dedicated to the rack power supply module; the other connectors marked 00 to ii can take all the other types of module.

4 Tapped holes for the module fixing screw.

5 Aperture which ensures correct location when a power supply module is fitted.

Since the power supply modules have a boss on the rear panel, it is impossible to mount this module in any other position.

6 Holes for fitting the rack on a support large enough to take M6 screws.

7 Location for marking the rack address.

8 Location for marking the station network address.

9 Ground terminals for grounding the rack.

10 Micro-switches for encoding the rack address (on extendable racks only).

11 9-pin female SUB D connectors for connecting BusX to another rack (on extendable racks only).

2.2

Installation / mounting

The procedure for installing and mounting racks is explained in section 5 of this part.

• Installation : section 5.1

• Mounting : section 5.3

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 3

A1

2.3

Functions

2.3-1 Composition of a PLC station

• Based on standard racks : TSX RKY 6/8/12 standard racks are used to make up a

TSX 57-10 or TSX 57-20 PLC station limited to a single rack.

• Based on extendable racks : TSX RKY 6E/8E/12E

By using extendable racks, it is possible to make up a PLC station containing a maximum of 2 racks for a TSX 57-10 station and 8 racks for a TSX 57-20 station.

The racks can have the same product reference or different product references, and are connected by BusX extension cables (1). BusX should have a line terminator (2) fitted at each end.

- BusX extension cables

The racks are interconnected by TSX

CBY ii

0K BusX extension cables connected to the 9-pin SUB D connector to be found on the right and left-hand side of each extendable rack.

As the concept of inlet and outlet does not apply to 9-pin SUB D connectors, it does not matter whether the cable coming in from a rack or the cable going out to another rack is connected to the right or left connector.

2

1

- line terminator

The two extendable racks at the end of the daisy chain must be fitted with a

TSX TLY line terminator on the unused

9-pin SUB D connector.

- maximum cable length

The total length of all the TSX CBY ii

0K cables used in a PLC station must never exceed 50 meters.

2

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 4

1

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii

E extendable racks 2

A1

2.3-2 Addressing racks in a PLC station

• Station made up of standard racks

The station is always limited to a single rack; the rack address is therefore implicit and has the value 0 (no micro-switches).

• Station made up of extendable racks

Each station rack must have an address assigned to it. This address is encoded via

4 micro-switches located on the rack.

2

1

4

3

Rack addresses 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Position of microswitches

2

1

4

3

ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Note :

- it makes no difference which position micro-switch 4 is in. In the above drawing, micro-switch

4 is always in the ON position.

- at the time of supply, the micro-switches are in the ON position (address 0).

Assigning addresses to the various racks

Address 0 : This address is always assigned to the rack which holds the processor, as this rack can be in any position in the daisy chain.

Addresses 1 to 7 : These can be assigned to all the other extendable station racks, in any order.

Note :

The rack address must be encoded before the power supply module is mounted.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 5

A1

2.3-3 Module addresses

For all standard and extendable racks, a module address is geographical and will depend on the position of the module in the rack. The address of each position is indicated above each connector; the connector marked PS is always dedicated to the rack power supply.

Module addresses according to the type of rack

• TSX RKY 6/6E racks : addresses 00 to 04

• TSX RKY 8/8E racks : addresses 00 to 06

• TSX RKY 12/12E racks : addresses 00 to 10

(1)

PS 00 01

Module addresses

02 03 04 05 06

Example : module addresses on TSX RKY 8E rack

(1) PS = Marks the power supply module connector

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 6

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii

E extendable racks 2

A1

2.3-4 Installing power supplies, processors and other modules

• On a standard or extendable rack with address 0

The rack with address 0 must hold a power supply module and the processor module.

Since TSX Premium PLCs can have two types of power supply (standard format or double format), the position of the processor will depend on the type of power supply being used.

Using a standard format power supply module :

- the power supply module always occupies position PS,

the processor may be inserted in position 0 (preferred position) or position 1 (in this case slot 0 is not available),

- the other modules should be installed from position 01 onwards.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Using a double format power supply module :

- the power supply module always occupies positions PS and 00,

- the processor module must be installed in position 01,

PS 00

- the other modules should be installed from position 02 onwards.

01 02 03 04 05 06

• On an extendable rack with addresses 1 to 7

Each rack must have a power supply module, whether standard or double format.

Using a standard format power supply module :

- the power supply module always occupies position PS,

- the other modules should be installed from position 00 onwards.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Using a double format power supply module :

- the power supply module always occupies positions PS and 00, PS 00 01

- the other modules should be installed from position 01 onwards.

02 03 04 05 06

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 7

A1

2.4

Accessories

2.4-1 TSX CBY i i

0K BusX extension cables

These cables are used to daisy-chain TSX

RKY

ii

E extendable racks and carry the various BusX signals. They are fitted with

9-pin male SUB D connectors at each end, which connect to the 9-pin female SUB D connectors on the extendable rack.

Note :

These cables do not carry any supply voltage, as each rack has its own power supply module.

7 cable lengths are available for the various types of use :

Product references

TSX CBY 010K

TSX CBY 030K

TSX CBY 050K

TSX CBY 120K

TSX CBY 180K

TSX CBY 280K

TSX CBY 380K

Length

1 meter

3 meters

5 meters

12 meters

18 meters

28 meters

38 meters

TSX CBY ii

OK

TSX CBY ii

OK

!

The total length of all the cables used in a PLC station is limited to 50 meters.

!

All the station racks MUST be powered down prior to inserting or removing a TSX CBY i i i

0K cable.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 8

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii

E extendable racks 2

A1

2.4-2 TSX TLY line terminator

When using extendable racks, in order to ensure correct data transmission on BusX, the bus should be fitted with a line terminator at each end (see outline diagram in section

2.3-1).

A line terminator is made up of a 9-pin

SUB D connector and a cover containing the adaptor elements. It fits onto the 9-pin

SUB D connectors on the extendable racks located at the end of the line.

A

B

TSX TLY line terminators are sold in lots of 2 and marked A and B. Each end of the bus must, without fail, have an A line terminator or a B line terminator (see diagrams below).

!

All the station racks MUST be powered down prior to inserting or removing a line terminator.

Positioning of line terminators (A and B)

• On a PLC station with several TSX RKY ii

E extendable racks TSX RKY ii E

TSX CBY ii 0K

A

A

A B

A

A

A B

A

A

A B

A

A

A B

TSX TLY

TSX RKY ii E

TSX CBY ii 0K

A

A

A

B

A

A

A

B

A

A

A

B

A

A

A

B

TSX RKY ii E

OK OK NOK NOK

• On a PLC station with a single TSX RKY i i

E extendable rack

Note:

When using a single extendable rack, a line terminator must be fitted to each 9-pin SUB D connector on the rack.

TSX TLY

TSX RKY ii

E

A

A

A B

A

A

A

B

A

A

A B

A

A

A

B

A

A

A B

A

A

A

B

A

A

A B

A

A

A

B

OK OK NOK NOK

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 9

A1

2.4-3 TSX RKA 02 protective cover for an unoccupied position

If there are any unoccupied positions on a rack, it is advisable to fit a TSX RKA 02 cover in this position, which is available for this purpose. This cover fits on the rack in the same way as a shallow version of a module.

TSX RKA 02 covers are sold in lots of 5.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 0

TSX RKY ii standard racks & TSX RKY ii

E extendable racks 2

A1

2.4-4 Marking

• Marking module positions on the rack

When the module is in place on the rack, it hides the position marker which is screen-printed on the rack. So that a module position can still be identified quickly, each rack comes with a sheet of self-adhesive labels which can be used to mark the position of each module.

These self-adhesive labels can be stuck on top of the module when it is in place on the rack.

Label position

Sheet of labels

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14

Example : processor module marking

• Marking racks

Each rack is supplied with a pack of clip-on markers on a strip. These can be used to mark each rack with :

- the address of the rack in the station,

- the network address of the station, if this is connected to a communication network.

Each rack therefore has two slots to take these markers.

Station network address

Rack address in the station

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 1

A1

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 2

3 TSX P57-10 / P57-20 processors

3.1

Presentation

3.1-1 General

TSX Premium PLC processors manage an entire PLC station comprising discrete I/O modules, analog I/O modules and application-specific modules which can be distributed over one or more racks connected on BusX.

Two types of processor are available to meet users' varying needs :

• TSX P57 10 processor :

This can be used to manage a PLC station comprising a maximum of 2 TSX RKY ii

E racks containing a maximum of 512 discrete I/O, 24 analog I/O, 2 application-specific modules (eg counter, axis control, stepper control, communication or weighing).

• TSX P57 20 processor :

This can be used to manage a PLC station comprising a maximum of 8 TSX RKY ii

E racks containing a maximum of 1024 discrete I/O, 80 analog I/O, 6 application-specific modules (eg counter, axis control, stepper control, communication or weighing).

Moreover, each processor integrates :

• A protected internal RAM memory which can accept the complete application and which can be extended by a PCMCIA memory card (RAM or flash EPROM),

• A realtime clock,

• Various modes of communication :

- communication via terminal ports (UNI-TELWAY mode or character mode) :

2 terminal ports (TER and AUX) enable simultaneous connection of two devices

(typically a programming terminal and a man-machine interface terminal).

- communication via PCMCIA card : a slot is able to receive a number of communication cards, so that a communication channel (FIPWAY, FIPIO Agent, UNI-TELWAY, serial links) can be connected directly to the processor.

The application is designed using PL7 Junior software under Windows, which offers :

• Four programming languages :

Grafcet, Ladder, Structured text and List languages,

• A multitasking software structure : master task, fast task, event processing,

• Modification of currently running programs,

• etc.

A1

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1

A1

3.1-2 Physical description

1 Display block comprising 4 indicator lamps :

• RUN indicator lamp (green) : lit if the processor is operating

(program running),

• ERR indicator lamp (red) : when lit, this indicates faults relating to the processor and its installed devices (PCMCIA memory card and PCMCIA communication card)

• I/O indicator lamp (red) : when lit, this indicates faults originating from another station module or a configuration fault,

• TER indicator lamp (yellow) : when lit, this indicates activity on the terminal port.

6

2 Pencil-point RESET button which causes the PLC to perform a cold start when pressed.

3 Terminal port (TER connector) : enables a peripheral device (with or without its own power supply) to be connected : programming or adjustment terminal, man-machine interface terminal, printer, etc.

4

5

1

2

3

4 Terminal port (AUX connector) : enables a peripheral device (with or without its own power supply) to be connected : programming or adjustment terminal, man-machine interface terminal, printer, etc.

5 Slot for a PCMCIA type 1 format memory extension card. If no card is present, this slot is fitted with a cover which MUST remain in place; if removed, the processor will stop.

6 Slot for a PCMCIA type 3 format communication card which enables a FIPWAY,

FIPIO Agent, UNI-TELWAY, or serial link communication channel to be connected to the processor.

If no communication card is present, this slot is fitted with a cover.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2

3.2

Catalog

Module type Processors

TSX P 57 10 / P 57 20 processors 3

A1

Station characteristics (1)

TSX RKY..E racks

Module slots (2)

No. of discrete I/O

2

24

512

8

96

1024

No. of analog I/O channels 24

Application-specific modules (3) 2

80

6

Slots for PCMCIA communication cards

1 (on processor) + 1 via each communication module

FIPWAY network connection 1

FIPIO Agent bus connection 1

Application-specific functions

Counting, via applic.-specific module (2/4 channels dep. on module, frequency 40 kHz)

Axis control, via application-specific module (2 or 4 axes dep. on module)

Stepper control

Communication

Weighing

Network via application-specific module (1 or 2 channels dep. on module),

Unitelway bus : via terminal port, PCMCIA card, application-specific module

Fipio Agent : via PCMCIA card

Modbus : via application-specific module, PCMCIA card

Character mode : via terminal port, PCMCIA card, application-specific module via application-specific module (1 measurement input, 50 measurements/ second)

FIPWAY : via PCMCIA card

Product references TSX P 57 10 TSX P 57 20

(1) Maximum characteristics for the station managed by the processor

(2) For standard format modules

(3) Counter (TSX CTY ii

), axis control (TSX CAY ii

), stepper control (TSX CFY ii

),

3 / 3

A1

3.3

Installation/mounting

3.3-1 Installation

A TSX P 57 ii

processor module is installed in a TSX RKY iii rack in position

00 or 01 depending on whether the rack is equipped with a standard or double format power supply module.

• Rack with TSX PSY 2600/1610 standard format power supply module :

In this instance, the TSX P 57 ii processor module is installed in position 00.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

• Rack with TSX PSY 3610/5500/5520 double format power supply module :

In this instance, since the power supply module takes up two positions (PS and

00), the TSX P 57 ii processor has to be installed in position 01.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Note :

The rack where the processor is installed is always address 0

3.3-2 Mounting

The procedure for mounting modules is defined in section 5.4-1.

!

The rack power supply must always be powered down prior to mounting a TSX P 57 i i

processor module.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 4

TSX P 57 10 / P 57 20 processors 3

A1

3.4

Auxiliary functions

3.4-1 Terminal port

Each processor has a terminal port (non-isolated RS 485 link), with two 8-pin mini-DIN connectors, used to physically connect two devices on the processor front panel :

• TER connector :

This is used to connect an FTX type or PC compatible terminal, or to connect the PLC to the UNI-TELWAY bus by means of the TSX P ACC 01 isolator box. This port enables power of 5V to be supplied to the connected accessory (within the limits of the current available from the power supply unit).

• AUX connector :

This is used to connect a peripheral device ,with or without its own power supply, (terminal, man-machine interface terminal or printer) (no voltage supplied to this connector).

The default communication mode for the TER and AUX connectors is UNI-TELWAY master at 19200 bauds and, by configuration, UNI-TELWAY slave mode or ASCII character mode.

Note : The various connection possibilities and the different operating modes for these terminal ports are explained in part A2 - Terminal port.

3.4-2 Slot for PCMCIA communication card

Each processor has a slot on the front panel for inserting a type 3 PCMCIA format communication card.

This slot can take any card which conforms to the internal interface standard, such as :

• TSX SCP111 : RS 232 D multiprotocol card, 9 non isolated signals

• TSX SCP112 : current loop multiprotocol card (20 mA CL)

• TSX SCP114 : RS 485 multiprotocol card, compatible with isolated RS 422,

• TSX FPP 10/20 : FIPIO Agent/FIPWAY cards

!

Do not insert or remove a communication card when the processor is powered up.

Note :

Further information on how to install the various communication cards is provided in this manual - part D.

PCMCIA communication card

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 5

A1

3.4-3 Memories

• Internal RAM memory

Each processor has an internal RAM memory of the following size :

• 32 Kwords for a TSX P 57 10 processor,

• 48 Kwords for a TSX P 57 20 processor.

This memory can receive the whole application. If this is too large, the memory can be extended by a PCMCIA memory card.

The processor internal RAM memory can be protected by an optional battery located in the power supply module. This protection is obviously only effective if the power supply and processor modules are in place on the rack. If either of these modules is removed, the RAM memory is no longer protected.

Note : Organization of the application memory (internal RAM + PCMCIA memory card) is described in this part - section 7.4

• PCMCIA memory cards

The slot located on the processor front panel, protected by a cover, can be used to insert an optional type 1 PCMCIA format memory card. This card can be used to extend the processor internal memory in order to store the application program and the constants.

Note : before inserting a PCMCIA memory card, the protective cover must first be removed.

There are three types of memory card :

- protected RAM type memory card : used predominantly during creation and debugging of the application program, this can be used for all online functions for transferring and modifying the application.

The memory is protected by a removable battery integrated in the memory card.

- Flash Eprom type memory card : used once the application program has been debugged, this can only be used to perform a global transfer of the application and to bypass the problems of battery backup.

- BACKUP type memory card : with the application program, this can be used to reload the application program into the processor internal RAM memory without needing to use a programming terminal.

This card cannot be used unless the application is only in the processor internal RAM memory and if the total size (program + constants) is less than 32 Kwords.

Handle

PCMCIA memory card

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 6

TSX P 57 10 / P 57 20 processors 3

A1

Handling PCMCIA memory cards with the power on

A PCMCIA memory card can be inserted or removed with the power on. To become operational, the memory card handle must be fitted; if this is missing, the processor will not start (processor faulty, ERR indicator lamp on).

When a memory card complete with handle is inserted, this causes the processor to cold-start.

Product references

Product references

TSX MRP 032P

TSX MRP 064P

TSX MRP 0128P

TSX MFP 032P (1)

TSX MFP 064P

Type

RAM

RAM

Capacity

32 Kwords

64 Kwords

Processor compatibility

TSX P 57 10 TSX P 57 20

Yes

Yes

RAM 128 Kwords No

Flash Eprom 32 Kwords

Flash Eprom 64 Kwords

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

TSX MFP 0128P

TSX MFP BAK032P

Flash Eprom

BACKUP

128 Kwords

32 Kwords

No

Yes

Yes

Yes

(1) PCMCIA memory cards TSX MFP 032P for use on TSX P57 10/20 processors must be version II

≥

02

Note :

• Memory capacity : Kwords = K16 (word of 16 bits)

• Organization of the application memory (internal RAM + PCMCIA memory card) is described in this part - section 7.4

3.4-4 Processor RESET pushbutton

Using a pencil to push this button on the processor front panel causes the application to cold-start :

• processor running normally : cold start while stopped or running, according to procedure defined at the time of configuration,

• processor faulty : forced starting while stopped.

Note :

The operating modes which are effective after a cold start are described in this part - section 7.5

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 7

A1

3.4-5 Display

Four indicator lamps on the processor front panel enable rapid diagnostics of the PLC status :

RUN indicator lamp (green) : shows the application status

• On : application running normally, program execution,

• Flashing : application stopped or executing incorrectly,

• Off : application missing or invalid.

ERR indicator lamp (red) : signals faults relating to the processor and its ancillary equipment (memory card and

PCMCIA communication card)

• On : blocking fault (malfunction, system fault or power supply),

• Flashing : non-blocking fault arising from :

- the application (missing, invalid or execution error),

- the PCMCIA memory card : (malfunction, incompatible type, battery fault),

- the PCMCIA communication card (malfunction, incompatible type, internal fault),

• Off : normal status, no internal fault.

RUN

TER

ERR

I / O

I/O indicator lamp (red) : signals configuration faults and faults arising from other station modules :

• On : external fault arising from :

- a station module (internal, external fault),

- configuration fault.

• Flashing : self-test running,

• Off : normal status, no internal fault.

TER indicator lamp (yellow) : signals activity on the terminal port TER

• On : exchange in progress.

If there is traffic on the terminal port, this may give the impression that this indicator lamp is flashing.

• Off : no exchange in progress

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 8

TSX P 57 10 / P 57 20 processors 3

A1

3.4-6 Realtime clock

Each processor has a battery-backed realtime clock which manages :

• the current date and time,

• the date and time of the last application stop

The date and time are still managed when the processor is powered down, so long as it is mounted on the rack with its power supply module in place, and protected by a battery.

!

If the processor is removed, the date and time information is lost

• Current date and time

The processor updates the current date and time in system words %SW49 to %SW53.

This data is encoded in BCD format.

System words

%SW49

%SW50

%SW51

%SW52

%SW53

High order byte

00

Seconds (0 to 59)

Hours (0 to 23)

Month (1 to 12)

Century (0 to 99)

Low order byte

Days of the week (1 to 7)

00

Minutes (0 to 59)

Days of the month (1 to 31)

Year (0 to 99)

• Access to the date and time :

- via the processor debug screen,

- via the program :

reads : system words %SW49 to %SW53 if system bit %S50 = 0

immediate updating : writes system words %SW49 to %SW53 if system bit

%S50 = 1

incremental updating : system words %SW59 are used to adjust the date and time field by field starting from the current value if system bit %S59 = 1 bit 0 = 1increments the day of the week bit 1 = 1increments the seconds bit 2 = 1increments the minutes bit 3 = 1increments the hours bit 4 = 1increments the days bit 5 = 1increments the month bit 6 = 1increments the years bit 7 = 1increments the centuries bit 8 = 1 decrements the day of the week bit 9 = 1 decrements the seconds bit 10 = 1 decrements the minutes bit 11 = 1 decrements the hours bit 12 = 1 decrements the days bit 13 = 1 decrements the month bit 14 = 1 decrements the years bit 15 = 1 decrements the centuries

Note : the processor does not manage the changeover from winter to summer time automatically

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 9

A1

• Date and time of the last application stop

The date and time of the last application stop are stored in BCD format in system words

%SW54 to %SW58.

System words

%SW54

%SW55

%SW56

%SW57

%SW58

High order byte

Seconds (0 to 59)

Hours (0 to 23)

Month (1 to 12)

Century (0 to 99)

Day of the week (1 to 7)

Low order byte

00

Minutes (0 to 59)

Days of the month (1 to 31)

Year (0 to 99)

Cause of the last application stop

- access to the date and time of the last application stop :

By reading system words %SW54 to %SW58

- cause of the last application stop :

By reading the low order byte of system word %SW58 (value stored in BCD format)

%SW58 = 1 application changes to STOP mode,

%SW58 = 2

%SW58 = 4

%SW58 = 5

%SW58 = 6 stops the application after a software fault, power break or the power supply RESET button pressed stop due to hardware fault application stop after HALT instruction

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 0

TSX P 57 10 / P 57 20 processors 3

A1

3.5

Characteristics

3.5-1 General characteristics

Processors

Maximum No. of TSX RKY

ii

E racks (6/8/12 positions)

configuration Maximum no. of module slots

TSX P 57 10 TSX P 57 20

2

24

8

96

Functions

Memory

(2)

Maximum no. of discrete I/O channels

Maximum no. of analog I/O channels

Maximum no. of application-specific modules (1) 2

No. of integrated UNI-TELWAY connections (terminal port)

1

512

24

No. of FIPWAY network connections

No. of FIPIO agent bus connections

1

1

Realtime clock

Internal RAM (can be protected)

Yes

32 Kwords

PCMCIA memory card

Max. memory size

1024

80

6

1

1

1

Yes

48 Kwords

32/64 Kwords 32/64/128 Kwords

96 Kwords 176 Kwords

Application structure

Execution time for 1K

Master task

Fast task

Event processing

1

1

1

1

32 64

(1 of which takes priority)

0.72 ms 0.31 ms Internal Ram 100% Boolean

100% numeric 1.18 ms

65% Boolean/35% numeric 1.39 ms

0.44 ms

0.78 ms instructions PCMCIA

System overhead card

MAST task

FAST task

Programming software

100% Boolean

65% Boolean+35%numeric 1.39 ms cyclic operation 2 ms periodic operation

0.72 ms

1.7 ms

0.57 ms

0.47 ms

0.98 ms

1.4 ms

1.2 ms

0.5 ms

PL7 Junior under Windows

Programming languages Ladder language,

Grafcet language, structured text language, List language

(1) Counter (TSX CTY ii

), axis control (TSX CAY ii

), stepper control (TSX CFY ii

), communication (TSX SCY 21600), weighing (TSX ISP Y100).

3 / 1 1

A1

3.5-2 Electrical characteristics

Since the processors can accept certain devices without their own power supply, the power consumption of these devices must be taken into account when calculating the global power consumption.

• Devices without their own power supply which can be connected to the terminal port

- Adjustment terminal : T FTX 117 ADJUST,

- TSX P ACC01 box for connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus.

• Devices without their own power supply which can be integrated in the processor :

- TSX FPP 10/20 PCMCIA communication cards

- TSX SCP 111/112/114 PCMCIA communication card

Typical

440 mA

Maximum

600 mA

Consumption on 5V power supply

Processors +

PCMCIA memory card

TSX P 57 10

TSX P 57 20

Devices without their own power supply T FTX 117 ADJUST

which connect to the terminal port (TER) TSX P ACC01

PCMCIA communication cards TSX FPP 10

which can be integrated in the processor TSX FPP 20

TSX SCP 111

TSX SCP 112

TSX SCP 114

450 mA

310 mA

150 mA

330 mA

330 mA

140 mA

120 mA

150 mA

650 mA

340 mA

250 mA

360 mA

360 mA

300 mA

300 mA

300 mA

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 2

TSX PSY iiii

Section 4

4 TSX PSY iiii power supplies

4.1

Presentation

4.1-1 General

TSX PSY iiii power supply modules are designed to supply power to each

TSX RKY iii  rack and its modules. The power supply module is selected according to the distributed supply (DC or AC) and the required power (standard format or double format version).

Moreover, each power supply module has auxiliary functions such as :

• a display block, an alarm relay,

• a slot which takes a battery for backing up the data in the processor RAM memory,

• a pencil-point type pushbutton which, when pressed, simulates a power break, causing a warm restart of the application,

• a 24 VDC sensor power supply (only on versions powered by an AC supply).

A1

Power supply modules for AC supply

Standard format model Double format model

TSX PSY 2600

100...240 VAC

Power supply modules for DC supply

Standard format model

TSX PSY 5500

100...120 / 200...240 VAC

Double format model

TSX PSY 1610 TSX PSY 3610 TSX PSY 5520

24 VDC, non-isolated 24...48 VDC, isolated

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1

A1

4.1-2 Physical description

Power supplies take the form of the following modules :

• standard format, for TSX PSY 2600 and TSX PSY 1610 modules,

• double format, for TSX PSY 5500/3610/5520 modules.

1 Display block comprising :

• an OK indicator lamp (green), on if the voltages are present and correct,

• a BAT indicator lamp (red), on when the battery is defective or missing,

• a 24V indicator lamp (green), on when the sensor voltage is present. This indicator lamp is only found on TSX

PSY 2600/5500 AC power supplies.

2 Pencil-point RESET button which, when pressed, causes a warm restart of the application.

3 Slot which takes a battery for backing up the processor internal RAM memory.

4 Cover which protects the module front panel.

5 Screw terminal block for connection :

• to the power supply network,

• of the alarm relay contact,

• of the sensor power supply for TSX

PSY 2600/5500 AC power supplies.

6 Hole for a cable clamp,

7 Fuse located under the module which protects :

• the 24 VR voltage on the TSX PSY

3610 non-isolated DC power supply,

• the primary voltage on the other power supplies.

8 110/220 voltage selector, present only on the TSX PSY 5500 AC power supply.

When delivered, the selector is set to

220.

Standard format double format

1

4

5

1

4

6

7

2

3

2

3

5

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 2

6

8

7

4-2 Catalog

Module type Power supplies

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A1

Input characteristics

Nominal voltages

Limit values

Limit frequency

Accepted duration of

AC supply micro-cuts

100...240

100...120 VAC 24 VDC

VAC 200...240 VAC non-isolated

85...264

VAC

47...63 Hz

≤

10 ms

85...140 VAC 19.2 ... 30 VDC

190...264 VAC

≤

1ms

24...48 VDC isolated

19.2...60 VDC

Apparent power

Nominal input current

50 VA 150 VA

0.5A/100V 1.7A/100V

0.3A/240V 0.5A/240V

≤

1.5 A

≤

2.7A

Output characteristics

Total useful power 26 W 50 W 26 W 50 W

Output voltages a 5V, 24VR (1), 24VC (2)

Nominal current 5V a 5 A

24VR a 0.6 A

24VC a 0.6 A

7 A

0.9 A

0.9 A

Auxiliary functions

Alarm relay

5V, 24VR (1)

3 A

0.6 A

7 A

0.8 A yes (1 NO, volt-free, contact on terminal block)

Display yes via indicator lamps on the front panel

Backup battery

≤

≤

3 A /24V

1.5A/48V

50 W

7 A

0.8 A yes (status monitoring via indicator lamp on the module front panel)

Conformity to standards IEC 1131-2

References TSX PSY

2600

TSX PSY TSX PSY TSX PSY TSX PSY

5500 1610 3610 5520

(1) 24 V a voltage for supplying power to the relays, installed on "relay output" modules.

(2) 24 V a voltage for supplying power to the sensors,

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 3

A1

4.3

Auxiliary functions

• Alarm relay

This relay, which is included in every power supply module, has a volt-free contact which can be accessed on the module screw terminal block

Principle

Connection terminal block

Ral

- Alarm relay of the module located on the rack supporting the processor (rack 0)

During normal operation, with the PLC running, the alarm relay is activated PLC running and its contact is closed (state 1). If the application stops, even partially, such as when a "blocking" fault appears, the output voltages are incorrect, or

PLC stopped or faulty the supply voltage disappears, this relay is de-energized and its associated contact opens (state 0).

- Alarm relay of modules located on

the other racks (racks 1 to 7):

Once the module is powered up and the output voltages are correct, the alarm relay is activated and its contact alarm relay

Alarm relay operation rack 0

1

0

Appearance of a PLC blocking fault or incorrect voltages is closed (state 1).

When the supply voltage disappears or if the output voltages are incorrect, the relay is de-energized (state 0).

These operating modes enable these contacts to be used in external safety circuits such as, for example, interlocking of preactuator power supplies, data feedback.

• Backup battery

Each power supply module has a slot to take a battery which supplies power to the internal RAM memory located in the processors, and therefore protects the data when the PLC is powered down. This battery, supplied in the same packaging as the power supply module, should be installed by the user, taking care to respect the polarity.

- Battery characteristics : thionyl lithium chloride battery, 3.6 V / 0.8 Ah, size 1 / 2AA.

- Replacement part reference : TSX PLP 01

- Data backed up for : 1 year,

- Monitoring the state of the battery : When powered up, the power supply module monitors the state of the battery. In the event of a problem, the user receives a visual warning from the BAT indicator lamp (red), which comes on; if this happens, the battery must be changed immediately.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 4

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A1

- Changing the battery : The battery should be changed with the power supply module powered up or immediately after it is powered down. In this last instance, the time for this operation is limited to 10 minutes, after which the data in the RAM memory may be lost.

As a preventive measure, the battery should be changed once a year.

• Display

Every power supply module has a display block comprising :

- Three indicator lamps (OK, BAT, 24V) for

TSX PSY 2600 / 5500 AC power supplies,

- Two indicator lamps (OK, BAT) for

TSX PSY 1610 / 3610 / 5520 DC power supplies,

OK indicator lamp (green) :

- on during normal operation,

- off when the output voltages are below the thresholds,

OK

BAT

24 V

BAT indicator lamp (red) :

- off during normal operation,

- on if battery missing, run down, wrong way round, or incompatible type

24V indicator lamp (green) :

- on during normal operation,

- off if the 24V sensor voltage delivered by the power supply is no longer in the monitoring range.

• RESET pushbutton

Action on this pushbutton results in a sequence of service signals identical to that for :

- a power break when pressed,

- a power-up when released.

These actions (press and release) effect a warm restart of the application (see section

7.5-2 - Part A1)

• Sensor power supply

TSX PSY 2600/5500 AC power supplies have an integrated power supply which delivers a 24 VDC voltage to supply the sensors.

This sensor power supply is accessible on the module screw terminal block.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 5

A1

4.4

Installation / insertion

4.4-1 Installation

• TSX PSY 2600/1610 standard format power supply modules :

These are installed in the first slot of each TSX RKY iii rack and occupy position PS.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

• TSX PSY 3610/5500/5520 double format power supply modules :

These are installed in the first two slots of each TSX RKY iii rack and occupy positions PS and 00.

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06

Note :

Every power supply module has a locating system which ensures that it can only be installed in the slots designated above.

4.4-2 Insertion / connections

Inserting modules : see section 5.4-1 of this part.

Connections : see section 6.2 of this part.

!

When inserting or removing a TSX PSY iiii power supply module, the external power supplies must be powered down.

Important:

The PLC internal 0V is connected to the machine ground. The machine ground itself must be connected to the earth ground.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 6

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A1

4.5

Characteristics

4.5-1 Characteristics of AC power supplies

References TSX PSY 2600

Primary Nominal voltages

Limit voltages

Nominal/limit frequencies

100…240 VAC

TSX PSY 5500

100..120/200...240VAC

85...264 VAC 85...140/ 190...264VAC

50-60 / 47-63 Hz 50-60 Hz / 47-63 Hz

Apparent power

Nominal current drawn : Irms

Initial power-up at

I inrush

I 2 t on energization

25

°

C (1) It on energization

Secondary

Accepted duration of micro-cuts

Integrated phase protection

(fuse located under the module)

Total useful power

5 VDC output Nominal voltage

Nominal current

Power (typical)

24 VR output (2) Nominal voltage

(24V relay) Nominal current

Power (typical)

24VC output (3) Nominal voltage

(24V sensor) Nominal current

Power (typical)

Outputs protected against

Conformity to standards

50 VA

≤

0.5 A at 100 V

≤

0.3 A at 240 V

≤

37 A at 100 V

≤

75 A at 240 V

150 VA

≤

1.7 A at 100 V

≤

0.5 A at 240 V

≤

38 A at 100 V

≤

38 A at 240 V

0.63 A 2 s at 100 V 4 A 2 s at 100 V

2.6 A 2 s at 100 V 2 A 2 s at 100 V

0.034 As at 100V 0.11 As at 100V

0.067 As at 240V 0.11 As at 240V

≤

10 ms

≤

10 ms via 5x20 fuse, time-delay type

4 A 4 A

26 W 50W

5.1 V

5 A

25 W

5.1 V

7 A

35 W

24 VDC

0.6 A

15 W

24 VDC

24 VDC

0.8A

19 W

24 VDC

0.5 A

12 W

0.8A

19 W overloads/short-circuits/overvoltages

IEC 1131-2 IEC 1131-2

Isolation Dielectric primary / secondary 2000 Vrms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min withstand primary / ground 2000 Vrms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min

Insulation primary / secondary

≥

100 M

Ω resistance primary / ground

≥

100 M

Ω

≥

100 M

Ω

≥

100 M

Ω

(1) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously or when calculating the size of protective devices.

(2) 24V a output for supplying power to the "relay output" module relays.

(3) 24V a output for suppling power to the sensors. This cannot be placed in parallel with an external energy source.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 7

A1

4.5-2 Characteristics of DC power supplies

• Non-isolated power supplies

References

Primary

Secondary

TSX PSY 1610 TSX PSY 3610

Nominal voltages 24 VDC 24 VDC

Limit voltages (including ripple)

(1)

19.2...30 VDC 19.2...30 VDC

(possible up to 34V for 1H in 24 H)

Nominal input current : Irms at 24 VDC

≤

1.5 A

Initial power-up

I inrush

≤

2.7 A

≤

100 A at 24 VDC

≤

150 A at 24 VDC at I 2 t on power-up

25

°

C (2) It on power-up

Accepted duration of

AC supply micro-cuts

Integrated protection on + input

(fuse located under the module)

12.5 A 2 s

0.2 As

≤

1 ms via fuse 5x20, time-delay, 3.5 A

20 A 2 s

0.5 As

≤

1 ms no

Total useful power (typical)

5VDC output Nominal voltage

Nominal current

Power (typical)

30 W

5V

3 A

15 W

50 W

5.1

7 A

35 W

24VR output (3) Nominal voltage

(24 VDC relay) Nominal current

Power (typical)

U supply — 0.6V

U supply — 0.6V

0.6 A 0.8A

15 W 19 W

Integrated protection Overloads on outputs against Short-circuits yes yes yes yes

(4)

Conformity to standards

Overvoltages yes

IEC 1131-2 yes

IEC 1131-2

(1) When supplying power to modules with "relay outputs", the range limit is reduced to

21.6V...26.4V.

(2) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously or when calculating the size of protective devices.

(3) 24 V a output for supplying power to the "relay output" module relays.

(4) The 24VR output voltage cannot be accessed by the user and is protected by a fuse located below the module (5x20, 4A, Medium).

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 8

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A1

• Isolated power supply

References

Primary

Secondary

Nominal voltages

TSX PSY 5520

24...48 VDC

Limit voltages (including ripple)

Nominal input current : Irms

Initial power-up

I inrush

19.2...60 VDC

≤

3 A at 24 VDC

≤

1.5 A at 48 VDC

≤

15 A at 24 VDC

≤

15 A at 48 VDC at

25

°

C

I 2 t on power-up 50 A

55 A

2

2 s at 24 VDC s at 48 VDC

(1) It on power-up 7 As at 24 VDC

6 As at 48 VDC

Accepted duration of AC supply micro-cuts

≤

1 ms

Integrated protection on + input

(fuse located under the module) via fuse 5x20, time-delay type,

5 A

Total useful power (typical) 50 W

5VDC output

24VR output (2)

(24 VDC relay)

Nominal voltage

Nominal current

Power (typical)

Nominal voltage

Nominal current

5.1 V

7 A

35 W

24 V

0.8 A

Power (typical)

Integrated protection Overloads on outputs against Short-circuits

19 W yes yes

Conformity to standards

Overvoltages yes

IEC 1131-2

Isolation Dielectric withstand

Insulation resistance primary / secondary primary / ground primary / secondary primary / ground

2000 Vrms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min

2000 Vrms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min

≥

10 M

Ω

≥

10 M

Ω

(1) These values should be taken into account when starting several devices simultaneously or when calculating the size of protective devices.

(2) 24V a output for supplying power to the "relay output" module relays.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 9

A1

4.5-3 Characteristics of the alarm relay contact

Characteristics

Limit operating AC voltage DC

Thermal current

AC load

DC load

Response time

Type of contact

Integrated protection

Resistive load AC12 Power

Inductive Voltage load AC14 Power and AC15

Resistive load DC12

Inductive

Voltage

Voltage

Power

Voltage load DC13 Power

(L/R = 60 ms)

Min. switchable load

Energization

De-energization

Alarm relay contact

19...264 V

10...30 V (possible up to 34V for 1 hour in 24 hours)

3 A c 24 V c 48 V c 110 V c 220 V

50 VA (5) 50 VA (6) 110 VA (6) 220 VA (6)

110 VA (4) 220 VA (4) c 24 V c 48 V c 110 V c 220 V

24 VA (4) 10VA (10) 10 VA (11) 10 VA (11)

24 VA (8) 50 VA (7) 50 VA (9)

110 VA (2) 110 VA (6)

220 VA (1) a 24 V

24 W (6)

40 W (3) a 24 V

10 W (8)

24 W (6)

1 mA / 5 V

< 10 ms

< 10 ms

Normally open

None, a quick-blow fuse must be fitted Against overloads and short-circuits

Against inductive overvoltages in c

Against inductive overvoltages in a

Contact/ground

None, an RC circuit or MOV peak limiter (ZNO) suitable for the voltage must be fitted in parallel across the terminals of each preactuator

None, a discharge diode must be fitted across the terminals of each preactuator

2000 V rms 50/60 Hz for 1 min Isolation

(test voltage)

(1) 0.1 x 10

(3) 0.3 x 10

(4) 0.5 x 10

6

(2) 0.15 x 10

6

6

Insulation resistance

operations

6 operations

operations

operations

(5) 0.7 x 10

(6) 1 x 10 6

(7) 1.5 x 10

6

> 10 M

Ω

at 500 VDC

operations.

operations.

6 operations.

(8) 2 x 10 6 operations.

(9) 3 x 10 6 operations.

(10) 5 x 10 6 operations.

(11) 10 x 10 6 operations.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 0

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A1

4.6

Power consumption table for selecting a power supply module

The power required to supply a rack depends on the types of module installed on it. It is therefore necessary to draw up a power consumption table in order to define which power supply module should be inserted in the rack (standard or double format module).

The tables on the following pages show the typical consumption of each module and can be used to calculate the consumption of each rack and on each output according to which modules have been installed.

Power available on each power supply module

Power

(typical)

Power supply modules

Total useful power

(all outputs mixed up) (1)

Power available on 5 VDC output

TSX TSX TSX

PSY 1610 PSY 2600 PSY 3610

TSX

PSY 5520

TSX

PSY 5500

30 W (30W) 26 W (30W) 50 W (55W) 50 W (55W) 50 W (55W)

15 W

Standard format

25 W 35 W

Double format

35 W 35 W

Power available on 24 VR output

15 W

Power available on 24 VC output

(sensor power supply on

front panel terminal block) not supplied

15 W

12 W

19 W not supplied

19 W not supplied

19 W

19 W

(1) The values in brackets are the maximum values which can be held for 1 out of every 10 minutes.

These values must not be included when calculating the consumption requirement.

Caution :

When drawing up the power requirement, the total power drawn on each output (5 VDC,

24 VR and 24 VC) must not exceed the total useful power of the module.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 1

A1

Power consumption table

Rack number :

Module type References

Processor +

PCMCIA memory card

TSX P57-10

TSX P57-20

Discrete inputs TSX DEY 08D2

TSX DEY 16A2

TSX DEY 16A3

TSX DEY 16A4

TSX DEY 16A5

TSX DEY 16D2

TSX DEY 16D3

TSX DEY 16FK

TSX DEY 32D2K

TSX DEY 64D2K

Discrete outputs TSX DSY 08R4D

TSX DSY 08R5

TSX DSY 08R5A

TSX DSY 08S5

TSX DSY 08T2

TSX DSY 08T22

TSX DSY 08T31

TSX DSY 16R5

TSX DSY 16S4

TSX DSY 16T2

TSX DSY 16T3

TSX DSY 32T2K

TSX DSY 64T2K

Total

No.

Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)

On 5VDC On 24VR On 24VC (2)

Module Total Module Total Module Total

440

450

55

55

125

55

250

135

155

55

80

80

80

55

80

80

80

80

80

140

155

55

55

80

220

80

70

80

135

80

135

75

160

315

(1) The module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.

(2) If using an external a 24 V sensor power supply, do not take the consumption on this output into account when selecting the rack power supply.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 2

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A1

Power consumption table (continued)

Rack number :

Module type References No.

Consumption in mA (typical value) (1)

On 5VDC On 24VR On 24VC (2)

Module Total Module Total Module Total

Report

Analog TSX AEY 414

TSX AEY 800

TSX AEY 1600

TSX ASY 410

Counter

Axis control

Stepper control

TSX CTY 2A

TSX CTY 4A

TSX CAY 21

TSX CAY 41

TSX CFY 11

TSX CFY 21

Weighing TSX AWY 001

Communication TSX SCY 21600

Other

(devices without

TSX SCP 111

TSX SCP 112

TSX SCP 114

TSX FPP 10

TSX FPP 20

TSX P ACC01

TSX FTX 117 their own power supply which can be connected on the terminal port)

140

120

150

330

510

650

150

350

280

330

1100

1500

660

270

270

990

330

150

310

145

30

60

15

30

50

100

Grand total

(1) The module consumption is given for 100% of inputs or outputs at state 1.

(2) If using an external a 24 V sensor power supply, do not take the consumption on this output into account when selecting the rack power supply.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 3

A1

Power requirement

The power requirement for a rack should be calculated on the basis of the consumption table drawn up using the tables defined on the preceding pages. The currents which apply to each output (5 VDC, 24 VR and 24 VC) are those which appear on the grand total line of the preceding table.

Rack number :

1

4

Power required on 5 VDC output :

2 Power required on 24 VR output :

3 Power required on 24 VC output :

Total power required :

.................. x10 -3 A x 5 V = ............................. W

................... x10 -3 A x 24 V = ............................. W

................... x10 -3 A x 24 V = ............................. W

= ............................. W

Caution : The power calculated must be compared to the power supplies in the table below.

• Power required on each output

≤

power available on each output :

1

≤

1a, 2

≤

2a, 3

≤

3a

• Sum of the power required on each output

≤

total power available :

4

≤

4a

Power available (at each output and total)

Power available

Modules

TSX PSY 1610

TSX PSY 2600

TSX PSY 3610

TSX PSY 5520

TSX PSY 5500

On 5 VDC output

1a

15 W

25 W

35 W

35 W

35 W

On 24 VR output

2a

15 W

15 W

19 W

19 W

19 W

On 24 VC output

3a

—

12 W

—

—

19 W

Total

4a

30 W

26 W

50 W

50 W

50 W

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 4

TSX PSY iiii power supplies 4

A1

4.7

Definition of protection devices at the head of the line

It is recommended that a protective device such as a circuit-breaker or a fuse be installed on the power supply at the head of the line.

The information below shows the minimum rating for the circuit-breaker and line fuse for a given power supply module.

• Selecting a line circuit-breaker

When selecting the rating for the circuit-breaker, the following three characteristics, which are given for each power supply, should be taken into account:

- nominal input current : Irms,

- inrush current : I,

- It.

The minimum rating for the circuit-breaker is selected as follows :

- circuit-breaker rating IN > Irms power supply,

T

- I max. circuit-breaker > I inrush power supply,

Characteristics supplied by the circuit-breaker manufacturer

Thermal zone

- It circuit-breaker at point A on the curve

> It power supply.

Magnetic zone

A

10

0

IN IA IB I

• Selecting the line fuse

When selecting the rating for the line fuse, the following two characteristics, which are given for each power supply, should be taken into account:

- nominal input current : Irms,

- I 2 t.

The minimum rating for the fuse is selected as follows :

- fuse rating IN > 3 x Irms power supply,

- I 2 t of the fuse > 3 x I 2 t power supply

Note:

A reminder of the power supply characteristics (Irms, I inrush, It , I 2 t) is given on the following page.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 5

A1

Reminder of the Irms, I inrush, It and I 2 t characteristics of each supply module

I

Modules

I rms

TSX PSY 2600 PSY 5500 PSY 1610 at 24 VDC at 48 VDC

–

–

–

–

1.5 A

– at 100 VAC at 240 VAC

I inrush at 24 VDC

(1) at 48 VDC

0.5 A

0.3 A

–

–

1.7 A

0.5 A

–

–

–

–

100 A

–

It

(1)

2 t

(1) at 100 VAC at 240 VAC at 24 VDC at 48 VDC at 100 VAC at 240 VAC at 24 VDC at 48 VDC at 100 VAC at 240 VAC

37 A

75 A

–

–

0.034 As

0.067 As

–

–

0.63 A

2.6 A 2 s

2 s

38 A

38 A

–

–

0.11 As

0.11 As

–

–

4 A

2 A

2

2 s s

–

–

–

–

0.2 As

–

–

–

12.5 A 2 s

–

(1) Values on initial power-up at 25

°

C.

–

–

–

–

0.5 As

–

–

–

20 A 2 s

–

PSY 3610 PSY 5520

2.7 A

–

3 A

1.5 A

–

–

150 A

–

–

–

15 A

15 A

–

–

–

–

7 As

6 As

–

–

50 A 2 s

55 A 2 s

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 6

5 Mounting

5.1

Installation rules

5.1-1 Positioning the racks

When mounting TSX RKY iii racks certain installation rules must be respected :

1 As the various modules (power supply, processors, discrete I/O, etc) are cooled by natural convection, the various racks must be installed horizontally and on a vertical plane.

Note :

If fan modules are being used, see section 8 of this part.

2 If several racks are installed in the same enclosure, it is recommended that the following positioning guidelines are respected :

• leave a space of at least 150 mm between two superposed racks, to allow for the cable ducts and to facilitate air circulation.

• it is advisable to install equipment which generates heat (transformers, process power supplies, power contactors, etc) above the racks.

• leave a space of at least 100 mm on each side of a rack to allow room for the cables and to facilitate air circulation.

A1

100 a 100

2 a a

2 2

1 a

≥

50 mm

1 Housing or enclosure.

2 Cable duct or clip.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1

A1

5.2

Dimensions

TSX RKY 6/6E

160 mm (1)

200 mm (2)

(1) Modules with screw terminal blocks

(2) Maximum depth with all types of module and associated connections

261.6 mm

TSX RKY 8/8E

TSX RKY 12/12E

335.3 mm

482.6 mm

Note :

If using fan modules, see section 8 of this part.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 2

Mounting 5

A1

5.3

Mounting/fixing racks

TSX RKY ii

and TSX RKY ii

E racks can be mounted :

• on a 35 mm wide DIN rail fixed with M6x25 screws

• on a Telequick pre-slotted mounting plate or on a panel,

The installation rules described in section 5.1 should be adhered to, whatever the type of mounting.

Note :

If using fan modules, see section 8 of this part.

5.3-1 Mounting on a 35 mm wide DIN rail

Fix with 4 M6x25 screws + washers and AF1-CF56 1/4 turn sliding nuts.

AF1-CF56 AM1-ED

(1) 244.1 mm

(2) 317.8 mm

(3) 465.1 mm

(1) TSX RKY6 and TSX RKY 6E

(2) TSX RKY8 and TSX RKY 8E

(3) TSX RKY 12 and TSX RKY 12E

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 3

A1

5.3-2 Mounting on panel or Telequick pre-slotted mounting plate

• Mounting on panel : cut-out (dimensions in mm)

4 fixing holes (1)

8.75

a b

8.75

(1) The fixing hole diameter must be large enough for M6 screws.

• Mounting on AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted mounting plate (dimensions in mm)

Fix the rack with 4 M6x25 screws + washer and AF1-EA6 clip nuts

AF1-EA6 AM1-PA

Racks

TSX RKY 6/6E

TSX RKY 8/8E

TSX RKY 12/12E

16 8.75

a

244.1 mm

317.8 mm

465.1 mm a b

8.75

b

261.6 mm

335.3 mm

482.6 mm

Thickness

16 mm

16 mm

16 mm

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 4

Mounting 5

A1

5.4

Mounting modules and terminal blocks

Modules can be inserted and removed while powered up with the exception of the processor and PCMCIA communication cards.

To insert/remove powered-up modules, they must be manually screwed and unscrewed to ensure that the signals on BusX are connected/disconnected in the correct sequence.

This sequence cannot be assured if an electric screwdriver is used.

powered-up modules must be removed/installed with the terminal block or connector HE10 disconnected, having taken care to cut the sensor/preactuator power supply if it is greater than 48V.

5.4-1 Inserting a module in a rack

1 Locate the pins on the rear of the module in the centering holes at the bottom of the rack

( 1 ).

2

2 Swivel the module, bringing it into contact with the rack (

2

).

1

3

3 Fit the module firmly onto the rack by tightening the screw at the top of the module (

3

).

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 5

A1

5.4-2 Fitting a screw terminal block on a module

The first time a screw terminal block is mounted on a module which takes this type of connection, the terminal block has to be coded with the type of module on which it is mounted. This is done by transferring 2 physical coding devices from the module onto the screw terminal. This mechanical code prohibits any subsequent mounting of the terminal block with this code on any other type of module.

1 With the module already in place on the rack, mount the terminal block as shown opposite ( 1 ).

The code is transferred automatically during this initial operation.

2 Swivel the screw terminal into position to plug onto the module ( 2 ).

2

1

3 Lock the screw terminal on the module by tightening the appropriate screw ( 3 ).

3

Note :

When replacing a module in position on the rack with another module, the screw terminal block on the old module already has physical coding devices which relate to that module.

There are two possible options :

• Replace the module with a module of the same type : in order to install the coded terminal block on the new module, it will first be necessary to remove the physical coding devices on the new module before installing the terminal block,

• Replace the module with another type of module : it will first be necessary to remove the old physical coding devices on the terminal block before installing it as described above.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 6

Mounting 5

A1

5.5 Fitting/removing the RAM memory backup battery

This battery, located on the power supply module TSX PSY

iiii

backs up the processor internal RAM memory in the event of a mains power supply failure. Supplied in the same packaging as the power supply module, it should be installed by the user.

Fitting the battery

1 Open the access cover located on the front panel of the power supply module,

2 Position the battery in its compartment, taking care to respect the polarity, as shown on the plate,

3 Close the access cover.

Changing the battery

The battery should be changed once a year, as a preventive measure, or when the BAT indicator lamp lights up. Follow the same procedure as for installation :

1 Open the cover which accesses the battery,

2 Take the defective battery out of its compartment,

3 Insert the new battery, taking care to respect the polarity,

4 Close and lock the access cover.

This operation must be performed with the power on. If there is a loss of power supply while changing the battery, the RAM memory backup operates for a maximum of 10 minutes.

Important :

So as not to forget to change the battery every year, it is advisable to note the date of the next change due on the special label inside the access cover.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 7

A1

5.6

Inserting/removing the PCMCIA memory card

A handle is required to insert the memory card in its slot.

Fitting the handle onto the card

1 Position the end of the memory card

(opposite end from the connector) at the handle opening.

The triangular-shaped markers on both the handle and the label of the card should be on the same side.

2 Slide the memory card into the handle until it stops. It then forms an integral part of the handle.

markers locating device with 1 ridge connector markers locating device with 2 ridges handle

Inserting the memory card

To install the memory card in the processor, proceed as follows :

1 Remove the protective cover by unlocking and then pulling it towards the front of the PLC,

2 Position the PCMCIA card with its handle into the slot which is now vacant. Slide in until the card stops, then push the handle to connect the card.

Note :

When installing the PCMCIA card in its slot, make sure that the physical locating devices are correctly positioned :

• 1 ridge towards the top,

• 2 ridges towards the bottom

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 8

Mounting 5

A1

Installing / changing the battery on a RAM type PCMCIA memory card

PCMCIA RAM memory cards (TSX MRP iiii

) must be fitted with a battery (reference TSX

BAT M01), which has to be changed (see table below). To do this :

1 Remove the card from its slot by pulling the handle towards the front of the PLC.

2 Separate the PCMCIA card from its handle by pulling them apart.

3 Hold the PCMCIA card so as to allow access to the battery slot at the nonconnector end of the card.

4 Unlock the battery holder, located at the non-connector end of the card. To do this, press the clip towards the bottom of the card (in the opposite direction to the write-protect micro-switch) while pulling it towards the back.

5 Remove the battery with holder from its slot.

6 Replace the defective battery with an identical 3 V battery. The polarities must be respected by placing the + markers on the holder and the battery on the same side.

5

7 Put the battery with holder back in its slot and lock it in place. To do this, simply reverse the removal procedure.

Markers

8 Fix the PCMCIA card in its handle.

9 Replace the card with its handle in the PLC.

4

Write-protection

Clip

Battery slot

Battery service life

PCMCIA card stored in normal conditions (-20

°

C to 70

°

C)

PCMCIA card installed in an operating PLC

(0

°

C to 60

°

C)

12 months

36 months

Note :

During operation, when the PCMCIA card battery is faulty, the processor ERR lamp flashes.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 9

A1

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1 0

6 Connections

6.1

Ground connections

6.1-1 Grounding the racks

The functional grounding of racks is provided by the rear panel, which is metal. This ensures that PLCs meet environmental standards, provided that the racks are fixed to a metal support which is correctly grounded. The various racks which may constitute a

TSX 57 PLC station must be fitted either on the same support or on different supports which must however be correctly interconnected.

To protect personnel, the s terminals of each rack must, without exception, be connected to the protective earth ground. To do this, use a green/yellow wire with a cross-section of at least 2.5 mm 2 and as short as possible.

A1 connected to earth ground green/yellow wire connected to earth ground

Important

The PLC internal 0V is connected to the machine ground. The machine ground itself must be connected to the earth ground.

6.1-2 Grounding the modules

The modules are grounded by metal plates located on the module rear panel. When the module is in position, these metal plates are in contact with the rack metalwork, thus providing the connection to ground.

Ground contacts

___________________________________________________________________________

6/1

A1

6.2

Connection of power supplies

6.2-1 Rules for connection

The TSX PSY iiii

power supply modules on each rack have a non-removable terminal block, protected by a cover, which is used to connect the mains supply, the alarm relay, the protective ground and, for AC power supplies, the power supply for the 24 VDC sensors.

This terminal block is fitted with captive screw clamp terminals with a maximum connection capacity of 2 wires with a cross-section of 2.5 mm 2 . The wires exit vertically downwards, and can be secured with a cable clamp.

Sensor

24V a supply

Alarm relay

110 - 220V c supply

PG protective ground

24 V

0 V

L

N s

NC

NC

Alarm relay

24V a supply (1)

PG protective ground

24 V

0 V s

AC power supply

TSX PSY 2600/5500

DC power supplies

TSX PSY 1610/3610/5520

!

For the TSX PSY 5500 power supply module, set the voltage selector position according to the mains voltage being used

(1) 24V...48V for the TSX PSY 5520 power supply

(110 or 220VAC).

___________________________________________________________________________

6/2

Connections 6

A1

Be sure to install a device for protecting and breaking the power supply upstream of the

PLC station.

When choosing protection devices, the user should take account of the inrush currents defined in the table of characteristics for each power supply (see section 4.5).

Note :

Given that the TSX PSY 1610/2610/5520 DC power supplies have a very strong inrush current, it is not advisable to use them on DC supplies with return current protection (fold back).

When a power supply module is connected on a DC supply, in order to avoid line losses, it is essential to limit the length of the power supply cable :

• TSX PSY 1610 power supply module :

- length limited to 30 meters each way (60 meters in total) with copper wires, cross-section 2.5mm

2

- length limited to 20 meters each way (40 meters in total) with copper wires, cross-section 1.5mm

2

• TSX PSY 3610 and TSX PSY 5520 power supply modules :

- length limited to 15 meters each way (30 meters in total) with copper wires, cross-section 2.5mm

2

- length limited to 10 meters each way (20 meters in total) with copper wires, cross-section 1.5mm

2

Warning :

Interconnection of several PLCs which are powered by a secure DC supply not connected to ground.

The 0V and the mechanical ground are connected inside the PLCs, the network wiring accessories and some operator panels.

Special connection arrangements must be made for specific applications which use a free-floating mounting. These depend on the installation mode used. In this case, it is compulsory to use an isolated DC supply. Please contact us when defining the electrical installation.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/3

A1

6.2-2 Connection of AC power supply modules

Connecting a PLC station comprising a single rack

100-240 V AC supply

L

N

PG

Q

KM s

(1)

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 6.2-4)

Power supply for sensors relating to the rack (2)

TSX

PSY i i

00

24 V

0 V

L

N s

Q : general isolator,

KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,

Protective fuse :

AC power supplies are fitted as standard with a protective fuse located under the module and in series on the L input :

• TSX PSY 2600 power supply : 4 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed,

• TSX PSY 5500 power supply : 4 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed

(1) isolation strip for locating ground fault.

(2) available current :

- 0.6 A with TSX PSY 2600 power supply module, (see characteristics section 4.5-1)

- 0.9 A with TSX PSY 5500 power supply module, (see characteristics section 4.5-1)

___________________________________________________________________________

6/4

Connections 6

A1

Connection of a PLC station comprising a number of racks

100-240 V AC supply

L

N

Q

PG

KM

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 6.2-4)

Power supply for sensors relating to the rack (2)

TSX

PSY 00

24 V

0 V s

(1)

L

N s

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 6.2-4)

Power supply for sensors relating to the rack (2)

TSX

PSY 00

24 V

0 V s

(1)

L

N s

Note :

When there are a number of PLC stations, all powered from a single supply, the connection principle is identical.

Q : general isolator,

KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,

Protective fuse :

AC power supplies are fitted as standard with a protective fuse located under the module and in series on the L input :

• TSX PSY 2600 power supply : 4 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed,

• TSX PSY 5500 power supply : 4 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed

(1) isolation strip for locating ground fault.

(2) available current :

- 0.6 A with TSX PSY 2600 power supply module, (see characteristics section 4.5-1)

6/5

A1

L

N

PG

6.2-3 Connecting DC power supply modules via an AC supply

• TSX PSY 1610/3610 non-isolated power supply modules

- Connection of a PLC station comprising a single rack, with AC supply referenced to ground

100-240 V AC supply

Q

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 6.2-4)

KM s

(3) c

+ 24 VDC

— +

(2)

Sensor/preactuator power supply s

Fu1(4)

TSX

PSY 10

NC

NC

(1)

24 V

0 V s

Q : general isolator,

KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,

(1) : external shunt supplied with the power supply module

(2) : isolation strip for locating ground fault. In this instance the power supply needs to be unplugged in order to disconnect the AC supply from the ground.

(3) : it is possible to use a process power supply (to be defined according to the power required, see part J).

(4) : protective fuse, (4 A, time-delayed) which is only necessary with a TSX PSY 3610 power supply module.

The TSX PSY 1610 power supply module is fitted as standard with a protective fuse located under the module and in series on the 24V input (3.5 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed).

___________________________________________________________________________

6/6

Connections 6

A1

L

- Connection of a PLC station comprising a number of racks, with AC supply referenced to ground

100-240 V AC supply

N

Q

PG

KM

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 6.2-4) s c

(3)

—

+ 24 VDC

+

TSX

PSY 10

NC

NC

Fu1(4)

(2) s

(1)

24 V

0 V s

Sensor/preactuator power supply

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 6.2-4)

TSX

PSY 10

NC

NC

Fu1(4)

24 V

0 V s

(1)

Q : general isolator,

KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,

(1) : external shunt supplied with the power supply module

(2) : isolation strip for locating ground fault. In this instance the power supply needs to be unplugged in order to disconnect the AC supply from the ground.

(3) : it is possible to use a process power supply (to be defined according to the power required, see part J).

(4) : protective fuse, (4A, time-delayed) which is only necessary with a TSX PSY 3610 power supply module.

The TSX PSY 1610 power supply module is fitted as standard with a protective fuse located under the module and in series on the 24V input (3.5 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed).

Note :

• When there are a number of PLC stations, all powered from a single supply, the connection principle is identical.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/7

A1

L

N

PG

• TSX PSY 5520 isolated power supply

- Connecting a PLC station comprising a single rack, with AC supply referenced to ground

100-240 V AC supply

Q

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 6.2-4) KM s

(2) c

— +

+ 24/48

VDC

TSX

PSY 20

NC

NC

(1) (1) s

24 V

0 V s

Sensor/preactuator power supply

Q : general isolator,

KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,

Protective fuse :

The TSX PSY 5520 power supply module is fitted as standard with a protective fuse located under the module and in series on the 24V input : 5 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed,

(1) : isolation strip for locating ground fault.

(2) : it is possible to use a process power supply (to be defined according to the power required, see part J).

___________________________________________________________________________

6/8

Connections 6

A1

L

N

- Connecting a PLC station comprising a number of racks, with AC supply referenced to ground

100-240 V AC supply

Q

PG

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 6.2-4)

KM s

(2) c

— +

+ 24/48

VDC

TSX

PSY 20

NC

NC

(1) (1) s

24 V

0 V s

Sensor/preactuator power supply

Interlocking circuit for preactuator power supply (see section 6.2-4)

TSX

PSY

5520

NC

NC

24 V

0 V s

Q : general isolator,

KM : line contactor or circuit-breaker,

Protective fuse :

The TSX PSY 5520 power supply module is fitted as standard with a protective fuse located under the module and in series on the 24V input : 5 A fuse, 5x20, time-delayed,

(1) : isolation strip for locating ground fault.

(2) : it is possible to use a process power supply (to be defined according to the power required, see part J).

Note :

• When there are a number of PLC stations, all powered from a single supply, the connection principle is identical.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/9

A1

6.2-4 Sensor and preactuator power supply interlocking

It is advisable to interlock the various power supplies in the following sequence :

1 Power up the PLC and input (sensor) power supply via the KM contactor (see previous circuit diagrams),

2 If the PLC is running in AUTO mode, power up the output (preactuator) power supply via the KA contactor. This is interlocked with the alarm relay contact of each power supply.

In addition, safety standards require authorization to be given by an operator before restarting the installation after a stop (caused by a power failure or use of the emergency stop button). The following interlocking circuit diagrams take account of these standards.

The MANU/AUTO switch gives the option of forcing the outputs from a programming terminal, when the PLC is stopped.

Example 1 : PLC station supplied with AC

L

Emergency stop

Start KA

Preactuator power supply

AUTO alarm relay contact

RAL0

MANU alarm relay contacts (1)

RAL0

RAL1

RAL2

KA RC

N

KA : contactor interlocked with the alarm relay of the power supply in AUTO operation.

(1) If the PLC station comprises a number of racks : connect all the power supply "alarm relay" contacts (RAL0, RAL1,

RAL2, etc) in series.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/10

Connections 6

A1

Example 2 : PLC station supplied with DC

+

Emergency stop

Start KA

Preactuator power supply

MANU AUTO alarm relay contact

RAL0

Sensor power supply alarm relay contacts (1)

RAL0

RAL1

RAL2

KA

–

KA : contactor interlocked with the alarm relay of the power supply in AUTO operation.

(1) If the PLC station comprises a number of racks : connect all the power supply "alarm relay" contacts (RAL0, RAL1,

RAL2, etc) in series.

___________________________________________________________________________

6/11

A1

___________________________________________________________________________

6/12

7 Functions

7.1

Addressing discrete I/O channels

The addressing for all TSX Premium PLC bit and word objects is defined in the PL7

Junior reference manual, part A1, section 1.2. This section only covers the addressing principle for discrete I/O.

Channel addressing is geographical; ie. it depends on :

• the rack address,

• the physical position of the module in the rack,

Module positions y : 00 to 10

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

0

A1

1

PS 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

The address syntax for discrete I/O is as follows :

%

Symbol

I or Q

I = input

Q = output rack address x x = 0 to 7 module position y y = 00 to 10 Point

• channel number i = 0 to 63

Examples

(1) %Q7.3 means : module output 3 located in position 07 in rack 0

(2) %I102.5 means : module input 5 located in position 02 in rack at address 1

Rack addresses (x) and module positions (y)

TSX racks RKY 6 RKY 8 RKY 12 RKY 6E RKY 8E RKY 12E

Rack address : x 0 0 0 0 to 7 0 to 7 0 to 7

Module position : y 00 to 04 00 to 06 00 to 10 00 to 04 00 to 06 00 to 10

Note : the rack containing the processor is always at address 0

Channel numbers (i)

TSX DEY iiii

/ DSY iiii modules 64 I/O 32 I/O 16 I/O 8 I/O

7 / 1

A1

7.2

Setting the PLC to RUN/STOP

Principle

The RUN/STOP function is used to start

(RUN) or stop (STOP) execution of the application program.

This function can be performed from :

• A programming or adjustment terminal,

• A discrete physical input which will previously have been dedicated to this function during the application configuration stage.

PLC status

Physical input %Ixy.i

RUN

STOP

1

0

Set to RUN/STOP by physical input %Ixy.i

Setting the PLC to STOP using this physical input has priority over setting it to RUN from a terminal or network.

Operating modes of the physical RUN/STOP input

• Operation of the physical RUN/STOP input (%Ixy.i)

- At state 0, this input forces the application to stop (STOP state),

- A rising edge on this input causes the application to start up (RUN state),

- At state 1, the application can be controlled freely from a terminal,

- If there is a fault on the RUN/STOP input, the application stops. Once the fault has disappeared, and if the input is at state 1, the application restarts in RUN mode.

• Processing on a restart

- the cold start is performed in RUN if :

- the RUN/STOP input is at state 1,

- there is no fault on this input at the time of the start.

- the warm restart is performed in RUN if :

- the RUN/STOP input is at state 1,

- there is no fault on this input at the time of the start,

- the PLC has not received a STOP command before the break.

Summary of the PLC status during a warm restart

(depending on the state of the RUN/STOP input before the break and on return of power)

RUN/STOP input state on return of power

RUN/STOP input state before power break

State 1 State 0 or faulty

State 1, PLC in RUN mode

State 1, PLC in STOP mode

State 0

Faulty

PLC in RUN mode

PLC in STOP mode

PLC in RUN mode

PLC in RUN mode

PLC in STOP mode

PLC in STOP mode

PLC in STOP mode

PLC in STOP mode

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 2

Functions 7

A1

7.3

Single task application structure

The application comprises only the master (MAST) task, which may be executed either cyclically or periodically, depending on the selection at the time of configuration.

7.3-1 Cyclic execution

This type of operation corresponds to the normal execution of the PLC scan (default selection). It consists of sequencing the scans of the main task (MAST), one after another.

Program processing

Program processing

I.P.

I.P.

I.P.

I.P.

%I %Q %I

Scan n+1 (Time T2)

%Q

Scan n (time T1)

I.P. (internal processing) : the system implicitly monitors the PLC (managing the system bits and words, updating the realtime clock current values, updating the status indicator lamps, detecting changes to RUN/STOP, etc) and processing requests originating from the programming terminal or the communication system,

%I (reading the inputs) : writing the status of information on the inputs to the memory,

Program processing : execution of the application program, written by the user,

%Q (updating outputs) : assigning physical outputs of discrete, analog and applicationspecific modules according to the status calculated by the application program.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 3

A1

Operating cycle

PLC running : the processor performs internal processing, reading of inputs, application program processing and updating of outputs. Reading of inputs and updating of outputs occur in parallel with the internal processing.

PLC stopped : the processor only performs internal processing and reading of inputs.

The output values are handled by the module according to the fallback mode configured for each channel or group of channels.

• fallback to 0 or 1: the physical outputs are forced to the fallback value (the image memory is not changed),

• maintain status : the module physical outputs are maintained at their last value.

Reading the inputs

RUN

Program processing

Updating outputs

Internal processing

STOP

Internal processing

Watchdog overrun

The application scan time is monitored by the PLC (watchdog) and must not exceed the value defined at the time of configuration.

In the event of an overrun, system bit %S11 is set to 1 and the application is declared to be faulty, which causes the PLC to stop immediately (the processor ERR and RUN indicator lamps flash).

Comment

To avoid tripping the watchdog when making a modification in RUN mode, it is necessary to leave approximately 50 ms time available between the maximum duration of the MAST task and duration of the watchdog.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 4

Functions 7

A1

7.3-2 Periodic execution

In this operating mode, the internal processing, reading of inputs, application program processing and updating of outputs are performed periodically according to a time defined during configuration (from 1 to 255 ms) which can be adjusted by system word

%SW0.

At the start of a PLC scan, a timer, initialized with the current configured value, starts to count down. The PLC scan must finish before expiry of this downcount, which at 0 starts a new scan.

Program processing

Program processing

I.P.

I.P.

I.P.

I.P.

%I %Q %I %Q

Scan n (Time T) Scan n+1 (Time T)

I.P. (internal processing) : the system implicitly monitors the PLC (managing the system bits and words, updating the realtime clock current values, updating the status indicator lamps, detecting changes to RUN/STOP, etc) and processing requests originating from the programming terminal or the communication system,

%I (reading of inputs) : writing the status of information on the inputs to the memory,

Program processing : execution of the application program, written by the user,

%Q (updating of outputs) : assigning the physical outputs of discrete, analog and application-specific modules according to the status calculated by the application program.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 5

A1

Operating cycle

PLC running : the processor performs internal processing, reading of inputs, application program processing and updating of outputs. Reading of inputs and updating of outputs occur in parallel with the internal processing.

If the period is not yet over, the processor completes its operating cycle with "system" tasks or background tasks until the end of the period.

PLC stopped : the processor only performs internal processing and reading of inputs.

The output values are managed by the module according to the fallback mode configured for each channel or group of channels.

• fallback to 0 or 1: the physical outputs are forced to the fallback value (the image memory is not changed),

• maintain status : the module physical outputs are maintained at their last value.

Start of period

Reading the inputs

RUN

Program processing

Updating the outputs

Internal processing

STOP

Internal processing

Period overrun : if the operating time exceeds that assigned to the period, the

PLC indicates a period overrun by setting system bit %S19 of the task to 1; processing

End of period continues and is executed in its entirety (it should not exceed the watchdog time limit).

The next scan is sequenced after implicit writing of the outputs of the current scan.

Watchdog overrun

The application scan time is monitored by the PLC (watchdog) and must not exceed the value defined during configuration.

In the event of an overrun, system bit %S11 is set to 1 and the application is declared to be faulty, which causes the PLC to stop immediately (the processor ERR and RUN indicator lamps flash). The duration of the watchdog must, without exception, be longer than the duration of the period.

Comment

To avoid tripping the watchdog when making a modification in RUN mode, it is necessary to leave approximately 50 ms time available between the maximum duration of the period and the duration of the watchdog.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 6

Functions 7

A1

7.3

Multitask application structure

The application structure of a TSX 57-10 or TSX 57-20 PLC can be single task or multitask. In a single task structure, only the main MAST task is used in cyclic or periodic operation (see previous section). In a multitask structure, 2 command tasks (MAST and

FAST) and event-triggered tasks are offered and executed according to their priority.

When one of these tasks is triggered (occurrence of an event or start of scan), the task interrupts the execution of less important tasks in progress. The interrupted task recommences when the priority task is complete. The structure of this kind of application is as follows :

• the main MAST task, low priority, is always present. It can be cyclic or periodic,

• the FAST task, medium priority, is optional. It is always periodic,

• the event-triggered tasks EVTi, highest priority, are called by the system when an event occurs. These tasks are optional and are useful for applications requiring short software response times. There can be no more than 32 on a TSX 57-10 PLC and 64 on a TSX 57-20 PLC.

In TSX 57-10/20 PLCs, the event-triggered task EVT0 has higher priority than the other event-triggered tasks (EVT1 to EVT63).

Master task

MAST

–

Fast task

FAST

Priority

Event-triggered tasks

EVTi , i

≠

0

Event-triggered task

EVT0

+

Example of multitask processing :

• cyclic master task (MAST),

• fast task with 20 ms period (FAST),

• event-triggered task.

Key

I : reading of inputs

P : program processing

Q : updating outputs

Event

Fast

I P Q I P Q I P Q

I P Q

I P Q I P Q

Master I P P Q I P P Q I P

System

20 ms 20 ms 20 ms 20 ms

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 7

A1

7.3-1 Control tasks

• MAST master task

This task has the lowest priority and controls the majority of the application program.

It can be configured to execute cyclically (default mode) or periodically. With periodic execution, the period duration can be configured in the PL7 Junior program and can be adjusted by system word %SW0 (%SW0 = 0 : cyclic execution).

The MAST task is organized according to the model described in the previous section : implicit reading of inputs, execution of the application program and implicit writing of outputs.

• FAST task

This task has a higher priority than the MAST task and is periodic in order to allow the lower priority time to be executed.

The period duration can be configured in the PL7 Junior program and adjusted by system word %SW1. This can be higher than that of the MAST task in order to adapt to slow periodic processing. The program executed must nevertheless remain short in order not to penalize the main task (MAST).

Note

When the FAST task is empty (no program), it does not exist in the PLC and the system bits and words associated with it are not significant. Hence the channels associated with the task are not exchanged.

• Period overrun

With periodic execution (MAST and FAST task), if the operating time exceeds that assigned to the period, the PLC signals a period overrun by setting system bit %S19 of the task to state 1; processing continues and is executed in its entirety (it must not exceed the watchdog time limit). The next scan is sequenced after implicit writing of the outputs of the current scan.

• Watchdog overrun

With cyclic or periodic execution, the application scan time is monitored by the PLC

(watchdog) and must not exceed the value defined during configuration. In the event of an overrun, system bit %S11 is set to 1 and the application is declared to be faulty, which causes the PLC to stop immediately (the processor ERR and RUN indicator lamps flash). The duration of the watchdog must, without exception, be longer than the duration of the period.

• Assigning channels to control tasks

In addition to the application program, the tasks execute "system" functions related to managing their associated implicit I/O. Associating a channel or group of channels with a task is defined in the configuration screen of the corresponding module; the task associated by default is the MAST task.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 8

Functions 7

A1

Discrete I/O module channels :

The modularity of the discrete I/O modules being 8 successive channels (channels 0 to 7, channels 8 to 15, etc), the I/O can be assigned in groups of 8 channels, to either the MAST or FAST task. For example, it is possible to assign the channels of a 32input module as follows :

- inputs 0 to 7 assigned to the MAST task,

- inputs 8 to 15 assigned to the FAST task,

- inputs 16 to 23 assigned to the MAST task,

- inputs 24 to 31 assigned to the FAST task.

Counter and axis control module channels :

Each channel of a counter or axis control module can be assigned to either the MAST or FAST task. For example, for a 2-channel counter module, it is possible to assign : channel 0 to the MAST task and channel 1 to the FAST task.

Analog module channels :

Each channel (TSX AEY 414 and TSX ASY 410 modules) or group of 4 channels (TSX

AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules) can be assigned to either the MAST or FAST task (MAST task by default).

Note

In order to maximize performance, the module channels should ideally be grouped in a single task.

• Task monitoring

In RUN mode, tasks can be enabled or inhibited by writing a system bit. When a task is inhibited, it exchanges its I/O but does not execute its application program.

MAST task monitoring : system bit %S30 (0 = task inhibited, 1 = task enabled)

FAST task monitoring : system bit %S31 (0 = task inhibited, 1 = task enabled)

By default, the MAST and FAST tasks are active.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 9

A1

7.4-2 Event-triggered tasks

Event-triggered tasks allow control events to be taken into account and processed as quickly as possible (for example, the event inputs of the TSX DEY 16FK discrete module, exceeding the threshold on a counter module, etc).

Control events

These are external events which can be triggered by, for example :

• the event inputs of the TSX DEY 16FK discrete module, on a rising or falling edge,

• the counter channel(s) on counter modules,

• the reception of telegrams in a PLC equipped with a TSX FPP 20 or TSX SCY 21600 module.

• etc.

It is possible to configure up to 32 events in a TSX 57-10 PLC and up to 64 events in a

TSX 57-20 PLC; the association between a channel and an event number is made in the channel configuration screen.

The appearance of a control event diverts the application program towards the processing which is associated with the I/O channel or with the reception of a telegram, which caused the event :

External event IT

Event-triggered task

(EVTi)

Internal processing

All the inputs associated with the channel which caused the event are read automatically. (*)

Implicit reading :

• of inputs associated with the channel, origin of the event,

• of inputs used in the task program

The processing time must be as short as possible.

Event processing

All the outputs used in the EVTi task are updated.

Implicit updating of outputs used in the EVTi task

Notes :

The EVTi task I/O are also exchanged in the MAST or FAST task (in each period or scan), which can cause inconsistencies linked to the input chronology (loss of edge, for example).

(*) In the case of telegrams, data reading is performed by the RCV_TLG function (see PL7 Junior programming manual, communication, part L)

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 1 0

Functions 7

A1

Enabling and inhibiting event-triggered tasks

Event-triggered tasks can be globally enabled or inhibited by the application program, via system bit %S38. If one or more events take place while the event-triggered tasks are inhibited, the associated processing is lost.

Masking and unmasking control events

Two PL7 language instructions, available to the application program, allow both global masking and unmasking of control events. If one or more events take place during masking, they are memorized by the system and the associated processing in the eventtriggered tasks will only be performed after unmasking; the order of appearance is maintained.

The masking of event-triggered tasks must be short so that :

• there is not too long a delay in taking account of events,

• events are not lost (memorization capacity overrun).

Priority of control events

In a TSX 57 PLC, there are 2 levels of priority for control events : event 0 (EVT0) has higher priority than the other events (EVT1 to EVT31 or EVT63 depending on the processor).

When an event occurs, if an event-triggered task of the same or higher priority level is being executed, it is memorized in a stack and the processing associated with this new event will only be performed after the processing in progress. If the stack overflows, events will be lost; an error is indicated by system bit %S39 being set to 1.

Maximum number of channels used in event-triggered tasks

The number of channels associated with the total number of control events is limited (see table below).

Type of channel Processor Processor

TSX P57-10 (32 EVT) TSX P57-20 (64 EVT)

Maximum number of discrete I/O channels 32 128

Maximum number of analog channels 8

Max. no. of app.-specific module channels 4

16

16

Notes

• I/O exchanges of the EVTi task are performed by channel (for some analog and application-specific modules) or by group of channels (for discrete modules and some analog modules). For this reason, if the processing modifies, for example, outputs 2 and 3 of a discrete module, it is the image (PLC memory) of outputs 0 to 7 which will be transferred to the module.

• any exchange of an input/output in an event-triggered task can cause loss of rising edge information, concerning processing performed on this channel (or group of channels), in the task where it has been declared : MAST or FAST.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 1 1

A1

7.5

User memory structure

TSX 57 PLC memory consists of an internal RAM memory designed to take the application program, with a capacity of :

• 32 Kwords for a TSX 57-10 PLC,

• 48 Kwords for a TSX 57-20 PLC.

Furthermore, this internal RAM memory can be extended with a PCMCIA memory card with a capacity of :

• 32 Kwords or 64 Kwords, RAM or FLASH EPROM type for a TSX 57-10 PLC.

• 32 Kwords, 64 Kwords or 128 Kwords, RAM or FLASH EPROM type for a TSX 57-20

PLC.

7.5-1 Application memory

The application memory can be divided into memory zones, physically shared between the RAM internal memory and the PCMCIA memory card (if the TSX 57 is equipped with a memory card):

• the application data zone is always in internal RAM,

• the application program zone (application descriptors and executable task code) is in internal RAM or in the PCMCIA memory card

• the constants, initial values and configuration zone is in internal RAM or in the

PCMCIA card,

With respect to these different zones, 2 types of application memory organization are possible depending on whether or not the PLC is equipped with a PCMCIA memory card.

TSX 57-10 or TSX 57-20

(without PCMCIA card)

TSX 57-10 or TSX 57-20

(with PCMCIA card)

Data Data

Internal

RAM Program

Constants

Internal

RAM

Program

PCMCIA card

Data

Program

: application data,

: descriptors and executable task code,

Constants : constant words, initial values and configuration.

Constants

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 1 2

Functions 7

A1

Application in Internal RAM

So that the application is loaded entirely in the protected internal RAM (*) of the PLC

(TSX 57-10 or TSX 57-20 without PCMCIA memory card), its size must be compatible with that of the RAM memory :

• 32 Kwords (TSX 57-10), split for example into 7.5 Kwords of application data and 24.5

Kwords of program and constants,

• 48 Kwords (TSX 57-20), split for example into 10 Kwords of application data and 38

Kwords of program and constants.

(*) The internal RAM is protected by an optional battery of 3.6 V located on the power supply module which has an autonomy of 1 year (see section 4.3 of this part).

Application in the PCMCIA card

In this case, the memory card contains the executable program, the constants, the configuration etc; the internal RAM is reserved exclusively for data.

In the creation and debugging phases of the program, it is necessary to use a protected RAM type PCMCIA card. Once the program is operational, it will be able to be executed in this same memory card or transferred to a FEPROM type PCMCIA card, to ensure protection in the event of failure of the RAM type memory card battery.

Note

When an application has been configured for execution in the internal RAM memory of a TSX 57 PLC (no PCMCIA memory card defined in the processor configuration screen), the presence of this card must first be declared (in the processor configuration screen) before transferring this application to a PLC equipped with a

PCMCIA memory card.

Application protection

Whatever the structure of the PLC memory : whether the application is situated in the internal RAM or in the PCMCIA card, the application can be protected in order to inhibit access under PL7 Junior (program reading and debugging) when the terminal is online.

To "remove" the protection of such an application, it must be transferred again, without protection, from the terminal to the PLC. This operation requires the source program of the application to have been previously loaded into the terminal.

A protected application in a PCMCIA card can be executed by another PLC, but never duplicated.

In addition to the protection offered by PL7 Junior, PCMCIA cards have a lock which inhibits any write access (program loading or modification).

Application backup

With TSX Premium PLCs, it is possible to back up the application (program and constants) on a Backup memory card (reference TSX MFP BAK 032P). The internal

RAM memory can thus be reloaded with the contents of this Backup memory card.

Note : This Backup function is not available when the application is being executed on a RAM or

FLASH EPROM PCMCIA memory card.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 1 3

A1

• Loading an application "backup" from the PLC internal RAM memory.

This operation is used to transfer the application program from the PLC internal RAM memory to a Backup PCMCIA memory card (reference TSX MFP BAK 032P). To do this perform the following steps.

1 insert the Backup memory card into its slot with the write-protection tab WP in the

OFF position,

2 transfer the application from the PLC internal RAM to the Backup card (PLC/

Backup menu, RAM -> Backup option),

3 at the end of this operation, remove the Backup card and set the WP switch to ON

(protecting the backup).

!

If the application in the PLC is protected, inserting the Backup memory card reinitializes the PLC internal RAM memory. In this case, the procedure for loading the Backup memory card is as follows :

1 ensure that the application program to be saved is available in the terminal. If it is not, transfer this program to the terminal,

2 insert the Backup memory card into its slot with the write-protection tab WP in the

OFF position,

3 transfer the application from the terminal to the PLC internal RAM (PLC/Backup menu, Terminal -> PLC option),

4 transfer the application from the PLC internal RAM to the Backup card (PLC/Backup menu, Terminal -> PLC option),

5 at the end of this operation, remove the Backup card and set the WP switch to ON

(protecting the backup).

Note :

These various transfers are executed from a terminal with PL7 Junior software (see "Operating modes" manual TLX DM PL7J 12E - part C - section 3.9.

• Retrieving an application "backup" from a preloaded memory card

This operation, using a preloaded memory card (reference

TSX MFP BAK 032P), enables the application program to be updated without using a terminal.

The write-protection tab on this memory card must be in the ON position.

When this type of card is inserted in a TSX 57 PLC, its contents are automatically transferred into the PLC internal RAM memory. At the end of the transfer, the PLC is placed in forced STOP (whatever the configured RUN AUTO option).

As long as the "backup" card is in the PLC, a power break / power return always causes its start-up in forced STOP.

Removal of the card causes the PLC to cold start, in RUN or STOP according to the

RUN AUTO configuration.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 1 4

Functions 7

A1

7.6

Operating modes of the PLC on start-up

7.6-1 Cold start

When one of the following operations takes place :

• loading an application,

• return of the power supply after a break with loss of context,

• pressing the RESET button on the processor,

• manipulating the handle of the PCMCIA memory card on the processor,

• initialization from PL7 Junior,

• forcing bit %S0 from a terminal, the PLC performs a cold start which involves :

• resetting the I/O bits and internal bits to zero,

• initialization of the data zone and the function blocks from the configuration data,

• setting internal words to zero if no save was requested during configuration,

• canceling bit forcing and step blocking,

• sending the configuration parameters (1) to all the application-specific modules

(analog, counter, axis control, communication, etc) and to the PCMCIA communication card.

Cold starting is performed in RUN (the PLC places itself in RUN automatically) or in

STOP (the PLC places itself in STOP), depending on the status of the "automatic startup in RUN" bit defined in the configuration or on the state of the RUN/STOP input. If an application is loaded via the terminal port or a RESET is carried out (processor RESET button) following a blocking fault, the cold start is forced to STOP.

For example, when a PCMCIA memory card containing an application with the

"automatic start-up in RUN" bit is plugged into a TSX 57-10/20 PLC, this automatically performs a cold start in RUN.

Processing the cold start

A cold start is signaled by system bit %S0 being set to 1.

If the user wishes specific processing vis à vis the application when a cold start occurs, at the start of the MAST task he should test the status of this system bit %S0 which remains in state 1 during the first MAST task scan.

(1) If bit %S0 is forced to 1 from a programming terminal or during initialization from PL7 Junior, this causes a cold start without reinitialization of the application-specific modules (analog, counter, communication, etc).

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 1 5

A1

7.6-2 Warm restart

During a restart after a power failure, and if the application context has not changed, this does not cause a cold start, but a warm restart which restarts execution of the program from the line where the failure occurred, without updating the outputs at the end of the restart cycle. At the end of this restart cycle, the system :

• initializes the message stacks,

• sends the configuration parameters to all the application-specific modules (analog, counter, axis control, etc) and to the PCMCIA format communication module.

• deactivates the event-triggered and FAST tasks until the end of the first MAST task scan,

• empties the event stacks,

• restarts execution of the MAST task.

Processing the warm restart

A warm restart is signaled by system bit %S1 being set to 1.

If the user wishes a specific processing vis à vis the application when a warm restart occurs, at the start of the MAST task he should test the status of this system bit %S1 which remains at state 1 during the first MAST task scan.

7.6-3 Operation following power supply failure and return

• Power supply failure on one or more racks including the one holding the processor (rack 0):

The system memorizes the application context and the time of the failure, then sets all the outputs to state 0 for the racks concerned. Should the other racks remain powered up, the corresponding outputs change to fallback mode (0 or 1 or maintain state according to the choice defined at the time of configuration).

When the power supply returns, the saved context is compared to the current one, which defines the type of start which will be executed :

- if the application context has changed (loss of system context or new application), the PLC performs a cold start and initializes the application,

- if the application context is identical, the PLC performs a warm restart without initializing the data.

• Power supply failure on a rack other than rack 0:

All the channels on this rack are seen as faulty by the processor but the other racks are not affected, and the values of the faulty inputs cease to be updated in the application memory. In the case of a discrete input module they are set to 0, unless they have been forced, in which case they keep their forced value.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 1 6

Functions 7

A1

If the duration of the failure is less than 10 ms for AC power supplies or 1 ms for DC power supplies, it is not seen by the program which runs normally.

Reading inputs Stop the processor and save the application context

Program execution

TOP

>

If %S0 = 1, processing relating to cold start.

If %S1 = 1, processing relating to warm restart

>

Power failure detected

No >

BOT

Power return

Yes identical

Warm restart

Comparison of the saved context with the current context different

Cold start

Configuration self-tests

Configuration self-tests

Setting bit

%S0 or %S1 to 0

Setting %S1 to 1

Updating outputs

Initialization of the application

Setting %S0 to 1

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 1 7

A1

7.6-4 Operation after insertion/removal of a PCMCIA memory card

TSX 57-10/20 processors are equipped with a cover on the front panel which must be removed in order to insert a PCMCIA memory card. Removing the cover causes the PLC to stop without saving the application context. The module outputs change to fallback mode.

Insertion of the memory card fitted with its handle causes the PLC to cold start. Similarly, removing the memory card causes the PLC to stop without saving the application context.

7.6-5 Operation after pressing the processor RESET button

The processor has a RESET button on the front panel which can be pressed in order to trigger a cold start of the PLC in RUN or in STOP (1), on the application contained in the memory card (or in the internal RAM).

RESET following a PLC blocking fault (see definition of a blocking fault, section 3.1

- part H)

When a blocking fault appears, the rack 0 alarm relay is deactivated (open contact) and the module outputs change to the fallback position or their state is maintained, according to the choice made at the time of configuration. Pressing the RESET button causes the

PLC to cold start, forced into STOP.

Other example

Pressing the RESET button causes the PLC to cold start, in RUN or in STOP (1), on the application contained in the memory card (or in the internal RAM).

(1) Starting in RUN or in STOP is defined during configuration.

Note :

When the RESET button is used, and during the PLC cold start, the terminal links ceases to be active.

7.6-6 Operation after pressing the power supply RESET button

The power supply module in each rack has a RESET button on the front panel, which can be pressed to trigger an initialization sequence for the modules in the rack it is supplying.

If this button is pressed on the power supply module in the rack containing the processor

(rack 0), it causes a warm start.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 1 8

Functions 7

A1

7.6-7 PLC response to cold start

When the PLC starts after the power supply returns with loss of context, pressing the processor RESET button or manipulating the handle, it responds differently depending on the status of its memory :

PLC cold start

Yes

PCMCIA card present

No

Valid application in internal RAM

No

Yes

Cold start in RUN or in STOP (1) on the application in RAM memory.

The application is not valid, and the

ERR indicator lamp flashes

Valid application in the

PCMCIA card ?

No

Yes

Cold start in RUN or in STOP (1) on the PCMCIA card application. If an application in internal RAM is valid, it is deleted.

The application is not valid, and the

ERR indicator lamp flashes. If an application in internal RAM is valid, it is not accessible but is not deleted.

(1) Starting in RUN or in STOP is defined during configuration

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 1 9

A1

7.7

Behavior on insertion/removal of a module when powered-up

All modules can be inserted when powered-up, with the exception of the processor module and PCMCIA communication cards.

Insertion and removal of modules when powered-up means that a module can be replaced without stopping the application.

The removal of a module activates system bits associated with the I/O, and the faults associated with the module and its channels. Inputs are no longer updated in the application memory and are set to 0 in the case of a discrete input module, unless they have been forced, in which case they keep their forced value while the module is missing.

The processor I/O indicator lamp comes on.

When the new module is inserted, the system tries to configure it with the configuration of the module it is replacing.

If this configuration is successful (module with the same reference), the channels are once again taken into account by the application, and the faults caused by the absence of the module disappear. The processor I/O indicator lamp goes off.

If this reconfiguration fails (module with a different reference), the channels are not taken into account by the application, the system bits associated with the I/O and the faults associated with the module and its channels remain active, and the processor I/O indicator lamp stays on.

7.8

Behavior of the I/O on downgraded operating mode

7.8-1 Safety value of discrete and analog outputs

• Situations :

- the PLC is not configured

- the PLC is in STOP mode without previously having been in RUN mode (for example after loading the application, or on a cold start in STOP mode),

- the PLC is in RUN mode but the task which manages the output module is in STOP mode and has never been in RUN mode,

- power break on the rack where the output module is positioned,

- output module does not conform to the configuration.

• Behavior :

Outputs are set to the safety value : 0 for discrete and analog outputs.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 2 0

Functions 7

A1

7.8-2 Discrete and analog outputs switching to fallback mode

• Situations:

These occur as soon as the application ceases to function normally

- the PLC switches to STOP mode,

- the PLC switches to "error" (processor fault) or to "HALT or software fault"

(application blocking fault),

- the task which manages these outputs switches to STOP mode,

- insertion of a breakpoint in the task which manages these outputs,

- command to switch outputs to fallback mode by system bit %S9 or the debug screen,

- communication fault detected by the output module (output not updated by the processor).

• Behavior :

The output values are managed by the module depending on the fallback mode for each channel or group of channels :

- fallback : the module physical outputs are forced to the fallback value configured (0 or 1). (The image memory is not modified),

- maintain state: the module physical outputs are maintained at their last value.

The default operating mode is fallback to 0.

7.8-3 I/O faults

• Situations :

- channel fault,

- module fault,

- module missing or does not conform to the configuration,

- communication fault detected by the processor.

• Behavior :

- faulty discrete input channel : the value in the application memory is set to 0, unless it is forced, in which case it is maintained at the forced value,

- other types of faulty input : in the case of a communication fault, the value in the application memory is not updated (the value is maintained),

- faulty output channel : the value of the output continues to be managed by the application and is only sent to the module if the latter conforms to the configuration.

The fault is indicated by the system bits associated with the I/O and the fault information associated with the module and its channels. The processor I/O indicator lamp is lit.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 2 1

A1

7.9

Loading the operating system (OS)

The TSX Premium PLC operating system can be updated by downloading via the processor terminal port.

The operating system updating procedure is explained in the manual

TLX DM PL7 J12E - part E - section 8.

___________________________________________________________________________

7 / 2 2

8 Appendix

8.1

Fan modules

8.1-1 General presentation

The fan modules installed above the TSX

Premium PLC racks ensure forced air convection in order to ensure that the ambient temperature is evenly distributed inside the unit and thus eliminate the different hot spots which may exist.

A temperature probe integrated into every fan module is used to inform the user that the ambient temperature has reached its maximum value.

The use of fan modules is advised in the following cases :

• Ambient temperature in the range 25

°

C...60

°

C : this increases the lifetime of the various TSX Premium PLC components (25% increase in MTBF).

• Ambient temperature in the range 60

°

C...70

°

C : since the ambient temperature is limited to 60

°

C without ventilation, forced ventilation is used to decrease the temperature inside the modules by 10

°

C, bringing the internal module temperature to the equivalent of an ambient temperature of 60

°

C.

Three fan modules are available for adaptation to the main power supplies : fan modules with 24 VDC,

110 VAC or 220 VAC supply voltage.

Depending on the rack modularity (6, 8 or 12 positions), 1, 2 or 3 fan modules must be installed above each rack :

• racks with 12 positions

TSX RKY 12 / 12E :

3 fan modules,

• racks with 8 positions

TSX RKY 8 / 8E :

2 fan modules,

• racks with 6 positions

TSX RKY 6 / 6E :

1 fan module

TSX RKY 12/12E

TSX RKY 8/8E

TSX RKY 6/6E

___________________________________________________________________________

8/1

A1

A1

8.1-2 Physical presentation

1 Terminal block for connecting :

- the module power supply voltage,

- the power supply for the temperature probe and the associated indicator lamp or preactuator.

Each terminal can receive one 1.5 mm 2 wire without a cable end or two 1 mm 2 wires with cable ends.

2 Terminal for grounding the module.

3

4

1

2

3

3 Holes for fixing the module (M4 x 12 screws). When using these modules with TSX

Premium PLCs, the fan modules must be fixed on a 35 x 15 AM1-ED iii type rail

.

4 Tilted shutters which enable the air to be directed to the front.

8.1-3 Catalog

Type of module Fan

Characteristics

Power supply voltage

Temperature probe

No. of modules per rack

References

24 VDC 110 VAC 220 VAC

Yes (temperature detection

≥

80

°

C

±

5

°

C), open on alarm

1 module on a rack with 6 positions (TSX RKY 6/6E)

2 modules on a rack with 8 positions (TSX RKY 8/8E)

3 modules on a rack with 12 positions (TSX RKY 12/12E)

TSX FAN D2 P TSX FAN A4 P TSX FAN A5 P

___________________________________________________________________________

8/2

Appendix 8

A1

8.1-4 Dimensions

• Single fan module (measurements in millimeters)

138

Back view

110

Right-hand view

• Fan module + rack (measurements in millimeters)

146

Front view

Racks with 6 positions

TSX RKY 6/6E

160 mm (1)

200 mm (2)

(1) with screw terminal module

(2) Maximum depth associated with all types of modules and their connectors

261.6 mm

335.3 mm

Racks with 8 positions

TSX RKY 8/8E

Racks with 12 positions

TSX RKY 8/8E

482.6 mm

___________________________________________________________________________

8/3

A1

8.1-5 Mounting

Fan modules associated with TSX Premium PLCs must be mounted on 35 mm x 15 mm rails (type AM1-ED iii

) to compensate for the thickness of the rack.

Note :

The fixing distances for TSX RKY ii

Racks are defined in part A1

- section 5.3

35x15 rail

Support

Fan module

TSX Premium PLC

Mounting positions for the fan modules depending on the type of rack

Racks with 6 positions (TSX RKY 6/6E) Racks with 8 positions (TSX RKY 8/8E)

8/4

Appendix 8

A1

8.1-6 Installation rules for racks with fan modules

(see general rules on positioning racks which are not fan-cooled, part A1 - section 5.1).

100 a

100

2 a a

2

2 a

≥

50 mm b

≥

30 mm

1 Equipment or unit.

2 Cable duct or clip.

1

___________________________________________________________________________

8/5

A1

8.1-7 Connections

• Connecting the fan module power supply

TSX FAN D2 P TSX FAN A4 P

θ θ

Fu 1

24 VDC

+24V

–0V

Fu 1 c 110 VAC

L

N

TSX FAN A5 P

θ

Fu 1 c 220 VAC

L

N

Note : when using several fan modules of the same type, use one common power supply for all the fan modules.

• Connecting the temperature probe power supply

The temperature probe can be power supplied either in AC or DC and connected to an indicator lamp, a PLC input, etc.

DC power supply AC power supply

Fu 2

24/48 VAC

θ

Fu 2 c

110/220 VAC

θ

Note : when using several fan modules, the probe contacts will be placed in series.

a c

(1)

Fu 2

θ

Fan module 1

θ

Fan module 2

θ

Fan module 3

(1) a 24 / 48 V or c 110 / 220 V

___________________________________________________________________________

8/6

Appendix 8

A1

8.1-8 Characteristics

Type of module

Power supply voltage Nominal

Limit

Current drawn at nominal voltage

TSX FAN D2 P TSX FAN A4 P TSX FAN A5 P

24 VDC

180 mA

110 VAC

20...27.6 VDC 90...120 VAC

180 mA

220 VAC

180...260 VAC

100 mA

Temperature probe Power supply voltage : a 24 / 48 VDC or c 110 / 220 VAC

Breaking capacity

(on resistive load)

Activation

Status

1 A at 24 VDC / 10 000 operations

1 A at 48 VDC / 30 000 operations

1 A at 110 VAC / 30 000 operations

0.5 A at 220 VAC 10 000 operations

Temperature

≥

75

°

C

±

5

°

C closed if temperature

≤

75

°

C

±

5

°

C open if temperature

≥

75

°

C

±

5

°

C

___________________________________________________________________________

8/7

A1

8.2

Performance

8.2-1 MAST task scan time

Program processing

I.P. at

start of scan

%I

Scan time

I.P. at end of scan

%Q

IP = internal processing

MAST scan time =

Program processing time (Ttp)

+

Internal processing time at start and end of scan (Tti)

• Definition of the program processing time Ttp

Ttp =

Application code execution time (Texca)

+

Grafcet overhead time (ToG7)

- Application code execution time (Texca)

Texca =

Σ

of the time of each instruction executed by the application program on each scan

The execution times for each instruction as well as the typical application used to verify these are given in the manual TLX DR PL7 12E - part B - section 8.

By way of indication, the table below gives the execution time in milliseconds (ms), for 1K instruction (1).

Type of processor

Program execution

TSX P 57 10 TSX P 57 20

Internal Memory Internal Memory

Ram card Ram card

0.72 ms 0.72 ms 0.31 ms 0.47 ms Application code 100% Boolean instructions execution time

(2)

(Texca)

65% Boolean instructions

+

35% numeric instructions

1.39 ms 1.39 ms 0.78 ms 0.98 ms

Note : not all application program instructions need to be executed on each PLC scan.

(1) 1K instruction = 1024 instructions

8/8

Appendix 8

A1

- Grafcet overhead time (ToG7)

ToG7 =

TGF

+

(TEA x number of steps active at the same time)

+

(TTP x number of transitions which are true at the same time).

Type of processor

TGF

TEA

TTP

TSX P 57 10

0.332 ms

0.121 ms

0.491 ms

TSX P 57 20

0.291 ms

0.106 ms

0.431 ms

• Definition of the internal processing time at the start and end of the scan (Tti)

Tti =

MAST task system overhead time (TosM)

+ max [System time for communication in reception (Tcomr); management time at start of scan for implicit I/O %I (Tge%I)]

+ max [System time for communication in transmission (Tcome); management time at end of scan for implicit I/O %Q (Tgs%Q)]

- MAST task system overhead time (TosM)

Type of processor

Cyclic execution time

Periodic execution time

TSX P 57 10

2 ms

1.7 ms

TSX P 57 20

1.4 ms

1.2 ms

___________________________________________________________________________

8/9

A1

- Management time of implicit I/O (%I and %Q) at the start and end of the scan

Tge%I =

60 µ s

+ Σ of IN times for each module (see below)

Tgs%Q =

60 µ s

+ Σ of OUT times for each module (see below)

Input (IN) and output (OUT) management times for each module :

Discrete I/O, analog, counter, axis control and stepper control modules.

Type of module

8-channel discrete inputs

16-channel discrete inputs

(all modules except TSX DEY 16FK)

32-channel discrete inputs

64-channel discrete inputs

Fast discrete inputs (8 channels used)

(TSX DEY 16FK module)

Fast discrete inputs (16 channels used)

(TSX DEY 16FK module)

8-channel discrete outputs

16-channel discrete outputs

32-channel discrete outputs

64-channel discrete outputs

Analog inputs (per group of 4 channels)

Analog outputs (4 channels)

Counter (TSX CTY ii

), per channel

Stepper control (TSX CFY ii

), per channel

Axis control (TSX CAY ii

), per channel

Input

(IN)

27

µ s

27

µ s

Management times

Output

(OUT)

–

–

Total

(IN + OUT)

27

µ s

27

µ s

48

µ s

96

µ s

29

µ s

37

µ s

26

µ s

33

µ s

47

µ s

94

µ s

84

µ s

59

µ s

55

µ s

75

µ s

85

µ s

–

–

16

µ s

22

µ s

15

µ s

20

µ s

30

µ s

60

µ s

–

59

µ s

20

µ s

20

µ s

22

µ s

48

59

µ

96

µ s

45

µ s

µ s s

41

µ s

53

µ s

77

µ s

154

µ s

84

µ s

118

µ s

75

µ s

95

µ s

107

µ s

Note :

The times given for discrete I/O modules assume that all the module channels are assigned to the same task.

Example : using a TSX DEY 32 D2 K module

- if the 32 channels are assigned to the same task, take the "32-channel discrete inputs" time.

- if only 16 channels are assigned to the same task, take the "16-channel discrete inputs" time, not the "32-channel discrete inputs" time divided by 2.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/10

Appendix 8

A1

- Communication system time

Communication (excluding telegram) is managed during the MAST task "Internal

Processing" phases :

- at the start of the scan for message reception (Tcomr)

- at the end of the scan for message transmission (Tcome)

The MAST task scan time is therefore affected by communication traffic. The communication time per scan varies considerably depending on :

- the traffic generated by the processor : number of communication OFs which are active simultaneously,

- the traffic generated by other devices in the direction of the processor or devices for which the processor as master, acts as a router.

This time is only spent in scans where there is a new message to be managed.

Examples of communication system times :

- PL7 Junior software with terminal connected and animation table open

Type of processor

Average scan time

Maximum scan time

TSX P 57 10

2.5 ms

3.4 ms

TSX P 57 20

1.8 ms

2.4 ms

- 1 SEND_RQ OF (mirror request, 100 characters)

Instruction execution time : 2 ms (for a TSX P 57 20 processor) to be included in the application code execution time for scans where the OF is actually executed.

Communication system time

Type of processor

Time during transmission

Time during reception

TSX P 57 10

1.4 ms

1.4 ms

TSX P 57 20

1 ms

1 ms

All these times cannot occur in the same scan. Transmission occurs in the same scan as execution of the instruction as long as the communication traffic is low but not in the same scan as reception of the response.

___________________________________________________________________________

8/11

A1

Example of calculating MAST task scan times in the following conditions :

For an application with the following characteristics :

• TSX P 57 20 processor,

• Task execution : cyclic,

• Program execution in PLC internal RAM,

• 10 K instructions, 65% Boolean + 35 % numeric,

• 1 communication OF of the SEND_REQ type,

• 128 discrete inputs distributed on : seven TSX DEY 16D2 modules + one TSX DEY

16FK module

• 80 discrete outputs, distributed on : five TSX DSY 16T2 modules,

• 32 analog inputs distributed on : two TSX AEY 1600 modules,

• 16 analog outputs distributed on : four TSX ASY 410 modules,

• 2 counter channels distributed on : one TSX CTY 2A module,

Application code execution time (Texca) :

• Without communication OF : 10x 0.78

= 7.8 ms

• With 1 communication OF of the SEND_REQ type = (10x0.78) + 2 = 9.8 ms

System overhead time (TosM) = 1.4 ms

Management time for implicit I/O (%I and %Q) at the start and end of the scan :

Module reference

TSX DEY 16 D2

Type of module

Number of modules

16-channel discrete inputs 7

Management time at start (IN) at end (OUT)

238

µ s

37

µ s 22

µ

– s TSX DEY 16 FK 16-channel discrete inputs 1

(fast inputs)

TSX DSY 16T2

TSX AEY 1600

TSX ASY 410

TSX CTY 2A

16-channel discrete outputs 5

Analog inputs

Analog outputs

Counter

165

µ s

2 (32 channels) 672

µ s

4 (16 channels) 236

µ s

1 (2 channels) 110

µ s

100

µ s

–

236

µ s

40

µ s

Total management time 1458

µ s 398

µ s

• Management time at start of scan : Tge%I = 60

µ s + 1458

µ s = 1518

µ s = 1.52 ms

• Management time at end of scan :Tgs%Q = 60 µ s + 398 µ s = 458 µ s = 0.46 ms

Communication system time :

• Sending the request : Tcome = 1 ms

• Receiving the response : Tcomr = 1 ms

___________________________________________________________________________

8/12

Appendix 8

A1

Scan time without execution of the communication OF

TcyM = Texca + TosM + Tge%I + Tgs%Q

= 7.8 ms + 1.4 ms + 1.52 ms + 0.46 ms = 11.18 ms

Scan time with execution of the communication OF and transmission of the request

TcyM = Texca + TosM + Tge%I + max [request transmission time (Tcome), Tgs%Q]

= 9.8 ms + 1.4 ms + 1.52 ms + max [ 1ms; 0.46 ms] = 13.72 ms

Scan time with receipt of the response

TcyM = Texca + TosM + max [response receipt time (Tcomr), Tge%I] + Tgs%Q

= 7.8 ms + 1.4 ms + max [1 ms; 1,52 ms] + 0.46 ms = 11.18 ms

___________________________________________________________________________

8/13

A1

8.2-2 FAST task scan time

FAST scan time =

Program processing time (Ttp)

+

Internal processing time at start and end of scan (Tti)

• Definition of the program processing time Ttp

Ttp = Execution time of application code with respect to the FAST task (Texca)

- Application code execution time (Texca) : see definition section 8.2-1

• Definition of the internal processing time at the start and end of the scan (Tti)

Tti =

FAST task overhead system time (TsoF)

+

Management time for implicit I/O (%I and %Q) at start and end of scan

- FAST task overhead system time (TosF)

Type of processor

FAST task overhead system time

TSX P 57 10

0.57 ms

TSX P 57 20

0.5 ms

- Management time of implicit I/O (%I and %Q) at start and end of the scan : see section 8.2-1

8.2-3 Response time to an event

Time between a rising or falling edge on an event-triggered input and the corresponding edge on an output set by the event-triggered task program.

Example : program with 100 Boolean instructions and input module TSX DEY 16 FK

Type of processor TSX P 57 10 TSX P 57 20

Response Minimum, typical, maximum time

Min.

Typ.

Max.

TSX DSY 08T22 output module 1.2 ms 1.3 ms 2.8 ms

Min.

1 ms

Typ.

1.1 ms

Max.

2.2 ms

TSX DSY 32T2K output module 1.9 ms 2.4 ms 4.2 ms 1.8 ms 2.2 ms 3.7 ms

___________________________________________________________________________

8/14

Terminal port Contents communication Part A2

___________________________________________________________________________

A2

Section

1 Terminal port

1.1

Preface

1.2

Presentation

1.2-1 Communication with a programming or adjustment terminal

1.2-2 Communication with an operator panel

1.2-3 UNI-TELWAY master/slave communication

1.2-4 Character string communication

1.3

Connections

1.3-1 Programming / adjustment terminal

1.3-2 Operator panel

1.3-3 Programming / adjustment terminal and operator panel

1.3-4 Modem on terminal port

1.3-5 UNI-TELWAY master

1.3-6 UNI-TELWAY slave

1.3-7 UNI-TELWAY inter-PLC

1.3-8 UNI-TELWAY inter-device

1.3-9 TSX model 40 master PLC type

1.3-10 Character string

1.3-11 Terminal port connection summary table

1.4

Appendix

1.4-1 Characteristics

1.4-2 Terminal port pin connection

Page

1/1

1/1

1/4

1/10

1/11

1/12

1/13

1/14

1/15

1/5

1/6

1/6

1/7

1/9

1/16

1/16

1/17

1/1

1/2

1/2

1/3

1/3

2 TSX P ACC 01 box

2.1

Presentation

2.1-1 Functions

2.1-2 External appearance

2/1

2/1

2/1

2/1

___________________________________________________________________________

A 2 / 1

A2

Terminal port communication

Section

2.2

Hardware installation

2.2-1 Dimensions and fixing

2.2-2 Internal view

2.2-3 Connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus

2.2-4 Connection to TSX 57ii PLCs

2.2-5 Configuration of switches

2.3

Examples of topology

2.3-1 Connectable devices

2.3-2 Master mode

2.3-3 Slave mode

2.3-4 Connection between two PLCs

2.4

TSX P ACC01 box connectors

Contents

Part A2

2/5

2/5

2/6

2/7

2/8

2/9

Page

2/2

2/2

2/2

2/3

2/3

2/4

___________________________________________________________________________

A 2 / 2

1 Terminal port

1.1

Preface

Since the terminal port refers to the UNI-TELWAY master, UNI-TELWAY slave and character string communication modes it will be necessary to consult the following documentation for the installation (hardware and software) of these communication modes.

• TSX DG UTW E

• TSX DR NET E

: UNI-TELWAY communication Bus (User guide),

: X-WAY communication (Reference manual),

• TLX DS COM PL7 13E : TSX Micro / Premium PLC communication (installation manual)

A2

1.2

Presentation

The terminal port on TSX Premium PLCs is an RS 485 non-isolated link consisting of two 8-pin mini DIN connectors. These two connectors, which are functionally identical, located on the processor and marked TER and AUX, enable physical and simultaneous connection of two devices such as a programming/adjustment terminal and an operator panel.

The TER connector is also able to supply power to a device which does not have its own supply (FTX 117,

RS 485/RS 232 converter cable, TSX P ACC 01 isolation box, etc).

The terminal port functions in UNI-TELWAY master mode by default. By configuration, it is possible to switch to UNI-TELWAY slave character mode.

Note

The communication mode (UNI-TELWAY master, UNI-TELWAY slave or character mode) is identical on the two connectors TER and AUX

The drawings presented in the following sections 1.2-1, 1.2-2, 1.2-3 and

1.2-4 are simplified schematics. Connections for the various elements on the terminal port are presented in section 1.3.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1

A2

1.2-1 Communication with a programming or adjustment terminal

Configured as the UNI-TELWAY master (default function), the terminal port is used to connect a programming and adjustment terminal.

Programming

FTX 417/507 programming terminal

FTX 117 Adjust / 417 / 507 adjustment terminal

Adjustment / Diagnostics

1.2-2 Communication with an operator panel

Configured as the UNI-TELWAY master (default function), the terminal port enables an operator panel to be connected.

The man-machine interface uses UNI-TE protocol to communicate with the local PLC and other stations on the network.

In order to free the TER connector for possible connection of a programming or adjustment terminal, the operator panel will be connected to the AUX connector.

TSX 57 master

CCX 17 slave

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 2

Terminal port 1

A2

1.2-3 UNI-TELWAY master/slave communication

The default communication mode of the terminal port is UNI-TELWAY master. It principally enables the connection of a slave programming terminal and an operator panel.

TSX 57i i

master

Client

Slave

Client/Server

Slave

Client/Server

FTX 417/507 CCX 17

1.2-4 Character string communication

This mode is used when connecting a printer or a specialized man-machine interface

(monitor, panel mounted controller, etc) to a TSX Premium PLC.

TSX 57TSX 57TSX 57-

Monitor Controller Printer

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 3

A2

1.3

Connections

The connector (marked TER) can be used to connect any device supporting the

UNI-TELWAY protocol, and in particular devices which do not have their own power supply (FTX 117 programming terminal, RS 485/RS 232 converter cable, TSX P ACC 01 isolation box, etc).

The connector (marked AUX) can only be used to connect devices which have their own power supply (operator panel, PLC, third-party equipment, etc).

The terminal port enables three operating modes :

• UNI-TELWAY master

(default configuration),

• UNI-TELWAY slave,

• Character string.

TSX 57ii

Note

The operating mode defined during configuration (UNI-TELWAY master,

UNI-TELWAY slave, character mode) is identical for both connectors.

Depending on the operating mode selected during configuration, the terminal port can be used to connect :

• a programming and adjustment terminal,

• a man-machine interface,

• another PLC,

• UNI-TELWAY devices (sensor / actuator, variable speed drive, etc),

• a printer or monitor (character string mode link).

• a modem.

The use of an isolation box, reference TSX P ACC 01, provides 2 connectors, enabling, for example, a programming terminal and two slave devices to be connected simultaneously. This box is also necessary to connect a TSX 57ii

PLC on a UNI-TELWAY link when the distance between the devices is greater than 10 meters. Slave mode can be forced by using this box, which is described in section 2.

Note

The TSX P ACC 01 box must be used to connect a TSX 57ii

slave PLC on a UNI-

TELWAY bus.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 4

Terminal port 1

A2

1.3-1 Programming / adjustment terminal

Because it does not have its own supply, the FTX 117 Adjust terminal must be connected to the TER connector of the processor of type TSX 57 type PLCs. Terminals with their own supply, (FTX 417, FTX 507), can be connected to the AUX terminal port.

The programming terminal uses UNI-TE protocol for programming, adjusting or performing diagnostics on the local PLC and all the station devices.

If the PLC is connected on a network architecture, network transparency enables the programming terminal to reach all the devices on the network.

The references for the various connection cables are :

Connection examples

TSX 57ii

TSX 57ii

TSX 57ii

TSX P CU1030

(RS 485/RS 232)

T FTX CBF 020

(RS485)

T FTX CB 1020/050

(RS485)

PC

Programming/adjustment

FTX 417/507

Programming/adjustment

Note :

The TSX P CU1030 cable does not operate on the AUX terminal port

FTX 117 Adjust

Adjustment

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 5

A2

1.3-2 Operator panel

The operator interface equipment uses UNI-TE protocol to communicate with the local

PLC and other stations on the network.

In the case of a TSX 57 PLC, the operator panel has its own power supply and must be connected to the AUX terminal port in order to leave the TER port available for a terminal which requires a power supply (FTX 117 Adjust for example).

Connection example

TSX 57-

The references of the connection cables between the terminal port and a

CCX 17 operator panel are shown opposite.

XBT-Z 968

T CCX CB10 002

(supplied with the

CCX 17)

CCX 17: operator panel

1.3-3 Programming / adjustment terminal and operator panel

The PLC terminal port can handle two devices in multidrop mode : the programming / adjustment terminal and an operator panel.

TSX 57 ii

PLCs have two connectors, and therefore each connector can accept one of these devices. Because the FTX 117 adjustment terminal does not have its own supply, it must be connected to the TER connector.

Connection example

TSX 57ii

T FTX CB 1020/1050

XBT-Z 968

T CCX CB10 002

(supplied with the CCX 17)

CCX 17 : operator panel

FTX 117 Adjust

Adjustment terminal

Note:

Either connected device can be removed without disturbing the operation of the other.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 6

Terminal port 1

A2

1.3-4 Modem on terminal port

The terminal port of TSX Micro PLCs version

≥

V1.5 and of TSX Premium PLCs is compatible with a modem connection in the following protocols : UNI-TELWAY Master,

UNI-TELWAY Slave and Character string.

The modem to be connected must have the following characteristics :

1- Support a 10 or 11 bits per character format if the terminal port is used in

UNI-TELWAY mode : 1 Start, 8 Data, 1 Stop, Odd, or No Parity,

2- operate without any data compression if the terminal port is used in UNI-TELWAY mode,

3- be able to be configured with "DTR signal forced" on the RS 232 serial port (in cases where the modem is used in response mode), since this signal is not connected by the cable,

4- operate without flow control (no -RTS/CTS- hardware or -XON/XOFF- software) on the RS 232 serial port, since the cable to be used on the terminal port side can only carry TX, RX and GND signals.

5- operate without carrier control. Warning : this operating mode also uses RTS and

CTS control signals,

6- accept a telephone call entry while its characters arrive on the RS 232 serial port (in cases where a modem/telephone network is used in response mode on a terminal port configured as a UNI-TELWAY master).

Warning : it is strongly recommended to check with the modem supplier that the above characteristics are available on the selected modem.

Connection diagram :

TSX CTC 07/10 adaptor if necessary

Modem

TSX PCX 1130

Example 1 : for a terminal port in UNI-TELWAY master mode connected to a modem/ telephone network in response mode, numbers 1 to 6 of the above characteristics are required.

Example 2 : for a terminal port in character string mode connected to a modem via a dedicated line, numbers 3 to 5 of the above characteristics are required.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 7

A2

Configuration of the terminal port in UNI-TELWAY mode :

The waiting time is between 100 and 250 ms.

In master mode, the number of slaves configured must correspond to the real number of slaves on the bus.

In slave mode, the number of addresses must correspond to those used..

The TSX Micro PLC terminal port is configured using PL7 Micro or PL7 Micro / Junior software.

Example of configuration screen :

For further details refer to the TLX DS COM PL7 communication manual.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 8

Terminal port 1

A2

1.3-5 UNI-TELWAY master

This is the default operating mode of the terminal port. It principally enables the connection of a programming terminal and an operator panel.

Connection example

TSX 57 master

T FTX CBF 020

XBT-Z 968

Client

Client/Server slave

T CCX CB10 002

(supplied with the

CCX 17) slave

Client/Server

FTX 417

CCX 17

Important

The master can scan up to eight link addresses. Link addresses 1, 2 and 3 are reserved for the programming terminal, the five other addresses can be used to connect a man-machine interface, slave PLC, sensors/actuators or any other slave device which supports the UNI-TE slave protocol. If a CCX 17 operator panel is used, addresses 4 and 5 are reserved (addresses forced by using XBT-Z 968 cables).

This operating mode is operational immediately, and consequently, within the limits of the default configuration, no other installation phase is necessary to connect a device on this type of link.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 9

A2

1.3-6 UNI-TELWAY slave

The terminal port UNI-TELWAY slave protocol enables, for example, a slave TSX 57

 ii

PLC to be integrated on a UNI-TELWAY bus managed by a TSX 57 ii

master PLC

(PCMCIA communication card or terminal port) or a model 40 TSX/PMX PLC.

For this connection to be possible, a TSX P ACC 01 connection box must be used. The different ways of connecting this box are shown in section 2.

Connection example

TSX 57i i

Master

PCMCIA communication card

TSX SCP 114

S1=ON

S2=ON

TER AUX

TSX P

ACC 01

TSX

SCA 50

TSX SCP CU 4030 cable

UNI-TELWAY Bus

TSX

SCA 50

TSX

SCA 62

TSX CSC 015

S1=ON

S2=ON

TER AUX

TSX P

ACC 01

TSX 57-

Slave

ATV 16

Slave

TSX 17-20

Slave

A slave PLC manages up to three consecutive link addresses :

• Ad0 (system address),

• Ad1 (client application address),

• Ad2 (listen application address).

TSX 37-10

Slave

Note:

When setting up TSX SCA 50 and TSX SCA 62 boxes, consult the TSX DG UTW manual :

UNI-TELWAY Bus Communication (User guide),

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1 0

Terminal port 1

A2

1.3-7 UNI-TELWAY inter-PLC

The terminal port enables the connection of two PLCs, one of which is the master and the other the slave.

A connection box TSX P ACC 01 is essential for this type of connection. The various means of connecting this box are given in section 2.

TSX 57 i i

Master TSX 57 i i

Slave

T FTX

CBF 020

T FTX CB1 020/050

FTX 417 slave

TSX P

ACC 01 TER AUX

S1=ON

S2=ON

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1 1

A2

1.3-8 UNI-TELWAY inter-device

The terminal port on TSX Premium PLCs provides a means of connection to a

UNI-TELWAY bus for communication with devices such as variable speed drives, sensors/actuators or with other PLCs.

When connecting a TSX 57

ii

PLC (master or slave) to a UNI-TELWAY bus, it is essential that a TSX P ACC 01 box is used. For more details, refer to section 2.

Connection example

FTX 417 slave TSX 57i i master

T FTX

CBF 020

S1=ON

S2=ON

TER AUX

TSX P

ACC 01

TSX SCA 50

UNI-TELWAY Bus

TSX SCA 62

CCX 17 slave

ATV 16 slave

The connected devices communicate with the PLC using UNI-TE protocol.

The various devices can also communicate between themselves.

The programming terminal can access all devices directly to perform adjustment and diagnostic functions.

Note:

When setting up TSX SCA 50 and TSX SCA 62 boxes, consult the TSX DG UTW manual :

UNI-TELWAY Bus Communication (User guide),

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1 2

Terminal port 1

A2

1.3-9 TSX model 40 master PLC type

A TSX/PMX model 40 type PLC can also be configured as the UNI-TELWAY bus master and can control the TSX 57 ii

PLC slaves.

Connection example

FTX 417 slave

TSX 107-40 master

T FTX

CBF 020 S1=ON

S2=ON

TER AUX

TSX P ACC 01

TSX CSB 015

TSX SCA62

TSX 57i i slave

S1=ON

S2=ON

UNI-TELWAY Bus

TER AUX

TSX P ACC 01

TSX 57i i slave

Note:

When setting up TSX SCA 50 and TSX SCA 62 boxes, consult the TSX DG UTW manual :

UNI-TELWAY Bus Communication (User guide)

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1 3

A2

1.3-10 Character string

When configured in character mode, the terminal port can be used to connect a device such as a printer, monitor, or specialized panel (panel mounted controller for example, etc).

Connection example

TSX 57i i

TSX 57i i

TSX 57i i

RS 485/RS 232 converter cable : TSX P CD 1030

RS 485/RS232 converter cable :

TSX P CD 1030

RS 485/RS232 converter cable :

TSX P CD 1030

Monitor which does not

manage the RTS signal

Controller Printer

Note :

The TSX PCD 1030 cable provides the RS485 / RS232 conversion, and supplies "slave peripheral" information to the printer. It does not operate on the AUX terminal port of the TSX 37-20 and the connected device must manage the RTS signal.

Warning :

The TSX PCX 1030 and TSX PCX 1130 cables should only be connected to the PLC TER port to supply the RS485 / RS 232 conversion electronics. To avoid conflicting signals, devices must not be connected to the PLC AUX port.

To ensure all types of connection, cables are supplied with adaptors.

The TSX PCX 1030 cable is supplied with two adaptors / converters :

TSX CTC 07 : 9-pin male to 25-pin female,

TSX CTC 10 : 9-pin male to 25-pin male.

The TSX PCX 1130 cable is supplied with one adaptor / converter :

TSX CTC 09 : 9-pin male to 25-pin male.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1 4

Terminal port 1

A2

1.3-11 Terminal port connection summary table

The table below defines the cable linking the connectors of a TSX 57 ii

terminal port to the peripheral equipment.

Connection cable PLC terminal ports Example of connected devices

TER AUX

X FTX 117 T FTX CB 1020 or

T FTX CB 1050

T FTX CBF 020

TSX P CU 1030

X

X

X

X

TSX P CD 1030

XBT-Z 968

TSX P ACC 01

TSX PCX 1030

TSX PCX 1130

X

X

X

X

X

X

TSX P ACC 01

FTX 507, FTX 417

RS 232 programming and adjustment terminals

Graphics terminals, printers, managing the

RTS signal

CCX 17, XBT

UNI-TELWAY connection devices which do not manage the RTS signal, type DTE <--> DTE : programming terminals,

RS 232 printers devices which do not manage the RTS signal, type DTE <--> DCE : Modem

The two TSX PCX 1030 and TSX PCX 1130 cables ensure the conversion of the RS 485 signals to RS 232. They permit connection of the terminal port to RS 232 devices which do not manage the RTS signal.

They are both fitted with a switch for setting the PLC to Master or slave mode. The switch can be accessed internally by removing the metal cover containing the electronics. The switch is managed as follows :

Switch position M

Switch position E

PL7 configuration

UTW master

UTW master with

PL7 conf

UTW slave with default conf

PL7 configuration PL7 configuration

UTW slave Character mode

UTW master with UTW master with default conf default conf

UTW slave with

PL7 conf

Character mode with

PL7 conf

Switch setting :

Master mode M Slave mode S

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1 5

A2

1.4

Appendix

1.4-1 Characteristics

The terminal port characteristics are given in the table below :

Structure

Transmission

UNI-TELWAY mode master or slave

Physical interface RS 485 non isolated.

Protocol

Bit rate

Multidrop master/slave.

19200 bits/s by default modifiable from 1200 to

19200 b/s

1 start bit, 8 data bits, even, odd or no parity, 1 stop bit

Character mode

RS 485 non isolated.

No protocol.

9600 bits/s by default modifiable from 1200 to 19200 bits/s. 7 or 8 data bits, even, odd or no parity, with or without echo.

Configuration Number of devices Maximum of eight (8 addresses One device (point handled by the master).

to point).

In slave mode the addresses

4,5,6 are selected by default

In master mode, the reserved addresses are :

1,2,3 for the programming terminal, 4,5 if CCX 17 present, the others are available.

Services

Length

UNI-TE

Other functions

Safety

Monitoring

10 m maximum.

10 m maximum.

Requests in point to point Character strings of with confirmation of 128 bytes 120 bytes max.

maximum initiated by any The messages must connected device.

end with $0D

No broadcasting initiated by (carriage return) the master.

Transparency of communication with any device in a network architecture via the master.

One control character on each No error feedback.

frame, acknowledgment and repetition possible.

Bus status table, status of devices, error counters are accessible by the slaves.

No flow control.

Note :

Use of a TSX P ACC 01 cable connector enables the RS485 link to be used in isolated mode. See section 2.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1 6

Terminal port 1

A2

1.4-2 Terminal port pin connection

The terminal port has 8-pin mini-DIN lockable connectors marked TER and AUX.

The signals are given below :

8 7 6

5

2

4

1

3

8 7 6

5

2

4

1

3

TER

1 D (B)

2 D (A)

3 not connected

4 /DE

5 /DPT (1 = master)

6 not connected

7 0 volt

8 5 volts

AUX

1 D (B)

2 D (A)

3 not connected

4 /DE

5 /DPT (1 = master)

6 not connected

7 0 volt

8 not connected

Note

The operation of the terminal port is dependent on two parameters:

• the state of the signal / DPT (0 or 1), fixed by the wiring accessory (lead,

TSX P ACC 01),

• the software configuration of the terminal port defined under PL7 Junior.

The table below defines the operating mode of the terminal port as a function of these two parameters.

Signal /DPT value

Configuration under PL7 Junior

UNI-TELWAY master

0

Terminal port in UTW slave mode (by default)

1

Terminal port in UTW master mode

UNI-TELWAY slave Terminal port in UTW slave mode

Terminal port in UTW master mode (by default)

Character mode Terminal port in character mode

Terminal port in UTW master mode (by default)

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1 7

A2

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1 8

2 TSX P ACC 01 box

2.1

Presentation

2.1-1 Functions

The TSX P ACC 01 box is a wiring accessory which connects to the TER connector on the processor of TSX Premium PLCs via a rigid cable, equipped with a mini-DIN connector at one end.

It is used to :

• connect several devices to the TSX Premium PLC terminal port. For this purpose, it has with two mini-DIN connectors, marked TER and AUX, which are functionally identical to the TER and AUX connectors of TSX 57ii

PLCs,

• isolate UNI-TELWAY signals so that the TSX Premium terminal port link can be extended to more than 10 meters to connect the PLC on a UNI-TELWAY bus,

• provide line termination when the box is connected to one end of the UNI-TELWAY bus,

• determine the operating mode of the terminal port :

- UTW master,

- UTW slave or character mode.

Note :

The two terminal ports of the TSX P AC01 box, TER and AUX, are not isolated from each other nor from the TER port of the PLC to which they are connected.

A2

2.1-2 External appearance

The box is made of zamak, the same as for the UNI-TELWAY terminal or connection box

(TSX SCA 50 and TSX SCA 62). It is designed to be mounted in a cabinet (see dimensions section 2.2-1). Its protection index is IP 20.

Terminal ports

Connection cable to TER port of

TSX 57ii

PLC (Length : 1 m)

TER AUX

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1

A2

2.2

Hardware installation

2.2-1 Dimensions and fixing

The TSX P ACC 01 box is installed on an AM1 PA... pre-slotted plate or on an

AM1-DE/DP type DIN rail with an LA9 D09976 fixing plate.

AM1-PA...

AM1 DE/EP

2.2-2 Internal view

=

2 x Ø 5,5

50 =

S2

Z

JA JB

S M

S1

S2

JA and JB

Selection of operating mode (master or slave),

Line terminator,

UNI-TELWAY bus connection terminals.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 2

TSX P ACC 01 box 2

A2

2.2-3 Connection to the UNI-TELWAY bus

The TSX P ACC 01 box is connected to the

UNI-TELWAY bus via the JA and JB connection terminals as shown opposite.

Shielding

Insulating sleeve

(essential)

White

Red

White

Blue

1

2

3

0 VL

0 VL

4

5

D(A)

D(B)

2.2-4 Connection to TSX 57i i

PLCs

As the TSX P ACC 01 box has to be supplied, it must be connected by its integral cable to the TER connector of the PLC processor.

The box can be connected or disconnected while the PLC is powered up.

TSX 57-

TER AUX

TSX P ACC 01

Note :

Only one TSX P ACC01 box can be connected to a TSX 57i i

PLC.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 3

A2

2.2-5 Configuration of switches

Line terminator configuration

End of line adaptation performed by switch

S2 as indicated below :

Operating mode configuration

The choice of operating mode is determined via switch S1 as indicated below :

Note : the operating mode selected only concerns the connection cable for the TER connector of the PLC processor

OFF

Z

S2

Position for

UNI-TELWAY line termination

OFF

Z

S2

Other positions

S2

Z

JA JB

S M

S M

UNI-TELWAY slave or character mode

S M

UNI-TELWAY master

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 4

TSX P ACC 01 box 2

A2

2.3

Examples of topology

2.3-1 Connectable devices

The functions of the two TER and AUX connectors of the TSX P ACC 01 box are identical to those of the TER and AUX connectors of the processor on TSX Premium PLCs :

• the TER connector on the box can be used to connect any device supporting

UNI-TELWAY protocol, and in particular devices which do not have their own power supply (FTX 117 Adjust terminal, RS 485/RS 232 converter cable, etc),

• the AUX connector on the box can only be used to connect devices which have their own supply (operator panel, PLCs, third-party equipment, etc).

Important

The TSX P ACC 01 box is supplied by the TER connector of the PLC to which it is connected. The TER port on the box can therefore be used to connect devices with their own power supply (CCX 17, etc) or without their own supply

(FTX 117 Adjust terminal, RS 485/RS 232 converter cable, etc).

In the event that the user wishes to connect the terminal port of a second PLC to one of the connectors on the TSX P ACC 01 box, it is essential that the AUX connector

(on the box and the PLC) is used in order to avoid conflict between the two PLC power supplies.

TSX 57ii master TSX 57ii slave

T FTX CB 1020/1050

TER AUX

TSX P ACC 01

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 5

A2

2.3-2 Master mode

A TSX P ACC 01 box is connected to a master PLC on the UNI-TELWAY link as shown in the example below.

Switches S1 and S2 must be set to OFF (master mode and other position).

FTX 417 slave TSX 57i i master

Address 1, 2, 3

TSX SCA 50

T FTX CBF 020

S1=OFF

S2=OFF

TER AUX

UNI-TELWAY Bus

TSX P ACC 01

XBT Z 968

TSX SCA 62

TSX CSC 015

T CCX CB10 002

Address 6

ATV 16 slave

Address 4/5

CCX 17 slave

TSX 17-20 slave

Address 7/8

1000 m max

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 6

TSX P ACC 01 box 2

A2

2.3-3 Slave mode

A TSX P ACC 01 box is connected to a slave PLC on the UNI-TELWAY link as shown below.

In this example, switches S1 and S2 on both boxes must be set to ON (slave mode and line termination boxes).

Important

For a PLC to function in slave mode, it must be connected to a TSX P ACC 01 box by the box integral cable.

FTX 117 Adjust

TSX 107-40 master

S1=ON

S2=ON

TER AUX

TSX P

ACC 01

UNI-TELWAY Bus

TSX 57slave

TSX CSB 015

TSX SCA 62

XBT Z 968

T CCX CB10 002

CCX 17

1000 m max

S1=ON

S2=ON

TER AUX

TSX P

ACC 01

TSX 57i i slave

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 7

A2

2.3-4 Connection between two PLCs

Reminder

If the user wishes to connect the terminal port of a second PLC to one of the TSX P ACC

01 box ports, the AUX port must be used in order to avoid conflict between the power supplies of the two PLCs.

For a PLC to function in slave mode, it must be connected to a TSX P ACC 01 box by the box integral cable.

In the example below, the TSX P ACC 01 box must be connected to the UNI-TELWAY slave PLC by the box integral cable. Switch S1 must be set to ON.

As the box is not situated on a UNI-TELWAY bus, the position of switch S2 is not important.

FTX 117 Adjust TSX 57 master TSX 57i i

slave

T FTX CB 1020/1050

T FTX CB

1020/1050

TER AUX

TSX P

ACC01

S1=ON

S2=not significant

XBT Z 968

T CCX CB10 002

CCX 17

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 8

TSX P ACC 01 box 2

A2

2.4

TSX P ACC01 box connectors

The TSX P ACC 01 box has two parallel connectors, marked TER and AUX.

The signals are given below :

5

8 7 6

4 3

2 1

5

8 7

4

6

3

2 1

TER

1 D (B)

2 D (A)

3 not connected

4 not connected

5 not connected

6 not connected

7 0 volt

8 5 volts

AUX

1 D (B)

2 D (A)

3 not connected

4 not connected

5 not connected

6 not connected

7 not connected

8 not connected

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 9

A2

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 0

Index part A2

Index

A

AUX connector A2 1/1

D

Devices which can be connected to TSX P ACC01

M

Modem on terminal port

A2 2/5

A2 1/7

T

TER connector

Terminal port characteristics

Terminal port, communication

Character string

A2 1/1

A2 1/16

Modem connection

UNI-TELWAY master/slave

With an operator panel

Terminal port connections

A2 1/3

A2 1/7

A2 1/3

A2 1/2

A2 1/4

Character string

Operator panel

A2 1/14

A2 1/6

Programming/adjustment terminal A2 1/5

Programming/adjustment terminal and operator panel A2 1/6

TSX model 40 master PLC type A2 1/13

UNI-TELWAY inter-device

UNI-TELWAY inter-PLC

UNI-TELWAY master

UNI-TELWAY slave

Terminal port pin connection

TSX P ACC 01 box

A2 1/12

A2 1/11

A2 1/9

A2 1/10

A2 1/17

A2 2/1

TSX P ACC01 box connectors

TSX P ACC01 configuration

TSX P ACC01 connection between two PLCs

TSX P ACC01 connections

To the UNI-TELWAY bus

To TSX 57-ii PLCs

TSX P ACC01 dimensions

TSX P ACC01 fixing

TSX P ACC01 master mode

TSX P ACC01 slave mode

A2 2/9

A2 2/4

A2 2/8

A2 2/3

A2 2/3

A2 2/3

A2 2/2

A2 2/2

A2 2/6

A2 2/7

B

___________________________________________________________________________

I / 1

___________________________________________________________________________

I / 2

Discrete I/O modules Contents B

___________________________________________________________________________

Section

1 Introduction

1.1

Description

1.1-1 General description

1.1-2 Physical description

1.2

Catalog

1.3

Installing, inserting and removing modules

1.3-1 Installation

1.3-2 Inserting/removing modules

1.4

Labelling

1.4-1 Modules with screw terminal block

1.4-2 Module with HE10 connectors

1.5

Channel addressing

Page

2 Discrete I/O functions 2/1

2.1

General functions

2.1-1 Constant current inputs

2.1-2 Protecting DC transistor outputs

2.1-3 Reactivating outputs

2.1-4 Output fallback state

2.1-5 Sharing the I/O

2.2

Specific functions of the TSX DEY 16FK module

2.2-1 Programmable input filtering

2.2-2 Latching inputs

2.2-3 Event management

2.3

Diagnostic functions

2.3-1 Module diagnostics

2.3-2 Process diagnostics

B1 2/6

B1 2/6

B1 2/6

___________________________________________________________________________

B/1

2/3

2/3

2/4

2/5

2/1

2/1

2/1

2/1

2/2

2/2

1/9

1/9

1/9

1/10

1/10

1/11

1/12

1/1

1/1

1/2

1/3

B

Discrete I/O modules Contents B

B

Section

2.4

Protection

2.4-1 Built-in protection for 24 VDC transistor output modules

2.4-2 Fuse protection

2.4-3 Protection of relay output contacts

Page

2/8

2/8

2/8

2/9

3 General installation rules

3.1

Recommendations for use

3.2

General wiring rules and recommendations

3.3

Compatibility of sensors v inputs and preactuators v outputs

3.3-1 Compatibility of sensors with inputs

3.3-2 Compatibility of preactuators with outputs

3.3-3 Using negative logic (24 VDC)

3.4

Software installation and associated language objects

3.5

Discrete I/O display and diagnostics

3/1

3/1

3/2

3/5

3/5

3/7

3/8

3/10

3/10

4 Characteristics

4.1

Characteristics of input modules with screw terminal

4.1-1 Input modules 24 - 48 VDC

4.1-2 24 VDC negative logic input module

4.1-3 AC voltage input modules with screw terminal

4.2

Characteristics of input modules with connectors

4.2-1 Fast input module

4.2-2 32 and 64 channel input modules

4.2-3 Temperature derating

4/1

4/4

4/4

4/5

4/6

4/1

4/1

4/2

4/3

___________________________________________________________________________

B/2

Discrete I/O modules Contents B

___________________________________________________________________________

Section

4.3

Characteristics of outputs with screw terminal

4.3-1 Transistor output modules

4.3-2 Relay output modules 50 VA

4.3-3 Relay output module 100 VA : TSX DSY 08R4D

4.3-4 Relay output module 100 VA : TSX DSY 08R5A

4.3-5 Triac output modules

4.4

Characteristics of transistor output modules with connector

5 Connections 5/1

5.1

Connection equipment

5.1-1 Connection to modules with screw terminal block

5.1-2 Connection to modules with HE10 connectors

5.2

Module connections

5.2-1 TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2 modules

5.2-2 TSX DEY 16D3 module

5.2-3 TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 / 16A5 modules

5.2-4 TSX DEY 16FK module

5.2-5 TSX DEY 32D2K / 64D2K modules

5.2-6 TSX DSY 08T2 / 16T2 / 16T3 / 08T22 / 08T31 modules

5.2-7 Relay modules 50 VA : TSX DSY 08R5 / 16R5

5.2-8 Relay modules 100 VA : TSX DSY 08R5A / 08R4D

5.2-9 TSX DSY 08S5 / 16S4 modules

5.2-10 TSX DSY 32T2K / 64T2K modules

5/1

5/1

5/2

5/4

5/11

5/14

5/17

5/19

5/4

5/7

5/8

5/9

5/21

5/23

6 TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O

6.1

Presentation

6.2

TSX Micro I/O module and sub-base compatibility

6/1

6/1

6/6

Page

4/7

4/7

4/8

4/9

4/10

4/11

B

4/12

___________________________________________________________________________

B/3

Discrete I/O modules Contents B

B

Section

6.3

TSX Premium I/O module and sub-base compatibility

6.4

Module v interface sub-base connection principle

Page

6/7

6/8

6.5

Sensor or preactuator connection to sub-bases

6.5-1 ABE-7H08R10/R11, ABE-7H16R10/R11 sub-bases

6.5-2 ABE-7H12R10/R11 sub-bases

6.5-3 ABE-7H08R21, ABE-7H16R20/21/23 sub-bases

6.5-4 ABE-7H12R20/21 sub-bases

6.5-5 ABE-7H08S21, ABE-7H16S21 sub-bases

6.5-6 ABE-7H12S21 sub-base

6.5-7 ABE-7H16R30/31 sub-bases

6.5-8 ABE-7H12R50 sub-base

6.5-9 ABE-7H116R50 sub-base

6.5-10 ABE-7H16F43 sub-base

6.5-11 ABE-7H16S43 sub-base

6.5-12 Fixed relay output adaptor sub-bases :

ABE-7R08S111, ABE-7R16S111, ABE-7R16S210/212

6.5-13 Fixed solid state relay input adaptor sub-bases :

ABE-7S16E2B1/E2E1/E2E0/E2F0/E2M0

6.5-14 Fixed solid state relay output adaptor sub-bases :

ABE-7S16S2B0 and ABE-7S16S2B2

ABE-7S08S2B0 and ABE-7S08S2B1

6.5-15 Removable solid state or electromechanical relay output sub-bases, relay 10mm wide

ABE-7R16T210, ABE-7P16T210

ABE-7R16T212, ABE-7P16T212

ABE-7R16T230

ABE-7R16T231

ABE-7P16T214

ABE-7P16T215

6/21

6/24

6/25

6/28

6/29

6/30

6/31

6/32

6/33

6/10

6/10

6/11

6/12

6/13

6/14

6/15

6/16

6/17

6/18

6/19

6/20

___________________________________________________________________________

B/4

Discrete I/O modules Contents B

___________________________________________________________________________

Section

6.5-16 Removable electromechanical or solid state relay input or output sub-bases, relay 12.5 mm wide

ABE-7R16T330, ABE-7P16T330

ABE-7R16T332, ABE-7P16T332

ABE-7R16T370

ABE-7P16T334

ABE-7P16T318

ABE-7P16F310

ABE-7P16F312

6.6

Compatibility table for relays and sub-bases

6.7

Accessories

6.8

Sub-base electrical characteristics

6.8-1 Fixed input adaptor sub-bases

6.8-2 Fixed solid state output adaptor sub-bases

6.8-3 Fixed relay output adaptor sub-bases

6.8-4 Removable output electromechanical relays

6.8-5 Removable input solid state relays

6.8-6 Fixed output solid state relays

6.9

Dimensions and mounting

6/42

6/43

6/43

6/44

6/45

6/46

6/47

6/48

6/49

Page

6/34

6/35

6/36

6/37

6/38

6/39

6/40

B

6/41

___________________________________________________________________________

B/5

Discrete I/O modules

B

Section

Contents B

Page

___________________________________________________________________________

B/6

1 Introduction

1.1

Description

1.1-1 General description

Inputs : these receive signals from sensors and perform the acquisition, adaptation, electrical isolation and filtering functions and protect against interference signals.

Outputs : these store instructions given by the processor in order to control preactuators via decoupling and amplifying circuits.

A wide range of discrete inputs and outputs meet requirements encountered on the following levels :

• functional : AC or DC I/O, positive or negative logic,

• connection via screw terminal blocks or HE 10 connectors,

• modularity : 8, 16, 32 or 64 channels/module.

B

Modularity

Connection

HE10 connectors

64 I or 64 Q 32 I or 32 Q 16 I 8 I or 8 Q

Modularity

Connection 64 I or 64 Q

Screw terminal blocks

(Terminal blocks not

shown)

32 I or 32 Q 16 I or 16 Q 8 I or 8 Q

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1

B

1.1-2 Physical description

I/O modules are standard format (1 slot), and are incorporated in a plastic case which provides IP20 protection for all the electronics.

The internal screening elements are connected to the protected ground for the rack via contacts located at the back of the modules (see part A1 section 6.1-2).

Modules with connection via screw terminal block

1 Module display and diagnostic block.

2 Removable screw terminal block for direct connection of the I/O to sensors and preactuators.

Reference : TSX BLY 01.

3 Pivoting door providing access to terminal block screws and also acting as a reference label holder.

4 Rotating support containing the locating device.

Note : The terminal blocks are supplied separately.

1

4

2

3

4

Modules with connection via HE10 connectors

Each module is composed of the following elements :

1 Module display and diagnostic block.

2 HE10 connectors, protected by a cover. They enable connection of the I/O to sensors and preactuators either directly or via TELEFAST 2 connection subbases.

1

2

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 2

1.2

Catalog

Module type Inputs with terminal block

Introduction 1

B

Modularity

Voltage

Isolation

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Logic

Proximity sensor compatibility

Filtering

Connection

References

8 inputs

24 VDC

16 inputs

48 VDC 24 VAC 48 VAC 100..120 200..240

24 VDC VAC VAC

Isolated inputs

Type 2 (1)

Positive Positive

Negative

2 and 3-wire proximity sensors (IEC 947-5-2)

2-wire AC proximity sensors ( IEC 947-5-2)

Integrated 4 ms Integrated, 50 or 60 Hz supply

Screw terminal block

TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY

08D2 16D2 16D3 16A2 16A3 16A4 16A5

(1) For module TSX DEY 16A2, type 2 conformity only applies to the 24 VAC version

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 3

B

Catalog (continued)

Module type Inputs with connectors

Modularity

Voltage

Isolation

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Logic

Proximity sensor compatibility

Filter

Programmable filter

Latching

Event

Connection

References

16 fast inputs 32 inputs

24 VDC

Isolated inputs

Type 1

Positive

64 inputs

2-wire proximity sensor see characteristics section 4

3-wire proximity sensor

(0.1.. 7.5 ms in steps of 0.5) fixed 4 ms

Yes

Yes

Yes fixed 4 ms

HE 10 connectors

TSX DEY

16FK

TSX DEY

32D2K

TSX DEY

64D2K

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 4

Catalog (continued)

Module type Transistor outputs with terminal block

Introduction 1

B

Modularity

Voltage

Isolation

Current

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Automatic protection

Fallback

Logic

Response time

Connection

References

8 outputs 16 outputs

24 VDC 48 VDC 24 VDC 48 VDC

Isolated outputs

0.5 A 2 A 1 A 0.5 A 0.25 A

Yes

Outputs protected against short-circuits and overloads with automatic or controlled reactivation with a rapid electromagnet demagnetization circuit

Configurable output fallback. Continuous monitoring of output control and outputs set to 0 if an internal fault is detected

Positive

0.3 ms 1 ms 1 ms 1 ms 0.2 ms

Screw terminal block

TSX DSY

08T2

TSX DSY

08T22

TSX DSY

08T31

TSX DSY

16T2

TSX DSY

16T3

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 5

B

Catalog (continued)

Module type Relay outputs with terminal block

Modularity

Voltage

Isolation

Current

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Protection

Fallback

Unlocking terminal block

Logic

Connection

References

8 outputs 16 outputs

12..24 VDC or

24..240 VAC

24..130 VDC 24..48 VDC or 12..24 VDC or

24..240 VAC

Isolated outputs between contact and ground

24..240 VAC

3 A 5 A 3 A

Yes

No protection Protection by interchangeable fuses No protection

Outputs set to 0 on detection of a fault, reactivated after fuse replacement

Configurable output fallback.

Automatic output cut-off facility when the terminal block is unlocked

Positive/negative

Screw terminal block

TSX DSY

08R5

TSX DSY

08R4D

TSX DSY

08R5A

TSX DSY

16R5

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 6

Catalog (continued)

Module type Triac outputs with terminal block

Introduction 1

B

Modularity

Voltage

Isolation

Current

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Protection

Fallback

Unlocking terminal block

Connection

References

8 outputs

48..240 VAC

Isolated outputs

2 A

Yes

16 outputs

24..120 VAC

1 A

Protection by interchangeable fuses Outputs not protected against shortcircuits or overloads. Anti-flame protection by non-interchangeable fuses.

Configurable output fallback

Automatic output cut-off facility when the terminal block is unlocked

Screw terminal

TSX DSY

08S5

TSX DSY

16S4

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 7

B

Catalog (continued)

Module type Solid state outputs with connectors

Modularity

Voltage

Isolation

Current

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Protection

Fallback

Logic

Connection

References

32 outputs 64 outputs

24 VDC

Isolated outputs

0.1 A

Yes

Outputs protected against short-circuits and overload with automatic or controlled reactivation

Configurable output fallback. Continuous monitoring of output control and outputs set to 0 if an internal fault is detected

Positive

HE 10 connectors

TSX DSY

32T2K

TSX DSY

64T2K

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 8

Introduction 1

1.3

Installing, inserting and removing modules

1.3-1 Installation

All TSX Premium discrete I/O modules are standard format.

They are supplied by the backplane bus and include a display on the front panel (see section 3.5).

The modules can be placed in either a standard rack or an extendable rack. They can be moved safely without switching off the power supply to the rack.

B

Standard rack Extendable rack

Connector modules

Terminal block modules

1.3-2 Inserting/removing modules

Discrete I/O modules should be inserted in the rack as follows :

• Position the two pins at the bottom of the card in the corresponding slots in the rack.

• Tilt the module upwards and plug in the backplane connector.

• Tighten the fixing screw at the top of the module (See part A1, section 5.4 Inserting modules).

Warning

If this screw is not tightened, the module will not stay in position in the rack.

! Reminder :

Modules must be inserted and removed with the sensor and preactuator supply off and

the terminal block disconnected.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 9

B

1.4

Labelling

1.4-1 Modules with screw terminal block

The module has three-fold labelling :

1 on the display block, the module reference,

2 under the display block, the module characteristics

3 on the terminal block, a removable label, to be placed inside the door, printed on both sides with the following information : external view (door closed) :

• module reference,

• type of channels,

• a box for writing in the module position number (address),

• description of each channel (symbol), internal view (door open) :

• I/O wiring diagram with channel numbers and connection terminal numbers.

View with door closed

TSX DEY 16D2

16 Current Sinking

Inputs

24VDC IEC type 2

I 0

1

TSX DEY 16D2

16I 24 VDC

IEC type 2

TSX

DEY

16D

16 C urren t Sin king

Inpu ts

24VD

C IE

C typ e 2

I 0

1

10

11

12

13

14

15

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3

1

2

3

8

9

6

7

10

4

5

2

3

11

12

13

14

15

View with door open

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

12

11

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

0 VDC

+24 VDC

I 0

1

12

13

14

15

9

10

11

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

Note :

The terminal block labels are supplied with the module.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1 0

1.4-2 Module with HE10 connectors

The module labelling is laser-engraved :

1 Marking on the display block shows :

• the module reference,

2 Marking of module characteristics

3 Marking (A) of addresses of corresponding channels :

• module channels 0 to 15,

4 Marking (B) of addresses of corresponding channels :

• module channels 16 to 31,

5 Marking (C) of addresses of corresponding channels :

• module channels 32 to 47,

6 Marking (D) of addresses of corresponding channels :

• module channels 48 to 63,

Introduction 1

B

64I 24VDC

IEC Type 1

- 2

5

6

1 - TSX DEY 64D2K

3

4

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1 1

B

1.5

Channel addressing

Channel addressing is geographical ; in other words it depends on :

• the rack address (0 to 7),

• the physical position of the module in the rack :

- 00 to 04 for a rack with 6 slots,

- 00 to 06 for a rack with 8 slots,

- 00 to 10 for a rack with 12 slots.

The syntax for a discrete I/O address is as follows :

% I or Q Address

Rack

Module position

.

Symbol I = Input

Q = Output

0 to 7 00 to 10 Point

Example :

%I102.5 indicates : input bit 5 of the module in position 2 of rack 1.

channel number

0 to 63

For more information see part A1 section 7.1 in this document, and part G - section 4.2 -

Discrete I/O of manual TLX DS 57 PL7 12E (PL7 Junior, TSX Premium Applicationspecific functions)

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1 2

2 Discrete I/O functions

2-1 General functions

2.1-1 Constant current inputs

24 and 48 VDC inputs are "constant current" type. Although the input voltage may be higher than 11 V (for 24 VDC inputs) or 20 V (for 48 VDC inputs), the input current is constant.

This characteristic has the following advantages :

• it ensures minimum current when energized on conforming to the IEC standard,

• it limits the current used when the input voltage increases, thus avoiding unnecessary temperature rise in the module,

• it reduces the current used on the power supply sensor, whether provided by the PLC power supply or a process supply.

B

2.1-2 Protecting DC transistor outputs

All transistor outputs (except those which are specifically marked "Unprotected"), have a protection device which detects the appearance of an overload or short-circuit when an output is active. Any such fault deactivates the output (tripping) and the fault is signalled on the front panel display. The LED for the faulty channel flashes, and the I/O fault LED lights up.

The fault is also indicated to the system. Language interface objects and debug screens are used to display the fault.

To use an output after tripping, it must be reactivated (see section 2.1-3).

2.1-3 Reactivating outputs

When an output is tripped following a fault, it can be reactivated so that it is active again.

Reactivation may be either automatic or controlled, depending on the option selected during configuration. This applies to modules with DC transistor outputs and to

modules with relay and triac outputs protected by interchangeable fuses. (See software installation document TLX DS 57 PL7 12E section 2.5)

• If the automatic option has been selected, reactivation is executed by the module.

There is a delay of about 10 seconds, and if the fault persists, the reactivation is repeated every 10 seconds until the fault disappears.

• If the controlled option has been selected, reactivation is executed after a command from the application program or from the terminal, via the debug screen. The minimum time between two reactivations is 10 seconds, and the module incorporates a delay to prevent repeated reactivations occurring very close together.

Reactivation affects one group of 8 channels at a time, but has no effect on channels

2 / 1

B

2.1-4 Output fallback state

All TSX Premium discrete module outputs can be placed in a state determined by the user when there is an fault on the PLC bus (base rack or extension rack), or if the processor stops. This state, known as the fallback position, is selected during configuration.

Several options are available :

• Fallback strategy configured per group of 8 channels with :

- either channel states maintained (last state given by the module),

- or switch to fallback position.

• Fallback value : if switching to fallback position is requested, all 8 channels in the same group will take the fallback value (0 or 1) set during configuration. The fallback value is determined channel by channel.

2.1-5 Sharing the I/O

Each module is split functionally into groups of 8 channels. Each group of channels can be assigned to a specific application task. This is most useful for modules with a large number of channels (eg TSX DEY 64D2K) where, for example, 48 channels could be assigned to the Master task (Mast), 8 channels to a Fast task and 8 channels would not be used for any task.

This property can be accessed in the PL7 Junior programming workshop configuration.

Note :

Inputs belonging to a single group (of channels) can easily be used by different tasks. When sharing the output channels of the same group, it is wise to take a certain number of precautions.

The channels of a single group have consecutive numbers, the first channel of each group always being a multiple of 8, (eg channels 0 to 7, 8 to 15, ... 24 to 31, ... 56 to 63).

Operating modes are common to channels in a group, and some functions are handled in common for all the channels in a group.

Example :

• Fallback strategy.

• Reactivating outputs after tripping.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 2

2 Discrete I/O functions 2

2.2

Specific functions of the TSX DEY 16FK module

2.2-1 Programmable input filtering

The input filter time for the TSX DEY 16FK module can be modified in configuration mode.

Input filtering is performed by :

• a fixed analog filter which provides maximum immunity for 0.1 ms to filter out line interference,

• a digital filter which can be configured in increments of 0.5 ms. This filtering can be modified in configuration mode via the terminal.

B

Configurable filter times (in ms)

0.1

1 2

0.5

1.5

2.5

The default filter time is 4 ms.

3

3.5

4

4.5

5

5.5

6

6.5

7

7.5

Note

• To avoid signals due to contact bounce when mechanical contacts are closed, it is advisable to use filter times of more than 3ms.

• In order to comply with standard IEC1131-2, the filter time must be set to

≥

3.5 ms

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 3

B

2.2-2 Latching inputs

Principle

Use the latch function to recognize particularly short pulses and those which are shorter than the PLC scan time.

This function recognizes the pulse so that it may be processed in the master (MAST) or fast (FAST) task during the next scan without interrupting the PLC scan.

The pulse is recognized when the input changes state. This may be either :

• change from state 0

→

to state 1,

• change from state 1

→

to state 0,

Example of processing a latch on pulse 0

→

1

PLC scan n

PLC scan n+1

PLC scan n+2

PLC scan n+3

PLC scan n+4

PLC scan

I P O I P O I P O I P O I P O

Pulse arrival

1

0

Inputs latched

1

0

;;

Reading and processing

Example of processing a latch on pulse 1

→

0

PLC scan n

PLC scan n+1

PLC scan n+2

PLC scan n+3

PLC scan n+4

PLC scan

I P O I P O I P O I P O I P O

Pulse arrival

1

0

Inputs latched 1

0

;; Reading and processing

Key

I = read inputs, P = process program, O = update outputs

Note

The time which separates the arrival of two pulses on the same input must be greater than or equal to the time of two PLC scans.

The minimum duration of the pulse should be greater than the filter time selected.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 4

2 Discrete I/O functions 2

2.2-3 Event management

Principle

The TSX DEY 16FK module can be used to configure up to 16 event-triggered inputs.

These inputs enable acceptance of events and ensure their immediate processing

(interrupt processing). Event-triggered processing priority is given to the number 0.

Event 0 is only associated with channel 0.

These inputs can be associated with event-triggered processing (Evti) and are defined in configuration mode by :

• i = 0 to 31 for the TSX P5710 processor

• i = 0 to 63 for the TSX P5720 processor

Event-triggered processing is initiated on a rising edge (0 → 1) or falling edge (1 → 0) of the associated input or simply on an edge : an EVT status (see Language interface) enables it to be differentiated during processing.

When two edges are detected on a module simultaneously, the events are processed in ascending order of channel number.

The principle of event-triggered processing is defined in part A, section 1.6-5 of the reference manual.

The recursion time of the edges on each input or the pulse width on an input programmed as RE + FE must correspond to the following diagram :

B

RE or

FE

T recursion

RE

+

FE

T width

T recursion or T width > 0.25 ms + 0.25 X module event number

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 5

B

2.3

Diagnostic functions

2.3-1 Module diagnostics

Dialog fault

Any communication fault, hindering normal operation of an output module or the fast input module, is indicated on the front panel by the red "ERR" lamp (module) flashing, and by the %@ module.ERR fault bit.

A communication fault can be caused by a hardware fault on the backplane bus, by a processor fault or by a faulty extension cable.

Internal Module Fault

Any internal fault which the module is able to detect is indicated on the front panel by the red "ERR" lamp coming on and the green "RUN" lamp going off.

Some instances of total module malfunction cannot be detected but are characterized by all lamps going off (as with a power supply fault).

2.3-2 Process diagnostics

Monitoring sensor/preactuator voltage

All input modules and transistor output modules have a device for monitoring the sensor and preactuator voltage.

When the sensor or preactuator voltage is below a certain threshold at which correct module operation cannot be ensured, the red I/O lamp lights up, and the "External voltage" fault is also indicated in the language objects.

• For an input module, when the sensor voltage is correct, the state perceived by the input is indeed that of the sensor, whatever type of sensor is being used (within the recommended range).

• For an output module, when the preactuator voltage is correct, the state determined for the preactuator is the state determined by the application. However, it is up to the user to check that the preactuator supply voltage is within the range accepted

by the preactuators being used (bear in mind the residual output voltage).

This monitoring is unique to terminal block modules. On connector modules with 32 or

64 channels, there is one monitoring device per connector (or one for every 16 channels).

A sensor or actuator voltage fault causes all inputs and outputs affected by the fault to switch to fault mode, that is all channels for a terminal block module, and the group(s) of 16 channels, on a connector module of 32 or 64 channels.

Note :

Relay and triac output modules do not monitor preactuator voltage.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 6

2 Discrete I/O functions 2

Monitoring presence of the terminal block

All terminal block modules include a facility for monitoring that the terminal block is on the module. If the terminal block is missing or if it is not properly attached to the module, the "I/O" lamp flashes and a "Terminal block" fault is indicated in the language interface.

Connector modules do not have a facility for monitoring the presence of connectors.

The module power supply monitoring performs this function.

Monitoring Short-circuit and Overload

Transistor output modules include a load state monitoring facility. If there is a shortcircuit or an overload on one or more outputs, they trip. The faults are indicated on the front panel by the lamps of the faulty channels flashing, and by the red "I/O" lamp lighting up.

The faults are indicated in the language interface by the "Short-circuit fault " bit on each channel and by the "Tripping" bit of channel groups per module.

The tripping of a channel is indicated by :

• I/O indicator lamp ON (I/O fault),

• channel lamp flashing,

• channel fault bit being set to 1 (%Ix.i.ERR =1)

• a fault code in the module status word

Monitoring sensor voltage

All input modules include a facility for monitoring the sensor voltage for all module channels. This facility monitors that the supply voltage for the sensors and the module is at a sufficient level to ensure correct operation of the module input channels (see section 4 for the various characteristics of each module).

If the sensor voltage is lower than or equal to a defined threshold, it is signalled by :

• I/O indicator lamp ON (I/O fault),

• channel fault bit %Ix.i.ERR =1

• a fault code in the module status word and in the channel status word.

Note : The sensor supply should be protected by a fast blow fuse.

Monitoring preactuator voltage

All modules with 24/48 VDC transistor outputs include a facility for monitoring the preactuator supply voltage for all module channels. This facility monitors that the supply voltage for the preactuator and the module is at a sufficient level to ensure correct operation of the module output channels.

This voltage should be greater than 18 V (24 VDC power supply), 36 V (48 VDC power supply) for modules with DC transistor outputs. If the preactuator voltage is less than or equal to this threshold, the outputs change to state 0 and the fault is indicated by :

• I/O indicator lamp ON (I/O fault),

• channel fault bit %Ix.i.ERR =1

• a fault bit in the module status word and in the channel status word.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 7

B

B

2.4

Protection

2.4-1 Built-in protection for 24 VDC transistor output modules

Protection of each channel against short-circuits and overload

All channels incorporate a protection facility providing protection against this type of fault.

Protection against polarity reversal

Modules have a device which causes the power supply to short-circuit, without damaging the module, to protect against polarity reversal.

In order for this protection to function in optimum conditions, it is essential to place a fastblow fuse on the power supply upstream of the preactuators.

Note :

As a general rule it is advisable to fit one fuse for all the module output channels ; see section 4.3 for a table of characteristics.

Protection against inductive overvoltages

Each output is individually protected against inductive overvoltages and is equipped with a zener diode fast demagnetization circuit for electromagnets which enables a reduction in the mechanical cycle time of certain fast machines.

2.4-2 Fuse protection

TSX DSY 08R5A/08R4D modules and

TSX DSY 08S5 output modules are equipped with interchangeable fuses which can be accessed on the front panel of the modules when the terminal block is removed.

If there is a fault, the front panel displays the module diagnostics.

The I/O indicator lamp is ON ; the channel fault bit %Ix.i.ERR =1.

Interchangeable fuses

The fuses can be accessed once the terminal block has been removed.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 8

2 Discrete I/O functions 2

2.4-3 Protection of relay output contacts (TSX DSY 08R5/16R5)

These relay outputs do not include a contact protection facility to enable control of :

• electrically isolated inputs, with a low energy level which require zero leakage current,

Preactuator c c

• power circuits, by eliminating induced overvoltages at source.

For this reason, it is imperative to connect the following to the terminals of the preactuator coils :

- an RC circuit or an MOV (ZNO) peak limiter, for use with AC supply,

- a flywheel diode for use with DC supply.

Relay contact

Module

Relay contact

R

MOV

Preactuator

+ –

C

Note : A relay output, used on an AC load, must not then be used on a DC load and vice versa.

B

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 9

B

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 0

3 General installation rules

3.1

Recommendations for use

Installation/removal of screw terminal blocks or HE10 connectors

Screw terminal blocks or HE10 connectors are installed or removed with the power supply to the preactuators and sensors off.

Inserting and removing modules

The terminal block must be disconnected when modules are inserted and removed, however, this can be done while the PLC is powered up.

Locking modules into their slot

In order to ensure that the contacts and electrical ground are securely connected, the fixing lock on the modules should be pushed in as far as possible.

Choice of DC power supplies for sensors and preactuators

Regulated or rectified power supplies with filtering

When using external 24 VDC power supplies, it is advisable to use :

• either regulated power supplies,

• or non regulated power supplies with filtering of :

- 1000

µ

F/A for full wave single phase rectification and 500

µ

F/A for 3-phase rectification,

- Maximum ripple (peak to peak) : 5%

- Maximum voltage variation : - 20% to + 25% of the nominal voltage

(ripple included)

Note :

Unfiltered rectified power supplies must not be used.

Cadmium/nickel battery power supply

This type of power supply may be used for supplying sensors and preactuators as well as the associated I/O. In normal operation, the latter tolerate a maximum voltage of

30 VDC.

When this type of battery is being charged, the battery voltage may reach 34 VDC for a duration of 1 hour. For this reason, all I/O modules operating on 24 VDC tolerate a voltage of 34 VDC, limited to 1 hour in 24 hours.

This type of operation has the following restrictions :

• the maximum current at 34 VDC tolerated by the outputs must never exceed the current defined for a voltage of 30 VDC,

• a derating in temperature which limits to :

- 80% of the I/O at state 1 up to 30 ° C,

- 50% of the I/O at state 1 at 60

°

C.

B

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1

B

3.2

General wiring rules and recommendations

Discrete I/O contain protection circuits ensuring excellent immunity to industrial conditions.

However, certain rules must be observed :

External power supplies for sensors and preactuators

These power supplies must be protected against short-circuits and overloads by fast blow fuses.

Attention

If the 24 VDC installation does not conform to VLSF standards (very low safety voltage), the 0V of the 24 VDC power supplies must be connected to the mechanical ground, this being taken to ground as near to the power supply unit as possible. This is necessary for the safety of personnel in the event of one of the AC supply phases coming into contact with the 24 VDC.

Note :

If an I/O module with a screw terminal block or HE10 connector is present in the PLC, the sensor or preactuator voltage must be connected to it, otherwise an "external power supply" fault will be displayed with the I/O LED on.

For connector modules, the sensor/preactuator power supply must be connected to each connector, except if the corresponding channels are not used and have not been assigned to any task (see part G, section 2 "Discrete I/O", in the PL7 Junior User's

Manual).

Inputs

• Usage recommendations for the fast input module (TSX DEY 16 FK)

- when using 24 VDC inputs, it is advisable to set the filter time for the required function.

- if the filter time is reduced to less than 3 ms, use of sensors with mechanical contact outputs is not recommended in order to avoid the effect of contact bounce when the contact is closed

- in order to achieve optimal operation, the use of DC inputs and sensors is recommended as AC inputs have a much longer response time.

• 24 VDC inputs and line coupling with AC supply

Close coupling between cables carrying AC and cables carrying DC input signals may interfere with operation.

(see simplified schematic on the next page)

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2

General installation rules 3

24 VDC inputs and line coupling with an AC supply (continued)

Simplified schematic

– a power supply

+

Module

C

+24 VDC

Input %I.

–0 VDC

Output %Q

.

L N to c power supply

The c power supply has the neutral connected directly or indirectly to ground

When the contact at the input is open, AC crossing the parasitic capacitance of the cable may generate a current in the input which may cause it to change to state 1.

Line capacitance not to be exceeded.

The following values are given for coupling with a 240 VAC/50 Hz line.

For coupling with a different voltage, apply the following formula :

Permissible capacitance = Capacitance at 240 VAC x 240

line voltage

Modules

TSX DEY 32/64D2K

TSX DEY 16D2

Max. permissible coupling capacitance with 240 VAC/50 Hz line

TSX DEY 16FK 10 nF

Filtering 0.1 ms

25 nF

45 nF

30 nF

3.5 ms

60 nF

7.5 ms

Note :

By way of an example, a standard 1 meter cable has a coupling capacitance of 100 to 150 pF.

B

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3

B

• 24 to 240 VAC inputs and line coupling

In this case, when the line controlling the input is open, current circulates due to the capacitance of the cable coupling.

Simplified schematic

N a power supply

L

Module

C

L

Input %I.

N

Line capacitance not to be exceeded :

Module

TSX DEY 16A2

TSX DEY 16A3

TSX DEY 16A4

TSX DEY 16A5

Maximum coupling capacitance

50 nF

60 nF

70 nF

85 nF

Outputs

• for high currents, it is advisable to segment the terminal connections by protecting each one with a fast blow fuse,

• use wire of sufficient cross-section to avoid voltage drops and temperature rises.

Cable routing

• inside and outside the equipment,

In order to limit the AC coupling, power circuit cables (power supply, power contactors, etc) must be separated from the input cables (sensors) and the output cables

(preactuators).

• outside the equipment,

I/O cables must be placed in a sheath separate to that used for power cables and placed in separate metal ducting, itself connected to ground. These cables must be separated by a minimum distance of 100 mm.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 4

General installation rules 3

3.3

Compatibility of sensors v inputs and preactuators v outputs

3.3-1 Compatibility of sensors with inputs

Compatibility between 3-wire sensors and 24 and 48 VDC inputs

• 3-wire sensors and positive logic inputs (sink) IEC 1131-2 type 1 and type 2,

All inductive or capacitive proximity

+ sensors, 3-wire PNP type photoelectric detectors, operating at 24 and 48 VDC, are compatible with all positive logic inputs.

Sensor

+

PNP

–

Input %I.

–

Module

Compatibility between 2-wire sensors and 24 VDC inputs

• 2-wire sensors and positive logic inputs (sink) IEC 1131-2 type 1.

All proximity sensors or other 2-wire sensors, operating at 24 VDC and having the characteristics listed below, are compatible with all 24 VDC positive logic Sensor

+

+

Input type 1 inputs.

Residual voltage at closed state:

≤

7 V

Minimum switching current :

≤

2.5 mA

Residual current at open state :

≤

1.4 mA.

–

%I.

Module

• 2-wire sensors and positive logic inputs (sink) IEC 1131 type 2.

All 2-wire proximity sensors, operating at 24 and 48 VDC and conforming to

CENELEC standards, are compatible with all 24 and 48 VDC positive logic type 2 inputs.

+

+

Sensor

Input %I.

–

Module

B

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 5

B

Compatibility between 2-wire sensors and 110/120 VAC inputs

All 2-wire AC proximity sensors conforming to IEC 947-5-2 standards and other

110/120 VAC contacts, are compatible with all 110/120 VAC IEC inputs 1131-2 type 2.

Summary table

Type of input

Type of proximity sensor

All 3-wire prox. sensor (DC), PNP

24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VAC 48 VAC 115 VAC 200/240

Type 1 Type 2 Type 2 Type 2 Type 2 VAC positive positive Type 2 logic logic

48 VDC

All 3-wire prox. sensor (DC), NPN

Telemecanique or other 2-wire proximity sensors DC with the following characteristics:

Residual voltage at closed state

≤

7V

Minimum switching current

≤

2.5 mA

Resid. current at open state

≤

1.4 mA

2-wire proximity sensor (AC/DC)

48 VDC

48 VDC (1)

(1) 2-wire proximity sensor (AC)

Key

DC

AC

: operates at a voltage

: operates at c voltage

AC/DC : operates at c or a voltage

48 VDC : compatibility

(1) : see operation in negative logic

Compatibility

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 6

General installation rules 3

3.3-2 Compatibility of preactuators with outputs

Compatibility between DC preactuators and outputs

• Respect the maximum current and output switching frequency specified in the characteristics tables.

• In the case of low consumption preactuators, the output leakage current at rest state must be taken into account such that :

I nominal

≥

50 x I leakage,

I nominal = current drawn by the preactuator,

I leakage = leakage current in the output at rest state.

Compatibility between tungsten filament lamps and transistor outputs (constant current)

• For outputs with protection against short-circuits, respect the maximum power of the tungsten filament lamps specified in the characteristics tables otherwise, there is the risk of tripping the outputs due to the lamp pull-in current at the moment of illumination.

Compatibility between AC preactuators and relay outputs

• Preactuators with inductive AC have a pull-in current which may exceed the holding current by ten times during a maximum time of 2/F seconds (F= AC frequency). For this reason, the relay outputs are designed to withstand this duty cycle (AC14 and

AC15). The characteristics table for relay outputs specifies the maximum permitted holding power (in VA) as a function of the number of operations.

Reminder of thermal current definition

The current which may continuously flow through a closed relay, with an acceptable rise in temperature. Under no circumstances should this current be switched by the relay.

Compatibility between filament lamp and triac outputs

• respect the maximum power equal to U x I max.

Compatibility between AC preactuators and triac outputs

• respect the maximum specified current,

• In the case of low consumption preactuators, the output leakage current at rest state must be taken into account such that :

0,1 x I nominal

≥

5 x I leakage,

I nominal = current drawn by the preactuator,

I leakage = leakage current in the output at rest state.

B

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 7

B

3.3-3 Using negative logic (24 VDC)

Negative logic (Source inputs / Sink outputs) can be used with the following modules :

• for the inputs :

- TSX DEY16A2 (this module intended for use with AC, can also be used with DC : positive or negative logic).

Warning :

The filter time for the inputs of module TSX DEY 16A2 is between 10 and 20 ms.

• for the outputs :

- relay outputs modules : TSX DSY 16R5 or TSX DSY 08R4D.

Wiring diagram :

Input module : TSX DEY 16A2

2-wire proximity sensor

+24 VDC

0 V

3-wire NPN proximity sensor

+

–

2

4

1

3

5

6

8

7

9

10

11

12

14

13

15

16

17

18

20

19

24 VAC

N

P

(1)

8

9

10

5

6

7

I 0

1

2

3

4

11

12

13

14

15

(1) : label identification for AC wiring (most common type of module operation).

Comment:

It is not advisable to use negative logic when the 0V sensor is connected to ground.

This is because if one of the wires were to be accidentally disconnected and come into contact with the mechanical ground, the input might be set to state 1. This would

3 / 8

General installation rules 3

Relay output module : TSX DSY 16R5

+ 24 VCC

Fusibles

Charges

2

4

6

8

1

3

5

7

9

10

12

11

8

9

10

18

20

13

14

16

11

15

C811

12

17

13

19

14

15

C1215

Q 0

1

2

3

C03

4

5

6

7

C47

0 V

Relay output module : TSX DSY 08R4D

+24 (->115)VDC

Loads

1

Q0

2

3

Q1

4

6

*

8

*

5

7

C0-1

C2-3

9

Q2

10

11

Q3

12

14 *

13

15

Q4

C4-5

Q5

16

18 *

17

19

Q6

C6-7

Q7

20

0 V

(*) : Strap required for the 24 V

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 9

B

B

3.4

Software installation and associated language objects

Discrete I/O used in the application program should be software configured using a configuration editor:

• declaration of the various modules in their respective position (in the rack),

• definition of the channel parameters for each module :

- filter time for fast inputs,

- assignment of channels to a task,

- type of output reactivation,

- fallback mode of channel outputs,

- etc.

The software installation and language objects associated with the discrete I/O are described in the PL7 Junior TLX DS PL7 J 12E software installation manual, part G

"Discrete I/O".

3.5

Discrete I/O display and diagnostics

The use and operation of display blocks is described in this manual in part H,

"Maintenance/Diagnostics".

The discrete I/O diagnostics are based on

3 indicator lamps :

• RUN green,

• ERR red,

• I/O red, on the front panel of each module as shown in the diagram opposite.

The zone below the diagnostic indicator lamps contains the lamps which relate to the input or output channels.

The channel is active when the corresponding lamp is on.

64-channel modules also have a +32 indicator lamp.

Lamps : RUN - ERR

- I/O

Channel status lamps

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 0

General installation rules 3

There are 3 types of display block depending on the module :

• 8 channel modules have :

- 3 module status lamps,

- 8 channel status lamps,

4

5

6

7

2

3

0

1

RUN ERR

I / O

B

• 16 channel modules have :

- 3 module status lamps,

- 16 channel status lamps,

4

5

6

7

2

3

0

1

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

RUN ERR

I / O

• 32 and 64 channel modules have :

- 3 module status lamps,

- 1 lamp + 32, displaying channels 32 to 63,

- 32 channel status lamps.

4

5

6

7

2

3

0

1

RUN

+ 32

ERR

I / O

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

11

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

19

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

27

Switch for displaying channels higher than 31

Example : displaying channel 41

Lamps 9 and +32 lit.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 1

B

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 2

4 Characteristics

4.1

Characteristics of input modules with screw terminal

4.1-1 Input modules 24 - 48 VDC

B

Module reference

Nominal input values

Input limit values

Voltage

Current at state 1 Voltage

Current at state 0 Voltage

Current

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

Input impedance at state 1 for 24 V

Filter time typical maximum

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Compatibility

TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2

24 VDC

7 mA

≥

11 V

≥

6.5 mA

(for U = 11V)

≤

5 V

≤

2 mA

19...30 V (possible up to

34 V, limited to 1 hour per

24 hours)

4 k

Ω

4 ms

7 ms

Yes type 2

2-wire/3-wire prox. sensors IEC 947-5-2

Dielectric strength

Insulation resistance

Type of input

Paralleling of inputs (1)

TSX DEY 16D3

48 VDC

7 mA

≥

30 V

≥

6.5 mA

(for U = 30V)

≤

10 V

≤

2 mA

38...60 V

7 k

Ω

4 ms

7 ms

Yes type 2

IEC 947-5-2

1500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min

10 M

Ω

10 M

Ω current sink current sink

Yes Yes

Consumption 5V typical maximum

Consumption 24V typical sensor maximum

55/80 mA

65/90 mA

25/25 mA

33/33 mA

80 mA

90 mA

25 mA

33 mA

Dissipated power No. = Number of channels (1 + 0.15 x No. ) W

Temperature

derating (2)

(1 + 0.3 x No.) W

The characteristics at 60

°

C are ensured for 60% of the inputs at state 1

(this characteristic is not relevant to module TSX DEY 08D2).

(1) This characteristic enables several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module,

or on different modules if redundant inputs are required.

(2) See section 4.2-3.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1

B

4.1-2 24 VDC negative logic input module

Module reference

Nominal input values

Input limit values

Voltage

Current at state 1 Voltage

Current at state 0 Voltage

Current

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

TSX DEY 16A2

24 VDC

16 mA (on exit)

≥

Usup — 14 V

≥

6.5 mA (on exit)

≥

Usup — 5 V

≤

2 mA (on exit)

19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to

1 hour per 24 hours)

Input impedance at state 1 for 24 V

Filter time

Compatibility typical maximum proximity sensor

1.6 k

Ω

10 ms

20 ms

2-wire (Telemecanique)

3-wire (IEC 947-5-2)

Dielectric strength

Insulation resistance

Type of input

Paralleling of inputs

Consumption 5V typical maximum

Consumption 24V typical

1500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min

10 M

Ω resistive

No

80 mA

90 mA

15 mA sensor

Dissipated power

Temperature

derating (1) maximum 19 mA

1 + 0.4 x Number of channels W

The characteristics at 60

°

C are ensured for 60% of the inputs at state 1

(1) See section 4.2-3.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 2

Characteristics 4

4.1-3 AC voltage input modules with screw terminal

Module reference

Nominal input values

Input limit values

Input impedance

Type of input

Typical filter time

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Compatibility

Consumption 5V

Frequency

Current 3 mA

47...63 Hz

4 mA

Sensor supply

Switch on

4 mA

20...26 V 40...52 V 87...132 V

1.6 k

Ω

3.2 k

Ω

9.2 k

Ω

Resistive Capacitive Capacitive

15 ms 10 ms 10 ms

Switch off

2-/ 3-wire prox. sensors typical

Consumption 24V sensor

Nominal dissipated

power (1) per channel

Dielectric strength

Input/ground or

Input/internal logic

Insulation resistance

Temperature

derating (1) maximum typical maximum

TSX DEY TSX DEY TSX DEY

16A2 16A3 16A4

TSX DEY

16A5

24 VAC 48 VAC 100..120 VAC 200..240 VAC Voltage

Current 15 mA at state 1 Voltage 10 V

16 mA

29 V

12 mA

74 V

15 mA

159 V

Current 6 mA 6 mA 6 mA

(U=10V) (U=29V) (U=74V) at state 0 Voltage 5 V 10 V 20 V

6 mA

(U=159V)

40 V

4 mA

20 ms type 2

80 mA

90 mA

15 mA

19 mA

0.89 W

20 ms type 2

IEC 947-5-2

80 mA

90 mA

16 mA

20 mA

0.86 W

20 ms type 2

80 mA

90 mA

15 mA

19 mA

0.83 W

1500 Vrms 1500 Vrms 1500 Vrms

(50/60 Hz for 1 minute)

170...264V

20 k

Ω

Capacitive

10 ms

20 ms type 1

80 mA

90 mA

12 mA

16 mA

0.97 W

2000 Vrms

> 10 M

Ω

at 500 VDC

The characteristics at 60

°

C are ensured for

60% of the inputs at state 1

B

(1) See section 4.2-3.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 3

B

4.2

Characteristics of input modules with connectors

4.2-1 Fast input module

Reference

Nominal input values

Input limit values

Voltage

Current at state 1 Voltage

Current at state 0 Voltage

Current

Sensor supply

(ripple included) default

TSX DEY 16FK

24 VDC

3.5 mA

≥

11 V

≥

3 mA

≤

5 V

≤

1.5 mA

19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to

1 hour per 24 hours)

4 ms Filter time

Type of input

Paralleling of inputs (1)

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Compatibility

Configurable filtering 0.1...7.5 ms (in increments of 0.5) current sink

Yes

Yes type 1

2-wire proximity sensor Yes (Telemecanique sensor and leakage current < 1.5 mA)

Consumption 5V

Consumption 24V sensor

Dissipated power

Dielectric strength

Input / ground or

Input / internal logic

Insulation resistance

Temperature

derating (2)

3-wire proximity sensor Yes typical 250 mA maximum typical maximum

300 mA

20 mA

30 mA

1.2 W + 0.1 W x No. of inputs at 1

1500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 minute

> 10 M

Ω

at 500 VDC

The characteristics at 60

°

C are ensured for 60 % of inputs at state 1

(1) This characteristic enables several inputs to be wired in parallel on the same module,

or on different modules if redundant inputs are required.

(2) See section 4.2-3.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 4

Characteristics 4

B

4.2-2 32 and 64 channel input modules

Reference

Nominal input values

Input limit values

Voltage

Current at state 1 Voltage

Current at state 0 Voltage

Current

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

TSX DEY 32D2K TSX DEY 64D2K

24 VDC 24 VDC

3.5 mA

≥

11 V

≥

3 mA

≤

5 V

≤

1.5 mA

3.5 mA

≥

11 V

≥

3 mA

≤

5 V

≤

1.5 mA

19...30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to

1 hour per 24 hours)

Typical filter time

Maximum filter time

4 ms

7 ms

4 ms

7 ms

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Compatibility

Yes type 1 Yes type 1

2-wire proximity sensor Yes with leakage current < 1.5 mA

Type of input

Power consumption

Dissipated power

3-wire proximity sensor Yes current sink

5 V Typical 135 mA

Maximum 155 mA

24 V

Sensor

Typical

Maximum

30 mA

40 mA

1 + 0.1 W x No. of channels

0

°

...60

°

C

Yes current sink

135 mA

175 mA

60 mA

80 mA

1.5 + 0.1 W

x No. of channels

Operating temperature

Dielectric strength

Input/ground or

Input/internal logic

Insulation resistance

Temperature derating (1)

1500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min

> 10 M

Ω

at 500 VDC

The characteristics at 60

°

C are ensured for

60 % of inputs at state 1

(1) See section 4.2-3.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 5

B

4.2-3 Temperature derating

All the characteristics of the various discrete modules are given for a simultaneous loading of 60% of the channels at state 1. For operation with a higher loading, see the following derating curve.

Percentage of inputs at state 1

100%

80%

60%

40%

20%

0%

0 10 20 30 40 50 60

Temperature in C

°

Notes :

There is no derating for relay output modules, the user must check that the overall consumption on the 24 V relay power supply is sufficient.

For transistor outputs, temperature derating is on the maximum current used by the active outputs.

Example 1 : a module with sixteen 24 VDC/0.5 A transistor outputs, each switching 0.5 A.

At 60

°

C, the maximum permitted current at the outputs is 16 x 0.5 x 60% = 4.8 which corresponds to about 10 outputs active simultaneously.

Example 2 : the same module (sixteen 24 VDC/0.5 A transistor outputs) each switching 0.3 A.

A 60

°

C, the maximum permitted current at the outputs is 16 x 0.3 x 60% = 2.9 A, which corresponds to 16 outputs active simultaneously. In this case, there is no derating on the outputs ; the maximum permitted current maximum of the module is not exceeded.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 6

Characteristics 4

4.3

Characteristics of outputs with screw terminal

4.3-1 Transistor output modules

Module reference

Nominal output values

Output limit values

Voltage

Current

TSX DSY TSX DSY TSX DSY TSX DSY

08T2 /16T2 08T22 08T31 16T3

24 VDC

500 mA

24 VDC

2 A

Voltage 19...30 V (1)

Current/channel 0.5 A 2 A

48 VDC

1 A

38...60 V

1 A

48 VDC

250 mA

38...60 V

0.25 A

4 A

Leakage current

Residual voltage

Min load impedance

Response time (2)

Current/module 4 A / 7 A 14 A at state 0

Switching frequency on inductive load

< 1.2 V

48

Ω

1.2 ms

7 A

< 1 mA

< 0.5 V < 1 V

12

Ω

48

Ω

200

µ s 200

µ s

0.5 / LI 2 Hz

< 1.5 V

192

Ω

1.2 ms

Built-in Against overvoltages protection Against reverse polarity

Against short-circuits and overloads

Preactuator voltage detection threshold

Maximum filament lamp power

Consumption 5V

Insulation resistance

Temperature derating typical maximum

Consumption 24V preactuator typical maximum

Nominal power dissipated

Dielectric strength

Input/ground or Input/internal logic per output x module current

Yes, by transil diode

Yes, by reverse mounted diode. Provide a fuse on the + 24 V or + 48 V of the preactuators.

15 ms

16 V

6 W

16 V

10 W

34 V

10 W

55/80 mA 55 mA 55 mA

65/90 mA 65 mA 65 mA

34 A

6 W

80 mA

90 mA

30/40 mA

40/60 mA

1 / 1.1 W

30 mA

50 mA

1.3 W

30 mA

50 mA

2.2 W

40 mA

60 mA

2.4 W

+ (0.75 W) + (0.2 W) + (0.55 W) + (0.85 W)

1500 V rms, 50/60 Hz for 1 min

> 10 M

Ω

at 500 VDC

The characteristics at 60

°

C are ensured for 60% of the max. module current

(1) 34 V permissible for 1 hour per 24 hours.

(2) All outputs have fast demagnetization circuits for electromagnets.

Electromagnet discharge time < L/R.

B

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 7

B

4.3-2 Relay output modules 50 VA

Modules

Operating voltage DC

(nominal / limit)

Thermal current

AC load

DC load

AC

Resistive Voltage

AC12 duty Power

Inductive

AC14 and

AC15 duty

Resistive

DC12 duty

Voltage

Power

Voltage

Power

Inductive Voltage

DC13 duty Power

(L/R = 60 ms)

Min switchable load

Switch on

Switch off

TSX DSY 08R5 / 16R5

12..24 V/10..34 V

24..240 V/20..264 V

3 A c 24 V c 48 V c 100..120V

c 200..240V

50 VA (5) 50 VA (6) 110 VA (6) 220 VA (6)

110 VA (4) 220 VA (4) c 24 V c 48 V c 100..120V

c 200..240V

24 VA (4) 10VA (10) 10 VA (11) 10 VA (11)

24 VA (8) 50 VA (7) 50 VA (9)

110 VA (2) 110 VA (6)

220 VA (1) a 24 V

24 W (6)

40 W (3) a 24 V

10 W (8)

24 W (6)

1 mA / 5 V

< 8 ms

< 10 ms

Response time

Type of contact

Built-in protection

Against overloads and short-circuits

Against inductive overvoltages for c

Normally open

None, a fast blow fuse must be fitted to each channel or group of channels

None, an RC circuit or MOV (ZNO) peak limiter appropriate for the voltage must be fitted in parallel to the terminals of each preactuator

None, a flywheel diode must be fitted across the terminals of each preactuator

Isolation

(test voltage)

Power

Against inductive overvoltages for a

Outputs/ground

Outputs/internal logic

Insulation resistance

5 V internal

2000 V rms 50/60 Hz for 1 min

> 10 M

Ω

at 500 VDC

Typ. 55/80 mA Max. 65/90 mA consumption 24 V relay per channel at 1 Typ. 8.5 mA

Nominal dissipated power

Max.10 mA

0.25 W + (0.2 W x No. of outputs at 1)

(1) 0.1 x 10 6 operations

(2) 0.15 x 10 6 operations

(5) 0.7 x 10 6 operations.

(6) 1 x 10 6 operations.

(3) 0.3 x 10 6 operations (7) 1.5 x 10 6 operations.

(4) 0.5 x 10 6 (8) 2 x 10 6 operations.

4 / 8

(9) 3 x 10 6 operations.

(10) 5 x 10 6 operations.

(11) 10 x 10 6 operations.

Characteristics 4

4.3-3 Relay output module 100 VA : TSX DSY 08R4D

Module reference

Operating voltage DC

(nominal/limit)

Thermal current

DC load

AC

Resistive

DC12 duty

Voltage

Power

Inductive Voltage

DC13 duty Power

(L/R = 60 ms)

Switch on

Switch off

TSX DSY 08R4D

24..130V/19..143 V not allowed

5 A (Max 6 A per common) a 24 V a 48 V a 100...130 V

50 W (6) 100 W(6) 220 W (6)

100 W (3) 200 W (3) 440 W (3) a 24 V a 48 V a 110 V

20 W (8) 50 W(8) 110 W (8)

50 W (6) 100 W(6) 220 W (6)

< 10 ms Response time

Type of contact

< 15 ms

2x2 N/C - N/O (1)

2x2 N/O

Isolation between contacts and ground

Built-in against overvoltages protection

Power consumption

2000 V at 50 to 60 Hz

R-C circuit and Ge-Mov against overloads and short-circuits

5 V Typical

Interchangeable fast blow fuse per common 6.3 A

55 mA

Maximum 65 mA

24 V

Relay

Nominal dissipated power (2)

Typical 10 mA per channel at 1

Maximum 12 mA per channel at 1

0.25 W + (0.24 W x No. of outputs at 1)

B

(1) N/C = normally closed - N/O = Normally open

(2) 60 % of active outputs.

(6) 1 x 10 6 operations.

(3) 0.3 x 10 6 operations

(8) 2 x 10 6 operations.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 9

B

4.3-4 Relay output module 100 VA : TSX DSY 08R5A

Module reference

Operating voltage DC

TSX DSY 08R5A

24..48V/19..60 V

(nominal/limit)

Thermal current

AC load

DC load

AC

Resistive

AC12 duty

Inductive

AC14 and

AC15 duty

24..240V/20..264V

5 A (Max 6 A per common)

Voltage

Power

Voltage

Power c 24 V c 48 V c 100..120V

c 200..240V

100 VA (5)100 VA (6) 220 VA (6) 440 VA (6)

200 VA (4) 440 VA (4) c 24 V c 48 V c 100..120V

c 200..240V

50 VA (4) 20 VA (10) 20 VA (11) 20 VA (11)

50 VA (8) 110 VA (7) 110 VA (9)

220 VA (2) 220 VA (6)

440 VA (1)

Resistive

DC12 duty

Inductive

DC13 duty

(L/R = 60 ms)

Switch on

Voltage

Power

Voltage

Power a 24 V a 48 V

24 W (6) 50 W (6)

50 W (3) 100 W (3) a 24 V a 48 V

10 W (8) 24 W (8)

24 W (6) 50 W (6)

< 10 ms Response time

Type of contact

Switch off < 15 ms

2x2 N/C - N/O (1)

2x2 N/O

Isolation between contacts and ground

Built-in protection

Power consumption against overvoltages

2000 V at 50 to 60 Hz

R-C circuit and Ge-Mov

Interchangeable fast blow fuse per common 6.3 A against overloads and short-circuits

5 V Typical

24 V

55 mA

Maximum 65 mA

Typical 10 mA per channel at 1

Dissipated power

(1) 0.1 x 10 6 operations

(2) 0.15 x 10 6 operations

(3) 0.3 x 10 6 operations

(4) 0.5 x 10 6 operations

Relay Maximum 12 mA per channel at 1

0.25 W + (0.24 W x No. of outputs at 1)

(5) 0.7 x 10

(8) 2 x 10 6

6 operations.

(6) 1 x 10 6 operations.

(7) 1.5 x 10 6 operations.

operations.

(9) 3 x 10 6 operations.

(10) 5 x 10 6 operations.

(11) 10 x 10 6 operations.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 0

Characteristics 4

4.3-5 Triac output modules

Module reference

Build-in protection

TSX DSY 08S5 against overvoltages Ge-Mov against overloads and short-circuits

Fast blow fuse per common

≤

6.3 A

TSX DSY 16S4

Operating voltage DC

(nominal/limit) AC not allowed

48..240V/41..264V

24..120V/20..132V

Permissible current (1)

Response time

Switch on

Switch off

2 A / channel - 12A/module 1 A / channel - 12A/module

≤

10 ms

≤

10 ms

Isolation between contacts and gnd.

2000 V at 50...60 Hz

Anti-flame protection non interchangeable per common de 10 A

Power

consumption 5 V

Dissipated power

Typical 125 mA

Maximum 135 mA

220 mA

230 mA

0.5 W + 1 W/A per output 0.85 W + 1 W/A per output

Important:

When using TSX DSY 08S5 modules at 220 VAC, it is essential not to use different phases between groups of channels on the same module.

B

(1) temperature derating is as shown on graph below

I max/module (A)

12

10

8

6

4

2

0

0 10 20 30 40 50 60

T (°C)

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 1

B

4.4

Characteristics of transistor output modules with connector

Module reference

Type of output

TSX DSY 32T2K positive logic

TSX DSY 64T2K

Operating voltage

(nominal/limit)

Permissible current

DC

AC

Permissible lamp power

Residual voltage

24V / 19...30 V (ripple included), possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour per 24 hours). not allowed

0.1 A/chann. - 3.2 A / module 0.1 A/chann.- 5 A/module

0.2 A

< 1.5 V for I = 0.1 A

1.2 ms Response time

Paralleling of outputs Yes : 3 max

Leakage current < 0.4 mA for U = 30 V

Compatibility of DC inputs with

IEC1 and IEC12

Built-in

Yes against overvoltagesYes, Transil diode protection against overloads Automatic cut-out after 15 ms and short-circuits against reversed Reverse mounted diode polarity place a 3 A fuse across the 24 V

Load impedance at state 1

Dielectric strength

Consumption 5V

Consumption 24V preactuator

Dissipated power typical maximum typical maximum

> 220

Ω

1500 V rms 50...60 Hz for 1 minute

135 mA

155

30 mA

40 mA

1.6 W + 0.1 W / output

135 mA

175 mA

60 mA

80 mA

2.4 W + 0.1 W / output

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 2

5 Connections

5.1

Connection equipment

5.1-1 Connection to modules with screw terminal block

The terminal blocks of the I/O modules have an automatic transfer coding device for when they are first used. This avoids handling errors while a module is being replaced.

The coding ensures electrical compatibility for each type of module. See part A1 section 5.4.

B

Each terminal can accept bare wires or wires fitted with cable ends, or open lugs.

The capacity of each terminal is :

• minimum :

• maximum :

1 wire, 0.2 mm 2 (AWG 24) without cable end,

1 wire, 2 mm 2 without cable end or,

1 wire, 1.5 mm 2 with cable end.

1

1 5.5 mm maximum

The screw terminals have a recess for screwdrivers with the following heads :

• Pozidrive N

°

1 cruciform,

• flat, Ø 5 mm diameter

The screw terminal connection blocks are fitted with captive screws. They are supplied unscrewed. The maximum capacity of the terminal block is 16 wires, 1 mm 2 (AWG) + 4 wires 1.5 mm 2 (AWG).

Opening the cover

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1

B

5.1-2 Connection to modules with HE10 connectors

20 wire preformed cable, 22 gauge (0.34 mm 2 ),

Used for simple and direct wire to wire connection of the I/O on modules with HE10 connectors to sensors, preactuators or terminals.

This preformed cable comprises :

• at one end, an HE10 moulded connector carrying 20 wires, 0.34 mm 2 cross-section within a sheath,

• at the other end, flying leads color coded conforming to DIN 47100 standard.

Note : A nylon cord inside the cable enables the sheath to be stripped easily.

There are two product references : TSX CDP 301 : 3 meters.

TSX CDP 501 : 5 meters.

Preformed cable

Module

Correspondence between wire color and the HE10 connector pin number white brown green yellow grey pink blue red black violet grey-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-grey grey-brown white-pink pink-brown

TSX CDP i 01

Top

1

HE10

2

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Bottom

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 2

Connections 5

Preformed stranded sheathed connection cable 28 gauge (0.08 mm 2 )

Used to connect the I/O from modules with HE10 connectors to TELEFAST 2 rapid connection and wiring interfaces. This preformed cable comprises 2 HE10 connectors and a sheathed rolled ribbon cable with 0.08 mm 2 cross-section wires.

Bearing in mind the small cross-section of the wires, it is recommended that they be used only for low current inputs or outputs (

≤

100 mA per input or output).

There are three product references : TSX CDP 102 : length 1 meter

TSX CDP 202 : length 2 meters

TSX CDP 302 : length 3 meters

Connection cable 22 gauge (0.34 mm 2 )

Used to connect the I/O of modules with HE10 connectors to TELEFAST 2 rapid connection and wiring interfaces. This preformed cable comprises 2 HE10 moulded connectors and a cable with 0.34 mm 2 cross-section wires used for carrying higher currents (

≤

500 mA).

There are five product references : TSX CDP 053 : length 0.50 meters.

TSX CDP 103 : length 1 meter.

TSX CDP 203 : length 2 meters.

TSX CDP 303 : length 3 meters.

TSX CDP 503 : length 5 meters.

B

TX CDP i 02 cable

Module

TSX CDP ii 3 cable

TELEFAST 2 ABE-7H iiiii

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 3

B

5.2

Module connections

5.2-1 TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2 modules

Presentation

TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2 modules comprise :

• 8 inputs 24 VDC, positive logic type 2 for the TSX DEY

08D2 modules,

• 16 inputs 24 VDC, positive logic type 2 for the TSX DEY

16D2 module,

The inputs are connected via a removable screw terminal block on the module.

Simplified input schematic

Sensor

+

Input

–

Module

Sensor voltage monitoring and supply

Input % IXn

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 4

TSX DEY 08D2 module connections

Sensors Inputs

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

FU1

+ –

0 VDC

+24 VDC

18

20

19

I 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Connections 5

B

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 5

B

TSX DEY 16D2 module connection

Sensors

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

FU1

+ –

0 VDC

+24 VDC

18

20

19

Inputs

I 0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 6

Connections 5

5.2-2 TSX DEY 16D3 module

Presentation

The TSX DEY 16D3 module has 16 inputs, 48 VDC.

This module is connected to a 20-pin screw terminal block. Inputs are type 2, positive logic.

B

Module TSX DEY 16D3 connections

Sensors Inputs

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

FU1

+ –

0 VDC

+48 VDC

18

20

19

5

6

7

8

9

10

I 0

1

2

3

4

11

12

13

14

15

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 7

B

5.2-3 TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 / 16A5 modules

Presentation

TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 and 16A5 modules have AC inputs, type 2. They are connected to the 20-pin screw terminal block.

Simplified input schematic

U VAC

Power supply check

Electrical isolation

Sensor

+ 5 V c

Filtering

Inputs

0 VAC

Module

TSX DEY 16A2 / 16A3 / 16A4 / 16A5 module connections

Sensors Inputs

2

4

6

8

10

1

3

5

7

9

11

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

I 0

1

2

3

UVAC = 24 V for TSX DEY 16A2

48 V for TSX DEY 16A3

115 V for TSX DEY 16A4

230 V for TSX DEY 16A5

12 11

13 12

14

16

15

13

14

15

17

FU1 UVAC

18 c 19

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

20

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 8

Connections 5

5.2-4 TSX DEY 16FK module

Presentation

This module has 16 fast input channels, 24 VDC. They are type 1 inputs, proximity sensor compatible conforming to the characteristics in section 4.

The module is fitted with an HE10 male connector :

• connector A addresses 0 to 15

The connector can accept :

• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for direct connection to the sensor terminal,

• or a TSX CDP•02 cable or a TSX CDP••3 cable for connection to a TELEFAST 2 interface.

A

B

Simplified schematic

+

Sensor

Sensor voltage monitoring and supply

Input % IXn

Input

–

Module

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 9

B

TSX DEY 16FK module connections

Sensors white brown green yellow grey pink blue red black violet grey-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-grey grey-brown

FU1

+ white-pink

–

0 VDC pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

A

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

0

Inputs

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

Note :

The colors are used to show the correspondence between the HE10 connector pins and the flying leads of a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1 0

Connections 5

5.2-5 TSX DEY 32D2K / 64D2K modules

Presentation

TSX DEY 32D2K and 64D2K modules have 24 VDC inputs. These are type 1 proximity sensor compatible inputs conforming to the characteristics in section 4.

The TSX DEY 32D2K module is fitted with 2 HE10 male connectors:

• connectors A and B are used to connect inputs :

- A (0 to 15)

- B (16 to 31)

A

B

B

The TSX DEY 64D2K module is fitted with 4 HE10 male connectors :

• connectors A and B for connecting channels :

- A (0 to 15)

- B (16 to 31)

• connectors C and D for connecting channels :

- C (32 to 47)

- D (48 to 63)

A

C

B

D

Each connector can accept :

• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for connecting to a sensor terminal,

• or a TSX CDP•02 cable or a TSX CDP••3 cable for connecting to a TELEFAST 2 interface.

Simplified input schematic fuse

+

Sensor voltage monitor and supply

Sensor

+

–

24 VCC

–

Input Module

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1 1

B

TSX DEY 32D2K module connections

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

Sensors white brown green yellow grey pink blue red black violet grey-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-grey grey-brown

FU1

+ white-pink

–

0 VDC pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

A

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Inputs

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Sensors white brown green yellow grey pink blue red black violet grey-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-grey grey-brown

FU1

+ white-pink

–

0 VDC pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

B

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Inputs

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1 2

Connections 5

B

TSX DEY 64D2K module connections

Sensors white brown green yellow grey pink blue red black violet grey-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-grey grey-brown

FU1

+ white-pink

–

0 VDC pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

C

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Inputs

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

Sensors white brown green yellow grey pink blue red black violet grey-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-grey grey-brown

FU1

+ white-pink

–

0 VDC pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

A

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Inputs

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Sensors white brown green yellow grey pink blue red black violet grey-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-grey grey-brown

FU1

+

–

0 VDC white-pink pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

D

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Inputs

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

Sensors white brown green yellow grey pink blue red black violet grey-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown

+24 VDC white-grey grey-brown

FU1

+ white-pink

–

0 VDC pink-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

B

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Inputs

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

FU1 = 0.5 A fast blow fuse

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1 3

B

5.2-6 TSX DSY 08T2 / 16T2 / 16T3 / 08T22 / 08T31 modules

Presentation

TSX DSY 08T2 / 16T2 and 08T22 modules have protected

24 VDC transistor outputs, TSX DSY 16T3 /08T31 modules have 48 VDC protected transistor outputs.

These five modules are fitted with a 20-pin screw terminal block, which can be removed in order to connect the outputs.

Simplified output schematic

+

VOLTAGE

MONITOR

CURRENT

MONITOR

COMMAND

SOLID STATE

SWITCH

R

Module

Transil

Transil

%Q. (0...n)

Preactuator

Load

–

Output

FU

+

–

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1 4

Connections 5

TSX DSY 08T2/08T22 module connections

TSX DSY 08T2

TSX DSY 08T22

Preactuators Outputs

Q0

Preactuators Outputs

Q0

0 1 0 1

2

4

6

1

3

5

7

2

4

6

8

3

5

7

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

1

2

3

2

4

6

8

3

5

7

1

2

3

9 4 9

4

10 10

11 5 11

5

FU2 = 6.3 A fast blow fuse

12

13

6

12

13

6

14 14

FU2

0 VDC

+24 VDC

16

18

20

15

17

19

7

FU2 = 16 A fast blow fuse

0 VDC

– +

FU2

+24 VDC

16

18

20

15

17

19

7

TSX DSY 16T2 module connection

Preactuators

Outputs

Q0

0 1

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

10

11

12

13

14

15

7

8

9

4

5

6

1

2

3

17

18

0 VDC

19

– +

FU2

+24 VDC

20

FU2 = 6.3 A fast blow fuse

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1 5

B

B

TSX DSY 16T3 module connections : 48 VDC supply

Preactuators

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

Outputs

Q0

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

5

6

3

4

7

1

2

FU2 = 10 A fast blow fuse

17

0 VDC

18

19

– +

FU2

+48 VDC

20

TSX DSY 08T31 module connection

Preactuators Outputs

Q0

0 1

2

1 3 1

4

2 5

2

6

3 7

3

8

4 9

4

10

5

11

5

12

6

13

6

14

7 15

7

16

17

18

0 VDC

19

– +

FU2

+48 VDC

20

FU2 = 10 A fast blow fuse

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1 6

5.2-7 Relay modules 50 VA : TSX DSY 08R5 / 16R5

Presentation

TSX DSY 08R5 and 16R5 modules have 8 relay outputs and 16 relay outputs respectively.

They are fitted with a 20-pin screw terminal block, which can be removed in order to connect the outputs.

Connections 5

B

Simplified output schematic

+

B

–

Preactuators

%Q.

(0...n)

Common

COMMAND

Module Output

Warning :

The relay contact must be protected by placing across the preactuator terminals :

• either an RC circuit or MOV (ZNO) peak limiter when using AC,

• or a flywheel diode when using DC.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1 7

B

TSX DSY 08R5 module connections

Outputs

R

0

C

MOV

19...240 VAC

6

24 VDC +

AC voltage load

DC voltage load

Protective device must be placed across terminals of each preactuator

FU

FU

4

6

0

2

1

3

5

7

2

4

6

8

10

1

3

5

7

9

6

7

4

5

C4-7

Q0

1

2

3

C0-3

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20 19 to 240 VAC or 24 VDC

TSX DSY 16R5 module connections

FU

FU

FU

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

C8-11

12

13

14

15

C12-15

C4-7

8

9

10

11

C0-3

6

7

4

5

Q0

1

2

3

Outputs

19 to 240

VAC or 24 VDC

FU

Note :

When the supply voltage for the preactuators is from a 3-phase supply which is equal to or greater than 200 VAC, the preactuators must all be supplied from the same phase.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1 8

Connections 5

5.2-8 Relay modules 100 VA : TSX DSY 08R5A / 08R4D

Presentation

TSX DSY 08R5A and 08R4D modules each have 8 protected relay outputs. They are fitted with a 20-pin screw terminal block, which can be removed in order to connect the outputs.

B

Simplified N/O - N/C output schematic

Channels 0 to 3

R

Channel 0 / 2

T

R

T

Channel 1 / 3

R : Normally closed - T : Normally open

FU = interchangeable 6.3 A fast blow fuse. 1 fuse per common

FU

Simplified N/O output schematic

Channels 4 to 7

Common

Channel 4 / 6

Channel 5 / 7

FU

Common

FU = 6.3 A - interchangeable fast blow fuse. 1 fuse per common.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1 9

B

TSX DSY 08R5A module connections

Preactuators

R0

R1

T0

T1

R2

R3

T2

T3

6

7

4

5

Outputs

1

Q 0

2

3

Q 1

4

5

C01

6

7

8

C23

9

Q 2

10

11

Q 3

12

14

16

13

15

Q 4

C45

Q 5

17

18

19

Q 6

C67

Q 7

20

FU

FU

FU

FU

19 to 240 VAC or 19 to 60 VDC (nominal = 48 VDC)

= strap 24 V must be connected when using

24 V AC or DC.

FU = 6.3 A fast blow fuse

TSX DSY 08R4D module connections

Preactuators

R0

R1

T0

T1

R2

R3

T2

T3

6

7

4

5

Outputs

1

Q 0

2

3

Q 1

4

C01

5

6

7

C23

8

9

Q 2

10

11

Q 3

12

14

16

13

15

Q 4

C45

Q 5

17

18

19

Q 6

C67

Q 7

20

FU

FU

FU

FU

= strap 24 V must be connected when using

24 V AC or DC.

FU = 6.3 A fast blow fuse

24 to 130 VDC

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 2 0

Connections 5

5.2-9 TSX DSY 08S5 / 16S4 modules

Presentation

TSX DSY 08S5 and 16S4 modules have 8 and 16 triac outputs respectively. They must be fitted with a removable 20-pin screw terminal block.

B

Simplified output schematic for a TSX DSY 08S5 module

VDC

Module

Output n

Load c 220 VAC supply

Preactuator

Simplified output schematic for a TSX DSY 16S4 module

VDC

Output n

ULN

Load c

110 VAC supply

Module Preactuator

Note :

Protect the module outputs against short-circuits at the load, by means of a 6.3 A fast blow fuse.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 2 1

B

TSX DSY 08S5 module connections

Preactuators

0

1

6

7

4

5

2

3

Outputs

Q 0

1

2

1

3

4

5

C01

2

6

7

3

8

10

9

11

C2-3

4

12

5

13

14

15

C45

6

16

17

7

18

19

C67

20

FU

FU

FU

FU

N P

220 VAC

FU = interchangeable 6.3 A fast blow fuse

TSX DSY 16S4 module connections

Preactuators

0

2

13

15

5

7

6

9

11

8

10

12

14

1

3

4

Outputs

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

9

10

11

C811

12

13

14

15

C12-15

Q 0

1

2

4

5

6

3

C03

7

C4-7

8

N P

110 VAC

Note :

Place a 6.3 A fast blow fuse at the load.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 2 2

Connections 5

5.2-10 TSX DSY 32T2K / 64T2K modules

Presentation

TSX DSY 32T2K and 64T2K modules have positive logic source type transistor outputs.

These modules are fitted with HE10 male connectors :

• 2 connectors A and B for module TSX DSY 32T2K

- connector A for outputs 0 to 15

- connector B for outputs 16 to 31

• 4 connectors A, B, C and D for module TSX DSY 64T2K

- connector A for outputs 0 to 15

- connector B for outputs 16 to 31

- connector C for outputs 32 to 47

- connector D for outputs 48 to 63

The connectors can accept :

• either a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable for direct connection to the preactuator terminal,

• or a TSX CDP••3 cable or TSX CDP•02 preformed cable for connection to a TELEFAST 2 wiring interface.

A

B

A

C

B

B

D

Simplified output schematic

+

24 V fuse

Limitation and tripping

Preactuator voltage monitor

Solid state switch transil

Output 0 to n

Load

–

0 V

Preactuator

Module

+

–

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 2 3

B

TSX DSY 32T2K module connections

Preactuators

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

0 VDC

–

+

FU2

+24 VDC

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15 white brown green yellow grey pink blue red black violet grey-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-grey grey-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

A

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Outputs

Preactuators B Outputs

16 white brown

1 2

17

18 green yellow

3 4

19

20 grey pink

5 6

21

22 blue red

7 8

23

24 black violet

9 10

25

26 grey-pink red-blue

11 12

27

28 white-green brown-green

13 14

29

30 white-yellow yellow-brown

15 16

31

FU2 = 2 A fast blow fuse

0 VDC

–

+

FU2

+24 VDC white-grey grey-brown

17 18

19 20

Note :

The colors are used to show the correspondence between the HE10 connector pins and the flying

5 / 2 4

Connections 5

TSX DSY 64T2K module connections

Outputs Preactuators

32

34

36

38

40

42

44

46

0 VDC

–

+

FU2

+24 VDC

33

35

37

39 blue red black violet

41 grey-pink red-blue

43 grey pink white-green brown-green

45 green yellow white-yellow yellow-brown

47 white brown white-grey grey-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

C

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Preactuators

0

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

0 VDC

–

+

FU2

+24 VDC white brown

1 green yellow

3 grey pink

5 blue red

7

9

11 black violet grey-pink red-blue

13

15 white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-grey grey-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

A

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Outputs

Preactuators

48

50

52

54

56

58

60

62

0 VDC

–

+

FU2

+24 VDC

49 white brown green yellow

51 grey pink

53 blue red

55

57

59 black violet grey-pink red-blue

61

63 white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-grey grey-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

D

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Outputs Preactuators

16

18

20

22

24

26

28

30

17

19

21

23

25

27

29

31

0 VDC

–

+

FU2

+24 VDC white brown green yellow grey pink blue red black violet grey-pink red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-grey grey-brown

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

17

19

B

2

4

6

8

10

12

14

16

18

20

Outputs

FU2 = 2 A fast blow fuse

Note :

The colors are used to show the correspondence between the HE10 connector pins and the flying leads of a TSX CDP•01 preformed cable.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 2 5

B

B

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 2 6

6 TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O

6.1

Presentation

The TELEFAST 2 system is a range of products for rapid connection of discrete I/O modules to the application. It replaces screw terminal blocks, and provides remote location of single-wire termination.

The TELEFAST 2 system can only be connected to modules equipped with HE10 connectors. It is composed of interface sub-bases and connecting cables. Several types of sub-base exist :

• Connection interface sub-bases for discrete I/O, 8/12/16 channels :

- 8 channel sub-base :

ABE-7H08R10, ABE-7H08R11,

ABE-7H08R21

• with 1 isolator/channel

ABE-7H08S21

- 12 and 16 channel compact sub-bases :

ABE-7H12R50*,

ABE-7H16R50.

- 12 and 16 channel sub-bases :

ABE-7H12R10 (1), ABE-7H12R11 (1),

ABE-7H12R20 (1), ABE-7H12R21 (1),

ABE-7H16R10, ABE-7H16R11,

ABE-7H16R20, ABE-7H16R21/23,

ABE-7H16R30, ABE-7H16R31,

• with 1 isolator/channel

ABE-7H12S21 (1), ABE7-H16S21

• with 1 fuse + 1 isolator/channel

ABE-7H16S43 (for Inputs)

ABE-7H16F43 (for Outputs)

Identification of the various discrete I/O connection sub-bases

ABE-7H ii i i i

0 or even number = without LED per channel odd number = with LED per channel

08 = 8 channel sub-base

12 = 12 channel sub-base

16 = 16 channel sub-base

(1) none of the 12 channel sub-bases are compatible with TSX Premium discrete

1 = 1 screw terminal per channel on 1 row

2 = 2 screw terminals per channel on 2 rows

3 = 3 screw terminals per channel on 3 rows

4 = 2 screw terminals per channel on 1 row

5 = 1 screw terminal per channel on 2 rows

(compact version)

Primary function :

R = Connection

S = Isolator/channel

B

6 / 1

B

• Connection interface and input adaptor sub-bases, 16 isolated channels

- ABE-7S16E2B1 : 16 inputs 24 VDC,

- ABE-7S16E2E1 : 16 inputs 48 VDC,

- ABE-7S16E2E0 : 16 inputs 48 VAC,

- ABE-7S16E2F0 : 16 inputs

110/120 VAC,

- ABE-7S16E2M0 : 16 inputs

220/240 VAC.

• Connection interface and solid state output adaptor sub-bases, 8 and 16 channels :

8 channel sub-bases

- ABE-7S08S2B0 : 8 solid state outputs

24VDC/0.5 A, with fault detection feedback to the PLC.

- ABE-7S08S2B1 : 8 solid state outputs

24VDC/2A, with fault detection feedback to the PLC.

16 channel sub-base

- ABE-7S16S2B0 : 16 solid state outputs 24VDC/0.5A, with fault detection feedback to the

PLC,

- ABE-7S16S2B2 : 16 solid state outputs 24VDC/0.5A, without fault detection feedback to the

PLC.

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 2

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• Connection interface and relay output adaptor sub-bases,

8 and 16 channels :

8 channel sub-base

- ABE-7R08S111 : 8 relay outputs,

1 "N/O" with distribution of "+ or c " poles.

B

- ABE-7R08S210 : 8 relay outputs,

1 "N/O", volt-free contact.

16 channel sub-base

- ABE-7R16S111 : 16 relay outputs,

1"N/O", 2x8 commons "+ or c ".

- ABE-7R16S210 : 16 relay outputs,

1 "N/O", volt-free contact,

- ABE-7R16S212 : 16 relay outputs,

1 "N/O" with distribution of 2 poles per group of 8 channels.

• Adaptor sub-base 16 channels v 2 x 8 channels

- ABE-7ACC02 : enables the distribution of :

• 16 channels in 2 x

8 channels,

• 12 channels in 8 channels + 4 channels.

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 3

B

• Input or output adaptor interface sub-bases, with or without removable electromechanical or solid state relays, 16 channels

Output sub-bases

1"N/O", volt-free contact

- ABE-7R16T210 : with 10 mm wide electromechanical relay,

- ABE-7P16T210 : 10 mm wide relays, not supplied,

- ABE-7P16T214 : as above but with 1 fuse per channel.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1"N/O", with distribution of 2 poles per group of 8 channels

- ABE-7R16T212 : with 10 mm wide electromechanical relay,

- ABE-7P16T212 : 10 mm wide relays, not supplied,

- ABE-7P16T215 : as above but with 1 fuse per channel.

0Vdc

LC

+24V dc

Fus I

= 1A

max

Q0

Q1

Q2

Q3

ABE

7P16

T214

Q4

Q5

Q6

Q7

Q8

Q9

Q10

Q11

Q12

Q13

Q14

Q15

1"N/O", with distribution of 2 poles per group of 4 channels

- ABE-7P16T318 : without 12.5 mm wide electromechanical relay,

1 fuse +

1 isolator/channel

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 4

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

1"C/O", volt-free contact

- ABE-7R16T230 : with 10 mm wide electromechanical relay,

- ABE-7R16T330 : with 12.5 mm wide electromechanical relay,

- ABE-7P16T330 : 12.5 mm wide relays, not supplied,

- ABE-7P16T334 : as above but with 1 fuse per channel.

1"C/O", common per group of 8 channels

- ABE-7R16T231 : with 10 mm wide electromechanical relay.

1"C/O", with distribution of 2 poles per group of 8 channels

- ABE-7R16T332 : with 12.5 mm wide electromechanical relay,

- ABE-7P16T332 :12.5 mm wide relays, not supplied.

2 "C/O", volt-free contact

- ABE-7R16T370 : with 12.5 mm wide electromechanical relay.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

• Input sub-bases for 12.5 mm wide solid state relays

- ABE-7P16F310 : volt-free,

- ABE-7P16F312 : distribution of 2 poles per group of 8 channels.

B

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 5

B

6.2

TSX Micro I/O module and sub-base compatibility

Discrete I/O modules

Modularity

Connection sub-bases

8 channels

ABE-7H08R ii

.

ABE-7H08S21

12 channels

ABE-7H12R ii

ABE-7H12S21

16 channels

ABE-7H16R ii

ABE-7H16S21

ABE-7H16R23

ABE-7H16F43

ABE-7H16S43

TSX DMZ 28DTK DMZ64DTK DEZ 12D2K

1x16I 1x12Q 2x16I 2x16Q 1x12I

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

Input adaptor sub-bases

16 channels

ABE-7S16S2 ii

ABE-7P16F3 ii

Output adaptor sub-bases

8 channels

ABE-7S08S2 ii

ABE-7R08S iii

16 channels

ABE-7R16S iii

ABE-7R16T iii

ABE-7P16T iii

(3)

(3)

(3)

(1)

(1)

DSZ 08T2K

1X8Q

(2)

(1) with adaptor 16 v 2x8 channels ABE-7ACC02

(2) except ABE-7S08S2B0

(3) caution : the 4 unused outputs are at state 1

Combination possible

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 6

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.3

TSX Premium I/O module and sub-base compatibility

Discrete I/O modules

Modularity

Connection sub-bases

8 channels

ABE-7H08R ii

ABE-7H08S21

12 channels

ABE-7H12R ii

ABE-7H12S21

16 channels

ABE-7H16R ii

ABE-7H16S21

ABE-7H16R23

ABE-7H16F43

ABE-7H16S43

TSX DEY 16FK DEY : 32D2K - 64D2K DSY : 32T2K - 64T2K

1x16I 2x16I 4x16I 2x16Q 4x16Q

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

Input adaptor sub-bases

16 channels

ABE-7S16E2 ii

ABE-7P16F3 ii

Output adaptor sub-bases

8 channels

ABE-7S08S2 ii

ABE-7R08S iii

16 channels

ABE-7R16S iii

ABE-7R16T iii

ABE-7P16T iii

(1)

(1)

(1)

(1)

B

(1) with adaptor 16 v 2x8 channels ABE-7ACC02

Combination possible

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 7

B

6.4

Module v interface sub-base connection principle

The connection between an HE 10 connector located on a discrete I/O module and a connection sub-base is made using a pre-formed stranded sheathed connection cable

(TSX CDP i

02) or a cable (TSX CDP ii

3) equipped with 20-pin HE10 connectors at each end,

• Pre-formed stranded sheathed connection cables, 28 gauge : 0.08 mm 2 (see description section 5.1-2).

Given the small cross section of the wires, it is recommended that they be used for the connection of I/O with low currents (

≤

100 mA per channel).

There are three product references :

- TSX CDP 102 : 1 meter long,

- TSX CDP 202 : 2 meters long,

- TSX CDP 302 : 3 meters long.

• Connection cables, 22 gauge : 0.34 mm 2 (see description section 5.1-2)

Used to connect any I/O with a current of

≤

500 mA per channel.

There are five product references :

- TSX CDP 053 : 0.5 meters long,

- TSX CDP 103 : 1 meter long,

- TSX CDP 203 : 2 meters long,

- TSX CDP 303 : 3 meters long,

- TSX CDP 503 : 5 meters long,

(1) TSX CDP i

02 preformed cable or

TSX CDP ii

3 cable

(1)

ABE-7 iiiiii sub-base

(1)

ABE-7 iiiiii sub-base

Module with HE10 connector

(16 channels per connector)

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 8

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

Connection of 16 channels (2 x 8) using an ABE-7ACC02 adaptor sub-base.

Example 1 : Connection of 16 channels (2 x 8) connecting channels 0 to 7

Module with HE10 connector

(16 channels per connector)

(1)

ABE-7H08R ii sub-base

B

(1)

ABE-7ACC02

(1) TSX CDP i 02 preformed cable or TSX CDP ii 3 cable

(1)

ABE-7H08R ii sub-base connecting channels 8 to 15

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 9

B

6.5

Sensor or preactuator connection to sub-bases

6.5-1 ABE-7H08R10, ABE-7H08R11, ABE-7H16R10, ABE-7H16R11 sub-bases

+24VDC 0VDC

ABE7-H08R11

8 Digital I/O

PLC

+ +

_ _

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

+24VDC

PLC

+ +

_ _

0VDC ABE7-H16R11 16 Digital Inputs / Outputs

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H08R10/11

ABE-

7H16R10/11

Output functions connection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H08R10/11

ABE-

7H16R10/11

+ – sensors

+ preactuators

–

Connection of sensor common :

• on terminals 1 or 2 : sensors connected to supply "+" (positive logic inputs),

Connection of preactuator common :

• on terminals 3 or 4 : preactuators connected to supply "—" (positive logic outputs).

Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 2A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

• for input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

• for output functions :

- 2 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H16R ii sub-base

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H08R ii sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 1 0

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-2 ABE-7H12R10, ABE-7H12R11 sub-bases

+24VDC

PLC

+ +

_ _

0VDC ABE7-H12R11

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

12 Digital Inputs / Outputs

7 8 9 10 11

B

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12R10/11

– + – sensors

Output functions connection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12R10/11

+ – preactuators

– –

Connection of sensor common :

• on terminals 1 or 2 : sensors connected to the supply "+" (positive logic inputs).

Terminals 200/201/202 and 203 are connected to the "—" pole.

Connection of preactuator common :

The use of a number of terminals connected to the "—" pole (3, 4, 200, 201, 202 and 203) creates commons for each group of 4 or 2 channels (positive logic outputs)

Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

• for input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

• for output functions :

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12R ii sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 1 1

B

6.5-3 ABE-7H08R21, ABE-7H16R20, ABE-7H16R21, ABE-7H16R23 sub-bases for type 2 inputs

+24VDC 0VDC

PLC

ABE7-H08R21

8 Digital I/O

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

+

_

+24VDC

+

PLC

_

0VDC ABE7-H16R21

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

16 Digital Inputs / Outputs

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Input functions connection

+ 24

VDC

Module and sensor supply

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H08R21

ABE-

7H16R20/21

7H16R23

+

(1)

–

Output functions connection

+ 24

VDC

Module and preactuator supply

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H08R21

ABE-

7H16R20/21

+

(2)

– sensors preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

In order to create the sensor supply common, place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).

Connection of preactuator common :

In order to create the preactuator supply common, place the jumper (2) across terminals

3 & 4 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic outputs).

optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

• for input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

• for output functions :

- 2 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H16R ii sub-base

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H08R ii sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 1 2

Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 2 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-4 ABE-7H12R20, ABE-H12R21 sub-bases

+24VDC

PLC

0VDC ABE7-H12R21

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

12 Digital Inputs / Outputs

7 8 9 10 11

_

+

B

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12R20/21

+

(1)

– sensors

Output functions connection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12R20/21

+

(2)

– preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

In order to create the sensor supply common, place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).

Terminals 216, 217, 218 and 219 are connected to the "—" pole.

Connection of preactuator common :

In order to create the preactuator supply common, place the jumper (2) across terminals

3 & 4 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "—" (positive logic outputs).

Terminals 216, 217, 218 and 219 are connected to the "—" pole.

The sub-base is supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

• for input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

• for output functions :

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12R ii sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 1 3

B

6.5-5 ABE-7H08S21, ABE-7H16S21 sub-bases with 1 isolator per channel

+24VDC 0VDC

ABE7-H08S21

8 Digital I/O

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

PLC

+

_

+24VDC

+

PLC

_

0VDC ABE7-H16S21

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

16 Digital Inputs / Outputs

9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H08S21

ABE-

7H16S21

+

(1) sensors

–

Output functions connection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H08S21

ABE-

7H16S21

+

(2)

– preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

In order to create the sensor supply common, place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).

Connection of preactuator common :

In order to create the preactuator supply common, place the jumper (2) across terminals

3 & 4 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "—" (positive logic outputs).

Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 2 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

• for input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

• for output functions :

- 2 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H16S21 sub-base

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H08S21 sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 1 4

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-6 ABE-7H12S21 sub-base with 1 isolator per channel

+24VDC 0VDC ABE7-H12S21

0 1 2 3 4 5 6

12 Digital Inputs / Outputs

7 8 9 10 11

PLC

_

+

B

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12S21

+

(1)

– sensors

Output functions connection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12S21

+

(2)

– preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

In order to create the sensor supply common, place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).

Terminals 216, 217, 218 and 219 are connected to the "—" pole.

Connection of preactuator common :

In order to create the preactuator supply common, place the jumper (2) across terminals 3 & 4 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "—" (positive logic outputs).

Terminals 216, 217, 218 and 219 are connected to the "—" pole.

The sub-base is supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

• for input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

• for output functions :

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12S21 sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 1 5

B

6.5-7 ABE-7H16R30, ABE-7H16R31 sub-bases

+24VDC

_

0VDC ABE7-H16R31

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

16 Digital Inputs / Outputs

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

+

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H16R30/31

+

(1)

(2)

–

Connection of sensor common :

In order to create the sensor supply common :

• place the jumper (1) across terminals 1 & 2 : terminals 200 to 215 should be connected to the supply "+",

• connect terminal 4 to one of the "C" terminals on the third row (2) : terminals 300 to

315 should be connected to the supply "—".

!

Sub-bases are supplied with a general purpose 2 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

• for input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse.

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 1 6

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-8 ABE-7H12R50 sub-base

+24VDC 0VDC

PLC

0

1

2

3

+ +

_ _

ABE7-H12R50

12 Digital I/O

4

5

6

7

8

9 11

10

B

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12R50

+ – sensors

Output functions connection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H12R50

+ – preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

• on terminals 1 or 2 : sensors connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).

!

Terminals 200/201/202 and 203 are connected to the "—" pole.

Connection of preactuator common :

The use of a number of terminals connected to the "—" pole (3, 4, 200, 201, 202 and 203) creates commons for each group of 4 or 2 channels (positive logic outputs)

!

The sub-base is supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

• for input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

• for output functions :

- 6.3 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H12R50 sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 1 7

B

6.5-9 ABE-7H16R50 sub-base

+24VDC 0VDC

PLC

ABE7-H16R50

16 Digital I/O

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9 11

10 12

13 15

14

+ +

_ _

Input functions connection

Module and sensor supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H16R50

+ – sensors

Output functions connection

Module and preactuator supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-

7H16R50

+ –

Preactuators

Connection of sensor common :

• on terminals 1 or 2 : sensors connected to the supply "+" (positive logic input).

Connection of preactuator common :

• on terminals 3 or 4 : preactuators connected to supply "—" (positive logic output).

The sub-base is supplied with a general purpose 6.3 A fast blow fuse. In order to ensure optimum protection, this fuse should be rated according to the application (connection to input or output functions) and the maximum permissible current in the sub-base. Type and rating of fuse to be used :

• for input functions : 0.5 A fast blow fuse,

• for output functions :

- 2 A fast blow fuse on ABE-7H16R50 sub-base

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 1 8

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-10 ABE-7H16F43 output sub-base with 1 fuse and 1 isolator per channel

B

NC

NC

NC

NC

115

215

114

214

113

213

112

212

211

110

111

109

209

210

108

208

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

103

203

102

202

101

201

100

200

3

2

1

4

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 1 9

B

6.5-11 ABE-7H16S43 input sub-base with 1 fuse and 1 isolator per channel

NC

NC

NC

NC

114

214

113

213

115

215

112

212

111

211

110

210

109

209

108

208

107

207

106

206

105

205

103

203

102

202

104

204

101

201

100

200

1

2

4

3

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 2 0

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-12 Fixed relay output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7R08S111, ABE-7R16S111,

ABE-7R16S210, ABE-7R16S212

• ABE-7R08S111 sub-bases : 8 relay outputs, 1"N/O" twice 4 commons "+ or c "

ABE-7R16S111 : 16 relay outputs, 1"N/O" twice 8 commons "+ or c "

B

+24VDC

PLC Fuse I=1Amax.

0VDC

ABE7- R08S111

8 Relays Outputs

Q0

Q1

Q2

Q3

Q4

Q5

Q6

Q7

PLC

+24VDC

Fuse I=1Amax.

0VDC

ABE7-R16S111 16 Relays Outputs

Q0

Q1

Q2

Q3

Q4

Q5

Q6

Q7

13

14

Q8

Q9

Q10

Q11

Q12

Q13

Q14

Q15

13

14

Sub-base and module output supply

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-7R08S111

Preactuator

supply

24...240 VAC or

24...127VDC

Ph

N

U1

Ph

N

U2

Fu

Fu preactuators

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-7 i sub-base and module output supply

ABE-7R16S111

Preactuator

supply

24...240 VAC or

24...127VDC

Ph

N

Ph

U1

U2

Fu

Fu

N preactuators

Type and rating of fuse supplied with the sub-base :

1 A fast blow fuse.

Fu : fuse to be rated according to the load

Protection of relay contacts :

Protection circuit must be placed across the preactuator terminals :

• RC or MOV circuit for AC,

• flywheel diode for DC

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 2 1

B

• ABE-7R16S210 sub-base : 16 relay outputs, 1 "N/O", volt-free contacts

NC

NC

NC

NC

115

215

114

214

113

213

112

212

111

211

110

210

109

209

108

206

105

106

107

207

208

104

204

205

103

203

102

202

101

201

100

200

3

2

1

4

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 2 2

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• ABE-7R16S212 sub-base : 16 relay outputs, 1 "N/O", with distribution of 2 poles per group of 8 channels

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

209

108

109

208

107

210

112

212

111

211

110

114

214

113

213

101

201

202

100

203

102

103

200

115

215

4

3

1

2

B

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 2 3

B

6.5-13 Fixed solid state relay input adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S16E2B1,

ABE-7S16E2E1, ABE-7S16E2E0, ABE-7S16E2F0, ABE-7S16E2M0

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

209

108

208

109

110

210

211

103

203

102

202

201

100

200

101

214

113

215

114

115

112

212

213

111

4

3

1

2

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 2 4

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.5-14 Solid state output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S16S2B0, ABE-7S16S2B2 and ABE-7S08S2B0, ABE-7S08S2B1

• ABE-7S16S2B0 and ABE-7S16S2B2 sub-bases : 16 solid state outputs/ 24VDC / 0.5A

B

114

214

113

213

115

215

112

212

111

211

110

210

109

209

108

208

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

103

203

102

202

101

201

100

200

NC

NC

4

3

1

2

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 2 5

B

• ABE-7S08S2B1 sub-base : 8 solid state outputs / 24 VDC / 2A

NC

NC

NC

NC

3

2

1

4

100

200

NC

NC

101

201

NC

NC

102

202

NC

NC

103

203

NC

NC

104

204

NC

NC

105

205

NC

NC

106

206

NC

NC

107

207

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 2 6

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• ABE-7S08S2B0 sub-base : 8 solid state outputs / 24 VDC / 0.5A

+24VDC

Fuse I=2Amax.

On protected outputs only

+

0VDC

Q0

ABE7-S08S2B0

8 non Isolated Outputs 24VDC 0,5A

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7

B

+ 24

VDC

- 0

VDC

ABE-7 i sub-base, TSX i module output and preactuator supply

Type and rating of fuse supplied with the sub-base :

2 A fast blow fuse

ABE-708S2B0

1 2 3 4 200

100

201

101

202

102

203

103

– +

Fu

Preactuators

207

107 chan. 7 Fu : fuse to be rated according to the load chan. 0 chan. 1 chan. 2 chan. 3

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 2 7

B

6.5-15 Solid state or electromechanical relay output sub-bases, relay 10mm wide

• 1"N/O" sub-bases, volt-free contact

- ABE-7R16T210 with electromechanical relays

- ABE-7P16T210 relays not supplied

6

8

5

7

115

215

114

214

113

213

112

212

111

211

110

210

109

209

108

208

2

1

4

3

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

103

203

102

202

101

201

100

200

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 2 8

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• 1"N/O" sub-bases, with distribution of 2 poles per group of 8 channels

- ABE-7R16T212 with electromechanical relays

- ABE-7P16T212 relays not supplied

6

5

8

7

115

215

114

214

113

213

112

212

111

211

110

210

109

209

108

208

2

1

4

3

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

103

203

102

202

101

201

100

200

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 2 9

B

B

• ABE-7R16T230 sub-base with electromechanical relays (1 "C/O"), volt-free contact

102

302

103

303

101

301

100

300

105

305

104

304

114

314

113

111

311

112

312

313

6

5

115

315

108

308

110

310

109

309

2

1

107

307

106

306

8

7

215

4

3

207

210

202

214

213

212

211

209

208

206

205

204

203

201

200

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 3 0

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• ABE-7R16T231 sub-base, with electromechanical relay (1"C/O"), distribution of one common per group of 8 channels

115

315

114

314

6

5

101

301

100

300

102

302

103

303

105

305

104

304

2

1

107

307

106

306

109

309

108

308

111

311

110

310

113

313

112

312

4

3

8

7

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 3 1

B

B

• ABE-7P16T214 sub-base relays not supplied

1"N/O", volt-free contact

1 fuse per channel

6

5

8

7

115

215

114

214

113

213

112

212

211

110

111

210

109

209

108

208

2

1

4

3

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

203

102

103

202

101

201

100

200

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 3 2

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• ABE-7P16T215 sub-base relays not supplied

1"N/O", distribution of 2 poles per group of 8 channels

1 fuse per channel

6

5

8

7

115

215

114

214

113

213

112

212

111

211

110

210

109

209

108

208

2

1

4

3

107

207

106

206

105

205

104

204

103

203

102

202

101

201

100

200

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 3 3

B

B

6.5-16 Electromechanical or solid state relay input or output sub-bases, relay 12.5 mm wide

• 1"C/O" sub-bases, volt-free contact

- ABE-7R16T330 with electromechanical relays

- ABE-7P16T330 relays not supplied

115

215

315

114

214

314

113

213

313

112

212

312

111

211

311

110

210

310

109

209

309

108

208

308

107

207

307

106

206

306

105

205

305

104

204

304

103

203

303

102

202

302

101

201

301

100

200

300

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 3 4

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• 1"C/O" sub-bases, distribution of 2 poles per group of 4 channels

- ABE-7R16T332 with electromechanical relays

- ABE-7P16T332 relays not supplied

B

14

13

12

11

10

9

16

15

5

6

3

4

7

8

1

2

308

107

208

108

209

309

109

210

310

110

211

311

212

312

111

206

306

105

106

207

307

205

305

104

100

200

201

301

302

101

202

300

102

204

304

103

203

303

215

315

114

115

213

313

112

314

113

214

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 3 5

B

• ABE-7R16T370 sub-bases, with electromechanical relay (2 "C/O"), volt-free contact

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 3 6

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• ABE-7P16T334 sub-base, relay not supplied (1"C/O"), volt-free contact

B

311

110

211

212

312

111

310

109

210

309

108

209

314

113

214

114

213

313

112

107

207

208

308

307

106

205

305

105

104

206

306

215

315

115

200

300

301

100

202

302

101

201

103

203

204

304

303

102

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 3 7

B

• ABE-7P16T318 sub-base relays not supplied

1"C/O" distribution of 2 poles per group of 4 channels

1 fuse and 1 isolator per channel

8

114

213

113

NC

214

212

112

7

211

111

NC

6

110

209

210

NC

115

215

109

NC

208

108

5

207

107

NC

206

4

106

205

105

NC

204

3

203

103

104

NC

202

2

102

201

101

NC

200

100

1

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 3 8

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• ABE-7P16F310 solid state relay input sub-base (relays not supplied), volt-free

B

100

200

NC

201

NC

NC

101

202

102

211

NC

NC

111

112

212

NC

213

NC

113

214

110

114

215

NC

115

104

204

NC

103

203

NC

NC

205

NC

206

105

106

209

NC

NC

109

NC

107

208

108

210

207

NC

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 3 9

B

• ABE-7P16F312 solid state relay input sub-base (relays not supplied), distribution of 2 poles per group of 8 channels

102

202

203

101

201

3

2

4

1

103

100

200

NC

NC

104

204

205

105

NC

NC

115

215

114

214

113

213

112

212

NC

NC

NC

NC

107

207

106

206

108

208

109

209

6

5

8

7

111

211

110

210

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 4 0

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.6

Compatibility table for relays and ABE-7R16T i i i

, ABE-7P16T i i i

,

ABE-7P16F i i i

sub-bases

B

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 4 1

B

6.7

Accessories

• Add-on shunt terminal block :

ABE-7BV10 : terminal block with 10 screw terminals

ABE-7BV20 : terminal block with 20 screw terminals

• Adaptor sub-base :

ABE-7ACC02 : used to switch from 16 channels to 2x8 channels

• Mounting kit :

ABE-7ACC01 : is used to fix sub-bases to full plates

ABE-7BV20

• Dust and damp-proof cable bushing :

ABE-7ACC84 : is used to feed through the enclosure without isolating the leads

• Enclosure feed through :

ABE-7ACC83 : HE10 connectors for 8/12 channels v M23 cylindrical connector.

ABE-7ACC82 : HE10 connector for 16 channels v M23 cylindrical connector.

ABE-7ACC80 : HE10 connectors for 32 channels v "HARTING" type connector.

ABE-7ACC81 : plug-in connector for ABE-7ACC80

ABE-7ACC82

• Removable continuity module :

ABE-7ACC20 : 10 mm wide

ABE-7ACC21 : 12.5 mm wide

• Software for marking customer labels :

ABE-7LOGV10

• Glass 5 x 20 fast blow fuse :

ABE-7FU012 0.125 A

ABE-7F7050

ABE-7FU100

0.5

1

A

A

ABE-7FU200

ABE-7FU630

• Self-adhesive label holder :

AR1-SB3 for AB1-R. / AB1-G. type labels

2

ABE-7ACC80

A

6.3 A

• Relays for ABE-7R16T i i i , ABE-7P16T i i i and ABE-7P16F i i i

ABR-7S iii : electromechanical output relays

(see page 6/41)

ABS-7S iii : solid state output relays

(see page 6/41)

ABS-7E iii : solid state input relays

(see page 6/41) sub-bases :

ABR-7S3 ii ABR-7S2 ii

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 4 2

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.8

Sub-base electrical characteristics

6.8-1 Fixed input adaptor sub-bases

Types of sub-base

Number of channels

ABE-7 ABE-7 ABE-7 ABE-7 ABE-7

S16E2B1 S16E2E1 S16E2E0 S16E2F0 S16E2M0

16 16

Control circuit characteristics (application inputs)

16 16 16

Nominal values

Input limit values

Voltage 24VDC 48VDC 48VAC 110/ 230/

130VAC 240VAC

Current

At state 1

At state 0

Frequency -

Voltage

Current

Voltage

Current

-

≥

13.7 V

≥

30 V

≥

5 mA

≤

5 V

≤

2 mA

≥

≤

≤

6 mA

10 V

2 mA

Frequency -

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

12 mA 13 mA 12 mA

50/60 Hz

≥

32 V

≥

5 mA

≤

10 V

8.3 mA

50/60 Hz

≥

≥

≤

79 V

5 mA

30 V

≤

1.5 mA

≤

2 mA

8 mA

50/60 Hz

≥

164 V

≥

4.5 mA

≤

40 V

≤

2 mA

47...63 Hz 47...63 Hz 47...63 Hz

19..30 V 38.4...60 V 38.4...53 V 96...143 V 184...264 V

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Response time

Maximum switching frequency

Nominal insulation voltage

Nominal impulse withstand voltage

(1.2 / 50)

State 0 to 1 0.05 ms

State 1 to 0 0.4 ms

I/O

I/O type 1 type 2

0.05 ms

0.4 ms

300 V

2.5 kV type 1

20 ms

20 ms

1000 Hz 1000 Hz 25 Hz type 1

20 ms

20 ms

25 Hz type 1

20 ms

20 ms

25 Hz

B

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 4 3

B

6.8-2 Fixed solid state output adaptor sub-bases

Types of sub-base ABE-7

S i i S2B0

8 / 16 Number of channels

Output circuit characteristics

DC load Resistive,

DC12 duty

Voltage 24 VDC

Inductive,

DC13 duty

Current 0.5 A

Voltage 24 VDC

Filament lamp

Current 0.25 A

10 W

ABE-7

S16S2B2

16

24 VDC

0.5 A

24 VDC

0.25 A

10 W

ABE-7

S08S2B1

8

24 VDC

2 A (1)

24 VDC

0.5 A (1) no

Limit values

Leakage current at state 0

Residual voltage at state 1

Voltage 19...30 VDC

≤

0.3 mA

≤

0.6 V

Minimum current per channel

Response State 0 to 1

1 mA

0.1 ms

Built-in protection

State 1 to 0

Against overloads and short-circuits

0.02 ms

19...30 VDC

≤

0.3 mA

≤

0.6 V

1 mA

0.1 ms

0.02 ms

19...30 VDC

≤

0.5 mA

≤

0.5 V

1 mA

0.1 ms

0.02 ms

Yes by current limiter and circuit-breaker

Id > 0.75 A Id > 0.75 A Id > 2.6 A

Against inductive overvoltages

Against reversed polarity

Yes by integrated zener diode

Yes by peak limiter

< 0.6 LI 2 < 0.6 LI 2 < 0.5 LI 2 Switching frequency on inductive load

Fault detection feedback

I/O Nominal insulation voltage

Nominal impulse withstand voltage

(1.2 / 50)

I/O

Yes

300 V

2.5 kV

No Yes

(1) from 50

°

C to + 60

°

C alternating between channels

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 4 4

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.8-3 Fixed relay output adaptor sub-bases

Types of sub-base

Number of channels

Contact characteristics

Limit operating voltage AC c

DC a

Thermal current

AC load

Resistive,

AC12 duty

Voltage

Inductive,

AC15 duty

ABE-7

R i i S111

8 / 16

250 V

30 V

3 A

230 VAC

Current (1) 0.6 A

Voltage 230 VAC

DC load

Resistive,

DC12 duty

Current (1) 0.4 A

Voltage 24 VDC

ABE-7

R i i S210

8 / 16

250 V

125 V

5A

230 VAC

1.5 A

230 VAC

0.9 A

24 VDC

Inductive,

DC13 duty

Current (1) 0.6 A

Voltage 24 VDC

L/R = 10 ms Current (1) 0.2A

Minimum switching Current 1 mA

Voltage 5 V

Response time State 0 to 1

State 1 to 0

Maximum rate of on-load operation

Built-in protection

Against overloads and short-circuits

10 ms

6 ms

0.5 Hz

1.5 A

24 VDC

0.6 A

10 mA

5 V

10 ms

5 ms

0.5 Hz

None, fit a fast blow fuse per channel or group of channels

ABE-7

R16S212

16

250 V

125 V

5A

230 VAC

1.5 A

230 VAC

0.9 A

24 VDC

1.5 A

24 VDC

0.6 A

10 mA

5 V

10 ms

5 ms

0.5 Hz

Against inductive overvoltages in AC

Against inductive overvoltages in DC

None, an RC circuit or an MOV (ZNO) peak limiter appropriate to the voltage must be placed across the terminals of each preactuator

None, a flywheel diode must be placed across the terminals of each preactuator

Nominal insulation voltage

Coil/contact

Nominal impulse withstand Coil/contact

voltage (1.2 / 50)

300 V

2.5 kV

(1) for 0.5 x10 6 operations

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 4 5

B

B

6.8-4 Removable output electromechanical relays

Relay references

Relay width

ABR-7 S21

10 mm

S23

10 mm

S33 S37

12.5 mm 12.5 mm

Contact characteristics

Contact type

Max operating voltage AC c

(in line with IEC 947-5-1) DC a

Thermal current

Frequency of the usage current

AC load Resistive,

AC12 duty

1"N/O"

250 V

125 V

1"C/O" 1"C/O"

250 V

125 V

4 A

264 V

125 V

5 A

2"C/O"

264 V

125 V

5 A 4 A

50/60 Hz

Voltage 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC

Current (1) 1.5 A 1.2 A 3 A 2.5 A

DC load

Inductive,

AC15 duty

Resistive,

DC12 duty

Inductive,

DC13 duty

Voltage

Current (1)

Voltage

Current (1)

Voltage

230 VAC

0.9 A

24 VDC

1.5 A

24 VDC

L/R = 10 ms Current (1) 0.6 A

Minimum switching Current 10 mA

Response time

Voltage 5 V

State 0 to 1 10 ms

State 1 to 0 5 ms

0.5 Hz

230 VAC

0.7 A

24 VDC

1.2 A

24 VDC

0.45 A

10 mA

5 V

10 ms

5 ms

0.5 Hz

230 VAC

1.7 A

24 VDC

3 A

24 VDC

1.4 A

100 mA

5 V

13 ms

13 ms

0.5 Hz

230 VAC

1.3 A

24 VDC

2.5 A

24 VDC

1 A

100 mA

5 V

15 ms

20 ms

0.5 Hz Maximum rate of on-load operation

Nominal insulation voltage

Nominal impulse withstand voltage

(1.2 / 50)

Coil/contact

Coil/contact

300 V

2.5 kV

(1) for 0.5 x10 6

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 4 6

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.8-5 Removable input solid state relays

References

Relay width

ABS-7 v EC3AL EC3B2 EC3E2 EA3E5 EA3F5 EA3M5

12.5mm 12.5mm 12.5mm 12.5mm 12.5mm

12.5mm

Control characteristics

Nominal operating DC voltage (Us) AC

Maximum operating voltage

(ripple included) a 5V c

6V

Max Us current

24V

30 V

48V

60 V

—

48V

53 V

— —

110/130V 230/240V

143 V 264 V

13.6 mA 15 mA 15 mA 12 mA 8.3 mA 8 mA

State 1 guaranteed Voltage

Current

State 0 guaranteed Voltage

Current

3.75 V 11 V

4.5 mA 6 mA

2 V 5 V

0.09 mA 2 mA

30 V

6 mA

10 V

2 mA

32 V

5 mA

10 V

1.5 mA

79 V

5 mA

30 V

2 mA

1000 Hz 1000 Hz 1000 Hz 25 Hz 25 Hz Maximum switching

frequency (cyclic ratio 50%)

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Response time

I/O

— Type 2 Type 2 Type 1 Type 1 Type 1

State 0 to 1 0.05 ms 0.05 ms 0.05 ms 20 ms 20 ms

State 1 to 0 0.4 ms 0.4 ms 0.4 ms 20 ms 20 ms

300 V

20 ms

20 ms

Nominal insulation voltage

Nominal impulse withstand voltage

(1.2 / 50)

I/O 2.5 kV

164 V

4.5 mA

40 V

2 mA

25 Hz

B

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 4 7

B

6.8-6 Fixed output solid state relays

References

Relay width

ABS-7

Output circuit characteristics

SC2E

10mm

SA2M

10mm

SC3BA

12.5mm

SC3E

12.5mm

SA3M

12.5mm

Nominal operating voltage

DC

AC a c

5..48V

—

—

24..240V

24V

—

5..48V

—

—

24..240V

Maximum voltage

AC load

Resistive, Current

AC12 duty

57.6VDC

264 VAC 30 VDC 60 VDC 264 VAC

— 0.5 A — — 2 A

DC load

Resistive, Current 0.5 A

DC12 duty

— 2 A 1.5 A —

— 0.3 A — Inductive, Current —

DC13 duty

— Filament lamp

DC6 duty

Leakage current at state 0

Residual voltage at state 1

Minimum current per channel

—

—

≤

0.5 mA

≤

2 mA

≤

1 V

≤

1.1 V

1 mA 10 mA

Response time

—

≤

≤

0.3 mA

0.3 V

1 mA

0.1 ms

10 W

≤

≤

0.3 mA

1.3 V

1 mA

0.1 ms

—

≤

≤

2 mA

1.3 V

10 mA

10 ms State 0 to 1 0.1 ms

State 1 to 0 0.6 ms

—

10 ms

10 ms

—

0.02 ms

< 0.5 LI 2

0.6 ms

—

10 ms

— Switching frequency on inductive load

Nominal insulation voltage

I/O 300 V

Nominal impulse withstand voltage

(1.2 / 50)

I/O 2.5 kV

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 4 8

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

6.9

Dimensions and mounting

• Dimensions

67

58 84 125

B

15

(1) Dimension with add-on shunt terminal block

ABE-7BV20 or

ABE-7BV10

67

58

(1)

ABE-7H08R1 i

ABE-7H08R2 i

ABE-7H12R50

ABE-7H16R50

ABE-7R08S111

ABE-7H08S21

(1)

(1)

ABE-7H12R1 i , ABE-7H12R2 i

ABE-7H12S21 , ABE-7H16R1 i

ABE-7H16R2 i , ABE-7H16R3 i

ABE-7H16S21 , ABE-7R16S111

ABE-7R08S210 , ABE-7S08S2B0

206

15

57

48

ABE-7H16F43

ABE-7H16S43

ABE-7S16E2B1

ABE-7S16E2E1

ABE-7S16E2E0

ABE-7S16E2F0

ABE-7S16E2M0

ABE-7S08S2B1

ABE-7S16S2B0

ABE-7S16S2B2

ABE-7R16S210

ABE-7R16S212

50

ABE-7ACC02

15

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 4 9

B

• Dimensions (cont)

74

65 211

15

Reference with dimensions of

211x88 mm

(product pictured with removable relays and screws not mounted)

83

74

(1)

ABE-7R16T210

ABE-7R16T212

ABE-7R16T231

ABE-7R16T230

ABE-7P16T210

ABE-7P16T212

ABE-7P16T214

ABE-7P16T215

272

(1)

15

Reference with dimensions of

272x88 mm

(product pictured with removable relays and screws not mounted)

ABE-7R16T330

ABE-7R16T332

ABE-7R16T370

ABE-7P16T330

ABE-7P16T332

ABE-7P16T334

ABE-7P16T318

(1) Dimension with add-on shunt terminal block

ABE-7BV20 or ABE-7BV10

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 5 0

TELEFAST 2 connection interfaces for discrete I/O 6

• Mounting

TELEFAST 2 connection sub-bases are mounted on 35 mm DIN rails.

Special mounting requirements for certain sub-bases

The following sub-bases must be mounted on a vertical plane and in a horizontal position :

• input adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S16E2E1

• solid state output adaptor sub-bases : ABE-7S ii S2B i

B

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 5 1

B

___________________________________________________________________________

6 / 5 2

Analog modules Contents

Part C

___________________________________________________________________________

C

Section

1 General introduction

1.1

Description

1.1-1 General

1.1-2 Physical description

1.2

Catalog

1.3

Labeling

2 General installation rules

2.1

Installation recommendations

2.1-1 Module and terminal block installation

2.2

Wiring recommendations

3 TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 3/1

3.1

Presentation 3/1

3.2

Input processing

3.2-1 Measurement sampling

3.2-2 Range selection and overshoot monitoring

3.2-3 Measurement filtering

3.2-4 Measurement display

3.2-5 Sensor alignment

3.2-6 Recalibration

3.3

Fault processing

3.3-1 External faults

3.3-2 Internal faults

3.3-3 Other faults

3.3-4 Fault display

3/9

3/9

3/9

3/9

3/10

___________________________________________________________________________

C / 1

3/3

3/3

3/4

3/4

3/6

3/7

3/8

2/1

2/1

2/1

2/1

Page

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/2

1/3

C

Analog modules Contents

Part C

___________________________________________________________________________

Section

3.4

Characteristics

3.4-1 Input characteristics

3.5

Connections

3.5-1 Connector pinout

3.5-2 Wiring accessories

3.5-3 TELEFAST pinout

4 TSX AEY 414 module 4/1

4.1

Presentation 4/1

4.2

Input processing

4.2-1 Measurement sampling

4.2-2 Range selection and overshoot monitoring

4.2-3 Sensor link monitoring

4.2-4 Measurement filtering

4.2-5 Measurement display

4.2-6 Sensor alignment

4.2-7 Recalibration

4.3

Fault processing

4.3-1 External faults

4.3-2 Internal faults

4.3-3 Other faults

4.3-4 Fault display

4.4

Characteristics

4.4-1 General characteristics

4.4-2 Detailed input characteristics

4.5

Connections 4/23

4.5-1 Terminal block pinout

4.5-2 External resistors (0..20 mA and 4..20 mA range)

4.5-3 Sensor connection

4/23

4/24

4/24

4.5-4 Recommendations for installing thermocouples 4/25

___________________________________________________________________________

C / 2

4/3

4/3

4/3

4/5

4/5

4/6

4/7

4/8

4/8

4/8

4/9

4/9

4/10

4/11

4/11

4/12

Page

3/11

3/11

3/12

3/12

3/13

3/14

Analog modules Contents

Part C

___________________________________________________________________________

C

Section

5 TSX ASY 410 module

5.1

Presentation

5.2

Output processing

5.2-1 Writing to the outputs

5.2-2 Behavior of outputs when the program is in STOP or absent

5.2-3 Forcing outputs

5.2-4 Overshoot monitoring

5.2-5 Digital/analog conversion

5.2-6 Updating the outputs

5.3

Fault processing

5.3-1 External faults

5.3-2 Internal faults

5.3-3 Fallback / Maintain outputs or set outputs to 0

5.3-4 Other faults

5.3-5 Fault display

5.4

Characteristics

5.4-1 Output characteristics

5.5

Connections

5.5-1 Terminal block pinout

Page

5/1

5/1

5/7

5/7

5/8

5/8

5/3

5/3

5/3

5/3

5/3

5/4

5/4

5/4

5/4

5/5

5/5

5/6

5/6

___________________________________________________________________________

C / 3

C

Analog modules Contents

Part C

___________________________________________________________________________

Section Page

___________________________________________________________________________

C / 4

1 General introduction

1.1

Description

1.1-1 General

The analog I/O modules in the TSX 57 range are standard format modules (occupying a single position), equipped with one 25-pin SubD connector (TSX AEY 800), two 25-pin

SubD connectors (TSX AEY 1600), or a screw terminal block (TSX AEY 414 and

TSX ASY 410). They can be installed in any position in TSX RKY.. racks, except for the first position which is reserved for the rack's power supply.

The maximum number of analog modules which can be used in a TSX 57 configuration must be such that :

• the total number of analog I/O does not exceed 24 in a TSX 57-10 configuration,

• the total number of analog I/O does not exceed 80 in a TSX 57-20 configuration.

C

1.1-2 Physical description

1 Rigid casing which provides support and protection for the electronic card.

2 Module reference markings (visible on the right side of the module).

3 Display block showing operating modes and errors.

4 Connector for the screw terminal block.

5 Module encoder.

6 25-pin SubD connector(s), for connecting sensors or preactuators.

7 Removable screw terminal block, for connecting sensors or preactuators.

This terminal block is supplied separately under reference

TSX BLY 01.

8 Cover providing access to screw terminals. Also holds the terminal wiring and channel identification label.

9 Terminal encoder.

1

2

3

4

2

5

1

2

3

6

2

6

7

8

9

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1

C

1.2

Catalog

Module type Inputs Outputs

Number of channels

Range

16

±

10 V

0..10 V

0..5 V

1..5 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

8

±

10 V

0..10 V

0..5 V

1..5 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

4

±

10 V

0..10 V

±

5 V

0..5 V (0..20 mA)

1..5 V (4..20 mA)

-13.. + 63 mV

0..400

Ω

0..3850

Ω

Temperature probe

Thermocouple

4

±

10 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

0 mA 0 mA Current consumed 0 mA on 24 VR

Current consumed 270 mA (typ.) on 5 V

Channel isolation

Resolution

Connections

380 mA (max)

Common point

0 mA

270 mA (typ.)

380 mA (max)

660 mA (typ.)

940 mA (max)

1500 Vrms isolation

990 mA (typ.) (*)

1220 mA (max) (*)

12 bits 16 bits 11 bits + sign

2 x 25-pin SubD 1 x 25-pin SubD 20-pin screw terminal block

AEY 800 AEY 414 ASY 410 TSX reference AEY 1600

(*) + 20 mA per active channel

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 2

General introduction 1

1.3

Labeling

The module is identified by laser-engraved markings on the cover, accessible on the front panel and the right-hand side of the module :

C

1 1

2

TSX

AEY

414

4 Multirange

Isolated

Analog Inputs I 0

1

2

3

3

2

• module marking 1, which indicates the module reference,

• module marking 2, which indicates the module reference and type,

• removable terminal block label 3, located inside the cover, displaying the module reference and type and the terminal wiring. Additional information may be added to this double-sided label by the user.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 3

C

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 4

2 General installation rules

2.1

Installation recommendations

2.1-1 Module and terminal block installation

Inserting/removing modules

Analog modules and terminal blocks can be inserted and removed when the PLC is powered up (without risk of damage to the modules or interference to the PLC).

The presence of the terminal block is detected using a shunt positioned in the upper part of the terminal block, which should always be tightened to its maximum.

The terminal block should always be removed before removing the module. This avoids leading voltage on to the terminal block inputs (up to 1700 V) in the event of a module isolation fault.

Encoding the screw terminal block

The first time a screw terminal block is fitted onto a module, the coding is transferred from the module to the terminal block which becomes specific to the module type

(for more information about encoding the terminal block, please refer to section 5 of part A1).

C

2.2

Wiring recommendations

To protect the signal against serial mode and common mode noise, it is advisable to take the following precautions :

Conductor type

Use shielded twisted pairs with a minimum cross-section of 0.28 mm 2 (AWG24 gauge).

Cable shielding

• for modules fitted with a screw terminal block (TSX AEY 414 / TSX ASY 410)

Connect the shielding at each end of the cable to the shielding connection terminals

(ground terminals). See the paragraph on the following page concerning referencing of sensors and preactuators to ground.

• for modules fitted with SubD connector(s) (TSX AEY 800 / 1600)

As there is a large number of channels, a minimum 13-pair twisted cable will be used with general shielding (external diameter 15 mm maximum), fitted with a 25-pin male

SubD connector for linking with the module.

Connect the shielding of the cable to the cover of the male SubD connector. It is connected to the PLC ground via the SubD connector retention screws (for this reason, it is therefore compulsory to screw the male SubD connector onto its female base).

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1

C

Grouping of conductors in cables

Signals of the same type with the same reference to ground can be grouped together in multipair cables.

Cable routing

Keep the discrete I/O cables (especially those for relay outputs) as far away as possible from the power cables.

Sensors referenced to ground

For modules with non-isolated channels (TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600), sensors

which are not referenced to ground are preferred.

To ensure correct operation of the measurement system, the following precautions are advised :

• sensors should be located near to each other (few meters),

• all the sensors should be referenced to the same point, which is connected to the module ground.

Input channel 0 +ve

Use of sensors referenced to ground

If the sensors are referenced to ground,

Input channel 0 -ve this can, in certain cases, lead to a ground voltage at the terminal block or SubD connector(s). It is therefore essential that the following rules are observed :

V s

Shielding connection

Input channel 1 +ve

Input channel 1 -ve s

• this voltage must be less than the safety voltage,

• when a reference voltage is taken to a sensor it can cause leakage current. It should therefore be checked that any leakage current generated does not interfere with the system.

V s

V s

Input channel n +ve

Input channel n -ve s

For safety reasons, the modules are fitted with an RC network (>30 M

Ω

,

4.7 nF), which grounds the reference voltage of the channels.

Use of preactuators referenced to ground

There is no technical restriction for referencing preactuators to ground. For safety reasons, however, it is preferable to avoid a ground voltage occurring at the terminal block, as this may vary significantly from the nearby ground voltage.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 2

3 TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 1600 modules

3.1

Presentation

General

TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules are analog input modules with 8 /16 high level inputs. Linked to sensors or transmitters, they perform monitoring, measurement and continuous process control functions.

TSX AEY 800 / AEY 1600

The TSX AEY 800 or TSX AEY 1600 module offers the range

±

10 V, 0..10 V, 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA for each of its inputs, depending on the choice made during configuration.

C

Functions

These input modules perform the following functions :

TSX AEY 800/1600

Channel selection Optocoupler

1000 Vrms isolation

Multiplexer

A / D

Optocoupler

Processing

Bus X interface

DC / DC converter

5 V 6

Function 1 2 3 4 5

7

1 Connection to the process and scanning of input channels

• physical connection to the process, via SubD connector(s),

• protection of the module against overvoltages (peak limiting diodes),

• adaptation of input signals by analog filtering,

• scanning of input channels, by solid state multiplexing (it is possible to scan only those channels defined as being used : fast cycle).

___________________________________________________________________________

3/1

C

2 Adaptation to input signals

• gain selection, according to the characteristics of the input signals, defined during configuration (unipolar or bipolar voltage or current range),

• compensation for drift in the amplifier circuits.

3 Digitalization of input measurement analog signals (12-bit analog/digital converter).

4 Converting input measurements to a unit which can be handled by the user

• acceptance of recalibration and alignment coefficients to be applied to the measurements, as well as the autocalibration coefficients of the module,

• measurement filtering (digital filter), according to the configuration parameters,

• measurement scaling, according to the parameters set during configuration.

5 Interface and communication with the application

• management of exchanges via bus X,

• geographical addressing,

• reception of module and channel configuration parameters,

• transmission of measured values, as well as the module status, to the application.

6 Module power supply

7 Monitoring the module and indicating possible faults to the application

• test of conversion circuit,

• test for range overshoot on the channels,

• test for the presence of the terminal block,

• test of watchdog.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/2

TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 3

3.2

Input processing

3.2-1 Measurement sampling

Measurement sampling depends on the cycle used, defined during configuration : normal cycle or fast cycle.

In normal cycle, the input scan cycle is fixed, irrespective of the number of inputs used :

• 27 ms for a TSX AEY 800 module.

• 51 ms for a TSX AEY 1600 module.

In fast cycle, only the channels defined as used are scanned, even if they are not consecutive. This improves the module scan time. The module scan time is represented by the following formula :

Ct (ms) = 3 (N + 1), where N = number of channels used

For example, if 6 channels are used the scan time is 3 (6 + 1) = 21 ms

Filtering is inhibited in fast mode.

The scan cycle of the channels used is as follows :

• normal cycle

Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 7 (15) Internal ref. (*)

3 ms 3 ms 3 ms 3 ms

C

27 ms (TSX AEY 800)

51 ms (TSX AEY 1600)

• fast cycle (for example, channels 3, 5 and 6 used)

Channel 3

3 ms

Channel 5

3 ms

Channel 6

3 ms

Internal ref. (*)

3 ms

Tc = 3 (N + 1) = 12 ms

(*) corresponds to the acquisition of voltage references integrated in the module, to enable its periodic autocalibration.

Note

The module scan is not synchronous with the PLC scan (application). At the start of each PLC cycle, the channel values are taken into account, which means that some values will not have changed if the scan of the MAST task is shorter than that of the module.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/3

C

3.2-2 Range selection and overshoot monitoring

Each module has the choice of 6 ranges for each of its inputs :

±

10 V, 0..10 V, 0..5 V,

1..5 V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA.

The module monitors overshoot for the chosen range, ie. it checks that the measurement is between the upper and lower limits defined in the table below. Outside these limits, the analog measurement system risks saturation and an overshoot fault is signalled by a bit which can be used by the program (error bit %Imodule.channel.ERR = 1 indicates a channel fault and status word bit %MWmodule.channel.2:X1 = 1 indicates a range overshoot on the channel).

Modules generally allow a 5% range overshoot of the positive electrical range (for example, 5% of 10 V for the range

±

10 V). The 0-5 V and 0-20 mA ranges will not tolerate a negative overshoot. As soon as the measured value becomes negative, a range overshoot fault is signalled.

AEY 800

AEY 1600 Limit

Range

Lower Upper

Limit

Values available

Min. limit in User (1) by default.

format

Standard format

Max. limit in User (1) format

±

10 V

0..10 V

0..5 V

1..5 V

- 10.5 V

- 0.5 V

0 V

0.8 V

+ 10.5 V

+ 10.5 V

+ 5.25 V

+ 5.2 V

±

10500 Min - 5% (max-min)/2 Max + 5% (max-min)/2

- 500..10500

Min - 5% (max-min) Max + 5% (max-min)

0..10500

Min (2) Max + 5% (max-min)

- 500..10500

Min - 5% (max-min) Max + 5% (max-min)

0..20 mA 0 mA + 21 mA 0..10500

Min (2) Max + 5% (max-min)

4..20 mA + 3.2 mA + 20.8 mA - 500..10500

Min - 5% (max-min) Max + 5% (max-min)

Min / Max : minimum / maximum values entered in USER format configuration.

(1) See section 3.2-4

(2) Range overshoot is signalled for an overshoot of approximately :

-10 mV for the range 0..5 V,

-40

µ

A for the range 0..20 mA.

3.2-3 Measurement filtering

First order filtering is performed with a filtering coefficient which can be modified via a programming terminal or by the program. The mathematical formula used is : where :

Mes fn

=

αα

x Mes fn-1

+ (1-

αα

) x Val

α

= filter efficiency, bn

Mes fn

= filtered measurement at moment n,

Mes fn-1

= filtered measurement at moment n-1,

Val bn

= "raw" value measured at moment n.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/4

TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 3

During configuration, the user selects the filter value from 7 possible values (0 to 6).

This value may be subsequently modified, even when the application is in RUN.

C

TSX AEY 800

Efficiency required

No filter

Low level of filtering

Medium level of 3 filtering 4

High level of filtering

5

6

0

1

2

Value to select

Corresponding Filter response

ααααα time at 63%

0

0.750

0.875

0.937

0.969

0.984

0.992

0

100 ms

202 ms

419 ms

851 ms

1.714 s

3.442 s

Cut off frequency (Hz)

-

1.591

0.788

0.379

0.187

0.093

0.046

TSX AEY 1600

Efficiency required

No filter

Low level of filtering

0

Medium level of 3 filtering 4

1

2

High level of filtering

5

6

Value to select

Note

Filtering is inhibited in fast cycle

Corresponding Filter response

ααααα time at 63%

0

0.750

0.875

0.937

0.969

0.984

0.992

0

178 ms

382 ms

791 ms

1.607 s

3.239 s

6.502 s

Cut off frequency (Hz)

-

0.894

0.416

0.201

0.099

0.049

0.024

___________________________________________________________________________

3/5

C

3.2-4 Measurement display

The measurement supplied to the application can be used directly by the operator, who can choose between :

• using the 0..10000 standard display (or

±

10000 for the range

±

10 V),

• entering the parameters for the display format by indicating the desired minimum and maximum values.

Standard display. The values are displayed in standard units :

• for a unipolar range of 0-10 V, 0-5 V, 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, they are displayed from 0 to 10000 (0 0 /

000

to 10000 0 /

000

),

• for the bipolar range of

±

10 V, they are displayed from - 10000 to + 10000

(- 10000 0 /

000

to + 10000 0 /

000

).

User display. The user may select the range of values in which the measurements are expressed, by choosing :

• the lower limit corresponding to the minium of the range 0 0 /

000

(or - 10000 0 /

000

),

• the upper limit corresponding to the maximum of the range + 10000 0 /

000

.

These upper and lower limits are integers between - 30000 and + 30000.

For example, suppose a conditioning unit indicates information about pressure on a 4-20 mA loop, with 4 mA corresponding to 3200 mB and 20 mA corresponding to 9600 mB. The user can then select the User format, by defining the following upper and lower limits :

• 0 0 /

000

<=> 3200 as lower limit,

• 10000 0 /

000

<=> 9600 as upper limit.

The values transmitted to the program will vary between 3200 (= 4 mA) and 9600

(= 20 mA).

For more information about standard or user display, refer to the installation manual for application-specific functions, reference TLX DS 57 PL7 12E.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/6

TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 3

3.2-5 Sensor alignment

Alignment consists of eliminating a systematic shift observed by a given sensor, around a given operating point. An error linked to the process will be compensated but not an error linked to the control system. For this reason, replacing a module does not require a new alignment. On the other hand, replacing the sensor or changing the operating point of that sensor will require a new alignment.

C

Conversion line after alignment

Initial conversion line

0 100 %

For example, suppose that a pressure sensor, linked to a conditioning unit (1mV/mB), indicates 3200 mB, while the actual pressure is 3210 mB. The value measured by the module in standard scale will be 3200 (3.20 V). The user can align the measurement to the value 3210 (required value). After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of +10 to any new measurement.

The alignment value which should be entered is 3210.

The alignment value can be modified via a programming terminal, even when the

program is in RUN. For each input channel, the user can :

• display and modify the required measurement value,

• save the alignment value,

• know if the channel already has an alignment.

The alignment offset can also be modified via the program.

Alignment is performed when the channel is in normal operation, without affecting the operating modes of the module channel.

The maximum deviation between the measured value and the required value (aligned value) should not exceed

±

1000.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/7

C

3.2-6 Recalibration

As TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 modules are common point modules, it is only necessary to recalibrate channel 0 in order to recalibrate the whole module.

It is recommended that the module should be recalibrated outside the application.

Recalibration can be performed with the PLC task linked to the channel, in RUN or in

STOP.

In recalibration mode, the measurements of all the module channels are declared invalid (bit %Ixy.i.ERR = 1), filtering and alignment are inhibited, the acquisition

cycles of the channels can be extended.

As inputs other than channel 0 are not read during recalibration, the value transmitted to the application for these other channels is the last value measured before recalibration.

Recalibration is performed from the calibration screen and is performed for the whole module only on channel 0. To do this :

• click on a channel to go to recalibration mode (a confirmation message signals the change to this mode),

• connect a voltage reference to the voltage input of channel 0, according to the range to be recalibrated :

- reference = 10 V

±

20 ppm, to recalibrate the module for the ranges

±

10 V and 0..10 V,

- reference = 5 V

±

20 ppm, to recalibrate the module for the ranges 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20

mA and 4..20 mA.

Warning : the 5 V reference recalibrates the whole measurement system for the ranges 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA, but does not take into account the 250

Ω current

shunt integrated in the module and located on the current input,

• select in the calibration screen the connected reference (for example 10 V). Wait the necessary time for the voltage reference to stabilize, then confirm the selection.

Recalibration of the ranges linked to this reference (for example,

±

10 V and 0..10 V) is performed automatically. The displayed value of channel 0 should therefore be

10000

±

10.

• the user can then connect another external voltage reference (for example 5 V), then repeat the previous procedure up to the automatic recalibration of the ranges linked to that reference (0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA).

Recalibration is not accepted until it has been saved in the module ("save" button). The

"Return to factory parameters" button cancels all recalibrations and reverts to the initial recalibration (performed in the factory). Pressing the "Return to factory parameters" button triggers a confirmation message. However, after confirmation, it is immediately accepted and does not require saving.

If the user exits the screen without saving, a message is displayed which reminds the user that it has not been saved. If the user still chooses to exit the screen, the new calibration coefficients will be lost (it will revert to the old coefficients).

___________________________________________________________________________

3/8

TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 3

3.3

Fault processing

3.3-1 External faults

Range overshoot

At the time of measurement range overshoot, the following bits are set to 1 :

• fault bit %Ixy.i.ERR, associated with the channel (for example, %I2.0.ERR for channel 0 of the module located in slot 2),

• bit 1 (range overshoot) of status word associated with the channel (for example,

%MW2.0.2:X1 for channel 0 of the module located in slot 2).

The I/O indicator lamp is permanently on during the fault.

C

3.3-2 Internal faults

Each module carries out a series of self-tests (watchdog, memory, analog/digital conversion circuit). When an error occurs during these tests, an internal fault is signalled.

The channels change to 0 and the ERR indicator lamp is permanently on. If a module is inoperative and can no longer communicate with the processor, the latter will still be informed as it detects a module which is absent or inoperative.

Self-test performed

Watchdog test

Checksum of REPROM memory

Test of bus X interface

Test of external RAM

Test of EEPROM memory

Test of internal references

Status of ERR indicator Feedback of fault lamp during a fault to the processor

Permanently on

Permanently on

Permanently on

Permanently on

Permanently on

Permanently on no no no no no yes

3.3-3 Other faults

Communication fault

When a communication fault occurs with the processor, the channels are frozen at the last value before the fault.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/9

C

Terminal block fault (user definable)

If the terminal block fault is configured, it occurs when at least one channel is used, while the corresponding SubD connector is absent. When such a fault occurs, the following bits are set to 1 :

• fault bit %Ixy.i.ERR, associated with the channel (for example, %I2.0.ERR for channel 0 of the module located in slot 2),

• bit 2 (terminal block fault) of the status word associated with the channel (for example,

%MW2.0.2:X2 for channel 0 of the module located in slot 2).

The I/O indicator lamp flashes during the fault.

3.3-4 Fault display

Modules TSX AEY 800 and TSX AEY 1600 are fitted with a display block comprising 3 indicator lamps which display the module operating modes and possible faults : RUN,

ERR and I/O indicator lamps.

Module status

RUN

Status indicator lamps

ERR I/O

Normal operation

External fault (range overshoot)

Internal fault (module failure)

• communication with CPU possible

• communication with CPU not possible

Other fault (communication fault)

Other fault (terminal block fault)

Note

When a range overshoot fault occurs at the same time as a terminal block fault, the indicator lamps behave as for a range overshoot (I/O lamp is on).

Indicator lamp off

Indicator lamp flashing

Indicator lamp on

___________________________________________________________________________

3/10

TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 3

3.4

Characteristics

3.4-1 Input characteristics

Module

Number of channels

Analog/digital conversion

Configuration of acquisition scan

Conversion time

Channels / ground dielectric voltage

Isolation between channels

TSX AEY 800 TSX AEY 1600

8 16

12 bits (3719 points for voltage / 3836 points for current)

Fast : periodic acquisition of channels used

Normal : periodic acquisition of all channels

3 ms / channel

1000 V rms

Common point

Isolation between bus and channels 1000 V rms

Maximum permissible overvoltage

±

30 V for voltage on inputs

±

30 mA for current

Standards IEC 1131

3 ms / channel

1000 V rms

Common point

1000 V rms

±

30 V for voltage

±

30 mA for current

IEC 1131

Electrical range

Full scale (FS)

Resolution

Maximum error at 25

°

C

Max. error at 0 to 60

°

C

Temperature drift

Range overshoot

Precision of internal conversion resistance

/

±

10 V

0..10 V

10 V

5.38 mV

0.19% FS

0.22% FS

20 ppm /

°

C

±

10.5 V

(range

±

10 V)

-0.5..10.5 V

(range 0..10 V)

/

0..5 V

1..5 V

5 V

1.34 mV

0.15% FS

0.22% FS

20 ppm /

°

C

0..5.25 V

(range 0.. 5 V)

0.8..5.2 V

(range 1..5 V)

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

20 mA

5.21

µ

A

0.25% FS

0.41% FS

45 ppm /

°

C

0..21 mA

(range 0.. 20 mA)

3.2..20.8 mA

(range 4..20 mA)

0.1% - 25 ppm /

°

C

C

___________________________________________________________________________

3/11

C

3.5

Connections

3.5-1 Connector pinout

TSX AEY 800

(1) +IV0

(2) +IC0

(*)

(3) COM1/STD

(4) +IV2

(5) +IC2

(6) COM3

(7) +IV4

(8) +IC4

(9) COM5

(10) +IV6

(11) +IC6

(12) COM7

(13) STD

1

2

14 COM0 (14)

15 +IV1 (15)

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

20 COM4 (20)

21 +IV5 (21)

22 +IC5 (22)

23 COM6 (23)

11

16 +IC1 (16)

17 COM2 (17)

18 +IV3 (18)

19 +IC3 (19)

12

24 +IV7 (24)

25 +IC7 (25)

13

TSX AEY 1600

(1) +IV0

(2) +IC0

(*)

(3) COM1/STD

(4) +IV2

(5) +IC2

(6) COM3

(7) +IV4

(8) +IC4

(9) COM5

(10) +IV6

(11) +IC6

(12) COM7

(13) STD

1

2

14 COM0 (14)

15 +IV1 (15)

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

20 COM4 (20)

21 +IV5 (21)

22 +IC5 (22)

23 COM6 (23)

11

16 +IC1 (16)

17 COM2 (17)

18 +IV3 (18)

19 +IC3 (19)

12

24 +IV7 (24)

25 +IC7 (25)

13

(1) +IV8

(2) +IC8

(*)

(3) COM9/STD

(4) +IV10

(5) +IC10

(6) COM11

(7) +IV12

(8) +IC12

(9) COM13

(10) +IV14

(11) +IC14

(12) COM15

(13) STD

1

2

3

4

14 COM8 (14)

15 +IV9 (15)

16 +IC9 (16)

17 COM10 (17)

5

6

7

8

9

10

22 +IC13 (22)

23 COM14 (23)

11

18 +IV11 (18)

19 +IC11 (19)

20 COM12 (20)

21 +IV13 (21)

12

24 +IV15 (24)

25 +IC15 (25)

13

+IVx : +ve voltage input of channel x

+ICx : +ve current input of channel x

COMx: -ve input of channel x (voltage or current)

STD : Strap (*) to detect removal.

___________________________________________________________________________

3/12

TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 3

3.5-2 Wiring accessories

Using TELEFAST wiring accessories facilitates the installation of TSX AEY 800 and

TSX AEY 1600 analog modules, by giving access to the inputs via the screw terminals.

The analog module is connected to the TELEFAST accessories via a 3 meter shielded cable, reference TSX CAP 030 which has 25-pin SubD connectors fitted at both ends.

There are two types of TELEFAST analog wiring accessories :

• TELEFAST accessory, reference ABE 7 CP A02, distributes the 8 channels coming from a 25-pin SubD connector, onto the screw terminals,

• TELEFAST accessory, reference ABE 7 CP A 03, distributes the 8 channels coming from a 25-pin SubD connector, onto the screw terminals; but also :

- supplies, channel by channel, the 2 and 4-wire sensors with a 24 V protected and current-limited voltage (to 30 mA),

- maintains the continuity of the current loops when the 25-pin SubD connector is removed,

- protects the current shunt contained in the modules against overvoltages.

C

TELEFAST

Sensors

TELEFAST

Sensors

Note

The TELEFAST wiring accessory, reference ABE 6 SD 2520, can be used instead of the

TELEFAST ABE 7 CP A02, as it has the same functions (the only difference between the 2 wiring accessories is that the TELEFAST ABE 6 SD 2520 belongs to the TELEFAST first-generation range).

___________________________________________________________________________

3/13

C

3.5-3 TELEFAST pinout

After connecting the analog module to a TELEFAST accessory, via cable TSX CAP 030, the distribution of the analog channels on the TELEFAST terminals is as follows :

TELEFAST, reference ABE 7 CP A02

110

111

112

113

114

115

105

106

107

108

109

101

102

103

104

TELEFAST 25-pin SubD Type of signal terminal no. connector pin no.

1 / Ground

2

3

4

100

/

/

/

1

Ground

Ground

Ground

+IV0 or +IV8

2

15

16

4

5

18

19

7

8

+IC0 or +IC8

+IV1 or +IV9

+IC1 or +IC9

+IV2 or +IV10

+IC2 or +IC10

+IV3 or +IV11

+IC3 or +IC11

+IV4 or +IV12

+IC4 or +IC12

21

22

10

11

24

25

+IV5 or +IV13

+IC5 or +IC13

+IV6 or +IV14

+IC6 or +IC14

+IV7 or +IV15

+IC7 or +IC15

210

211

212

213

214

215

205

206

207

208

209

201

202

203

204

TELEFAST 25-pin SubD Type of signal terminal no. connector pin no.

Supp1 / Ground

Supp2

Supp3

Supp4

200

/

/

/

14

Ground

Ground

Ground

COM0 or COM8

/

/

/

/

/

3

17

6

20

Ground

COM1 or COM9

Ground

COM2 or COM10

Ground

COM3 or COM11

Ground

COM4 or COM12

Ground

/

9

/

23

/

12

COM5 or COM13

Ground

COM6 or COM14

Ground

COM7 or COM15

Ground

___________________________________________________________________________

3/14

TSX AEY 800 / TSX AEY 1600 modules 3

TELEFAST, reference ABE 7 CP A03

3

4

100

101

1

2

TELEFAST 25-pin SubD Type of signal terminal no. connector pin no.

/

/

0 V

0 V

102

103

/

/

/

/

15

16

0 V

0 V

IS1 or IS9 (*)

+IV1 or +IV9

+IC1 or +IC9

Ground

112

113

114

115

108

109

110

111

104

105

106

107

/

24

/

25

/

/

21

22

/

/

18

19

IS3 or IS11 (*)

+IV3 or +IV11

+IC3 or +IC11

Ground

IS5 or IS13 (*)

+IV5 or +IV13

+IC5 or +IC13

Ground

IS7 or IS15

+IV7 or +IV15

+IC7 or +IC15

Ground

212

213

214

215

208

209

210

211

204

205

206

207

TELEFAST 25-pin SubD Type of signal terminal no. connector pin no.

Supp1

Supp2

/

/

24 V (sensor supply)

24 V (sensor supply)

Supp3

Supp4

200

201

202

203

/

/

/

1

2

14 / 3

0 V (sensor supply)

0 V (sensor supply)

IS0 or IS8 (*)

+IV0 or +IV8

+IC0 or +IC8

COM0 / COM1 or

COM8 / COM9

/

4

5

17 / 6

IS2 or IS10 (*)

+IV2 or +IV10

+IC2 or +IC10

COM2 / COM3 or

COM10 / COM11

IS4 or IS12 (*)

/

/

7

8

20 / 9

10

11

23 /12

+IV4 or +IV12

+IC4 or +IC12

COM4 / COM5 or

COM12 / COM13

IS6 or IS14 (*)

+IV6 or +IV14

+IC6 or +IC14

COM6 / COM7 or

COM14 / COM15

C

(*) ISx : 24 Vsupply on channel x

___________________________________________________________________________

3/15

C

___________________________________________________________________________

3/16

4 TSX AEY 414 module

4.1

Presentation

General

The TSX AEY 414 is a multirange input module, with 4 inputs isolated from each other. This module provides for each of its inputs, according to the selection made during configuration, the range :

• B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T, U thermocouple or electrical range -13..+63 mV,

• 2 or 4-wire Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000 temperature probes, or ohmic range : 0..400

Ω

, 0..3850

Ω

,

• high level

±

10 V, 0..10 V,

±

5 V, 0..5 V (0..20 mA with an external shunt) or 1..5 V (4..20 mA with an external shunt). Note that external shunts are delivered with the product.

Note

The terminal block is supplied separately under reference TSX BLY 01.

Functions

This input module performs the following functions :

C

TSX AEY 414

2830 Vrms isolation

Optocoupler

1780 Vrms isolation

Gain selection

Channel selection (0..3)

Optocoupler

Optocoupler

A / D Processing

Bus X interface

Optocoupler

Optocoupler

DC/DC converter

Internal temperature measurement

5 V 5

Function 1 2 3 4

4/1

C

1 Connection to the process and scanning of input channels

• physical connection to the process, via screw terminal block,

• gain selection, according to the characteristics of the input signals, defined for each channel during configuration (high level, thermocouple or temperature probe range).

• multiplexing

2 Digitalization of input measurement analog signals

3 Converting input measurements to a unit which can be handled by the user

• acceptance of recalibration and alignment coefficients to be applied to the measurements (channel by channel and range by range), as well as the autocalibration coefficients of the module,

• linearization of the measurement provided by Pt or Ni temperature probes,

• linearization of the measurement and acceptance of the internal or external cold junction compensation, in the case of thermocouples,

• measurement scaling, according to the parameters set during configuration

(physical units or user range).

4 Interface and communication with the application

• management of exchanges via bus X,

• geographical addressing,

• reception of module and channel configuration parameters,

• transmission of measured values, as well as the module status, to the application.

5 Module power supply

6 Monitoring the module and indicating possible faults to the application

• test for the conversion circuit,

• test for range overshoot on the channels,

• test for the presence of the terminal block,

• test of the sensor link (except on ranges

±

10 V, 0..10 V,

±

5 V, 0..5 V and 0..20 mA),

• test for the watchdog.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/2

TSX AEY 414 module 4

4.2

Input processing

4.2-1 Measurement sampling

The TSX AEY 414 module scan time and consequently the sampling rate are independent of the AC supply frequency (50 Hz or 60 Hz).

The measurements are linked together in the following way : channel 0, channel 1, channel 2, channel 3 and internal selection. Internal selection corresponds to the internal temperature or internal references for module autocalibration or to the line compensation for the temperature probe ranges.

110 ms 110 ms

Tconv Ttf Tconv Tconv

C

Channel 0 Channel 1 Internal selection

550 ms

Tconv is the time taken to convert a channel : Tconv = 106 ms,

Ttf is the time taken for the wiring test : Ttf = 4 ms.

Internal selection does not require a wiring test, except for line compensation.

The scan is always executed in the same way and lasts 550 ms.

4.2-2 Range selection and overshoot monitoring

Using the software, the user can choose one of the following ranges for each channel :

±

10 V, 0..10 V,

±

5 V, 0..5 V (0..20 mA), 1..5 V (4..20 mA), -13..+63 mV, 0..400

Ω

, 0..3850

Ω

, Pt100, Pt1000, Ni1000, B, E, J, K, L, N, R, S, T and U thermocouple.

For thermocouple ranges, cold junction compensation is performed by the module.

However, the cold junction temperature can be measured via the module terminal block

(by an internal probe in the module) or remotely via a Pt100 Class A external probe (not supplied), connected to channel 0 of the module.

Whatever the selected range, the module monitors overshoot; that is, it checks that the measurement is between the upper and lower limits defined by the following table.

Outside these limits, saturation of the analog measurement system is likely and an overshoot fault is signalled by a bit which can be used by the program (error bit

%Ixy.i.ERR = 1 signals a fault on the channel and status word bit %MWxy.i.2:X1 = 1 indicates a range overshoot on the channel).

___________________________________________________________________________

4/3

C

For ranges

±

10 V, 0..10 V,

±

5 V, 0..5 V, 1..5 V, 0..20 mA and 4..20 mA : modules generally allow a 5% positive overshoot of the electrical range.

For temperature ranges : the range overshoot corresponds to an overshoot of the input range, an overshoot of the standard sensor measurement zone or an overshoot of the compensation temperature range (-5

°

C to +85

°

C). The use of internal compensation in a normal environment (0

°

C to +60

°

C) is compatible with thresholds -5

°

C to +85

°

C.

Overshoot values

L

N

R

J

K

B

E

S

T

U

TSX AEY 414 Lower

Range limit

±

10 V -10.5 V

0..10 V

±

5 V

-0.5 V

-5.25 V

0..5 V

1..5 V

-0.25 V

+0.8 V

0..20 mA

4..20 mA

-1 mA

+3.2 mA

Pt100

Pt1000

Ni1000

Upper limit

+10.5 V

+10.5 V

+5.25 V

+5.25 V

+5.2 V

+21 mA

+20.8 mA

0

°

C (32

°

F) +1802

°

C (+3276

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

-270

°

C (-454

°

F) +812

°

C (+1495

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

-210

°

C (-346

°

F) +1065

°

C (+1953

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

-270

°

C (-454

°

F) +1372

°

C (+2502

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

-200

°

C (-328

°

F) +900

°

C (+1652

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

-270

°

C (-454

°

F) +1300

°

C (+2372

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

-50

°

C (-58

°

F) +1769

°

C (+3216

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

-50

°

C (-58

°

F) +1769

°

C (+3216

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

-270

°

C (-454

°

F) +400

°

C (+752

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

-200

°

C (-328

°

F) +600

°

C (+1112

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

-200

°

C (-328

°

F) +850

°

C (+1562

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

-200

°

C (-328

°

F) +800

°

C (+1472

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

-60

°

C (-76

°

F) +240

°

C (+464

°

F) d

°

C or d

°

F

Default values

±

10500

Min. limit in

User mode

Max. limit in

User mode

Min - 5%(max-min)/2 Max + 5%(max-min)/2

-500..+10500 Min - 5%(max-min) Max + 5%(max-min)

±

10500 Min - 5%(max-min) Max + 5%(max-min)

-500..+10500 Min - 5%(max-min) Max + 5%(max-min)

-500..+10500 Min - 5%(max-min) Max + 5%(max-min)

-500..+10500 Min - 5%(max-min) Max + 5%(max-min)

-500..+10500 Min - 5%(max-min) Max + 5%(max-min)

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

-500

-500

-500

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

+10000

-13..+63 mV -13 mV

0..400

Ω

0..3850

Ω

0

0

+63 mV

400

Ω

3850

Ω

-2064..10000 Min

0..10000

0..10000

Min

Min

Max

Max

Max

___________________________________________________________________________

4/4

TSX AEY 414 module 4

4.2-3 Sensor link monitoring

Sensor link monitoring imposes a maximum value on the resistance, Rs, of the sensors connected to the module inputs. This maximum Rs value is compatible with normal operation of TSX AEY 414 module (refer to the following table).

A sensor link fault can correspond to a short-circuit (S.C.) or an open circuit (O.C.) according to the type of sensor used. However, report is global and makes no distinction between a short-circuit and an open circuit.

C

Notes

• the module manages the coherence between the terminal block fault and the sensor link fault.

• the sensor link fault is not detected in the 0-5 V / 0-20 mA range (this function is not offered to the user and the wiring test is not performed).

• in the 1-5 V/ 4-20 mA range, the wiring test is only effective if the 250

Ω

shunt is connected. If the shunt is not connected, the wiring test may not detect a fault, even if the cables are cut.

• in the case of temperature probes, the sensor link fault caused by a line compensation anomaly can appear or disappear with a maximum delay of 12 s, in relation to the occurrence of the anomaly.

Sensor Pt1000 / Ni1000 temperature probes

Pt100 temperature probe

Max Rs

O.C.

S.C.

-

> 3850

Ω

150

Ω

-

> 400

Ω

15

Ω

Thermocouples

-15/60 mV, B, E, J,

K, L, N, R, S, T, U

100

Ω

100000

Ω not detectable

4.2-4 Measurement filtering

First order filtering is performed with a filtering coefficient which can be modified from a programming terminal or by the program. The mathematical formula used is as follows : where :

Mes fn

=

αα

x Mes fn-1

+ (1-

α

) x Val bn

α

= filter efficiency,

Mes fn

= filtered measurement at moment n,

Mes fn-1

= filtered measurement at moment n-1,

Val bn

= "raw" value measured at moment n.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/5

C

During configuration the user selects a filter value from 7 possible values (0 to 6).

This value may be subsequently modified, even when the application is in RUN.

Efficiency required

No filtering 0

Low level of filtering

Medium level of 3 filtering 4

High level of filtering

1

2

5

6

Value to select

Corresponding Filter response

ααααα time at 63%

0

0.750

0.875

0.937

0.969

0.984

0.992

0

1.91 s

4.12 s

8.45 s

17.5 s

34.1 s

68.5 s

Cut off frequency (Hz)

-

0.083

0.039

0.019

0.0091

0.0046

0.0022

4.2-5 Measurement display

This processing enables the choice of the display format in which the measurements are supplied to the user program. It is necessary to differentiate between electrical ranges and thermocouple or temperature probe ranges.

Electrical ranges

The measurement supplied to the application can be used directly by the operator who can choose between :

• using 0..10000 standard display (or

±

10000 for the range

±

10 V),

• setting his own display format parameters by indicating his required minimum and maximum values.

Standard display (default). Values are displayed in standard units :

- for a unipolar range 0..10 V, 0..5 V, 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA, they are displayed from

0 to 10000 (0 0 /

000

to 10000 0 /

000

),

- for

±

10 V and

±

5 V bipolar ranges, they are displayed from -10000 to +10000

(-10000 0 /

000

to +10000 0 /

000

).

User display. The user by choose the range of values in which the measurements are expressed, by choosing :

- the lower limit corresponding to the minimum of the range : 0 0 /

000

(or -10000 0 /

000

),

- the upper limit corresponding to the maximum of the range : +10000 0 /

000

.

These upper and lower limits are integers between -30000 and +30000.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/6

TSX AEY 414 module 4

Thermocouple and temperature probe ranges

The user has the choice of two types of display :

• Temperature display. Values are supplied by default in tenths of a degree :

- tenths of a degree Celsius, if the unit chosen during configuration is

°

C,

- tenths of a degree Fahrenheit, if the unit chosen during configuration is

°

F.

• Standard display. The user can choose a 0..10000 standard display (0 to 10000 0 /

000

), by specifying the minimum and maximum temperatures corresponding to 0 and

10000.

C

4.2-6 Sensor alignment

Alignment consists of eliminating a systematic shift observed by a given sensor, around a given operating point. An error linked to the process will be compensated but not an error linked to the control system. For this reason, replacing a module does not require a new alignment. On the other hand, replacing the sensor or changing the operating point of that sensor will require a new alignment.

Conversion line after alignment

Initial conversion line

0 100 %

For example, suppose that a Pt100 probe, plunged into melting ice (probe adjustment procedure) displays 10

°

C after measurement (and not 0

°

C). The user can align the measurement to the value 0 (required value). After this alignment procedure, the measurement channel will apply a systematic offset of -10 to any new measurement.

The alignment value can be modified via a programming terminal, even if the

program is in RUN. For each input channel, the user can :

• display and modify the required measurement value,

• save the alignment value,

• know if the channel already has an alignment.

Alignment is performed when the channel is in normal operation, without affecting the operating modes of the module channel.

The maximum deviation between the measured value and the required value (aligned value) should not exceed

±

1000.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/7

C

4.2-7 Recalibration

Recalibrating a module :

• corrects long-term drifts on the module,

• improves precision at an ambient temperature other than 25

°

C (recommended).

The recalibration range is limited to between

±

1% of the full scale, since beyond that range the module will consider there to be an analog input circuit anomaly.

Recalibration (full scale) is performed on each of the channels and in each of the ranges, by placing a calibration source directly on the input terminals. The following table indicates the calibration value to be supplied, according to the user range :

User range

Measurement current /

±

10 V, 0..10 V,

±

5 V, 0..5 V, Pt100, Pt1000 and -13..63 mV, B, E, J, K, L,

1..5 V, 0..20 mA & 4..20 mA Ni1000 N, R, S, T and U

Calibration voltage 10 V

±

0.018% 2.5 V

±

0.016%

2.5 mA

±

0.0328% /

60 mV

±

0.028%

• In the case of temperature probes, recalibration of the current source takes place channel by channel. This consists of reading the value supplied by each of the current sources (only in 2.5 mA) to within 0.0328% and supplying the value in units of 100 nA.

The recalibration procedure is available via the PL7 Junior software debug screens

(refer to the installation manual for analog applications).

• for the calibration voltages 10 V and 2.5 V, the expected value read after calibration is 10000

±

2. For a calibration voltage of 60 mV, the value read is expected to be

9523

±

2 (10000 corresponding to full scale, ie 63 mV).

4.3

Fault processing

4.3-1 External faults

Range overshoot

At the time of measurement range overshoot, the following bits are set to 1 :

• fault bit %Ixy.i.ERR, associated with the channel (for example, %I2.0.ERR for channel 0 of the module located in slot 2),

• bit 1 (rage overshoot) of status word associated with the channel (for example,

%MW2.0.2:X1 channel 0 of the module located in slot 2).

The I/O indicator lamp is permanently on during the fault.

Sensor link fault (user definable)

When a sensor link fault occurs (refer to section 4.2-3, sensor link monitoring), the following bits are set to 1 :

• fault bit %Ixy.i.ERR, associated with the channel (for example, %I2.0.ERR for channel 0 of the module located in slot 2),

• bit 0 (sensor link fault) of status word associated with the channel (for example,

%MW2.0.2:X1 channel 0 of the module located in slot 2).

4/8

TSX AEY 414 module 4

4.3-2 Internal faults

Each module carries out a series of self-tests (watchdog, memory, analog/digital conversion circuit). When an error occurs during these tests, an internal fault is signalled : the channels are reset to 0 (%IWxy.i) and the ERR indicator lamp is

permanently on. If a module is inoperative and can no longer communicate with the processor, the latter will still be informed as it detects a module which is absent or inoperative.

Self-test performed Status of ERR indicator Feedback of fault lamp during a fault to the processor

C

Watchdog test

Checksum of REPROM memory

Test of bus X interface

Test of external RAM

Test of EEPROM memory

Test of converters

Test of internal references

Permanently on

Permanently on

Permanently on

Permanently on

Permanently on

Permanently on

Permanently on no no no no no yes yes

4.3-3 Other faults

Communication fault

When a fault of communication with the processor occurs the channels are frozen at the last value before the fault.

Terminal block fault (user-definable)

If the terminal block fault is configured, it occurs when the terminal block is absent. When such a fault occurs, the following bits are set to 1 :

• fault bit %Ixy.i.ERR, associated with the channel (for example, %I2.0.ERR for the channel 0 of the module located in slot 2),

• bit 2 (terminal block fault) of the status word associated with the channel (for example,

%MW2.0.2:X2 for the channel 0 of the module located in slot 2).

The I/O indicator lamp flashes during the fault.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/9

C

4.3-4 Fault display

The TSX AEY 414 module is fitted with a display block comprising 3 indicator lamps which display the module operating modes and possible faults : RUN, ERR and I/O indicator lamps.

Module status

RUN

Status indicator lamps

ERR I/O

Normal operation

External fault (range overshoot or sensor link fault)

Internal fault (module failure)

• communication with CPU possible

• communication with CPU not possible

Other fault (communication fault)

Other fault (terminal block fault)

Indicator lamp off

Indicator lamp flashing

Indicator lamp on

___________________________________________________________________________

4/10

TSX AEY 414 module 4

4.4

Characteristics

4.4-1 General characteristics

Number of channels

Analog/digital conversion

Acquisition scan time

4

0..65535 points / 16 bits

550 ms

Digital filter 1st order / User-definable time constant

Channel / ground dielectric voltage 1780 Vrms

Dielectric voltage between channels 2830 Vrms

Permissible common mode voltage betw. channels and ground during operation

240 VAC or 100 VDC

Permissible common mode voltage between channels during operation

415 VAC or 200 VDC

Overvoltage permitted in differential

±

30 VDC (powered on, without 250

Ω

external resistors) mode on inputs

±

15 VDC (powered off, without 250

Ω

external resistors)

Overcurrent permitted on inputs

±

25 mA (powered on/off, with 250

Ω

external shunts)

Linearization Automatic

Cold junction compensation

Temperature probe current

PLC standards

Internal and automatic

External by Pt100 class A on channel 0, between -5

°

C and +85

°

C

2.5 mA DC for 100

Ω

and 559

µ

A DC for 1000

Ω

UL508, UL94, IEC1131, IEC68, IEC801

Sensor standards

Electrical ranges

±

10 V 0..10 V

Full Scale 10 V 10 V

±

5 V

(1)

5 V

IEC584, IEC751, DIN 43760, DIN 43710, NF C 42-330

0..5 V 1..5 V 0..20 mA 4..20 mA -13..63 mV 0..400

Ω

0..3850

Ω

(1) (1) (1)

5 V 5 V 20 mA 20 mA 63 mV 400

Ω

3850

Ω

Max. error at 25

°

C (2)

0.27% 0.16% 0.27% 0.22% 0.27% 0.36% 0.45% 0.19% 0.13% 0.22%

FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS

Max. error from 0.50% 0.39% 0.50% 0.45% 0.56% 0.69% 0.86% 0.44% 0.27% 0.48%

0 to 60

°

C (2) FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS FS

Temp. probe Pt100 according to IEC Pt1000 according to IEC Ni1000 according to DIN ranges

Max. error at 25

°

C (3)

1.2

°

C 2.5

°

C 1.1

°

C

Max. error from

0 to 60

°

C (3)

2.4

°

C 5.0

°

C 2.0

°

C

(1) The parameters for ranges 0..5 V and 0..20 mA or 1..5 V and 4..20 mA are set in the same way during configuration; the only difference lies in their installation (250

Ω

shunt or not).

(2) For electrical ranges, the data applies to the whole input range.

(3) For temperature probe ranges, the data is given for the middle of the standard range, in 4-wire or

2-wire configuration, whilst conforming to connection restrictions (see section 4.5-3).

___________________________________________________________________________

4/11

C

C

General characteristics (continued)

Thermocouple B ranges (4)

E J K L N R S T U

Max. error IC 3.5

°

C 6.1

°

C 7.3

°

C 7.8

°

C 7.5

°

C 6.0

°

C 6.0

°

C 6.6

°

C 6.6

°

C 5.4

°

C at 25

°

C (4) EC / 1.5

°

C 1.9

°

C 2.3

°

C 2.0

°

C 2.0

°

C 3.2

°

C 3.4

°

C 1.5

°

C 1.5

°

C

Max. error IC 8.1

°

C 8.1

°

C 9.5

°

C 10.5

°

C 9.8

°

C 8.7

°

C 11.0

°

C 12.0

°

C 8.8

°

C 7.3

°

C

0 to 60

°

C EC / 3.2

°

C 4.0

°

C 4.7

°

C 4.2

°

C 4.3

°

C 7.7

°

C 8.5

°

C 3.3

°

C 3.1

°

C

(4) For thermocouple ranges, the data includes internal or external cold junction compensation after a stabilization of 30 min. and is given for the middle of the standard range.

"IC" signifies that internal compensation is used; in this case care must be taken with the installation (see section 4.5-4).

"EC" signifies that external compensation is used, across channel 0 for Pt100, with a class A probe.

4.4-2 Detailed input characteristics

The TSX AEY 414 module has 23 ranges on each of its inputs, which can be configured channel by channel.

Precision

The precision of each input is given by the following formula :

Measurement = C + K x M where C = constant for the range examined,

K = proportionality coefficient,

M = absolute value of the measurement.

The measurement error is therefore composed of a constant value (C) and a value proportional to the measurement (K), which can be different depending on the polarity of the measurement.

For thermocouple ranges, the measurement error also takes into account the cold junction compensation error and the linearization error, and for current ranges it takes into account the external resistance error (shunt).

Crosstalk

Crosstalk is expressed in dB and is given by the following formula :

Crosstalk = 20 x Log

10

(V

M

/ V m

) where V

M

V m

= full scale voltage in the least sensitive range,

= error voltage on the following channel, configured in the least sensitive range (due to the presence of V

M

).

In this case, V

M

equals +10 V and V m

is the error due to the presence of +10 V on the following channel configured for

±

20 mV.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/12

TSX AEY 414 module 4

Rejection in common mode

Rejection in common mode between channel and ground is expressed in dB and is given by the following formula :

CM rejection = 20 x Log

10

(V

MC

/ V em

) where V

MC

= voltage in common mode, expressed in VDC or VAC (50 / 60 Hz),

V em

= error voltage on the measurement (reduced by the conversion resolution), expressed in VDC.

For a current range, rejection in common mode is naturally deduced from this formula.

For temperature probe or thermocouple ranges, rejection in common mode has no significance.

Rejection in 50/60 Hz serial mode

Rejection in 50/60 Hz serial mode, superimposed on the measured value, is expressed in dB and is given by the following formula :

SM rejection = 20 x Log

10

(V

MS

/ V em

) where V

MS

= serial mode voltage, expressed in peak to peak V,

V em

= voltage error on the measurement (reduced by the conversion resolution), expressed in VDC.

For a current range, rejection in common mode is naturally deduced from this formula.

For temperature probe or thermocouple ranges, rejection in common mode has no significance.

C

Characteristics of the

±

10 V range

Range

Full scale (FS)

Conversion resolution

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

°

C

±

10 V

10 V

570

µ

V

1 mV

+2 mV + 0.0014 x M

- 2 mV + 0.0025 x M

Max error over 0 to 60

Full scale range

Range overshoot

°

C 0.50% FS

±

10 V

±

10.5 V

CM rejection channel / ground 95 dB

(VDC)

CM rejection channel / ground 105 dB

(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)

SM rejection- 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB

(0.01%)

(0.27% FS)

(

±

10000)

(

±

10500)

Errors at temperatures other than 25

°

C and 60

°

C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60

°

C. The formula is :

4/13

C

Characteristics of the 0..10 V range

Range

Full scale (FS)

Conversion resolution

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

°

C

Max. error from 0 to 60

°

C

Full scale range

0..10 V

10 V

570

µ

V

1 mV

+2 mV + 0.0014 x M

0.39% FS

0..10 V

Range overshoot -0.5..10.5 V

CM rejection channel / ground 95 dB

(VDC)

CM rejection channel / ground 105 dB

(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)

SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB

(0.01% FS)

(0.10% FS)

(0..10000)

(-500..10500)

Characteristics of the

±

5 V range

Range

Full scale (FS)

Conversion resolution

±

5 V

5 V

570

µ

V

0.5 mV Display resolution

Max. error at 25

°

C +1.5 mV + 0.0019 x M

-1.5 mV + 0.0024 x M

Max. error from 0 to 60

Full scale range

Range overshoot

°

C 0.50% FS

±

5 V

±

5.25 V

CM rejection channel / ground 100 dB

(VDC)

CM rejection channel / ground 110 dB

(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)

SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB

(0.01% FS)

(0.27% FS)

(

±

10000)

(

±

10500)

Errors at temperatures other than 25

°

C and 60

°

C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60

°

C. The formula is :

E(T) = E(25

°

C) + I T - 25

°

C I x [E(60

°

C) - E(25

°

C)]/35

___________________________________________________________________________

4/14

TSX AEY 414 module 4

Characteristics of the 0..5 V range

Range

Full scale (FS)

Conversion resolution

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

°

C

Max. error from 0 to 60

°

C

Full scale range

0..5 V

5 V

570

µ

V

500

µ

V

+1.5 mV + 0.0019 x M

0.45% FS

0..5 V

Range overshoot -0.25..5.25 V

CM rejection channel / ground 100 dB

(VDC)

CM rejection channel / ground 110 dB

(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)

SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB

(0.01% FS)

(0.22% FS)

(0..10000)

(-500..10500)

Characteristics of the 1..5 V range

Range

Full scale (FS)

Conversion resolution

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

°

C

Max. error from 0 to 60

°

C

Full scale range

1..5 V

4 V

570

µ

V

400

µ

V

+3.2 mV + 0.0019 x M

0.56% FS

1..5 V

Range overshoot 0.8..5.2 V

CM rejection channel / ground 100 dB

(VDC)

CM rejection channel / ground 110 dB

(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)

SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB

(0.01% FS)

(0.27% FS)

(0..10000)

(-500..10500)

Errors at temperatures other than 25

°

C and 60

°

C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60

°

C. The formula is :

E(T) = E(25

°

C) + I T - 25

°

C I x [E(60

°

C) - E(25

°

C)]/35

C

___________________________________________________________________________

4/15

C

Characteristics of the 0..20 mA range

Range

Full scale (FS)

Conversion resolution

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

°

C

Max. error from 0 to 60

°

C

Full scale range

0..20 mA

20 mA

2.28

µ

A

2

µ

A

+6

µ

A + 0.0033 x M

0.69% FS

0..20 mA

Range overshoot -1..21 mA

CM rejection channel / ground 100 dB

(VDC)

CM rejection channel / ground 110 dB

(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)

SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB

(0.01% FS)

(0.36% FS)

(0..10000)

(-500..10500)

Characteristics of the 4..20 mA range

Range

Full scale (FS)

Conversion resolution

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

°

C

Max. error from 0 to 60

°

C

Full scale range

4..20 mA

16 mA

2.28

µ

A

1.6

µ

A

+19.2

µ

A + 0.0033 x M

0.86% FS

4..20 mA

Range overshoot 3.2..20.8 mA

CM rejection channel / ground 100 dB

(VDC)

CM rejection channel / ground 110 dB

(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)

SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz 35 dB

(0.01% FS)

(0.45% FS)

(0..10000)

(-500..10500)

Errors at temperatures other than 25

°

C and 60

°

C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60

°

C. The formula is :

E(T) = E(25

°

C) + I T - 25

°

C I x [E(60

°

C) - E(25

°

C)]/35

Precision includes the shunt (250

Ω

- 0.1% - 25 ppm/

°

C). The influence of the shunt on the precision can be reduced by using a more precise resistance (0.01% - 10 ppm/

°

C).

___________________________________________________________________________

4/16

TSX AEY 414 module 4

Characteristics of the -13..63 mV range

Range

Full scale (FS)

Conversion resolution

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

°

C

Max. error from 0 to 60

Full scale range

°

C

-13..63 mV

63 mV

2.02

µ

V

6.3

µ

V (1)

+18

µ

V + 0.001581 x M

-18

µ

V + 0.004581 x M

0.44% FS

-13..63 mV

Range overshoot -13..63 mV

CM rejection channel / ground >140 dB

(VDC)

CM rejection channel / ground >150 dB

(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)

SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz >35 dB

(0.01% FS)

(0.19% FS)

(-2064..10000)

(-2064..10000)

Characteristics of the 0..400

Ω range

Range

Full scale (FS)

Conversion resolution

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

°

C

Max. error from 0 to 60

°

C

Full scale range

Range overshoot

0..400

Ω

400

Ω

31 m

Ω

40 m

Ω

(1)

63 m

Ω

+ 0.001180 x M

0.27% FS

0..400

Ω

0..400

Ω

CM rejection channel / ground >110 dB

(VDC)

CM rejection channel / ground >120 dB

(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)

SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz >35 dB

(0.01% FS)

(0.13% FS)

(0..10000)

(0..10000)

Errors at temperatures other than 25

°

C and 60

°

C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60

°

C. The formula is :

E(T) = E(25

°

C) + I T - 25

°

C I x [E(60

°

C) - E(25

°

C)]/35

(1) Converter resolution can be achieved by redefining the limits in the User scale.

C

___________________________________________________________________________

4/17

C

Characteristics of the 0..3850 Ω range

Range

Full scale (FS)

Conversion resolution

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

°

C

Max. error from 0 to 60

°

C

Full scale range

Range overshoot

0..3850

Ω

3850

Ω

139 m

Ω

385 m

Ω

(1)

2.114

Ω

+ 0.001647 x M

0.48% FS

0..3850

Ω

0..3850

Ω

CM rejection channel / ground >110 dB

(VDC)

CM rejection channel / ground >120 dB

(VAC - 50 / 60 Hz)

SM rejection - 50 / 60 Hz >35 dB

(0.01% FS)

(0.22% FS)

(0..10000)

(0..10000)

Errors at temperatures other than 25

°

C and 60

°

C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60

°

C. The formula is :

E(T) = E(25

°

C) + I T - 25

°

C I x [E(60

°

C) - E(25

°

C)]/35

(1) Converter resolution can be achieved by redefining the limits in the User scale.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/18

TSX AEY 414 module 4

Characteristics of the temperature probe ranges

Range

Conversion resolution (1)

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

-200

°

C

-100

°

C

0

°

C

100

°

C

200

°

C

300

°

C

400

°

C

500

°

C

600

°

C

700

°

C

800

°

C

°

C (2)

Max. error from 0 to 60

-200

°

C

-100

°

C

0

°

C

100

°

C

200

°

C

300

°

C

400

°

C

500

°

C

600

°

C

700

°

C

800

°

C

Full scale range in in

°

C

°

F

°

C

Pt100

0.09

°

C

0.1

°

C

0.3

°

C

0.5

°

C

0.6

°

C

0.8

°

C

1.0

°

C

1.2

°

C

1.4

°

C

1.7

°

C

1.8

°

C

2.1

°

C

2.3

°

C

Pt1000

0.04

°

C

0.1

°

C

0.4

°

C

0.8

°

C

1.2

°

C

1.6

°

C

2.1

°

C

2.5

°

C

3.0

°

C

3.4

°

C

4.0

°

C

4.5

°

C

5.1

°

C

Ni1000

0.02

°

C

0.1

°

C

0.9

°

C

1.1

°

C

1.2

°

C

0.5

°

C

0.8

°

C

1.2

°

C

1.6

°

C

2.0

°

C

2.4

°

C

2.9

°

C

3.3

°

C

3.8

°

C

4.4

°

C

5.0

°

C

-200..850

°

C

-328..1562

°

F

0.5

°

C

1.4

°

C

2.2

°

C

3.1

°

C

4.0

°

C

4.9

°

C

5.9

°

C

7.0

°

C

8.0

°

C

9.1

°

C

10.3

°

C

-200..800

°

C

-328..1472

°

F

1.6

2.0

2.3

°

°

°

C

C

C

-60..250

°

C

-76..482

°

F

Errors at temperatures other than 25

°

C and 60

°

C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60

°

C. The formula is :

E(T) = E(25

°

C) + I T - 25

°

C I x [E(60

°

C) - E(25

°

C)]/35

The data is given for 4-wire connections and include errors and drifts from the current source

2500

µ

A (Pt100) or 559.03

µ

A (Pt1000 or Ni1000).

The effect of self-heating does not cause a significant error on the measurement, whether the probe is in air or water.

(1) these values are given for an operating point in the middle of the temperature probe range.

(2) ambient temperature of TSX AEY 414.

Reference standard : NF C 42-330 June 1983 and IEC 751, 2nd edition 1986 for Pt100 / 1000,

DIN 43760 September 1987 for Ni1000.

C

___________________________________________________________________________

4/19

C

Characteristics of thermocouple ranges

Thermocouple range

Conversion resolution (1)

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

-200

°

C

-100

°

C

0

°

C

100

°

C

200

°

C

300

°

C

400

°

C

500

°

C

600

°

C

700

°

C

800

°

C

900

°

C

1000

°

C

1100

°

C

1200

°

C

1300

°

C

1400

°

C

1500

°

C

1600

°

C

1700

°

C

°

C (2)

Full scale range (4)

B E J K

0.24

°

C

0.1

°

C

0.026

0.1

°

C

°

C 0.037

0.1

°

C

°

C 0.048

0.1

°

C

°

C

3.5

3.6

3.6

3.5

3.5

3.7

3.9

4.7

4.0

4.0

3.8

3.6

IC / EC (

°

C) (3) IC (

°

C) EC (

°

C) IC (

°

C) EC (

°

C) IC (

°

C) EC (

°

C)

16.8

2.7

18.7

3.3

9.5

7.5

6.7

6.2

1.7

1.5

1.4

1.5

7.4

7.1

7.1

1.5

1.5

1.7

9.5

7.5

7.4

7.8

1.8

1.6

1.7

1.9

6.1

6.1

6.2

6.4

6.6

6.8

1.5

1.7

1.8

2.0

2.1

2.3

7.3

7.4

7.5

7.3

7.0

1.8

2.0

2.1

2.2

2.2

7.6

7.6

7.8

7.9

8.2

8.6

8.9

9.3

2.0

2.1

2.3

2.4

2.6

2.8

3.1

3.3

9.8

3.6

10.3

3.8

0..1802

°

C -270..812

°

C -210..1065

°

C -270..1372

°

C

Errors at temperatures other than 25

°

C and 60

°

C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60

°

C. The formula is :

E(T) = E(25

°

C) + I T - 25

°

C I x [E(60

°

C) - E(25

°

C)]/35

(1) These values are given for an operating point in the middle of the thermocouple range.

(2)"IC" signifies that internal compensation is used; in this case care must be taken with the installation (see section 4.5-4).

EC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (4) and automatic external compensation, with

Pt100 class A.

(3) With thermocouple B, the type of cold junction compensation (internal or external) is not taken into account, since it has no effect on precision.

(4) Internal compensation : ambient temperature = 20

°

C,

External compensation : ambient temperature = 30

°

C.

Reference standards : IEC 584-1, 1st edition 1977 and IEC 584-2, 2nd edition 1989.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/20

TSX AEY 414 module 4

Characteristics of thermocouple ranges (continued)

Thermocouple range

Max. error at 25

-300

°

F

-100

°

F

0

°

F

100

°

F

200

°

F

300

°

F

400

°

F

500

°

F

600

°

F

700

°

F

800

°

F

900

°

F

1000

°

F

1100

°

F

1200

°

F

1300

°

F

1400

°

F

1500

°

F

1700

°

F

1900

°

F

2100

°

F

2300

°

F

2500

°

F

2700

°

F

2900

°

F

3100

°

F

°

C (1)

Full scale range (3)

B E J K

7.0

6.8

6.6

6.2

6.2

6.3

6.4

6.6

7.0

CI / CE (

°

F) (2) CI (

°

F) CE (

°

F) CI (

°

F) CE (

°

F) CI (

°

F) CE (

°

F)

26.4

4.3

28.5

5.1

15.8

2.9

15.7

3.1

13.6

2.7

12.8

2.6

13.2

2.9

12.7

2.8

11.6

2.6

13.7

3.2

12.8

3.0

11.0

2.7

13.8

3.5

13.1

3.3

10.9

2.9

13.8

3.7

13.4

3.6

11.1

3.2

13.9

4.0

13.4

3.9

8.5

11.4

3.5

14.3

4.3

12.9

4.0

7.3

11.8

3.9

14.7

4.7

12.5

4.0

12.4

4.3

15.5

5.1

16.3

5.6

17.1

6.1

18.0

6.6

19.1

7.2

32..3276

°

F -454..1493

°

F -346..1949

°

F -454..2502

°

F

(1) "IC" signifies that internal compensation is used; in this case care must be taken with the installation (see section 4.5-4).

EC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (3) and automatic external compensation, with

Pt100 class A.

(2) With thermocouple B, the type of cold junction compensation (internal or external) is not taken into account, since it has no effect on precision.

(3) Internal compensation : ambient temperature = 20

°

C,

External compensation : ambient temperature = 30

°

C.

C

___________________________________________________________________________

4/21

C

Characteristics of thermocouple ranges (continued)

Thermocouple range

Conversion resolution (1)

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

-200

°

C

-100

°

C

0

°

C

100

°

C

200

°

C

300

°

C

400

°

C

500

°

C

600

°

C

700

°

C

800

°

C

900

°

C

1000

°

C

1100

°

C

1200

°

C

1300

°

C

1400

°

C

1500

°

C

1600

°

C

°

C (2)

Full scale range (3)

L N R S

0.036

°

C

0.1

°

C

0.05

0.1

°

°

C

C 0.16

0.1

°

°

C

C 0.19

0.1

°

°

C

C

7.3

7.5

7.4

7.4

7.1

6.8

6.7

IC (

°

C) EC (

°

C) IC (

°

C) EC (

°

C) IC (

°

C) EC (

°

C) IC (

°

C) EC (

°

C)

19.6

4.0

7.5

7.1

7.2

1.5

1.5

1.7

9.5

7.8

7.0

6.5

2.1

1.8

1.8

1.7

11.4

8.1

7.1

4.8

3.5

3.2

11.2

8.3

7.4

4.7

3.5

3.3

1.9

2.0

2.1

2.2

2.2

2.3

2.3

6.2

6.0

6.0

6.1

6.2

6.3

6.5

6.8

7.0

7.4

1.8

1.9

2.0

2.1

2.2

2.4

2.6

2.7

2.9

3.2

6.5

6.3

6.2

6.1

6.1

6.0

6.0

5.9

5.9

5.9

6.0

6.1

6.3

6.5

2.9

3.0

3.0

3.1

3.1

3.2

3.2

3.3

3.3

3.4

3.5

3.7

3.8

4.0

6.9

6.8

6.8

6.8

6.6

6.6

6.6

6.6

6.6

6.7

6.8

6.9

7.2

7.4

3.1

3.2

3.3

3.4

3.3

3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.8

3.9

4.1

4.3

4.5

-200..900

°

C -270..1300

°

C -50..1769

°

C -50..1769

°

C

Errors at temperatures other than 25

°

C and 60

°

C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60

°

C. The formula is :

E(T) = E(25

°

C) + I T - 25

°

C I x [E(60

°

C) - E(25

°

C)]/35

(1) These values are given for an operating point in the middle of the thermocouple range.

(2) "IC" signifies that internal compensation is used; in this case care must be taken with the installation (see section 4.5-4).

EC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (4) and automatic external compensation, with

Pt100 class A.

(3) Internal compensation : ambient temperature = 20

°

C,

External compensation : ambient temperature = 30

°

C.

Reference standards :

• thermocouple L : DIN 43710, edition December 1985,

• thermocouple N : IEC 584-1, 2nd edition 1989 and IEC 584-2, 2nd edition 1989,

• thermocouple R : IEC 584-1, 1st edition 1977 and IEC 584-2, 2nd edition 1989,

• thermocouple S : IEC 584-1, 1st edition 1977 and IEC 584-2, 2nd edition 1989.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/22

TSX AEY 414 module 4

Characteristics of thermocouple ranges (continued)

Thermocouple range

1300

°

F

1400

°

F

1500

°

F

1600

°

F

1700

°

F

1800

°

F

1900

°

F

2000

°

F

2100

°

F

2200

°

F

2300

°

F

2400

°

F

2600

°

F

2800

°

F

3000

°

F

Max. error at 25

-300

°

F

-100

°

F

0

°

F

100

°

F

200

°

F

300

°

F

400

°

F

500

°

F

600

°

F

700

°

F

800

°

F

900

°

F

1000

°

F

1100

°

F

1200

°

F

°

C (1)

Full scale range (2)

L N R S

CI (

°

F) CE (

°

F) CI (

°

F) CE (

°

F) CI (

°

F) CE (

°

F) CI (

°

F) CE (

°

F)

29.4

6.0

15.7

3.4

14.9

2.8

21.9

8.8

21.2

8.6

13.5

3.3

13.1

2.7

14.8

6.4

15.1

6.5

12.0

3.1

12.7

2.9

12.8

5.7

13.3

6.0

11.2

3.2

13.0

3.2

11.9

5.6

12.3

5.5

10.9

3.3

13.3

3.5

11.2

5.3

12.1

5.7

10.9

3.5

13.4

3.8

11.0

5.3

12.1

5.9

10.9

3.8

13.3

4.0

10.8

5.4

12.1

6.0

11.1

4.0

12.8

4.0

12.2

4.0

11.5

4.3

10.7

5.5

12.0

6.2

10.5

5.6

11.9

6.3

11.9

4.7

10.7

5.7

11.9

6.4

12.3

5.1

10.6

6.0

3.9

2.3

13.0

5.5

10.5

6.1

3.9

2.3

13.7

6.0

10.5

6.2

10.4

6.3

10.4

6.4

10.7

6.7

4.0

4.1

4.2

4.4

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.8

-328..1652

°

F -454..2372

°

F -58..3216

°

F -58..3216

°

F

(1) "IC" signifies that internal compensation is used; in this case care must be taken with the installation (see section 4.5-4).

EC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (2) and automatic external compensation, with

Pt100 class A.

(2) Internal compensation : ambient temperature = 20

°

C,

External compensation : ambient temperature = 30

°

C.

C

___________________________________________________________________________

4/23

C

Characteristics of thermocouple ranges (continued)

Thermocouple range

Conversion resolution (1)

Display resolution

Max. error at 25

-200

°

C

-150

°

C

-100

°

C

-50

°

C

0

°

C

50

°

C

100

°

C

150

°

C

200

°

C

250

°

C

300

°

C

350

°

C

400

°

C

500

°

C

600

°

C

°

C (2)

Full scale range (3)

T

0.046

°

C

0.1

°

C

7,1

6,6

6,2

5,9

5,7

5,6

5,5

IC (

°

C)

18,3

13,0

10,3

8,7

7,7

1,5

1,5

1,5

1,5

1,5

1,5

1,6

EC (

°

C)

3,2

2,4

2,0

1,7

1,6

U

0.038

°

C

0.1

°

C

IC (

°

C)

7,7

6,7

5,8

5,4

EC (

°

C)

1,6

1,5

1,5

1,5

-270..400

°

C

5,4

5,2

5,0

-200..600

°

C

1,6

1,6

1,7

Errors at temperatures other than 25

°

C and 60

°

C can be deduced by linear extrapolation of the errors defined at 25 and 60

°

C. The formula is :

E(T) = E(25

°

C) + I T - 25

°

C I x [E(60

°

C) - E(25

°

C)]/35

(1) These values are given for an operating point in the middle of the thermocouple range.

(2) "IC" signifies that internal compensation is used; in this case care must be taken with the installation (see section 4.5-4).

EC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (4) and automatic external compensation, with

Pt100 class A.

(3) Internal compensation : ambient temperature = 20

°

C,

External compensation : ambient temperature = 30

°

C.

Reference standards :

• thermocouple T : IEC 584-1, 1st edition 1977 and IEC 584-2, 2nd edition 1989,

• thermocouple U : DIN 43710, edition December 1985.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/24

TSX AEY 414 module 4

Characteristics of thermocouple ranges (continued)

Thermocouple range

Max. error at 25

-300

°

F

-200

°

F

-100

°

F

0

°

F

100

°

F

200

°

F

300

°

F

400

°

F

500

°

F

600

°

F

700

°

F

800

°

F

1000

°

F

°

C (1)

Full scale range (2)

T

CI (

°

F)

29,2

21,1

16,9

14,4

13,0

11,9

11,2

10,6

10,3

10,0

9,8

CE (

°

F)

5,3

4,0

3,3

3,0

2,8

2,7

2,7

2,7

2,7

2,7

2,8

U

CI (

°

14,3

12,3

10,5

F) CE (

2,9

2,8

2,6

°

F)

9,8 2,7

9,7

9,2

-328..1112

°

F

2,9

3,0

-454..752

°

F

(1) "IC" signifies that internal compensation is used; in this case care must be taken with the installation (see section 4.5-4).

EC = ambient temperature of the TSX AEY 414 (2) and automatic external compensation, with

Pt100 class A.

(2) Internal compensation : ambient temperature = 20

°

C,

External compensation : ambient temperature = 30

°

C.

C

___________________________________________________________________________

4/25

C

4.5

Connections

4.5-1 Terminal block pinout

The TSX AEY 414 module uses a TSX BLY 01 terminal block.

1

Shielding connection

COM0

LC0

2

4

3 IN0

5 IS0

Shielding connection 6

IN1 8

7

9

COM1

LC1

IS1 10

11 Shielding connection

COM2 12

13 IN2

LC2 14

15 IS2

Shielding connection 16

IN3 18

IS3

20

17 COM3

19 LC3

INx : +ve input channel x

COMx : -ve input channel x

ISx : +ve probe supply

LCx : Line compensation

Note

The terminal block is fitted with an internal shunt, which cannot be accessed at the terminals.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/26

TSX AEY 414 module 4

4.5-2 External shunts (0..20 mA and 4..20 mA range)

When the 0..20 mA or 4..20 mA range is used, an external shunt of 250

Ω

- 0.1% -

1/2 W - 25ppm/

°

C is required, connected in parallel on the input terminals. This shunt is supplied with the module in lots of 4, which can also be supplied separately, under reference TSX AAK2.

C

4.5-3 Sensor connection

It is advisable to use shielded cables and to link the shielding to the terminals designed for this purpose (Shielding connection).

For high level and thermocouple inputs, the "source + wiring" resistance should be less than 100

Ω

so as not to adversely affect the module performance.

For temperature probe inputs, the resistance of each of the wires in 4-wire configuration should be less than 50

Ω

, which corresponds to a copper wire with a cross-section of

0.6 mm 2 and maximum overall length of 3000 m.

For the 2-wire Pt100 temperature probes, the resistance of each of the wires should be less than 50 m

Ω ( so as not to introduce a measurement error caused by resistive losses in the cables).

Examples of wiring sensors on channel 0

High level voltage

Shielding connection

1

COM0

2

IN0

3

High level current

Shielding connection

COM0

1

2

(1)

(1)

IN0

(1) External shunt 250

Ω

3

2-wire temperature probe

Shielding connection

COM0

LC0

IS0

IN0

5

3

1

2

4

Thermocouple

Shielding connection

COM0

1

2

IN0

3

4/27

C

4.5-4 Recommendations for installing thermocouples

• Use of internal cold junction compensation

In the case of measurements by ET thermocouple with internal compensation (and only in this case) it is advisable to follow the rules below :

- the PLC must not be directly fan-cooled, convection must be natural,

- variations in ambient temperature must be less than 5

°

C per hour,

- modules in close proximity must be able to dissipate between 2.2 W and 3.3 W, which corresponds to the most commonly used modules (TSX P5710, TSX P5720, TSX

DEY 16D2, TSX DEY 32DK, TSX DEY 16FK, TSX DSY 16R5, TSX AEY 414, etc),

- the TSX AEY 414 module must be mounted in a PLC which has a minimum clearance height of 150 mm (D) and width (d) of 100 mm.

If these recommendations are followed, installation can be made in a wall or floor-mounted enclosure, or without an enclosure.

If the installation rules described above are not observed, module operation is not impaired. However, measurement precision on inputs set for thermocouple ranges will be affected. In stable ventilation conditions and for a fixed configuration, the measurement will simply be shifted by a stable value, which can be compensated by carrying out sensor alignment.

d

D

D d

Since thermocouple B is not sensitive to cold junction compensation from 0 to 70

°

C, these installation restrictions do not apply.

• Use of external cold junction compensation

If thermocouples with external compensation are used, the acquisition of the cold junction temperature must be made using a Pt100 class A probe on channel 0 (probe not supplied). Channels 1, 2 and 3 of the module can therefore be used for the thermocouple measurement.

In this case, there are no particular restrictions on TSX AEY 414 module installation.

However, the Pt100 probe must be placed near to the cold junction terminal block, thus enabling the use of standard shielded copper cables instead of compensated cables.

___________________________________________________________________________

4/28

5.1

Presentation

General

The TSX ASY 410 module has 4 analog outputs which are isolated from each other and have ranges of

±

10 V,

0..20 mA and 4..20 mA, without the need for an external supply.

It is possible to connect loads of 1 k

Ω

minimum on the voltage outputs and 600

Ω

maximum on the current outputs (IEC 1131 standard values).

5 TSX ASY 410 module

C

Note

The terminal block is supplied separately under reference TSX BLY 01.

Functions

This output module performs the following functions :

TSX ASY 410

1500 Vrms isolation

Voltage/current Optocoupler

Optocoupler

D / A

6

Bus X interface

5 V

Processing

Optocoupler

Optocoupler

D / A

D / A

Optocoupler

DC / DC converter

D / A

Function 5 4 3 2 1

7

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 1

C

1 Connection to the process

• physical connection to the process, via a 20-pin screw terminal block,

• protection of the module against overvoltages.

2 Adaptation to different actuators (voltage or current output).

3 Conversion of digital data into analog signals

4 Converting application data into data which can be used by the digital/ analog converter.

5 Interface and communication with the application

• management of exchanges via bus X,

• geographical addressing,

• reception, from the application, of module and channel configuration parameters, as well as digital channel settings,

• transmission of module status to the application.

6 Module power supply

7 Monitoring the module and indicating possible faults to the application

• converter test,

• test for range overshoot on the channels,

• test for the presence of the terminal block,

• watchdog test.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 2

TSX ASY 410 module 5

5.2

Output processing

5.2-1 Writing to the outputs

The application must provide the outputs with standard format values -10000 to +10000.

C

5.2-2 Behavior of outputs when the program is in STOP or absent

When the task which controls the outputs is in STOP or when the program is absent, the outputs take the following position :

• programmable fallback, if the "Fallback" option was selected during module configuration,

• maintain last value transmitted, if the "Maintain" option was selected during module configuration.

The fallback value can be modified from the PL7 Junior debug screen or via the program.

5.2-3 Forcing outputs

From the PL7 Junior debug screen, each output can be forced to a value between -10000 and +10000, defined by the user. This function is mainly used for the wiring test.

Forcing cannot be accessed if the program task which controls the output is in RUN (the output is in Fallback or Maintain position when the program task is in STOP).

5.2-4 Overshoot monitoring

If the values supplied by the application are less than -10000 or greater than +10000, analog outputs will become saturated at the following value :

• -10 V or +10 V in the range

±

10 V,

• 4 mA or 20 mA in the range 4..20 mA,

• 0 mA or 20 mA in the range 0..20 mA.

An overshoot fault is signalled by a bit which can be used by the program (error bit

%Ixy.i.ERR = 1 signals a fault on the channel and status word bit %MWxy.i.2:X1 = 1 indicates a range overshoot on the channel).

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 3

C

5.2-5 Digital/analog conversion

Digital/analog conversion is executed on 11 bits + sign (-2048 to +2047). The data supplied by the program is converted automatically within the dynamic limits of the converter.

5.2-6 Updating the outputs

The maximum time between transmission of the output value to the PLC bus and its actual positioning on the terminal block is 2.5 ms.

Outputs can be individually assigned to the MAST task or to the FAST task of the application program.

5.3

Fault processing

5.3-1 External faults

Range overshoot

When the value transmitted by the program exceeds permissible limits (-10000 to

+10000), the following bits are set to 1 :

• fault bit %Ixy.i.ERR, associated with the channel (for example, %I2.0.ERR for channel 0 of the module located in slot 2),

• bit 1 (range overshoot) of the status word associated with the channel (for example,

%MW2.0.2:X1 channel 0 of the module located in slot 2).

The I/O indicator lamp is permanently on during the fault.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 4

TSX ASY 410 module 5

5.3-2 Internal faults

Each module carries out a series of self-tests (watchdog, memory, analog/digital conversion circuit). When an error occurs during these tests, an internal fault is signalled.

The ERR indicator lamp is permanently on. If the module is able to do so, it signals a fault to the processor.

C

Self-test performed

Watchdog test

Checksum of REPROM memory

Test of bus X interface

Test of external RAM

Test of EEPROM memory

Status of ERR indicator Feedback of fault lamp during a fault to the processor

Permanently on

Permanently on

Permanently on

Permanently on

Permanently on no no no no no

5.3-3 Fallback / Maintain outputs or set outputs to 0

When a fault occurs, according to the seriousness of the fault, outputs take the Fallback/

Maintain value individually or together or are they forced to 0 (0 V or 0 mA).

Fault

Task in STOP or program absent

Communication fault

Configuration fault

Internal module fault

Value of outputs outside limits

(range overshoot)

Terminal block fault

Installation under power

Processor stopped

Program reloading

Behavior of voltage outputs

Behavior of current outputs

Fallback/Maintain

(channel by channel)

Fallback/Maintain

(all channels)

Fallback/Maintain

(channel by channel)

Fallback/Maintain

(all channels)

0 V (channel by channel) 0 mA (channel by channel)

0 V (all channels) 0 mA (all channels)

Value transmitted with Value transmitted with saturation at +10 / -10 V saturation to 4 / 20 mA or

(channel by channel) 0 / 20 mA (channel by channel)

Maintain value

(all channels)

Outputs to 0

(all channels)

0 V

(all channels)

Maintain value

(all channels)

0 mA

(all channels)

0 mA

(all channels)

Fallback state or maintain current value is chosen during module configuration.

The fallback value can be modified from the PL7 Junior debug screen or via the program.

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 5

C

5.3-4 Other faults

Communication fault

When a communication fault occurs, the channels go to fallback or maintained mode, according to the choice made during configuration. The ERR indicator lamp flashes.

Terminal block fault (user definable)

When a terminal block fault occurs, the following bits are set to 1 :

• fault bit %Ixy.i.ERR, associated with the channel (for example, %I2.0.ERR for channel 0 of the module located in slot 2),

• bit 2 (terminal block fault) of the status word associated with the channel (for example,

%MW2.0.2:X2 for channel 0 of the module located in slot 2).

The I/O indicator lamp flashes during the fault.

5.3-5 Fault display

The module TSX ASY 410 is fitted with a display block comprising 3 indicator lamps which display the module operating modes and possible faults : RUN, ERR and I/O indicator lamps.

RUN

Status indicator lamps

ERR I/O

Module status

Normal operation

External fault (range overshoot)

Internal fault (module failure)

• communication with CPU possible

• communication with CPU not possible

Other fault (communication fault)

Other fault (terminal block fault) indicator lamp off indicator lamp flashing indicator lamp on

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 6

TSX ASY 410 module 5

5.4

Characteristics

5.4-1 Output characteristics

Voltage or current outputs

Number of channels

5

Conversion time

Output power supply

Type of protection

Crosstalk between channels

Monotonicity

Non linearity

RC ground network

Isolation between channel and ground

Isolation between channels

Isolation between bus and channels

Voltage outputs

Voltage output range

Maximum voltage without damage for voltage output

Load impedance

Capacitive load

Maximum resolution

Measurement error as a % of Full Scale :

FS = 10 V

Current outputs

Current output range

Maximum voltage without damage for current output

Load impedance

Inductive load

Maximum resolution

Measurement error as a % of Full Scale :

FS = 20 mA

Max. leakage current

4

2.5 ms by the PLC short-circuits and overloads

≤

-80 dB yes

≤

1 LSB

R = 50 M

Ω

, C = 4.7 nF

500 VDC

1500 V rms

1500 V rms

±

10 V

±

30 V

1 k

Ω

minimum

< 0.1

µ

F

4.88 mV in

±

10 V

25

°

C

0 to 60

0.45%

°

C 0.75% (35 ppm /

°

C)

20 mA

±

30 V

600

Ω

maximum

< 300

µ

H

9.77

µ

A

25

°

C

0 to 60

0.52%

°

C 0.98% (70 ppm /

°

C)

50

µ

A

C

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 7

C

5.5

Connections

5.5-1 Terminal block pinout

The TSX ASY 410 module uses a TSX BLY 01 terminal block.

Channel 0 common

Shielding connection

Channel 1 voltage output

2

4

1

5

Channel 0 voltage output

3

Channel 0 current output

Shielding connection

6

7 Channel 1 common

Channel 1 current output

9 Shielding connection

Shielding connection 10

Channel 2 common

12

11 Channel 2 voltage output

Shielding connection

Channel 3 voltage output

8

14

16

13

Channel 2 current output

15 Shielding connection

17 Channel 3 common

Channel 3 current output

18

Shielding connection 20

19 Shielding connection

Note

It is advisable to use shielded cables and to link the shielding to the terminals designed for this purpose (Shielding connection).

___________________________________________________________________________

5 / 8

Communication Contents

TSX SCY 21600 module - PCMCIA cards Part D

___________________________________________________________________________

Section Page D

1 Presentation

1.1

Structure of network documentation

1.2

General communication architecture

1.3

Operating standards

2 Installation of the TSX SCY 21600 module 2/1

2.1

Presentation

2.2

Description

2.3

Characteristics of the integrated channel

2.4

Compatibility of the host channel

2.5

Installation

2.6

Operation

2.7

Module visual diagnostics

2.8

Connection of the integrated channel

2.8-1 Presentation

2.8-2 Connection to the UNI-TELWAY fieldbus

2.8-3 Principle of distributed adaptation for an RS485 line

2.8-4 Example of a UNI-TELWAY architecture

2.8-5 Connection to the Jbus/Modbus fieldbus

2.8-6 Principle of single line adaptation for an RS485 line

2.8-7 Example of a Modbus architecture

___________________________________________________________________________

D / 1

2/1

2/1

2/2

2/2

2/3

2/4

2/4

2/6

2/6

2/7

2/8

2/9

2/9

2/10

2/11

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/2

Communication

TSX SCY 21600 module - PCMCIA cards

Contents

Part D

D Section

2.8-8 Connection of the TSX SCA50 junction box

2.8-9 Connection in Character mode

2.8-10 TSX SCY 21600 module consumption

3 Installation of PCMCIA cards

3.1

Presentation

3.2

Description

3.3

Connection of the PCMCIA card host channel

3.3-1 Precautions relating to PCMCIA connections

3.3-2 Connecting PCMCIA cards

3.3-3 PCMCIA card references

3.3-4 Mounting cards and cables for TSX PREMIUM

3.3-5 Displaying the operating status of PCMCIA cards

3.3-6 PCMCIA card visual diagnostics

3.4

Connection of the TSX SCP 111 card

3.4-1 Point-to-point connection in character mode

(DTE <==> DTE)

3.4-2 UNI-TELWAY, Modbus or Character mode connection via Modem

3.5

Connection of the TSX SCP 112 card

3.5-1 Point-to-point connection

3.5-2 Multidrop connection

3.5-3 Dynamic performance

3.5-4 Connection to April 5000/7000 PLCs

3.6

Connection of the TSX SCP 114 card

3.6-1 Connection to the UNI-TELWAY network

3.6-2 Connection to the Modbus/Jbus bus

3.6-3 Character mode asynchronous link connection

Page

2/11

2/12

2/13

3/1

3/1

3/3

3/4

3/4

3/4

3/4

3/5

3/6

3/6

3/7

3/7

3/8

3/9

3/9

3/10

3/11

3/14

3/20

3/20

3/22

3/24

___________________________________________________________________________

D / 2

Communication Contents

TSX SCY 21600 module - PCMCIA cards Part D

___________________________________________________________________________

Section

3.7

Connection of TSX FPP 20 cards

3.8

Connection of TSX FPP 10 cards

3.9

Summary of connection cables

3.9-1 TSX SCP 111 card

3.9-2 TSX SCP 112 card

3.9-3 TSX SCP 114 card

3.9-4 TSX FPP 10 and TSX FPP 20 cards

3.10 Precautions for connecting PCMCIA cards

3.11 Current consumption of PCMCIA cards

3.11-1 Current consumption of TSX SCP 111 card

3.11-2 Current consumption of TSX SCP 112 card

3.11-3 Current consumption of TSX SCP 114 cards

3.11-4 Current consumption of TSX FPP 10 and TSX FPP20 cards

Page

3/25

D

3/26

3/27

3/27

3/27

3/27

3/27

3/28

3/28

3/28

3/28

3/28

3/28

___________________________________________________________________________

D / 3

Communication

TSX SCY 21600 module - PCMCIA cards

D Section

Contents

Part D

Page

___________________________________________________________________________

D / 4

1 Presentation

1.1

Structure of network documentation

This manual is aimed at users wishing to install a device with one or more communication networks.

Manuals :

TSX DM57 E : (this document) part D, provides general information regarding hardware aspects of network installation.

TSX DRNET E : reference manual provides an outline of the world of X-WAY communication, an overview of the various networks, and the X-WAY protocols.

Information on the individual networks is given in the following manuals :

TSX DG FPW E : FIPWAY network

TSX DG UTW E : UNI-TELWAY network

TSX DG MDB E : Modbus network

TSX DM COM PL7 13 E : PL7 communication manual, providing general information on software installation of the various networks.

D

1.2

General communication architecture

FIPWAY

TSX SCP 111

TSX FPP 20 TSX SCY CM 6030 TSX SCY CU 6030

TSX ACC4

MODBUS

TSX SCP

CD 1030

TSX SCP 114

TSX SCP CU 4030

TSX SCA 50 TSX SCA 50

UNI-TELWAY

TSX ACC4

TSX SCA 50

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1

D

1.3

Operating standards

The TSX SCY 21600 module and the PCMCIA communication cards comply with the following international standards :

• US standards

• CANADA standards

: UL508, IEC 1131-2

: CSA C22.2 / 142

• Conforming to regulations : FCC-B

• CE marking

• PCMCIA mechanical type III E standard

• PCMCIA 2.01.

The integrated link of the TSX SCY 21 600 module complies with the following communication standards :

• UNI-TELWAY,

• MODBUS,

• XWAY.

The TSX FPP 20 FIPWAY and TSX FPP10 FIPIO agent PCMCIA cards comply with the following communication standards :

• FIP protocol (link, network management),

• PCMCIA,

• XWAY.

The TSX SCP 111, 112, 114 PCMCIA cards comply with the following communication standards :

• UNI-TELWAY, Modbus protocols

• PCMCIA,

• XWAY.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 2

2 Installation of the TSX SCY 21600 module

2.1

Presentation

The TSX SCY 21600 communication module will take PCMCIA cards.

It has two communication channels :

• One multiprotocol integrated channel (channel 0), isolated RS485 asynchronous serial link, for UNI-TELWAY, Jbus/Modbus, or Character Mode protocols,

• One PCMCIA host channel (channel 1) which supports the following protocols :

- UNI-TELWAY, Jbus/Modbus, and Character Mode on an RS232-D, current loop or

RS485 link corresponding to the TSX SCP 111, 112 and 114 cards.

- FIPWAY cell network corresponding to the TSX FPP 20 card.

Important : the TSX SCY21600 module integrated channel is only compatible with a 2-wire RS485 link.

D

2.2

Description

The TSX SCY21600 module is a single format module for insertion in one of the TSX

Premium PLC slots.

This module comprises the following components :

1 - Three indicator lamps on the front panel of the module :

• RUN and ERR indicate the module status,

• CH0 displays the communication status of the integrated serial link channel

(channel 0),

2 - Integrated channel with a 25-pin female

SUB-D connector, standard RS 485 link in half duplex mode (channel 0) :

• UNI-TELWAY

• Jbus/Modbus

• Character mode

3 - Host channel for PCMCIA type III cards

(channel 1) :

• Serial link cards : TSX SCP 111, TSX

SCP 112, or TSX SCP 114

• FIPWAY cell network :

TSX FPP 20

(channel 0 : integrated channel)

1

2

(channel 1 : host channel)

3

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1

D

2.3

Characteristics of the integrated channel

The integrated channel of the TSX SCY 21 600 module comprises :

• an RS485 physical interface,

• a baseband asynchronous mode,

• a double twisted pair medium,

• UNITELWAY, Modbus and Character Mode protocols.

Protocol

Type

Speed

Number of devices

Number of slave addresses

Length of bus excluding tap-links

Size of messages

Function

UNITELWAY Modbus

Master-slave Master-slave

9,600 bits/sec.

9,600 bits/sec.

Can be configured Can be configured from 1,200 to from 1,200 to

19,200 bits/sec 19,200 bits/sec

28 28

98

1000 m.

240 bytes

98

1000 m.

256 bytes

Message handling Read Words/bits

Master-slave Write Words/bits

Slave-slave Diagnostics

UNI-TE requests

-

-

Character Mode

Half duplex

9,600 bits/sec.

Can be configured from 1,200 to

19,200 bits/sec

1000 m.

4 Kb

Transmission of character strings

Reception of character strings

2.4

Compatibility of the host channel

The cards accepted by the host channel are :

• TSX SCP 111,112,114 PCMCIA cards which are used for communication with TSX

7 PLCs, series 1000, Modicon and other products compatible with UNITELWAY,

Jbus/Modbus and Character mode. PCMCIA cards are also Jbus/Modbus compatible with series 1000 PLCs.

• The TSX FPP 20 card is compatible with FIPWAY devices :

- model 40 PLCs (TSX 47-455, TSX 67-455 etc) later than version 5.0,

- TSX 17 PLCs,

- connected PC compatibles with TSX FPC10 and TSX FPC 20 cards.

Note : the host channel does not accept the TSX FPP 10 card.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 2

Installation of the TSX SCY 21600 module 2

2.5

Installation

The TSX SCY 21600 module can be installed in a TSX Premium rack equipped with a

TSX 57-10 or TSX 57-20 processor, with a PLC application generated using PL7 Junior software.

The TSX SCY 21600 module is included in an X-WAY network architecture based on

TSX series 7, TSX Micro and TSX Premium.

This communication module provides the standard TSX Premium application with :

• an isolated multiprotocol RS485 communication channel,

• a slot for a PCMCIA standard communication card.

The TSX SCY 21600 module can be connected to any rack on the TSX Premium PLC station. Depending on whether the power supply is single or double width, the processor is at slot 0 or 1. The TSX SCY 21600 module occupies one of the other available slots.

The TSX SCY 21600 module can be located remotely in a Bus X remote rack of a TSX

Premium PLC station.

D

Maximum number of TSX SCY 21600 modules

TSX P57-10 processor

TSX P57-20 processor

Slot 1 to 710

Slot 1 to 710

2 modules maximum

6 modules maximum

Insertion / removal :

The TSX SCY 21600 module can be inserted or removed with the power on. This device does not have memory protection. When the module is disconnected from the rack, its internal memory is erased. The module goes through an initialization phase when it is reinserted.

A TSX SCY 21600 module with a PCMCIA card can be removed with the power on.

! PCMCIA cards cannot be removed with the power on.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 3

D

2.6

Operation

The TSX SCY 21600 module is a two-channel communication module from the

Premium range for use with TSX P57-10 and TSX P57-20 processors.

It is used for communication between the PLC and devices with an X-WAY architecture via UNI-TELWAY or Jbus/Modbus fieldbuses or the FIPWAY network.

The TSX SCY 21600 module manages two independent communication channels with their own functions :

• Channel 0 handles UNI-TELWAY, Jbus/Modbus, and Character mode protocols on a half duplex isolated standard RS485 physical link, with a speed restricted to 19200 bits per second,

• Channel 1 can take one of the following PCMCIA communication cards :

- Fieldbus : TSX SCP111 (RS232), TSX SCP112 (current loop), TSX SCP114

(RS 422/RS485) cards, UNI-TELWAY, Jbus/Modbus and Character Mode,

- Cell network : TSX FPP 20 FIPWAY card.

The PCMCIA card and protocol can be selected during configuration of the TSX SCY

21600 communication channels using PL7 Junior software.

2.7

Module visual diagnostics

There are three indicator lamps on the front panel of TSX SCY 21600 modules. These provide information on the operating status of the module and the communication

status of the integrated serial link channel :

RUN (Green)

ERR (Red)

CH0 (Yellow)

The communication status of the host channel is indicated by the ERR and COM indicator lamps on the PCMCIA serial link or FIPWAY cards, see section 5.3.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 4

Installation of the TSX SCY 21600 module 2

The indicator lamps on the TSX SCY 21600 module indicate the operating mode of the integrated channel. These indicator lamps can be : on, off or flashing.

State of indicator lamps

RUN ERR CHO Comments

(1) (1)

(1)

Module powered down, or not operating

No communication on the integrated channel

(2) Communication on the integrated channel

Serious fault on the integrated channel

Fault on the integrated channel, configuration fault, no device OK on the channel

Faulty device on the integrated channel

Self-tests

D

Key :

- On

- Off

- Flashing

- (1) = Indeterminate state

- (2) = line activity display.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 5

D

2.8

Connection of the integrated channel

2.8-1 Presentation

The wiring accessories for connecting the standard RS485 link of the TSX SCY 21600 module enable the following connections :

• connection to the UNI-TELWAY network via a TSX SCA 50 junction box with the

TSX SCY CU 6030 cable, or via a TSX SCA62 junction box with the

TSX SCY CU 6530 cable,

• connection to the Jbus/Modbus network via a TSX SCA 50 junction box with the TSX

SCY 6030 cable,

• connection to RS485 standard devices using a connector suitable for the link with the

TSX SCY CU 6030 or TSX SCY CM 6030 cable.

TSX SCY 21600

TSX SCY CU 6030 cable for UNI-TELWAY

TSX SCY CM 6030 cable for Jbus/Modbus

RS 485 integrated channel

TSX SCA 50

TSX SCY CU 6530 cable for UNI-TELWAY

TSX SCA 62

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 6

Installation of the TSX SCY 21600 module 2

2.8-2 Connection to the UNI-TELWAY fieldbus

The communication channel integrated in the module is connected to the UNI-TELWAY fieldbus with the TSX SCY CU 6030 connection cable, via the TSX SCA50 junction box.

25-pin SUB - D connector

UNI-TELWAY cable : TSX SCY CU 6030

TSX SCA 50

15-pin SUB - D connector

UNI-TELWAY cable : TSX SCY CU 6530

TSX SCA 62

Description of the TSX SCY CU 6030 cable

5 V

4.7 k

Ω

0 V

J1

20

13

25

0 V

0 V

6

12

19

24

D (A)

D (B)

TSX SCA 50 box connection

White

Red

2

3

4

White

Blue

5

1

8

0 V

4.7 k

Ω

Description of the TSX SCY CU 6530 cable

5 V

4.7 k Ω

0 V

J1

20

13

25

0 V

0 V

TSX SCA 62 box connection

15

8

0 VL

0 VL

6

12

19

24

D (A)

D (B)

7

14

D (A)

D (B)

15-pin SUB - D connector

8

0 V

4.7 k Ω

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 7

D

D

2.8-3 Principle of distributed adaptation for an RS485 line

This is the type of adaptation used for UNI-TELWAY networks

5 V

Rp

0 V

Rp

5 V

Rp

Rx–

0 V

Rp

Tx+

L–

5 V

Rp

L+

0 V

Rp

5 V

Rp

0 V

Rp

The above diagram shows the general architecture of a UNI-TELWAY network.

The network consists of a single shielded twisted pair. The various network stations are connected simply by linking :

• all the outputs marked + (Tx+, Rx+) on the + wire of the network marked (L+),

• all the outputs marked - (Tx-, Rx-) on the - wire of the network marked (L-).

The network impedance is matched by means of two line termination resistors (Zc) located on the stations at both ends of the network.

Distributed polarization of the network is achieved by connecting the L+ wire to the 0 V and the L- wire to the 5V by means of two polarization resistors (R = 4.7K

Ω

). This polarization keeps the network stable when it is de-energized. This adaptation must be performed for each network station .

The essential features are :

• up to 32 stations,

• maximum length : approximately 1,300 m,

• bus topology,

• tap link

≤

15 m,

• half duplex on 2 wires,

• line termination on the end stations.

• distributed adaptation Rp = 4.7K

Ω

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 8

Installation of the TSX SCY 21600 module 2

2.8-4 Example of a UNI-TELWAY architecture

TSX SCY CU 6530 TSX SCY CU 6030

D

TSX SCA 62

UNI-TELWAY

TSX SCA 50

2.8-5 Connection to the Jbus/Modbus fieldbus

The integrated channel is connected to the bus via the TSC SCA 50 junction box with the TSX SCY 6030 connection cable.

Integrated channel equipped with a

25-pin SUB-D connector

Jbus/Modbus cable : TSX SCY CM 6030

TSX SCA 50

Description of the TSX SCY CM 6030 cable

0 V

SCY 21600 module integrated channel connector

470 Ω

21

J1

TSX SCY CM 6030 cable

5 V

9

470

Ω

6 EMI –

24 EMI +

150

Ω

11

23

Green / White

White / Green

Orange / White

White / Orange

D(A)

D(B)

White / Blue

Blue / White

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 9

D

2.8-6 Principle of single adaptation for an RS485 line

This is the type of adaptation used for ModBus networks

Rc

5 V

Rp

Rx– Tx+

L–

L+

0 V

Rp

Rc

The above diagram shows the general architecture of an RS 485 network.

The transmitters are shown as

The receivers are shown as :

:

Tx+

(A)

Tx–

(B)

Rx+

(A')

Rx–

(B')

The network consists of a single shielded twisted pair. The various network stations are connected by linking :

• all the outputs marked + (Tx+, Rx+) on the + wire of the network marked (L+),

• all the outputs marked - (Tx-, Rx-) on the - wire of the network marked (L-).

The network impedance is matched by means of two line termination resistors (Rc) located on the stations at both ends of the network.

Polarization of the network is achieved by connecting the L+ wire to the 0 V and the Lwire to the 5V by means of two polarization resistors (R = 4.7K

Ω

). This polarization ensures there is always a current flowing through the network, and can be located at any point along the network (in practice it is generally at the level of the master).

It must be the only one on the network, whatever the network length.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 0

Installation of the TSX SCY 21600 module 2

The essential characteristics are :

• up to 32 stations,

• maximum length : approximately 1,300 m,

• bus topology,

• tap link

≤

15 m,

• half duplex on 2 wires,

• line termination on the end stations.

• single adaptation Rp = 47K

Ω

D

2.8-7 Example of a Modbus architecture

TSX SCY CM 6030

MODBUS

TSX SCA 50

2.8-8 Connection of the TSX SCA50 junction box

• Modbus connection without line matching

0 V

470

Ω

5 V

470 Ω

21

9

J1

6

24 nc nc

EMI –

EMI +

D(A)

D(B)

TSX SCY CM 6030 cable

Orange / White

White / Orange

TSX SCA50

1

D(A)

D(B)

4

5

150 Ω

11

23 nc nc

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 1

• Modbus connection with line matching

D

0 V

470

Ω

5 V

470 Ω

21

9

J1

6

24

TSX SCY CM 6030 cable

EMI –

EMI +

D(A)

D(B)

150 Ω

11

23

White / Green

Green / White

White / Orange

Orange / White

White / Blue

Blue / White

TSX SCA50

1

4

D (A)

5 D (B)

2.8-9 Connection in Character mode

The cable for connecting the TSX SCY 21600 module to an RS 485 standard device is the TSX SCY CM 6030 cable.

When connecting the TSX SCY 21600 integrated channel to a Half duplex standard

RS 485 device in Character mode, the user makes the connection using the

TSX SCY CM 6030 connection cable, adding a connector suitable for the device to be connected to the free end of the cable, and linking the required signals.

TSX SCY CM 6030 cable

Two-wire RS 485 device

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 2

Installation of the TSX SCY 21600 module 2

2.8-10 TSX SCY 21600 module consumption

This table shows the consumption of a TSX SCY 21600 communication module

without a PCMCIA card or connection to the integrated channel :

Voltage

5 Volts

Typical current

350 mA

Max current

420 mA

D

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 3

D

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 4

3 Installation of PCMCIA cards

3.1

Presentation

TSX Premium PLCs connect to networks, buses and communication links via PCMCIA communication cards.

The card comprises a metal case whose size conforms to the extended type III PCMCIA format.

These cards are inserted in the appropriate slot in the processor and/or TSX SCY 21600 module of TSX Premium PLCs.

Note:

!

PCMCIA cards must not be connected while the module is powered up.

D

Each TSX SCP 11• PCMCIA card supports a different physical layer. This card family comprises three products.

• The RS 232-D link, reference TSX SCP 111,

• The current loop link (20 mA), reference TSX SCP 112,

• The RS 485 link (compatible with the RS 422), reference TSX SCP 114.

Each card in the TSX SCP 111, 112, 114 family offers all the communication protocols.

The protocols which can be used for each PCMCIA card are as follows :

• Modbus/Jbus protocol,

• UNI-TELWAY protocol,

• Character mode (asynchronous link).

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1

D

The TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card supports the FIP physical layer. The card is used to connect a TSX Premium PLC to a FIPWAY network, and is also suitable for devices made by manufacturers who wish to connect their products to the FIPWAY network.

The card has four selection switches

labelled "1" used to set the code for the network and station number.

PCMCIA cards may also be used on devices with a type III slot, such as the

CCX 17, FTX 417-40 terminals or third-party equipment, for example PC compatibles.

1

The PCMCIA TSX FPP 10 card is used to connect a TSX Premium PLC to a FIPIO bus by acting as a FIPIO agent and provides the link with TSX 47-107 and April 5000 PLCs.

Setup, use and maintenance of PCMCIA cards is performed using PL7 Junior programming and run-time software for TSX Premium PLCs.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

3.2

Description

Type III E (extended) PCMCIA communication cards are incorporated in a metal case with the following dimensions :

• length 85.6 mm,

• width 51 mm,

• height 10 mm.

D

The front of the card displays the communication operating status and is the point of physical connection to the network.

The mechanical configuration of the card can be adapted according to the type of installation required. The PCMCIA card is fitted with either a removable cover with two lugs, or a plain removable cover.

The plain removable cover (1) is used for connecting PC compatible devices.

The removable cover with lugs (2) has fixing screws for physically connecting the card in the host module (for example,

PCMCIA card installed in the processor of the TSX Premium).

Note : Both covers are supplied with the card.

1

2

Connection to the network is obtained by connecting the cable to the front of the card.

A module locating device prevents incorrect mounting. The product reference label informs the user of the type of physical layer supported by the card.

Note

The use of covers with lugs, mounted on the PCMCIA cards, prevents unintentional removal while the module is powered up and ensures correct card operation.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3

D

3.3

Connection of the PCMCIA card host channel

3.3-1 Precautions relating to PCMCIA connections

! The PCMCIA card must only be handled when the power is off. When removing or inserting it, the unit may not operate. There are no warm restart procedures between the

PCMCIA card and the TSX SCY 21600 host device.

If the operating environment makes it impossible to stop the application by switching the

PLC off, it is advisable to remove both the TSX SCY 21600 module and the PCMCIA card.

The PCMCIA card must be fitted with its PLC version cover and must be screwed into the TSX SCY 21600 host module, before the unit is powered up (see section 4).

3.3-2 Connecting PCMCIA cards

The connection of PCMCIA cards on a UNI-TELWAY or Modbus/Jbus fieldbus or in

Character mode to a standard device is described in section 4 of this document.

List of connection equipment required to use a specific protocol from a PCMCIA card :

PCMCIA cards

TSX SCP 111 (RS232)

TSX SCP 112 (BC)

UNI-TELWAY

(1)

TSX SCP CX 2030

TSX SCP 114 (RS422/RS485) TSX SCP CU 4030 and TSX SCA 50

JBUS/MODBUS Character mode

(1) TXS SCP CD 1030/1130

TSX SCP CX 2030 TSX SCP CX 2030

TSX SCP CM 4030 TSX SCP CU 4030 and TSX SCA 50 TSX SCP CM 4030

(1) : with point-to-point : TSX SCP CD 1030/1130 cables, with multidrop via a modem : TSX SCP CC 1030 cable.

Connection of the TSX FPP 20 FIPWAY card via the host channel is performed using the TSX FPCG 10 or TSX FPCG 30 cable.

3.3-3 PCMCIA card references

PCMCIA card references are as follows :

• TSX SCP 111 : multiprotocol card RS 232 D, 9 signals, not isolated,

• TSX SCP 112 : multiprotocol card, 20 mA current loop,

• TSX SCP 114 : multiprotocol RS 485 card, compatible with RS 422, isolated,

• TSX FPP 20 : FIPWAY card

• TSX FPP 10 : FIPIO Agent card

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 4

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

3.3-4 Mounting cards and cables for TSX PREMIUM

PCMCIA cards consist of the following components :

1 Assembled card.

2 Body, made of Zamak.

3 PCMCIA connector.

4 Upper cover.

5 Removable cover.

6 Connection cable with ferrule.

5

1

2

3

4

D

6

The removable cover (5) displays the operating status of the card in its environment. The function of the two indicator lamps is printed on the front of the removable cover.

The product reference label indicates the type of PCMCIA card. It is located on the upper cover (4).

The metal ferrule (6), located at the PCMCIA card end of the cable, prevents the cable being trapped by the removable cover. The ferrule eliminates the risk of the cable being subjected to a bending radius, which could have a detrimental effect on the quality of the connection.

PCMCIA cards are fitted by assembling the connection accessory (a cable which varies according to the type of transmission support chosen), and then screwing the removable cover with fixing lugs onto the base. This cover can be used to fix the PCMCIA card inside the processor or the TSX SCY 21600 module.

A 20-pin connector is used on the PCMCIA card end.

Processor or

TSX SCY 21600 slot

To fit the transmission support to the card, first unscrew the cover from the case, then assemble as described below :

1 Connect the cable.

2 Place the cover with lugs on the case.

3 Screw on the cover.

4 Next, insert the card in the appropriate slot in the host device.

5 Screw in the card to prevent it being removed while powered up and to ensure correct operation.

1

2

5

4

3

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 5

D

3.3-5 Displaying the operating status of PCMCIA cards

There are two diagnostic indicator lamps on the front of the card. They provide the user with information on the operating status of exchanges between the device supporting the PCMCIA card and the connected device.

"ERR" error indicator lamp (1) (normally off) displays faults.

The "ERR" indicator lamp is red.

"COM" communication indicator lamp (2) displays line activity.

The "COM" indicator lamp is yellow.

1

2

3.3-6 PCMCIA card visual diagnostics

The PCMCIA card indicator lamps show the communication operating mode and provide card diagnostics.

Indicator lamp state

ERR COM

(1)

Meaning

Device not powered up

No dialogue

Corrective action

Check power supply and connection to the card

Normal operation

Serious fault

Operational fault

Change card

Check configuration and connection to communication bus

Operational fault Check configuration

Indicator on Indicator off

(1) : state of the indicator lamp indeterminate.

Indicator flashing.

When the "ERR" indicator lamp on the TSX FPP 20 card flashes, this indicates that an external fault has occurred. External faults include :

• line fault,

• station already present on the network,

• incorrect coding of the network-station address (selector switch coding).

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 6

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

3.4

Connection of the TSX SCP 111 card

3.4-1 Point-to-point connection in character mode (DTE <==> DTE)

The TSX SCP 111 card, with RS 232 D as the physical support, is inserted either in the processor or in the SCY 21600 module. It is connected via the TSX SCP CD 1030/1100 cable to the connected device.

DTE to DTE type devices such as terminals or printers can be connected (DTE means :

Data Terminal Equipment).

The cable required for this connection is reference TSX SCP CD 1030/1100.

D

Type of connection

The TSX SCP 111 PCMCIA card is connected directly to the device via the

TSX SCP CD 1030 cable.

The two connected devices are DTEs (Data Terminal Equipment).

TSX SCP 111

TSX SCP CD 1030 (3 m. long) or TSX SCP CD 1100 (10 m. long)

Description of the TSX SCP CD 1030 cable

The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :

TXD

RXD

RTS

CTS

8

7

10

9

DCD

SG

18

15

Printer

SUB-D 25 M

connector

4

20

3

2

5

RXD

TXD

CTS

RTS

DTR

J2

7

SG

1

PG

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 7

D

3.4-2 UNI-TELWAY, Modbus or Character mode connection via Modem

Connection of the PCMCIA card to the UNI-TELWAY, Modbus or Character mode bus via a Modem and a telephone link (DTE / DCE type) can be achieved using the

TSX SCP CC 1030 cable. The card is either inserted into the processor or into the

SCY 21600 module (DCE means : data communication device).

Type of connection

The TSX SCP 111 PCMCIA card is linked to the connected device via the

TSX SCP CC 1030 cable.

The connected devices are DCE (Data Conversion Equipment) type; for example a

MODEM or converters.

TSX SCP 111

TSX SCP CC 1030 (3 m. long)

Description of the TSX SCP CC 1030 cable

The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :

J1

TXD

RXD

RTS

CTS

DTR

DSR

DCD

RI

CH/CI

SG

14

13

18

17

19

8

7

10

9

15

Modem

SUB-D 25 M connector

20

6

8

22

23

4

5

2

3

7

TXD

RXD

RTS

CTS

DTR

DSR

DCD

RI

CH/CI

SG

J2

1

PG

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 8

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

3.5

Connection of the TSX SCP 112 card

The TSX SCP 112 PCMCIA card is used to connect a TSX 57 PLC to a 20mA current loop link in point-to-point or multidrop connection.

An external power supply must always be used to provide the necessary current to power the current loop.

The TSX SCP CX 2030 cable is used to perform this type of connection (3m long).

Description of the TSX SCP CX 2030 cable

The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals:

9

J1

+ Supply

White / Blue

13

Orange / White

19

White / Green

17

Green / White

2

White / Orange

20

- Supply

Blue / White

D

Notes

To connect the TSX SCP 112 card in multidrop mode, a screw terminal block must be used.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 9

D

3.5-1 Point-to-point connection

Wiring principle for TSX SCP112 current loop PCMCIA cards in point-to-point.

Point-to-point connection is only possible in 20mA inactive mode.

Station 1

SCP112

9

19

17

2

20

Station 2

SCP112

9

19

17

2

20

+

24 V

–

Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2

Important : the cable shielding must be connected as closely as possible to the terminal blocks.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 0

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

3.5-2 Multidrop connection

Multidrop connection is only possible in 0mA inactive mode. Transmissions and receptions are wired in parallel. The Master is defined by the program.

Example of connection of n TSX SCP 112 cards :

Station 1

SCP112

Station 2

SCP112

Station n

SCP112

D

19

17

9

13

20

19

17

9

13

20

19

17

9

13

20

+

24 V

–

Rc

Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2

RC = optional load resistor

Terminal block n

Important : the cable shielding must be connected as closely as possible to the terminal blocks.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 1

D

3.5-3 Dynamic performance

The flow rate of a current loop link is limited by the cross-section and length of the cable used.

The user should refer to the two diagrams below to get an idea of the performance that can be achieved for his application.

Point-to-point

These curves are for a shielded two-pair cable (transmission in one pair, reception in the other). All precautions for use are adhered to.

speed in Kbps

20

15

10

5

1 mm 2 cable, 4500m max

0.64 mm 2 cable, 2500m max

0.34 mm 2 cable, 1300m max

0

200 500 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 line length in meters

Multidrop

The graph below is for a shielded cable where the conductor cross-section is 0.34 mm 2 , connected in accordance with the parallel multidrop diagram above. The use of conductors with a larger cross-section will improve the quality of the transmitted signals.

16

Number of connected stations

19200 bps

9600 bps

4800 bps

2400 bps

6

1200 bps

600 bps

2

100 500 1000 1500 line length in meters

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 2

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

The performance of a multidrop link is much improved when a large number of stations are connected. The load on the line is greater, which improves the quality of the transmitted signal.

When connection is performed according to the preceding diagram, the number of stations can be artificially increased (up to a maximum of 16 stations) by loading the line at one end. This can be performed by incorporating a load resistor. This load resistor can be connected on any terminal block as long as it is between pins 17 and 19 of the

SCP112 cards.

The value of resistor R, which simulates the load of "N" stations is determined by the formula :

U

R = ------------

N

×

20

R in K

Ω

U = external power supply voltage

N = Number of stations to be simulated

Example :

An installation has 6 physically connected stations in multidrop in accordance with the preceding diagram, with a 24V external power supply.

The line performance will be the same as for 10 stations, with the load of 4 additional stations simulated by a resistor :

24

R = ------------ = 0.3K

Ω

4

×

20

D

Note : The load resistor should not produce any inductive effect, otherwise operation may be affected.

Use thick film type resistors.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 3

D

3.5-4 TSX SCP 112 connection to April 5000/7000 PLCs

The 20 mA current loop TSX SCP 112 PCMCIA card is used to connect April communication modules, type JBU0220 and JBU0250. Multidrop connection of the

TSX SCP 112 PCMCIA card to JBU0220 and JBU0250 modules is performed in serial

mode. For connection of April modules refer to the TEM60000E reference manual.

Important : The TSX SCP 112 must be configured in point-to-point mode in the PL7 configuration screen, regardless of whether a point-to-point or a serial multidrop link is used.

Notes :

The current loop permits a current of 20 mA when the PLC is inactive in both point-to-point and multidrop mode.

If a slave is powered down, the transmitter of this slave becomes conducting, the line is available.

If the loop power supply is located remotely, on one of the slaves, the powering down of this slave interrupts communication.

Point-to-point type link : JBU0220 or JBU0250 module active

TSX SCP 112

+SUPP White / Blue

+ –

24 V

JBU0220/0250

RX+ White / Green 19

RX– Green / White 18

17

TX P-P

White / Orange

–SUPP

Blue / White

15

14

10

16

Master or slave passive Master or slave active

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 4

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

Point-to-point type link : TSX SCP 112 card active

TSX SCP 112

+SUPP

RX+

RX–

White / Blue

White / Green

+ –

24 V

JBU0220/0250

TX P-P

Green / White

White / Orange

14

10

16

19

18

17

15

–SUPP

Blue / White

Master or slave active Master or slave passive

D

Mixed stations link

TSX SCP 112

+SUPP

RX+

RX–

TX P-P

White / Blue

White / Green

Green / White

White / Orange

Blue / White

+ –

24 V

JBU0220/0250

19

18

17

15

14

10

16 –SUPP

Master or slave : passive on reception active in transmission

Master or slave : passive on reception active in transmission

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 5

D

Multidrop type link

The following examples describe the various wiring possibilities for the TSX SCP 112 card with JBU0220/0250 modules.

Important : always connect the 24 V supply of each TSX SCP 112 in the loop, whether active or passive, otherwise the link may not operate.

These supplies must not have any common point (voltage).

Do not connect the -24 V of the supplies to ground.

Example 1 : Multidrop TSX SCP 112 master active

TSX SCP 112

+SUPP

RX+

RX–

White / Blue

White / Green

+ –

24 V

Green / White

TX P-P White / Orange

–SUPP Blue / White

Master active

JBU0220/0250

19

18

17

15

14

10

16

15

14

10

16

Slave 1 passive

19

18

17

Slave 2 passive

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 6

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

Example 2 : Multidrop master JBU0220/0250 active on transmission / reception

JBU0220/0250

19

18

17

15

14

10

16

JBU0220/0250

19

18

17

15

14

10

16

Master active on transmission/ reception

–

24 V

+

White / Blue

White / Green

Slave 1 passive

+SUPP

RX+

Green / White

RX–

D

White / Orange

TX P-P

Blue / White

–SUPP

TSX SCP 112

Slave 2 passive

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 7

D

Example 3 : Multidrop master JBU0220/0250 active on transmission/reception -

TSX SCP 112 slaves.

TSX SCP 112

JBU0220/0250

19

18

– +

White / Blue

24 V

White / Green

+SUPP

RX+

Green / White RX–

17

15

14

10

16

White / Orange TX P-P

Blue / White –SUPP

Master active on transmission/ reception

–

24 V

+

White / Blue

Slave 1 passive

+SUPP

White / Green RX+

Green / White RX–

White / Orange TX P-P

Blue / White –SUPP

TSX SCP 112

Slave 2 passive

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 8

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

Example 4 : Multidrop master active TSX SCP 112.

TSX SCP 112

+SUPP White / Blue

RX+

+ –

White / Green

24 V

RX– Green / White

TSX SCP 112

– +

White / Blue

24 V

White / Green

+SUPP

RX+

Green / White RX–

D

TX P-P White / Orange

Master active on transmission/ reception

–SUPP Blue / White

White / Orange TX P-P

Blue / White –SUPP

Slave 1 passive

19

18

17

15

14

10

16

JBU0220/0250

Slave 2 passive

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 9

D

3.6

Connection of the TSX SCP 114 card

3.6-1 Connection to the UNI-TELWAY network

The TSX SCP 114 card, with RS 485 as the physical support, is connected to the

UNI-TELWAY network using cable TSX SCP CU 4030, via the TSX SCA 50 junction box, or using cable TSX SCP CU 4530 (fitted with a 15-pin SUB-D connector) via the

TSX SCA62 junction box.

The card is inserted into the processor or into the SCY 21600 module.

The TSX SCA50 is passive, comprising a printed circuit with 3 sets of screw clamp terminals. It is used for connecting a station, via tap link, to the trunk cable segment of a UNI-TELWAY bus.

Electrical continuity of the signals, shielding and end of line termination are thus provided.

Type of connection

The cable of the PCMCIA card has flying leads for connection to the terminal block located inside the junction box.

TSX SCP 114

TSX SCA 50

TSX SCP CU 4030 TSX SCA 50

Note

Using the tap junction box configures the wiring system for the card as a tap-link type connection system.

Description of the TSX SCP CU 4030 cable

The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :

J1

4,7 k Ω

5 V

0 V

0 V

4,7 k Ω

10

12

11

9

7

6

8

17

16

19

1

2

0 V

0 V

D (A)

D (B)

TSX SCA 50 junction box

White

Red

White

Blue

1

2

3

4

5

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 0

Connection via a TSX SCA 62 junction box

TSX SCP 114

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

TSX SCA 62

D

TSX SCP CU 4530

Description of the TSX SCP CU 4530 cable

The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :

5 V

4.7 k

Ω

0 V

0 V

4.7 k

Ω

8

10

12

11

17

16

6

9

7

19

1

2

J1

0 V

0 V

D (A)

D (B)

TSX SCA 62 junction box

Red

White

White

Blue

15

8

7

14

0 VL

0 VL

D (A)

D (B)

15-pin SUB-D

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 1

D

3.6-2 Connection to the Modbus/Jbus bus

The TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card is connected to the Modbus bus via the

TSX SCP CM 4030 serial link cable. This cable is connected to the TSX SCA 50 junction box.

Type of connection

The cable of the PCMCIA card has flying leads for connection to the terminal block located inside the connection box.

TSX SCP 114

TSX SCP CM 4030

TSX SCA 50

Comment :

The user cable (3 m) allows a device to be connected to a TSX SCA 50 junction box located at up to 3 meters from the card. This length ensures that connection is possible within a standard floor-standing enclosure.

Description of the TSX SCP CM 4030 cable

The 20-pin miniature PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :

J1

10

12

11

9

5 V

0 V

470 Ω

470

Ω

1

2

20

18

Pup 470

Pdw 470

Ω

Ω

13 ADP 150 Ω

150 Ω

Green / White

White / Green

Orange / White

White / Orange

Brown / White

Important : on a Modbus / Jbus bus it is necessary to :

• Polarize the line, usually in one place only, (generally on the master device) using

Pull-down and pull-up resistors of 470

Ω

available on the PCMCIA card. Connect pullup R to TX+ (D(A)) and pull-down R to TX- (D(B)).

• Match the line on the two end devices by a 150

Ω

resistor between TX+ and TX-

(connection on TX- is already internally performed by the card).

Important : to connect a TSX SCP114 card to a Series 1000 (S1000) PLC, it is essential to connect TX+ to L-.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 2

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

Modbus connection to TSX SCA 50 box

Connection without line terminator

5 V

0 V

J1

470

470

150

TX –

TX –

TX +

TX +

Pup 470r

Pdw 470r

RX –

RX +

ADP 150r

10

12

11

9

20

18

1

2

13

Green / White

White / Green nc nc nc

TSX SCA 50

1

4

5 s

D (A)

D

D (B)

Connection of SCA 50 with line terminator

5 V

0 V

J1

470

470

150

TX –

TX –

TX +

TX +

Pup 470r

Pdw 470r

RX –

RX +

ADP 150r

20

18

1

10

12

11

9

2

13

Green / White

White / Green

Orange / White

White / Orange

Brown / White

TSX SCA 50

1

4

5 s

D (A)

D (B)

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 3

D

3.6-3 Multi-protocol asynchronous link connection, RS 422

No special accessories are required for connecting the TSX SCP 114 card in Character mode.

The reference number of the connection cable for the RS 485/RS 422 PCMCIA card is

TSX SCP CX 4030. The cable is 3 meters long.

Type of connection

The TSX SCP 114 PCMCIA card is connected in point-to-point mode to a standard

RS 422A VAX station type device.

Industrial calculator

TSX SCP 114

TSX SCP CX 4030

Description of the TSX SCP CX 4030 cable

The 20-pin miniature 20 PCMCIA connector supports the following signals :

J1

GND

470

Ω

18

10

TX –

TX +

12

11

9

VDC

470

Ω

20

RX –

1

RX +

2

ADP Rx

5

ADP 150r

13

16

0 V iso

4

Green / White

White / Green

White / Orange

Orange / White

Brown / White

Also see section 2 for connection of the TSX SCY 21600 integrated link in character mode.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 4

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

3.7

Connection of TSX FPP 20 cards

TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA cards are connected to the FIPWAY network using a TSX FP ACC4 or a TSX FP ACC12 type connector.

To connect the PCMCIA card to the ACC4/ACC12 connector, the user may select either :

• a 1 m cable, reference TSX FPCG 10,

• a 3 m cable, reference TSX FPCG 30.

The figure below shows the components needed to connect the TSX Premium PLC to the FIPWAY network :

• TSX 57 processor or SCY 21600 module,

• TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA card,

• TSX FPCG 10/30 cable,

• TSX FP ACC4 junction box.

D

FIPWAY

••••••••••••••••••

••

Processor slot or

TSX SCY 21600

TSX FPCG 10/30

Important

The cables (TSX FPCG 10 and 30) may be connected to and disconnected from the

PCMCIA card only when it is powered down.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 5

D

3.8

Connection of TSX FPP 10 cards

TSX FPP 10 PCMCIA cards are connected to the FIPIO bus using a TSX FP ACC4 or

TSX FP ACC12 type connector.

To connect the PCMCIA card to the ACC4 / ACC12 connector, the user may select either :

• a 1m cable, reference TSX FPCG 10,

• a 3 m cable, reference TSX FPCG 30.

The figure below shows the components needed to connect the TSX Premium PLC to the FIPIO remote I/O bus :

• TSX P5710-20 processor,

• TSX FPP 10 PCMCIA card,

• TSX FPCG 10/30 cable,

• TSX FP ACC4 junction box.

FIPIO

Processor slot

•••••••••••••••••• ••

TSX FP ACC4

TSX FPCG 10/30

Important

The cables (TSX FPCG 10 and 30) may be connected to and disconnected from the

PCMCIA card only when it is powered down.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 6

Installation of PCMCIA cards 3

3.9

Summary of connection cables

3.9-1 TSX SCP 111 card

Type of cable

Modem cable

Reference

TSX SCP CC 1030

Standard cable TSX SCP CD 1030

TSX SCP CD 1100

Description

Cable for connection via Modem

DTE/DCE, 9 signals, RS 232D, l = 3 m

Cable for DTE/DTE connection

RS 232D, l = 3 m or 10 m

D

3.9-2 TSX SCP 112 card

Type of cable

Current loop cable

Reference

TSX SCP CX 2030

Description

20 mA CL cable l = 3m.

3.9-3 TSX SCP 114 card

Type of cable

Universal cable

Reference

TSX SCP CX 4030

UNI-TELWAY cable

Modbus cable

Connection box

Connection box

Converter box

TSX SCP CU 4030

TSX SCP CM 4030

TSX SCA 50

TSX SCA 62

TSX SCA72

Description

Universal cable, RS 485 type and

RS 422A, l = 3 m

RS 485 2-wire cable, l = 3 m

RS 485 2-wire cable, l = 3 m

Connection box (screw) to bus for for RS 485 serial link

Connection box (connector) to bus for RS 485 serial link

RS 232D / RS 485 converter box

3.9-4 TSX FPP 10 and TSX FPP 20 cards

Type of cable

FIPWAY/FIPIO cable

FIPWAY/FIPIO cable

Connection box

Connection box

Reference

TSX PPCG 10

TSX FPPCG 30

TSX FP ACC4

TSX FP ACC12

Description

Connection cable, l = 1 m

Connection cable, l = 3 m

FIPWAY/FIPIO connection box

Low-cost FIPWAY/FIPIO connection

3 / 2 7

D

3.10 Precautions for connecting PCMCIA cards

Important

PCMCIA cards must be connected to and disconnected from the host device

(processor or TSX SCY 21600) with the device powered down.

The ferrule placed in direct contact with the PCMCIA card casing serves to discharge electrical interference carried by the connection cable braid.

3.11 Current consumption of PCMCIA cards

3.11-1 Current consumption of TSX SCP 111 card

Voltage

5 volts

Typical current

140 mA

Maximum current

300 mA

3.11-2 Current consumption of TSX SCP 112 card

Voltage

5 volts

Typical current

120 mA

Maximum current

300 mA

3.11-3 Current consumption of TSX SCP 114 cards

Voltage

5 volts

Typical current

150 mA

Maximum current

300 mA

3.11-4 Current consumption of TSX FPP 10 and TSX FPP20 cards

Voltage Typical current Maximum current

5 volts 280 mA 330 mA

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 8

Index part D

Index

C L

Cable

TSX SCP CC 1030

TSX SCP CD 1030

TSX SCP CM 4030

TSX SCP CU 4030

TSX SCP CU 4530

TSX SCP CX 2030

TSX SCP CX 4030

TSX SCY CM 6030

TSX SCY CU 6030

TSX SCY CU 6530

Character mode connection

D 3/8

D 3/7

D 3/22

D 3/20

D 3/21

D 3/9

D 3/24

D 2/9, D 2/11

D 2/7

D 2/7

D 3/7

Characteristics

Integrated channel

Connection

TSX FPP 10

TSX FPP 20

TSX SCP 111

TSX SCP 112

TSX SCP 114 network

Connection via Modem

Current consumption of PCMCIA cards

D 2/2

D 2/2

D 3/7

D 3/26

D 3/25

D 3/7

D 3/9

D 3/20

Connection in Character mode D 2/12

Connection of the integrated channel D 2/6

To the UNI-TELWAY fieldbus D 2/7

Connection to the Jbus/Modbus fieldbus

Connection to the UNI-TELWAY

D 2/9

D 3/20

D 3/8

D 3/28

Link

Multidrop D 3/11

Point-to-point D 3/10

SCP 112 / April 5000/7000 PLCs D 3/14

M

Modbus architecture

Modbus/Jbus bus connection

N

Network architecture

Network documentation

O

Operation

P

PCMCIA connection accessory

PCMCIA card protocols

PCMCIA card visual diagnostics

PCMCIA cards

Connection

Description

Display

Mounting

Precautions

Presentation

References

PCMCIA card consumption

R

D 2/11

D 3/22

D 1/1

D 1/1

D 2/4

D 3/5

D

Distributed line matching

Dynamic performance

J

D 2/8

D 3/12

RS 232 D physical support

RS 485 physical support

D 3/7

D 3/20

Junction box

TSX SCA 62

TSX SCA 50

D 3/21

D 2/11

S

Single line matching D 2/10

Standards D 1/2

Summary of connection cables D 3/27

___________________________________________________________________________

I / 1

D 3/1

D 3/6

D 3/1

D 3/4

D 3/3

D 3/6

D 3/5

D 3/4

D 3/1

D 3/4

D 3/28

B

T

TSX FPP 10

TSX FPP 20

"ERR" indicator lamp

TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA

TSX SCA 62

TSX SCA50

TSX SCP 111

TSX SCP 112

TSX SCP 114

TSX SCP CC 1030

TSX SCP CD 1030

TSX SCP CM 4030

TSX SCP CU 4030

TSX SCP CU 4530

TSX SCP CX 203

TSX SCP CX 4030

TSX SCP PCMCIA assembly configuration

D 3/20

D 3/21

D 3/9

D 3/24 dimensions indicator lamps module locating device slot

TSX SCY 21600

Description

Insertion / removal :

Installation

Presentation

TSX SCY 21600 module

D 3/5

D 3/3

D 3/3

D 3/6

D 3/3

D 3/1

D 2/1

D 2/1

D 2/3

D 2/3

D 2/1 consumption D 2/13

TSX SCY 21600 visual diagnostics D 2/4

D 3/26

D 3/25

D 3/6

D 3/2

D 3/21

D 2/11

D 3/7

D 3/9

D 3/20

D 3/8

D 3/7

D 3/22

U

UNI-TELWAY architecture D 2/9

___________________________________________________________________________

I / 2

___________________________________________________________________________

TSX CTY 2A and TSX CTY 4A Contents counter modules Part E

___________________________________________________________________________

Section

1 Presentation

1.1

Description

1.1-1 General

1.1-2 Physical description

Page

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/2

E

2 Functions 2/1

2.1

Presentation of different counting functions

2.1-1 Downcounting function

2.1-2 Upcounting function

2.1-3 Up/down counting function

2.2

Upcounting or downcounting on TSX CTY 2A and TSX CTY 4A modules

2.3

Up/down counting on TSX CTY 2A and TSX CTY 4A modules

2.4

Connection principle of EPSR input "power supply return"

2/3

2/6

2/13

2/1

2/1

2/1

2/2

3 Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules

3.1

Number of counter modules controlled by a TSX 57 PLC

3.2

Positioning and inserting TSX CTY 2A/4A modules

3.3

Types of sensor which can be used on counter inputs

3.4

TSX CTY 2A/4A module electrical characteristics

3.4-1 General module characteristics

3.4-2 Counter input characteristics

3.4-3 Auxiliary input characteristics

3.4-4 Auxiliary output characteristics

___________________________________________________________________________

E/1

3/1

3/1

3/2

3/3

3/4

3/4

3/5

3/7

3/9

___________________________________________________________________________

TSX CTY 2A and TSX CTY 4A Contents counter modules Part E

___________________________________________________________________________

E

Section

3.5

15-pin SUB-D and HE10 connector pinout

3.5-1 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector

3.5-2 20-pin HE10 connector

3.6

Connection of encoder type counting sensors

3.6-1 Connection principle

3.6-2 Connection of the TSX CTY 2A/4A module to the encoder

3.6-3 Connection of the power supply and sensors to auxiliary inputs and outputs

3.7

Connections with proximity sensor type counting sensors

3.7-1 Connection principle

3.7-2 Connection of counting sensors and their power supply

3.7-3 Connection of sensors to auxiliary inputs and outputs and their power supply

3.7-4 Wiring precautions

3.8

General installation rules

3.8-1 Installation

3.8-2 General wiring instructions

3.8-3 Encoder and auxiliary sensor supplies

3.8-4 Software setup

3/19

3/19

3/20

3/21

3/22

3/23

3/23

3/23

3/24

3/24

Page

3/10

3/10

3/11

3/12

3/12

3/14

3/18

___________________________________________________________________________

E/2

___________________________________________________________________________

TSX CTY 2A and TSX CTY 4A Contents counter modules Part E

___________________________________________________________________________

Section

4 Appendices

4.1

TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base : ABE-7CPA01

4.1-1 Presentation

4.1-2 Wiring diagram

4.1-3 Dimensions and mounting

4.1-4 Availability of counting signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block

4.1-5 Correspondence betw. TELEFAST term. blocks and

15-pin SUB-D connectors

Page

4/1

4/1

4/1

4/2

4/2

4/3

4/4

E

4.2

TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base : ABE-7H08R20

4.2-1 Presentation

4.2-2 Availability of signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal

block

4.2-3 Correspondence betw. TELEFAST term. blocks and HE10

connectors

4/5

4/5

4/6

4/7

4.3

Wiring accessory for incremental encoder with RS 422/485 output :

TAP S15 05 / TAP S15 24

4.3-1 Presentation

4.3-2 Installation of TSX TAP S15 ii

4.3-3 Correspondence table between 15-pin SUB-D and

12-pin DIN connectors.

4/8

4/8

4/9

4/11

4.4

Connection to modules with HE10 connectors

4.4-1 20-wire preformed cable, 22 gauge (0.34 mm2)

4.4-2 Preformed connection cable with flying leads and sheath,

28 gauge (0.08 mm2)

4.4-3 Connection cable, 28 gauge (0.34 mm2)

4/12

4/12

4/13

4/13

4.5

Module display 4/14

___________________________________________________________________________

E/3

___________________________________________________________________________

TSX CTY 2A and TSX CTY 4A Contents counter modules Part E

___________________________________________________________________________

Page

E

Section

___________________________________________________________________________

E/4

1 Presentation

1.1

Description

1.1-1 General

The TSX CTY 2A and 4A counter modules are standard format modules for counting pulses at a maximum frequency of 40 kHz. They can be installed in all TSX 57-10 or

TSX 57-20 positions. These modules can be installed in the extension rack provided with the TSX 57-10 or in the 7 extension racks provided with the TSX 57-20.

The number of TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules which can be used in a TSX 57-20 PLC is limited to 6 modules, and for a TSX 57-10 PLC to 2 modules.

These two modules differ only in the number of channels they have : 2 channels for the

TSX CTY 2A module, 4 channels for the TSX CTY 4A module. Both perform upcounting, downcounting or up/down counting functions.

Sensors used on each channel can be :

• either 5 VDC or 10...30 VDC transistor outputs (RS 422 or Totem Pole standard line driver encoders), in this case the maximum counting frequency is up to 40 kHz,

• or volt-free contact outputs, in which case the input filtering for receiving the counting pulses is increased in order to prevent contact bounce being taken into account when the contact closes.

E

Proximity sensor

Incremental encoder

Photoelectric sensor

TSX CTY 2A

TSX 57-10 PLC

TSX 57-20 PLC

TSX CTZ 1A

TSX CTY 4A

___________________________________________________________________________

1/1

E

1.1-2 Physical description

1 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting :

• the counting sensor(s) corresponding to channel 0 and 1 for module TSX CTY 2A and to channel 0, 1,

2 and 3 for module TSX CTY 4A.

• the encoder power supply if this type of sensor is used,

• the encoder power supply return which confirms that this is correctly supplied.

2 20-pin HE10 connector for connecting (each channel) :

• auxiliary inputs :

- resetting or setting preset value,

- enable counter,

- read,

• auxiliary outputs,

• external supply :

- auxiliary input and output supply,

- supply for other sensors.

3 Screw for fixing the module in its position.

4 Rigid casing providing :

• support for the electronic card,

• guidance of module into its slot.

TSX CTY 2A

2

3

4

5

1

3

4

5

1

5 Module diagnostics indicator lamps :

• module level diagnostics :

- RUN (green indicator lamp) : indicates module operating mode (module operative),

- ERR (red indicator lamp) : indicates internal status of the module (internal fault, module failure),

- I/O (red indicator lamp) : indicates external module fault.

• channel level diagnostics :

- CHx (green indicator lamp) : indicates channel diagnostics.

TSX CTY 4A

2

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

2 Functions

2.1

Presentation of different counting functions

2.1-1 Downcounting function

The downcounting function is used to downcount pulses (on 24 bits + sign) from a preset value of between 0 and + 16777215 and to signal when the current value is equal to or less than 0.

The downcounting range is from - 16777216 to + 16777215.

valid downcounting range

E current value measurement = or < than 0

-16777216 0 preset +16777215 with automatic preset

Note :

Operation of the downcounting function, associated language objects and software installation are explained in the programming manual - Part H (PL7 Junior)

2.1-2 Upcounting function

The upcounting function is used to upcount pulses (on 24 bits + sign) from the value 0 to a predefined value known as the setpoint value.

The upcounting range is from 0 to + 16777215.

The function indicates when the setpoint value is reached.

The current value of the counter is continuously compared with two adjustable thresholds (threshold 0 and threshold 1).

valid upcounting range current measurement value

≥

setpoint value current measurement value

≥

threshold 1 value current measurement value

≥

threshold 0 value

0 threshold 0 with automatic reset threshold 1 setpoint +16777215

Note :

Operation of the upcounting function, associated language objects and software installation are

2 / 1

E

2.1-3 Up/down counting function

The up/down counting function performs on the same counter the upcounting of pulses and the downcounting of pulses (on 24 bits + sign) from a preset value which is within the up/down counting range. The up/down counting range is from - 16777216 to

+16777215 and two setpoints (an upper and a lower setpoint) can be defined.

The current value of the counter is continuously compared with two adjustable thresholds (threshold 0 and threshold 1).

valid up/down counting range current value

≥

upper setpoint current value

≥

threshold 1 current value

≥

threshold 0 current value

≥

lower setpoint

-16777216 lower setpoint preset threshold 0 threshold 1 upper setpoint

+16777215

Note :

Operation of the up/down counting function, associated language objects and software installation are explained in the programming manual - Part H (PL7 Junior).

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 2

Functions 2

2.2

Upcounting or downcounting on TSX CTY 2A and TSX CTY 4A modules

The TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules provide :

• 2 independent upcounter or downcounter channels for the TSX CTY 2A module.

• 4 independent upcounter or downcounter channels for the TSX CTY 4A module.

The maximum counting frequency on each channel is 40 kHz.

Upcounting or downcounting signals

Upcounting or downcounting signals relating to one channel, and the encoder supply which can generate these signals, are grouped together on a standard 15-pin SUB-D connector.

Each upcounter or downcounter channel can receive 5 VDC or 24 VDC signals. Pulses are received on input IA

Auxiliary inputs

24 VDC auxiliary inputs (reset to 0 : upcounting, set to the preset value : downcounting and enable up/down counting) and the external supplies, are grouped together on an

HE10 connector, common to channels 0/1 in the case of TSX CTY 2A/4A modules and to channels 2/3 in the case of the TSX CTY 4A module.

• Reset (upcounting) or Preset (downcounting)

The reset (upcounting) or set to the preset value (downcounting) can be performed in one of the ways described below :

• changing the state of the input IPres i (rising or falling edge, selected during configuration),

• automatically as soon as the setpoint value is reached in upcounting or the value 0 is reached in downcounting (choice selected during configuration),

• directly by the program.

Note :

In upcounting, the input IPres is called IReset in PL7 Junior screens.

• Enable counting

Upcounting or downcounting is enabled in one of the ways described below :

• signal at state 1 (24 VDC) at input IEna i ,

• directly by the program.

E

Note :

The various functions of these auxiliary inputs are explained in the programming manual - Part H.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 3

Line monitoring input : EPSR

This input, which is usually connected to the power supply return output of an encoder, checks that the power supply of the encoder is normal.

If there is a line break on the cable carrying the power supply voltage to the encoder, the fault which is generated is signalled and can be used by the application program.

The various connection principles of this input are explained in section 2.4.

E

Counter outputs

Upcounting and downcounting functions have counter outputs which can be associated by the program to reflex physical outputs Q0, Q1 on the counter module.

• downcounting function : one counter output with predefined activation and deactivation conditions :

- activation when the current value is reset,

- deactivation upon preset.

• upcounting function : two counter outputs one counter output with predefined activation and deactivation conditions :

- activation when the setpoint value is reached,

- deactivation upon counter reset, one counter output with activation and deactivation conditions defined by the user in a coding matrix, which can be accessed via the adjustment function.

Physical outputs

The physical output state can be controlled in 2 modes :

• automatic mode :

- if the physical output is validated, the counter output state is copied to the physical output, otherwise the output state is 0.

• manual mode :

- the physical output state is controlled.

Setting up these counter outputs and physical outputs is explained in the programming manual -

Part H.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 4

Functions 2

Simplified schematic

The simplified schematic below shows only one 15-pin SUB-D connector. In the case of TSX CTY 2A/4A modules, the 15-pin SUB-D connectors relating to the other channels perform exactly the same functions.

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connection of counting sensor

1

Upcounting or downcounting pulses input

Power supply reserved exclusively for the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)

Encoder supply return signal

(must be wired)

IA +5 VDC

IA +24 VDC

IA –

9

1

2

10

3

11

4

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

– 0 VDC

EPSR

12

7

8

5

15

13

IA

IB

IZ

2

3

7

8

4

5

6

9

10

13

14

11

12

15

E

5 VDC or 10...30 VDC encoder supply

Preset input channel 0

Counter enable input channel 0

Preset input channel 1

Counter enable input channel 1

+

–

+

+5 VDC

– 0 VDC

+10...30 VDC

IPres0

IEna0

IPres1

IEna1

1 2

3 4

I0

5

7

6

8

9 10

11 12

I2

I2

I0

I1

I1

Auxiliary inputs

Reflex outputs channel 0

Reflex outputs channel 1

Q0

Q1

Q0

+24 VDC

Q1

13 14

15 16

17 18

Sensor power supply for

24 VDC auxiliary inputs/ outputs

+

–

19 20

– 0 VDC

HE10 connector for connecting power supplies (encoders and sensors), auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, etc) and reflex outputs.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 5

E

2.3

Up/down counting on TSX CTY 2A and CTY 4A modules

TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules provide :

• 2 independent up/down counter channels for the TSX CTY 2A module,

• 4 independent up/down counter channels for the TSX CTY 4A module.

The maximum up/down counting frequency on each channel is 40 kHz.

Up/down counting signals

There are several possibilities for each channel :

• First possibility : (see simplified schematic 1, page 2/10)

Use a single physical up/down counter input, the direction (upcounting or downcounting) is defined by the application by setting a bit object to state 0 or 1.

Each up/down counter channel can receive 5 VDC or 24 VDC signals. The up/down counting pulses are received on input IA.

• Second possibility : (see simplified schematic 2, page 2/11)

Use a single physical up/down counter input, the direction (upcounting or downcounting) is defined by setting the second input to state 0 or 1.

The up/down counting pulses are received on input IA.

The direction (upcounting or downcounting) is defined by setting input IB to state 0 or 1

(state 1 : upcounting, state 0 : downcounting).

Note :

Pulses on input IA will be taken as upcounting if input IB is at 1 for more than 3

µ s.

Pulses on input IA will be taken as downcounting if input IB is at 0 for more than 3

µ s.

• Third possibility : (see simplified schematic 3, page 2/11)

Use two physical inputs, an upcounter input and a downcounter input :

Upcounting pulses are received on input IA.

Downcounting pulses are received on input IB.

Note :

All pulses on IA and IB are taken as upcounting whatever the synchronism of the signals.

• Fourth possibility : (see simplified schematic 4, page 2/12)

Use of two physical inputs with signals phase shifted by

π

/2 (incremental encoder signals).

In this case, it is possible to choose operation with multiplication by 1 or 4 during configuration :

Counting signals are received on input IA for A signals and on input IB for B signals.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 6

Functions 2

Auxiliary inputs/outputs

24 VDC auxiliary inputs/outputs as well as external power supplies are grouped together on an HE10 connector. Each connector groups the 2 channels directly above.

The connector contains : set to preset value inputs (IPres0,1: channel 0,1 / IPres2,3: channel

2,3), upcounting or downcounting enable inputs (IEna0,1: channel 0,1 / IEna2,3: channel

2,3), current value read inputs (IRead0,2: channel 0,2 / IRead1,3: channel 1,3), outputs (Q0 and Q1 : channel 0,1/Q0 and Q1 channel 2,3).

• Preset

Preset can be executed in one of the following ways, (selected during configuration) :

- changing state of input IPres i (rising or falling edge) and enable by the program,

- on rising edge of input IPres i , if the direction is upcounting (positive) or on falling edge of input IPres i , if the direction is downcounting (negative) and enable by the program.

Upcounting direction Downcounting direction

E

Physical input IPres i

- on rising edge of input IPres i , if the direction is downcounting (negative) or on falling edge of input IPres i , if the direction is upcounting (positive) and enable by the program.

Upcounting direction Downcounting direction

Physical input IPres i

- on state 1 of input IPres i and enable by the program, the current value will not change as long as the input is at 1.

- on short cam reference point : preset is executed :

- if the direction is upcounting (positive): input IPres i at 1 and rising edge of Zero marker input IZ, and enable by the program,

- if the direction is downcounting (negative): input IPres i at 1 and falling edge of Zero marker input IZ, and enable by the program,

Upcounting direction Downcounting direction

Physical input IPres i

Zero marker input IZ

Preset Preset

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 7

E

- on long cam reference point : preset is taken into account on the first rising edge of the Zero marker input IZ after input IPres i has passed to state 0 in both upward and downward directions, and enable by program.

Upcounting direction

Downcounting direction

Physical input IPres i

Zero marker input IZ

Preset Preset

- directly by program.

Enable up/down counting

Upcounting or downcounting can be enabled in one of the ways described below :

• either on state 1 of the signal sent to input IEna and enable by the program,

• or directly by the program.

Capture

The capture instruction for the current value is executed in one of the ways described below :

• on change of state (rising or falling edge) of the input IRead i

and enable by the program,

• or directly by the program.

Note :

The various functions of these auxiliary inputs are explained in the programming manual

- Part H.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 8

Functions 2

Line monitoring input : EPSR

This input, which is usually connected to the power supply return output of an encoder, checks that the power supply of the encoder is normal.

If there is a line break on the cable carrying the power supply voltage to the encoder, the fault which is generated is signalled and can be used by the application program.

The various connection principles of this input are explained in section 2.4.

Counter outputs

The up/down counting function has two counter outputs which can be assigned to high-speed physical outputs located on the counter module.

These two counter outputs have activation and deactivation conditions defined by the user in a coding matrix which can be accessed via the adjustment function.

The physical output state can be controlled in manual or automatic mode.

The setting up of these counter outputs is explained in the programming manual -

Part H.

E

Note :

The simplified schematics on the following pages are not shown in their entirety :

• in the case of TSX CTY 2A/4A modules, the standard 15-pin SUB-D connectors are used to connect the counting sensors relating to the various channels, their representations are exactly the same,

• on simplified schematics 2, 3 and 4 the HE10 connector is not depicted, see simplified schematic 1.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 9

E

Simplified schematic 1

Use of a single physical up/down counter input, the direction (upcounting or downcounting) is defined by the application.

Standard 15-pin SUB-D 15 connector for connecting counting sensor

Up/down counting pulse input

Zero marker input

Supply reserved exclusively for powering the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)

Encoder supply return signal

(must be wired)

IA +5 VDC

IA +24 VDC

IA –

9

10

1

IZ +5 VDC

IZ +24 VDC

IZ –

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

– 0 VDC

EPSR

11

12

7

8

4

13

5

15

2

3

IA

IB

IZ

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

8

5 VDC or 10...30 VDC encoder power supply according to encoder type

+

–

+

Preset input channel 0

Enable input channel 0

Read input channel 0

Preset input channel 1

Enable input channel 1

Read input channel 1

Reflex outputs channel 0

Reflex outputs channel 1

Encoder power supply for

24 VDC auxiliary inputs/ outputs

+

–

+5 VDC

– 0 VDC

+10...30 VDC

IPres0

IEna0

IRead0

IPres1

IEna1

IRead1

1 2

3

5

7

9

11

4

6

8

10

12

I0

I2

I0

I2

I1

I1

Auxiliary inputs

Q0

Q1

Q0

+24 VDC

Q1

13

15

17

14

16

18

19 20

– 0 VDC

HE10 connector for connecting power supplies (encoders and sensors), auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, etc) and reflex outputs.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 0

Functions 2

Simplified schematic 2

Use of a single physical up/down counter input, the direction (upcount or downcount) is defined by setting the second input to state 0 or 1.

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting counting sensor

Up/down counting pulse input

Counting direction input

(upcount or downcount)

Zero marker input upcount downcount

Supply reserved exclusively for powering the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)

Encoder supply return signal

(must be wired)

IA +5 VDC

IA +24 VDC

IA –

IB +5 VDC

IB +24 VDC

IB –

IZ +5 VDC

IZ +24 VDC

IZ –

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

– 0 VDC

EPSR

9

10

11

12

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

15

13

IA

IB

IZ

3

4

5

1

2

6

7

8

13

14

11

12

15

9

10

E

HE10 connector

1

3

2

Simplified schematic 3

Use of two physical inputs, an upcounter and a downcounter input :

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting counting sensor

Upcounting pulse input

Downcounting pulse input

Zero marker input

Supply reserved exclusively for powering the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)

Encoder supply return signal

(must be wired)

IA +5 VDC

IA +24 VDC

IA –

IB +5 VDC

IB +24 VDC

IB –

IZ +5 VDC

IZ +24 VDC

IZ –

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

– 0 VDC

EPSR

9

10

11

12

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

15

13

IA

IB

IZ

3

4

5

1

2

6

7

8

11

12

13

14

15

9

10

HE10 1 2 connector

3

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 1

E

Simplified schematic 4

Use of two physical inputs with signals phase shifted by

π

/2 (incremental encoder signals) with the possibility of multiplication by 1 or 4 :

• with multiplication by 1 : up/down counting is performed on the rising edge of input IB,

• with multiplication by 4 : up/down counting is performed on all the rising and falling edges of inputs IA and IB.

Standard 15-pin SUB-D 15 connector for connecting counting sensor

Input signal A

Input signal B

/2

Zero marker input

Supply reserved exclusively for powering the encoder (from the external power supply connected to the HE10 connector)

Encoder supply return signal

(must be wired)

IA +5 VDC

IA +24 VDC

IA –

IB +5 VDC

IB +24 VDC

IB –

IZ +5 VDC

IZ +24 VDC

IZ –

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

– 0 VDC

EPSR

9

10

11

12

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

15

13

IA

IB

IZ

3

4

5

1

2

6

7

8

13

14

11

12

15

9

10

HE10 connector

1

3

2

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 2

Functions 2

2.4

Connection principle of EPSR input "power supply return"

Several instances can occur :

• counting with an encoder which has a power supply return output

- the EPSR input is connected to the encoder power supply return output

4

TSX CTY

2 A/4 A

–

EPSR

A

B

Z

+

+5 VDC

– 0 VDC

EPSR

12

7

8

5

15

13

4

5

6

7

8

Encoder

12

13

14

15

Standard

15-pin SUB-D

E

• counting with an encoder which does not have a power supply return output

- the EPSR input is connected to the positive of the encoder power supply, encoder side.

A

B

Z

+

+24 VDC

12

4

5

TSX CTY

2 A/4 A

4

5

12

13

7

6

–

– 0 VDC

EPSR

8

15

7

14

13

15

8

Encoder

Standard

15-pin SUB-D

• counting with inductive proximity sensors

- the EPSR input is connected to the positive of the counting sensor power supply,

- the - 0 VDC output is connected to the negative of the power supply for the counting sensors.

+24 VDC – 0 VDC

Power supply for counting sensors

4

TSX CTY

2 A/4 A

4

12

5

12

5

13

7

6

15

14

– 0 VDC

EPSR

8

13

7

15

8

Standard

2 / 1 3

E

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1 4

3 Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules

3.1

Number of counter modules controlled by a TSX 57 PLC

The maximum number of counter modules which can be installed on a TSX 57 PLC will depend on the reference :

• 2 modules for a TSX 57-10 PLC,

• 6 modules for a TSX 57-20 PLC.

E

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1

E

3.2

Positioning and inserting TSX CTY 2A/4A modules

In a TSX 57-10 PLC

A TSX 57-10 PLC can accept a maximum of 2 TSX CTY 2A or TSX CTY 4A counter modules.

These modules can be installed in all the positions of the main rack and in all the positions of the extension rack (3 types of extension rack are available: 6, 8 and 12 positions).

In a TSX 57-20 PLC

A TSX 57-20 PLC can accept a maximum of 6 counter modules.

These modules can be installed in all the positions of the main rack and in all the positions of the 7 extension racks (3 types of extension rack are available: 6, 8 and 12 positions).

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2

Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules 3

3.3

Types of sensor which can be used on counter inputs

Counter inputs on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules can receive pulses generated by :

• inductive, photoelectric or other types of sensor :

- 24 VDC supply voltage,

- 2-wire or 3-wire PNP or NPN type.

• incremental encoders, the main characteristics of which are defined below.

E

Types of incremental encoder most commonly used

Supply voltage

5 V

10...30 V

10...30 V (1)

(1) encoders not widely used.

Output voltage

5 V differential

10...30 V

5 V differential

Type of output stage

RS 422/485 line driver

Totem Pole

RS 422/485 line driver

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3

E

3.4

TSX CTY 2A/4A module electrical characteristics

3.4-1 General module characteristics

Module

Maximum frequency of counter inputs

TSX CTY 2A

40 kHz

TSX CTY 4A

40 kHz

Current drawn on internal 5 V by the module excluding preactuator / on 24 V sensor sensor current

Power dissipated in the module

Sensor supply monitor circuit

Operating temperature

Dielectric strength inputs/ground or inputs and internal logic

Insulation resistance

Typical: 280 mA

Max: 330 mA

330 mA

470 mA

Typical: 30 mA

Max: 60 mA

Typical: 4.5 W

Max: 6 W

36 mA

72 mA

8 W

11.5 W

Yes

0 to 60

°

C

Yes

0 to 60

1000 V rms - 50/60 Hz - 1 min

°

C

Humidity

Storage temperature

Operating altitude

> 10 M

Ω

at 500 VDC

5% to 95% without condensation

- 25

°

to + 70

°

C

0 to 2000 meters

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 4

Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules 3

3.4-2 Counter input characteristics

Characteristics for use in RS 422 C

Example schematic for each counter input IA, IB, IZ.

220

A

IA +5 VDC

1 nF

PS2701-1-L opto-coupler line monitoring

190

A

IA –

Opto-coupler

E

Inputs IA, IB and IZ used in RSS 422 are totally compatible with incremental encoder line drivers with RS 422 outputs and also with encoders with pushpull complementary outputs with a 5 V power supply. Line monitoring is performed on each output.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 5

E

Characteristics for use at 5 VDC/24 VDC

Inputs

Logic

Nominal values

Voltage

Current

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

Voltage

At state 1 Voltage

Current

At state 0 Voltage

5 VDC counter

(IA/IB/IZ)

Positive

5 V

18 mA

–

24 VDC counter

(IA/IB/IZ)

Positive

24 V

18 mA

Limit values

Current

Input impedance for U nominal

Input impedance for U = 2.4 V

(RS 422 compatibility)

≤

5.5 V

≥

2.4 V

> 3.7 mA (1)

≤

1.2 V

< 1 mA (3)

400

Ω

> 270

Ω

19…30 V (possible up to

34 V, limited to 1hr per 24hrs)

–

≥

–

11 V

> 6 mA (2)

≤

5 V

< 2 mA (4)

1.4 k

Ω

Response time

Input type

IEC 1131 conformity –

2-wire prox. sensor compatibility (5) –

Maximum permissible frequency 40 kHz

Resistive Resistive

Type 2

Yes

3-wire prox. sensor compatibility (5) – Yes

(1) for U = 2.4 V, (2) for U = 11 V, (3) for U = 1.2 V, (4) for U = 5 V

(5) see part B - section 3.3 : compatibility of sensors with type 1 and type 2 inputs.

Characteristics of power supply control circuit for counting sensors (encoder or proximity sensor)

Counting sensor supply return

PS2701-1-L opto-coupler

0 V counting sensor

Voltage with no encoder or proximity sensor supply fault

Current with detection of a supply fault

Limit values Voltage

2.5 V

0.5 mA

30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1 hour per 24 hours)

3 mA Current for 2.5 V < U < 30 V

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 6

Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules 3

3.4-3 Auxiliary input characteristics

Inputs

Logic

Nominal values

Limit values

Voltage

Current

Sensor supply

(ripple included)

At state 1 Voltage

Current

At state 0 Voltage

Current

24 VDC auxiliary

(preset, enable, read)

Positive

24 V

7 mA

19…30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1hr per 24hrs)

≥

11 V

> 6 mA (1)

≤

5 V

< 2 mA

Voltage control thresholds

Response time for sensor voltage monitoring

OK

Fault

> 18 V

< 14 V

Disappearance of 24 V supply < 2.5 ms (4)

Input impedance

Response time

Input type

Appearance of 24 V supply < 10 ms (4)

State 0 to 1

State 1 to 0

3.4 k

Ω

< 250

µ s (3)

< 250

µ s (3)

Current sink

IEC 1131 conformity

2-wire proximity sensor compatibility (2)

Type 2

Yes (all 24 VDC 2-wire proximity sensors)

3-wire proximity sensor compatibility (2) Yes (all 24 VDC 3-wire proximity sensors)

(1) for U = 11 V

(2) see part B - section 3.3 "compatibility of sensors with type 1 and type 2 inputs".

(3) the auxiliary inputs are fast inputs (response time < 250

µ s) in accordance with the 40 KHz maximum permissible frequency of the counter inputs.

(4) when the sensor supply voltage disappears, the fast auxiliary inputs can be taken into account.

E

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 7

E

The auxiliary inputs receive a 24 V supply from a power supply on the connector.

Equivalent schematic :

Ie

Ie

Ie

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 8

Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules 3

3.4-4 Auxiliary output characteristics

Equivalent schematic :

Preactuator/ sensor supply control

Short-circuit fault control

Command

+

24 V

Q0 or Q1

E

–

Outputs 24 VDC auxiliary

Nominal voltage

Voltage limits

Nominal current

Max. voltage drop "On"

Leakage current

Max. current at 30 V and at 34 V

Switching time

Electronic discharge time

Switching frequency on inductive load

Compatibility with

DC inputs

IEC 1131-2 conformity

Protections against overloads and short-circuits

Short-circuit monitoring on each channel

Reset :

* by application program

* automatic

Protection against overvoltage on channels

Protection against reverse polarity

Power of one filament lamp

24 V

19…30 V (possible up to 34 V, limited to 1hr per 24hrs)

500 mA

< 0.5 V

< 0.1 mA

375 mA

< 250

µ s

< L/R s

F < 0.6 / (LI 2 ) Hz

All positive logic inputs whose input resistance is < 15 K

Ω yes

By current limiter and thermal trip

One signal bit per channel

One bit per channel in program write mode zener diode between outputs and + 24 V by diode inverted on supply

8 W (max)

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 9

E

3.5

15-pin SUB-D and HE10 connector pinout

3.5-1 Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector

Connector for connecting counting sensors and encoder supply :

• TSX CTY 2A module : two 15-pin SUB-D connectors (channels 0 and 1),

• TSX CTY 4A module : four 15-pin SUB-D connectors (channels 0,1,2 and 3).

Note : the pinouts of the various connectors are strictly identical.

Signal A input

Signal B input

Signal Z input

Encoder supply

Encoder supply return signal

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the counting sensor to channel 0 or 1

IA +5 VDC

IA +24 VDC

IA –

IB +5 VDC

IB +24 VDC

IB –

IZ +5 VDC

IZ +24 VDC

IZ –

+10...30 VDC

+5 VDC

– 0 VDC

EPSR

9

10

11

12

7

8

3

4

5

15

13

1

2

6

7

4

5

8

1

2

3

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

5 VDC signals

Input IA +

Input IA -

Input IB +

Input IB -

Input IZ +

Input IZ -

Encoder supply :

+ 5 VDC

- 0 VDC

Encoder power supply return

Pins

10

11

4

1

2

5

15

8

13

10...30 VDC signals

Input IA +

Input IA -

Input IB +

Input IB -

Input IZ +

Input IZ -

Encoder supply :

+ 10...30V

- 0 VDC

Encoder power supply return

Pins

3

11

12

9

2

5

7

8

13

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 0

Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules 3

3.5-2 20-pin HE10 connector

Connector designed for connecting auxiliary inputs, encoder supplies and other sensors.

The TSX CTY 2A module has a single HE10 connector for channels 0 and 1. The

TSX CTY 4A module has two HE10 connectors for channels 0,1 and 2,3 respectively.

5 VDC or 10...30 VDC encoder supply input

Preset input channel 0 (channel 2)

Enable counter input channel 0 (channel 2)

Read input channel 0 (channel 2)

Preset input channel 1 (channel 3)

Enable counter input channel 1 (channel 3)

Read input channel 1 (channel 3)

+5 VDC

– 0 VDC

+10...30 VDC

IPres0 (2)

IEna0 (2)

IRead0 (2)

IPres1 (3)

IEna1 (3)

IRead1 (3)

1 2

3 4

I0

5 6

7

9

I2

8

10

I0

I2

11 12

Reflex outputs channel 0 (channel 2)

Reflex outputs channel 1 (channel 3)

Q0

Q1

Q0

+24 VDC

Q1

13 14

15 16

17 18

Sensor power supply for

24 VDC auxiliary inputs

19 20

– 0 VDC

I1

I1

For remote connection of supply to 15-pin

SUB-D connectors

Auxiliary inputs

E

24 VDC signals Pins

Auxiliary inputs channel 0 (channel 2) :

Preset IPres 0/2

Enable IEna 0/2

Read IRead 0/2

5

6

7

Supplies

Encoder supply :

+ 5 VDC

- 0 VDC

- 10...30 VDC

Pins

1

2

3

Auxiliary inputs channel 1 (channel 3) :

Preset IPres 1/3

Enable IEna 1/3

9

10

Read IRead 1/3 11

Reflex output channel 0 (channel 2) :

Output Q0

Output Q1

13

14

Sensor supply :

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

17 or 19

18 or 20

Reflex output channel 1 (channel 3) :

Output Q0 15

Output Q1 16

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 1

E

3.6

Connection of encoder type counting sensors

3.6-1 Connection principle

In the case of a TSX CTY 2A module, only the elements relating to channels 0 and 1 should be connected.

Incremental encoders Incremental encoders

TSX CTY 4A channel 2 channel 0

1 1 channel 3 channel 1

TSX CDP ii 2 pre-formed cable (1) or

TSX CDP ii 3 cable (2)

3

24 VDC sensor supply

3 24 VDC sensor supply

TELFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20

2

Connections:

• encoder supply (5 VDC or 10...30 VDC)

• preset sensor channels 2 and 3

• counter enable sensor channels 2 and 3

• read sensor channels 2 and 3

• reflex outputs channels 2 and 3

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20

2

Connections:

• encoder supply (5 VDC or 10...30 VDC)

• preset sensor channels 0 and 1

• counter enable sensor channels 0 and 1

• read sensor channels 0 and 1

• reflex outputs channels 0 and 1

Notes :

• it is not obligatory but it is advisable to use a discrete TELEFAST connection sub-base in order to facilitate connection of power supplies and sensors to the auxiliary inputs and outputs,

• in the case of the TSX CTY 1A module, it is possible to use an ABE-7H08R10 sub-base,

• TELEFAST 2 connection sub-bases are described in part B1 - section 6 of this manual.

(1) TSX CDP 102 : 1 m long, TSX CDP 202 : 2 m long, TSX CDP 302 : 3 m long,

(2) TSX CDP 053 : 0.5 m long, TSX CDP 103 : 1 m long, TSX CDP 203 : 2 m long,

3 / 1 2

Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules 3

Description of the various connection elements

1 Equipment for connecting the encoder to the standard 15-pin SUB-D connector, located on the TSX CTY 2A/4A module. In view of the different types of encoder, the connection equipment is the user's responsibility and consists of :

• a connector for the encoder (depends on the encoder used, generally a 12-pin female DIN connector),

• a standard 15-pin male SUB-D connector for connection to the 15-pin female

SUB-D connector on the TSX CTY i A module. Element provided as a separate part under the reference TSX CAP S15,

• a cable :

- with twisted pairs (26 gauge) and shielding for an encoder with standard RS 422 line driver outputs,

- multicore (24 gauge) with shielding for an encoder with Totem Pole outputs.

The cable shielding is of the "braid + strip" type. Contact between the "braid + strip", and the ground for each connector, must be secured by clamping around the whole circumference of the cable.

The connection of this cable to the two connectors varies depending on the type of power supply used by the encoder (5 VDC or 10...30 VDC) and the type of outputs (RS 422, Totem Pole). Different types of connection are used as examples in this section.

2 TELEFAST 2 : connection sub-base ABE-7H16R20.

This enables rapid connection of :

• the 24 VDC power supply for sensors other than the encoder,

• the encoder power supply,

• sensors to the auxiliary inputs (preset, enable, read).

• outputs for a TSX CTY 2A or TSX CTY 4A counter module.

3 Connection cable TSX CDP ii 3 or pre-formed cable TSX CDP ii 2

(see part B for characteristics)

E

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 3

3.6-2 Connection of the TSX CTY 2A/4A module to the encoder

TSX CTY 2A

Cable 1 Channel 0

E

Incremental encoder

Example of module/encoder connection with RS 422 line driver outputs

Encoder characteristics

• supply voltage : 5 VDC,

• output voltage : 5 VDC differential,

• output stage : RS 422/485 standard line driver.

Simplified schematic

+5 VDC

15 CTY module

EPSR

13

IA +24 VDC

9

+

A IA +5 VDC

Encoder

1

A IA –

2

–

0 VDC

8

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector Simplified schematic for channel connection

DIN connector

Encoder

TSX CTY

Cable 1

(encoder/TSX CTY.. connection)

2A/4A

Z

Z

EPSR*

A

A

B

B

+

– s

(1)

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

* EPSR = encoder power supply return

3 / 1 4

Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules 3

Example of PLC/encoder connection with Totem Pole outputs

Encoder characteristics

• supply voltage : 10...30 VDC,

• output voltage : 10...30 VDC,

• output stage : Totem Pole.

Simplified schematic

Encoder

+

–

A

+10...30 VDC

7

EPSR

13

15

IA +24 VDC

9

IA +5 VDC

1

IA –

2

0 VDC

8

CTY module

Standard 15-pin

SUB-D connector

Schematic for channel connection

Encoder

EPSR*

+

A

B

Z

–

DIN connector

Cable 1 (encoder/TSX CTY.. connection) s

(1)

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

6

4

5

7

8

1

2

3

Standard 15-pin SUB-D connector

6

7

3

4

5

1

2

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

8

E

* EPSR = encoder power supply return

When the encoder does not have a supply return, the EPSR input should be linked on the encoder side to the positive of the power supply

(1) This link should be made directly if the encoder is isolated from ground

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 5

E

Example of PLC/encoder connections with NPN open collector outputs

Encoder characteristics

• supply voltage : 24 VDC

• output voltage : 24 VDC,

• output stage : NPN open collector.

Simplified schematic

+ CTY module

Encoder

–

EPSR

+10...30 VDC

7

13

15

IA +24 VDC

9

IA +5 VDC

1

IA –

2

0 VDC

8

Standard 15-pin

SUB-D connector

Schematic for channel connection

Encoder

DIN connector

Cable 1 (encoder/TSX CTY.. connection) s

EPSR*

+

–

A

B

Z

(1)

5

6

3

4

7

8

1

2

9

12

13

10

11

14

15

Standard 15-pin

SUB-D connector

TSX CTY 2 A/4 A

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

13

14

11

12

15

* EPSR : encoder power supply return.

When the encoder does not have a supply return, the EPSR input should be linked on the encoder side to the positive of the power supply.

(1) This link should be made directly if the encoder is isolated from ground

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 6

Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules 3

Example of PLC/encoder connections with PNP open collector outputs

Encoder characteristics

• supply voltage : 24 VDC

• output voltage : 24 VDC,

• output stage : PNP open collector.

Simplified schematic

Encoder

+

–

+24 VDC

7

EPSR

13

15

IA +24 VDC

9

IA +5 VDC

1

IA –

2

0 VDC

8

CTY module

Standard 15-pin

SUB-D connector

E

Schematic for channel connection

Encoder

DIN connector

Cable 1 (encoder/TSX CTY.. connection) s

EPSR*

+

–

A

B

Z

(1)

5

6

3

4

7

8

1

2

9

12

13

10

11

14

15

Standard 15-pin

SUB-D connector

TSX CTY 2 A/4 A

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

13

14

11

12

15

* EPSR : encoder power supply return.

When the encoder does not have a supply return, the EPSR input should be linked on the encoder side to the positive of the power supply.

(1) This link should be made directly if the encoder is isolated from ground

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 7

E

3.6-3 Connection of the power supply and sensors to auxiliary inputs and outputs

These are connected using a TELEFAST 2 prewired sub-base ABE-7H16R20 :

TSX CTY 4A

+ + – – s

24 VDC sensor supply connection

Channels 0 and 1

+ + – –

ABE-7H16R20

TSX CDP ii 2 preformed cable or

TSX CDP ii 3 cable

Encoder supply connection

Encoder with

10...30 VDC supply voltage

100 101 102

10...30 VDC

ABE-7BV20

(negative common)

Connection of sensor to auxiliary I/O

IPres0 channel 0

IEna0 IRead0 Q0 Q1 IPres1 channel 1

IEna1 IRead1 Q0 Q1

204 104

+

205 105 206 106

+ +

204 104 205 105 206 106

+ + +

208 108

+

209 109

+

210 110

+

208 108 209 109 210 110

+ + +

Mechanical contact

2-wire

PNP proximity sensor

Encoder with

5 VDC supply voltage

100 101 102 204 104

+

304

–

205 105

+

305

–

206 106

+

306

–

5 VDC

208 108

+

308

–

209 109

+

309

–

210 110

+

310

–

3-wire

PNP proximity sensor

Note :

The connection of channels 2 and 3 of a TSX CTY 4A module is identical to that of channels 0 and 1.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 8

Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules 3

3.7

Connections with proximity sensor type counting sensors

3.7-1 Connection principle

TSX CTY 2A

channel 1

1

E

4

Counting sensor 24 VDC supply connection

Auxiliary I/O sensors

24 VDC supply connection

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7CPA01

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20

2 3

Counting sensor connections

Connections :

• preset sensor

• counter enable sensor

• read sensor

• outputs

1 TSX CCP S15 cable, 2.5 m long with high density 15-pin SUB-D connectors + standard 15-pin SUB-D connector for connecting the counter channel to the

TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base (ABE-7CPA01).

This cable carries the various counter channel signals.

2 TELEFAST 2 connection sub-bases : ABE-7CPA01 :

This is used to connect the counting sensors and their power supply to the relevant channel.

3 TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base : ABE-7H16R20.

This is used to connect sensors relating to auxiliary inputs and their power supply.

4 TSX CDP ii

3 connection cable or TSX CDP ii

2 cable (see part B1 - section 5.1-2 for characteristics).

They connect the auxiliary inputs on the module to the TELEFAST 2 connection subbase ABE-7H16R20.

Note :

The connection of channels 2 and 3 of a TSX CTY 4A module is identical to that of channels 0 and 1.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 9

E

3.7-2 Connection of counting sensors and their power supply

TSX CCP H15

TSX CTY 2A

+ + – – s

Counting sensor

24VDC supply connection

+ + – –

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7CPA01

Counting sensor connections (proximity sensor)

18

(1)

25 27 26 28 GND s

4 1 8 10 14 16

+

A

– +

B

– +

Z

–

GND s

4 1 8 10 14 16

+

A

– +

B

– +

Z

–

18 25 27 26 28

Connections to

3-wire proximity sensor with PNP output

Connections to

3-wire proximity sensor with NPN output

GND 4 1 8 10 14 16 18 25 27 26 28 s

Connections to

2-wire proximity sensor

A B Z

(1) When the counting sensors are proximity sensors, the EPSR input (encoder power supply return) must respect polarity :

• EPSR (terminal 18) to the 24VDC positive of the sensor supply (terminal 26 or 28),

3 / 2 0

Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules 3

3.7-3 Connection of sensors to auxiliary inputs and outputs and their power supply

These are connected via a TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base ABE-7H08R20 :

TSX CTY 2A channels 0 and 1

+ + – – s

24 VDC auxiliary input sensor supply connection

+ + – –

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20

TSX CDP ii 2 pre-formed cable or TSX CDP ii 3 cable

ABE-7BV20

(negative common)

IPres0

Connection of sensors to auxiliary I/O channel 0 channel 1

IEna0 IRead0 Q0 Q1 IPres1 IEna1 IRead1 Q0 Q1

Mechanical contact

204 104

+

205 105

+

206 106

+

112 312 113 313 208 108

+

209 109

+

210 110

+

114 314 115 315

2-wire proximity sensor

204 104 205 105 206 106

+ + +

112 312 113 313 208 108 209 109 210 110

+ + +

114 314 115 315

3-wire PNP proximity sensor

204 104

+

304

205 105

+

305

206 106

+

306

112 312

– – –

113 313 208 108

+

308

209 109

+

309

210 110

+

310

114 314

– – –

115 315

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 1

E

3.7-4 Wiring precautions

E

Inputs IPres, IEna, IRead are fast inputs which should be connected to the sensor by twisted pair if it is a volt-free contact, or by shielded cables if it is a 2 or 3-wire proximity sensor.

The module incorporates protections against short-circuits or voltage inversion. However, the module cannot withstand a fault for a long time. The fuses should therefore be in series with the power supply to ensure protection. These fuses should be fast-blow and rated no higher than 1A. The energy provided by the power supply should be sufficient to ensure correct fuse protection.

Important note : wiring solid state outputs Q0 or Q1

The actuator connected to outputs Q0 or Q1 has its common point at the 0V of the power supply. If for any reason (poor contact or accidental damage) there is a break in the 0V of the output amplifier power supply while the 0V of the actuators is still connected to the

0V of the power supply, there should be an output current of several mA from the amplifier sufficient to keep low power actuators energized.

+ + – – s

+ + – –

IPres0 IEna0 channel 0

IRead0 Q0 Q1 IPres1 IEna1 channel 1

IRead1 Q0 Q1

204 104

+

205 105

+

206 106

+

112 312 113 313 208 108

+

209 109

+

210 110

+

114 314 115 315

Rl Rl Rl Rl

TELEFAST connection :

This type of connection is the most reliable provided that the actuator common is connected to the common points strip 2•• (jumper in position 1-2). In this case the module common cannot be disconnected without disconnecting the actuator common.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 2

Setting up 40 kHz counting on TSX CTY 2A/4A modules 3

3.8

General installation rules

3.8-1 Installation

It is not advisable to connect or disconnect the standard 15-pin SUB-D connectors of

TSX CTY 2A/4A modules with the encoder and sensor supplies present, as this could damage the encoder. Certain encoders cannot withstand a sudden power-up or simultaneous disconnection of the signals and power supplies.

3.8-2 General wiring instructions

Cross section of wires

Wires of a sufficient cross sectional area must be used in order to avoid voltage drops

(mainly at 5 V) and temperature rises.

Example of voltage drops for encoders with a 5 V power supply and a 100 meter length of cable.

Wire cross section

0.08 mm 2 (28 gauge)

0.12 mm 2 (26 gauge)

0.22 mm 2 (24 gauge)

0.34 mm 2 (22 gauge)

0.5 mm 2

1 mm 2

50 mA

-

1.1 V

-

0.25 V

0.17 V

0.09 V

Encoder consumption

100 mA

2.2 V

1.4 V

0.8 V

0.5 V

0.34 V

0.17 V

150 mA

-

3.3 V

-

0.75 V

0.51 V

0.24 V

200 mA

-

4.4 V

-

1 V

0.68 V

0.34 V

Connection cables

All cables carrying power supplies to the sensors (encoders, proximity sensors, etc) and the counting signals must :

• be kept apart from power cables,

• be shielded with the shielding connected to the mechanical ground on both the PLC and the encoder,

• never carry signals other than counting signals and power supplies relating to the counting sensors.

The PLC/encoder connecting cable should be as short as possible in order to avoid loops causing coupling capacitances which can interfere with operation.

Note :

Ensure that the outward and return lines for a signal are in the same cable as the supply lines if necessary. In order to do this, it is preferable to use twisted pair cables.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 3

E

E

3.8-3 Encoder and auxiliary sensor supplies

Encoder supply

This must be :

• reserved exclusively for supplying the encoder, so as to avoid interference pulses which could disrupt encoders with sensitive electronics,

• as near to the TELEFAST 2 sub-base as possible in order to reduce voltage drops and coupling with other cables,

• protected against short-circuits and overloads by fast blow fuses,

• have sufficient endurance to micro-cuts.

Auxiliary sensor supply

See part B1 - section 3-1 "choice of DC power supplies for sensors and preactuators".

Important :

The - 0VDC polarity of the encoder and auxiliary sensor power supplies must be connected to ground ( s ) as close as possible to the power supplies.

Cables carrying supply voltages should have their shielding connected to ground

( s ).

3.8-4 Software setup

The software setup and language objects associated with the various counter functions are explained in more detail in manual TLX DS PL7 J12E "Application-specific functions", part H.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 4

4 Appendices

4.1

TELEFAST 2 connections : ABE-7CPA01

4.1-1 Presentation

The TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base (ABE-7CPA01) transforms a 15-pin standard female SUB-D connector to a screw terminal block connector with :

• 32 terminals on two rows for connecting the various sensors and supplies,

• 4 terminals for onward connection (2 GND terminals + 2 terminals N1 for special connections),

• 4 terminals for connecting the sensor supply.

This enables rapid connection of the proximity detector type sensors to a counter channel on the TSX CTY 2A and TSX CTY 4A modules.

E

TSX CTY 2A

TSX CTY 4A

ABE-7CPA01

TSX CCP S15

Sensors for counting

A 9-pin SUB-D connector is used to transfer information to an Altivar drive when using this sub-base with analog I/O.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1

E

4.1-2 Wiring diagram

15 X1

X2

4.1-3 Dimensions and mounting

• Dimensions

67

58 142,4

15

• Mounting

The ABE-7CPA01 connection sub-base is mounted on 35 mm DIN rails.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 2

Appendices 4

4.1-4 Availability of counting signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block

Counter channel used with proximity detector sensors

E

Notes :

• Each TELEFAST 2 ABE-7CPA01 connection sub-base is supplied with 6 labels which enable each sub-base to be identified individually according to its intended use.

• It is possible to add an optional ABE-7BV20 strip to provide, for example, a ground common.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 3

E

4.1-5 Correspondence betw. TELEFAST term. blocks and 15-pin SUB-D connectors

Type of signal

27

28

29

30

31

32

23

24

25

26

19

20

21

22

TELEFAST Standard 15-pin

screw terminal SUB-D connector block (term. N

°

) (pin N

°

)

1 2

14

15

16

17

18

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

4

5

2

3 2

9

3

11

12

5

13

7

8

IA -

IA -

IA + 24 VDC

IB + 24 VDC

IB -

IZ + 24 VDC

IZ -

Encoder power supply return (EPSR)

+ 10...30 VDC encoder supply input

- 0 VDC encoder supply input

+ 24 V sensor supply output

- 0 V sensor supply output

+ 24 V sensor supply output

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 4

Appendices 4

4.2

TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base : ABE-7H08R20

4.2-1 Presentation

The TELEFAST 2 connection sub-base ( ABE-7H16R20) transforms a 20-pin HE10 connector to a screw terminal block connector for the rapid connection of the sensors and supplies to the auxiliary inputs of TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules.

E

TSX CTY 4A

TSX CDP i i i

(1)

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20

TSX CTY 2A

TSX CDP i i i

(1)

Auxiliary input sensors

(1) TSX CDP ii 2 pre-formed cable or TSX CDP ii 3 cable (see part B - section 5.1-2 for characteristics).

Note :

The connection sub-bases for TELEFAST 2 discrete I/O are described in part B - section 6.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 5

E

4.2-2 Availability of signals on the TELEFAST screw terminal block

The terminal block below represents the terminal block of the sub-base ABE-7H16R20.

On sub-base ABE-7H08R10, the terminal block is limited to terminals 1 to 4 and 100 to 107.

(1)

(2)

(1) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base, the position of the jumper defines the polarity of all the 2 ii terminals :

• jumper in position 1 and 2 : terminals 2 ii have positive polarity,

• jumper in position 3 and 4 : terminals 2 ii have negative polarity.

(2) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base, it is possible to add an optional ABE-7BV20 strip to provide a second sensor common (positive or negative according to user choice).

Note :

• See part B - section 6.4-3 : connection of sensors and supply for the sub-base ABE-7H16R20.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 6

Appendices 4

4.2-3 Correspondence betw. TELEFAST term. blocks and HE10 connectors

Type of signal

114

115

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

110

111

112

113

105

106

107

108

109

101

102

103

104

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

1

2

3

4

200...215

TELEFAST 20-pin HE10 screw terminal connector block (term. N

°

) (pin N

°

)

100 1

15

16

17

18

11

12

13

14

19

20

8

9

6

7

10

2

3

4

5

300...315

+ 5 VDC

- 0 VDC

+ 10…30 VDC

Encoder supply

IPres 0/2 (preset channel 0/2) Auxiliary

IEna 0/2 (counter enable channel 0/2) inputs

IRead 0/2 (read channel 0/2) channel 0/2

IPres 1/3 (preset channel 1/3) Auxiliary

IEna 1/3 (counter enable channel 1/3) inputs

IRead 1/3 (read channel 1/3) channel 1/3

Output Q0 channel 0/2

Output Q1 channel 0/2

Output Q0 channel 1/3

Output Q1 channel 1/3

Auxiliary input sensor supply

All 2 ii terminals at + 24 VDC

All 2 ii terminals at - 0 VDC

Connecting sensor commons to :

+ 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 are linked

- 0 VDC if terminals 3 & 4 are linked

On optional ABE-7BV20 strip, terminals may be used as sensor common.

Aux. outputs channel 0/2

Aux. outputs channel 1/3

E

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 7

E

4.3

Wiring accessory for 24 V incremental encoder with Totem pole outputs : TSX TAP S15 24

4.3-1 Presentation

TSX TAP 15 is a connection module for 24 V incremental encoders (TSX TAP S15 24) with Totem pole (or push-pull) outputs.

TSX TAP 15 has 2 connectors :

• a 12-pin female round connector for screwing the encoder cable clockwise (the fixing ring is on the encoder cable),

• a standard 15-pin Sub-D connector for connecting to the SubD connector for the counter inputs on the module via a standard cable TSX CCP S15.

TSX TAP 15 can be mounted on a rail, using the bracket supplied with the product, or fitted through an enclosure, using the seal supplied.

Information regarding 12-pin round type FRB (a standard in the world of incremental encoders) connectors

The pins on these connectors are numbered in the following ways. Most encoders have a 12-pin integrated base and the pins are numbered anti-clockwise. The TSX TAP S15 has a female 12-pin sub-base which is numbered anti-clockwise. All user power leads should be fitted with connection sockets numbered clockwise, which will therefore ensure that the pin numbers correspond with the socket numbers on the wiring.

Encoder with anti-

clockwise socket TSX TAP S15 24 connection sockets

User power lead sub-base sub-base

M

3

1 9

11

8

2 10 12 7

6

4 5

F

8 9 1

7 12 10 2

6

11

3

5 4 clockwise anti-clockwise

M

8 9 1

7 12 10 2

6

11

3

5 4

F

3

1 9

11

8

2 10 12 7

6

4 5

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 8

Appendices 4

4.3-2 Mounting of TSX TAP S15 i i

Mounting on a Telequick plate

The bracket supplied enables the TSX TAP S15 05/24 to be mounted on a pre-slotted plate type AM1-PA ... or on any other support.

E

Mounting into an enclosure wall

By means of a fixing screw, the TSX TAP S15 05/24 can be mounted into an enclosure wall. A seal is provided to ensure dust and damp-proof protection between the inside and outside.

max thickness = 5mm seal drill hole = Ø 37mm

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 9

E

Dimensions :

70,4

∅

5,5

27,4 43

16,5

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 0

Appendices 4

4.3-3 Connection of an encoder using the TSX TAP S15 24 accessory

The connection of an encoder via a TSX TAP S15 24 auxiliary requires the user to provide a specific cable between the accessory and the encoder. The TSX TAP S15 24 pinout is as follows :

TSX CCP S15

14

15

12

13

9

10

11

3

1

2

4

5

6

7

8

8

11

2

5

3

9

12

7

13

TSX TAP S15 24

B+ 24V

8

A+ 24V

5

Z+ 24V

Encoder power supply return

24V

3

12

0V

10

1 9 8

2 10 12 7

3

11

6

4 5

Cable to be made up

E

This type of connection is compatible with encoders with a 24V supply :

- Heidenheim

- Hengstler

- Codéchamp

- Ivo

- Ideacod, etc

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 1

E

4.4

Connection to modules with HE10 connectors

4.4-1 20-wire preformed cable, 22 gauge (0.34 mm 2 )

It is used for a simple and direct wire-to-wire connection of HE10 module I/O to sensors, pre-actuators or terminals.

This preformed cable consists of :

• an insulated HE10 connector at one end, with 20 0.34 mm 2 wires and sheath,

• flying leads at the other end, color-coded according to DIN 47100 standard.

Note : A nylon core in the cable enables the wire to be stripped easily.

Two kinds are available : TSX CDP 301 : 3 m long,

TSX CDP 501 : 5 m long.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 2

Appendices 4

4.4-2 Preformed connection cable with flying leads and sheath, 28 gauge

(0.08 mm 2 )

This is used to connect I/O of modules with HE10 connectors to connection and adaptation interfaces using TELEFAST 2 rapid wiring. This cable has 2 HE10 connectors and a ribbon cable with 0.08 mm 2 flying leads and sheath.

Given the small wire section, it is recommended to use it only on inputs or outputs with low current (<100 mA per input or output).

Three kinds are available : TSX CDP 102 : 1 m long,

TSX CDP 202 : 2 m long,

TSX CDP 302 : 3 m long.

E

4.4-3 Connection cable, 22 gauge (0.34 mm 2 )

This is used to connect I/O of modules with HE10 connectors to connection and adaptation interfaces using TELEFAST 2 rapid wiring. This cable has 2 insulated HE10 connectors and a cable with 0.34 mm 2 wires for higher currents (<500 mA).

Five kinds are available : TSX CDP 053 : 0.5 m long,

TSX CDP 103 : 1 m long,

TSX CDP 203 : 2 m long,

TSX CDP 303 : 3 m long,

TSX CDP 503 : 5 m long.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 3

E

4.5

Module display :

TSX CTY 2A/4A modules have indicator lamps which display the status of the module and the channels.

• Module status indicator lamps (RUN, ERR, I/O)

The state of the three indicator lamps on the front panel signal the module operating mode (indicator lamp off, flashing or on) :

- RUN indicator lamp : signals the module operating status,

- ERR indicator lamp : signals an internal fault on the module,

- I/O indicator lamp : signals an external fault.

CH2

CH3 CH3 CH1

RUN ERR

I / O I/O

• Channel status indicator lamps (CH i

)

TSX CTY 2A/4A modules have 2 or 4 indicator lamps which display and diagnose the status of each channel.

These indicator lamps are green.

Indic. lamps

State On

RUN Module running

Flashing

—

ERR

I/O

CH i

TSX CTY 2A :

CH0 and CH1

TSX CTY 4A :

CH0, CH1, CH2,

CH3

Internal fault module failure

External fault

• wiring fault

• encoder power supply fault

• measurement overrun

Application fault

Communication fault

—

The channel is operating The channel is not perfectly operating correctly due to :

•an internal fault,

•an external fault,

•a communication

fault,

•an application fault.

Off

Module faulty or switched off

No fault

No fault

The channel is not operating,

No configuration or incorrect configuration.

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1 4

TSX CAY 21 / 41 axis control modules

Setup

Contents

Part F

Section

1 Presentation

1.1

Introduction

1.1-1 Axis control range

1.1-2 Set of two components

1.1-3 Setup software

1.2

Physical description

2 Functions

2.1

Functions

2.1-1 Configuring the axes

2.1-2 Adjusting the axes

2.1-3 Debugging

3 Setup 3/1

3.1

Setup

3.1-1 Basic configuration required

3.1-2 Installation procedure

3.1-3 General wiring instructions

3.2

Choice of encoder

3.2-1 Output interface

3.2-2 Encoder power supply

3.2-3 Shielding

3.3

Connecting the speed reference signals 3/3

3.3-1 Signal referencing

3.3-2 Connecting using a TSX CAP S9

3/3

3/3

3.3-3 Connecting using a TSX CDP 611 cable 3/4

3.3-4 Connecting to terminals with the Telefast pre-wired system 3/5

3.3-5 TAP MAS connection box 3/7

3.3-6 Connecting speed drives using the TAP MAS connection box 3/8

___________________________________________________________________________

F/1

3/2

3/2

3/2

3/2

3/1

3/1

3/1

3/1

2/1

2/1

2/2

2/3

2/4

Page

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/2 F

1/3

TSX CAY 21 / 41 axis control modules

Setup

Contents

Part F

F

Section

3.4

Connecting counter signals

3.4-1 Signal referencing

3.4-2 Connecting an incremental encoder

3.4-3 Connecting an SSI absolute encoder

3.4-4 Connecting encoder supplies

3.5

Wiring accessories

3.5-1 Encoder connection accessories

3.5-2 Mounting the TSX TAP S15 05

3.6

Connecting sensors, preactuators and supplies without a speed drive 3/18

3.6-1 Signal referencing 3/18

3.6-2 Telefast connection and wiring accessories 3/19

3.6-3 Signal availability on the TELEFAST screw terminal block 3/20

3.6-4 Connecting via TSX CDP 301 or 501 cable

3.6-5 Wiring precautions

3/23

3/24

3.7

Connecting speed drive command signals

3.7-1 Signal referencing

3.7-2 Connecting using the TELEFAST pre-wired system

3.7-3 Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector

3.8

Module electrical characteristics

3.8-1 General characteristics

3.8-2 Analog output characteristics

3.8-3 Counter input characteristics

3.8-4 Auxiliary input characteristics

3.8-5 Reflex output Q0 characteristics

3.8-6 Monitoring the sensor / preactuator voltage

3.8-7 Speed drive control input characteristics

3.8-8 Relay output characteristics

3.9

Module display : 3/38

3/26

3/26

3/27

3/28

3/29

3/29

3/30

3/30

3/33

3/34

3/35

3/36

3/37

Page

3/9

3/9

3/10

3/11

3/12

3/13

3/13

3/15

___________________________________________________________________________

F/2

TSX CAY 21 / 41 axis control modules

Setup

Section

4 Appendix

4.1

Appendix

Contents

Part F

Page

4/1

4/1

F

___________________________________________________________________________

F/3

F

TSX CAY 21 / 41 axis control modules

Setup

Section

Contents

Part F

Page

___________________________________________________________________________

F/4

1 Presentation

1.1

Introduction

1.1-1 Axis control range

FIP speed drive motor

F encoder

The servo-loop positioning axis control range for TSX model 57 PLCs is designed to meet the requirements of machine manufacturers.

It is designed for machines which require high-performance motion control together with simultaneous sequential control via a PLC.

The range is used to control movements on a restricted independent axis or on an infinite linear axis.

1.1-2 Set of two components

Multi-axis control module

There are two modules :

.

• a single format, 2-axis module with input for incremental encoder or SSI serial interface absolute encoder.

TSX CAY 21

• a double format, 4-axis module with input for incremental encoder or SSI serial interface absolute encoder.

TSX CAY 41

___________________________________________________________________________

1/1

F

1.1-3 Setup software

The SMOVE function integrated in the PL7 Junior software is used to execute movements. A detailed screen can be called up in SMOVE. The function library provides user-friendly assistance for entering SMOVE function parameters.

Screens for adjusting the axis parameters and setting up movements can be accessed via the PL7 Junior software.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

1.2

Physical description

TSX CAY 21 and TSX CAY 41 axis control modules comprise :

TSX CAY 21

Presentation 1

Encoder axis 0

Analog : speed reference axes 0, 1

Encoder axis 1

TSX CAY 41

Discrete I/O, speed drive control axes 0,1

I/O axes 0, 1, I/O supply, encoder supply

Encoders : axis 0 axis 2

Analog : speed reference axes 0, 1, 2, 3 axis 1 axis 3

Discrete I/O, speed drive control axes 0,1, 2, 3

I/O axes 0, 1, 2, 3, I/O supply, encoder supply

___________________________________________________________________________

1/3

F

F

___________________________________________________________________________

1/4

2 Functions

2.1

Functions

Block diagram of an axis control system

CPU TSX CAY module

Configuration

+ adjustment

%K, %M

Configuration parameters

Adjustment

Setpoint

Servo loop

SMOVE function

%Q/%QW

%I/%IW

Processing

Application

Encoder input

Speed drive output

Processing of auxiliary I/O

RP cam input

Event input

Recalibration input

Emergency stop input

Speed drive fault input

Speed drive enable relay output

Auxiliary output

F

Axis control modules provide the following functions for each axis :

• Inputs

- input for reading position measurements : incremental encoder, type RS 485 or 5V totem pole absolute encoder, type SSI serial interface, 16 to 25 data bits

- machine reference point input

- event input

- speed drive fault input

- recalibration input

- emergency stop input

• Outputs

- isolated

±

10V analog output, resolution 13 bits + sign, to control the speed drives.

- speed drive enable relay output

- auxiliary solid state output

___________________________________________________________________________

2/1

Processing commands :

Each movement, controlled by the PLC sequential program, is described by an SMOVE movement command function in PL7 language. The TSX CAY 21/41 module uses this

SMOVE command to calculate a position / speed reference.

PL7 screens make it easy to configure, adjust and debug the axes.

F

2.1-1 Configuring the axes

This screen is used to enter the parameters required to adapt the module operation to the machine characteristics. These parameters are : type of encoder, position limits, maximum speed, etc. They cannot be modified by the program. There is no default configuration.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/2

Functions 2

2.1-2 Adjusting the axes

These parameters are linked to operation of the axes. The parameters are adjusted online or offline.

The operating parameters are :

• corrected resolution

• movement control : deviation, recalibration, overspeed, etc.

• stop control : time, speed, target window

• position loop : position gain, feedforward cœfficient, offset

• command : soft limits, acceleration, acceleration profile

• manual mode parameter : speed, reference point value, etc.

These parameters can be modified by the program.

F

___________________________________________________________________________

2/3

2.1-3 Debugging

Debug mode can be accessed online. It is used to control and observe axis behavior.

The data and commands differ depending on the operating mode selected :

• automatic mode

• manual mode

• direct drive mode

• measurement mode (Off)

F

The upper area of the screen gives information about the module operating status and its diagnostics. The lower area of the screen gives access to the commands and information about the operation of movements, I/O, faults, etc.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/4

3 Setup

3.1

Setup

3.1-1 Basic configuration required

The servomotor axis control modules can be installed in any slot of a TSX 57 rack. The power supply to the rack must be chosen according to the number of modules installed.

A TSX 57-10 processor can control a maximum of 2 intelligent modules (CTY, CAY, etc); a TSX 57-20 processor can control up to 6 intelligent modules.

3.1-2 Installation procedure

It is possible to install or remove a module without switching off the supply voltage to the rack. The module design enables this operation to be executed while powered up to ensure a device remains available for use.

Connection or disconnection of connectors with sensor supplies is however not recommended, as this is not possible with certain encoders. The auxiliary I/O connectors can be disconnected while powered up without damaging the module.

Nevertheless, for the safety of personnel it is recommended that auxiliary supplies are switched off before any disconnection.

F

The module and connector fixing screws must be tightened correctly in order to obtain good electrical contacts, thus ensuring good protection against electrostatic and electromagnetic interference.

3.1-3 General wiring instructions

The sensor and actuator supplies must be protected against overloads or overvoltages by fast-blow fuses.

Use wires with an adequate cross-section to avoid line voltage drops or overheating.

Keep sensor and actuator cables away from any source of radiation caused by highpower electrical circuit switching.

All cables connecting absolute or incremental encoders must be shielded. Shielding must be of high quality and connected to the machine ground at both the module and encoder ends. There must be continuity along the entire length of the connections. Only encoder signals should be carried on the cable.

For performance reasons, module auxiliary inputs have short response times and it is thus important that these inputs have an adequate independent supply to ensure that the module continues to operate correctly in the event of brief power outage. It is recommended that regulated supplies are used as they ensure the consistency of actuator and sensor response times. The supply 0V must be connected to the machine ground as near as possible to the supply output.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1

F

3.2

Choice of encoder

3.2-1 Output interface

The output interfaces of incremental encoders or pulse generators are :

• RS 422/485 standard output, two push-pull outputs complemented by signal

• 5V Totem Pole output, two complemented push-pull outputs.

The SSI-type serial absolute encoders have a standard RS485 interface for clock and data signals.

We recommend using an encoder with an opto type "CLOCK" signal input stage.

3.2-2 Encoder power supply

The module is designed to supply either 5V or 24V encoders. It is possible to mix supply voltages on all module channels.

Incremental encoders generally have a 5V supply.

SSI-type absolute encoders often have a 24V supply (10/30V).

5V encoder supply : maximum voltage drop

It is necessary in this case to take into account the line voltage drop, which depends on the cable length and the encoder consumption for a given wire gauge.

Example for a 100m cable :

Wire cross-section

Encoder consumption

28-gauge = 0.08 mm 2

22-gauge = 0.34 mm 2

0.5 mm 2

1 mm 2

Voltage drop for a 100m cable

50mA

1.1V

100mA

2.2V

0.25V

0.17V

0.09V

0.5V

0.34V

0.17V

150mA

3.3V

0.75V

0.51V

0.24V

200mA

4.4V

1V

0.68V

0.34V

24V encoder supply

This type of encoder is recommended as there is no need for a precise supply (10V/30V).

With a 24V power supply these encoders can use a very long cable, and the voltage drop along the cable is very small. This is the case with SSI-type serial link encoders.

If an SSI-type 24V serial absolute encoder is used it is not necessary to connect it to the 5V supply.

The 24V supply must be reserved for the encoders. The supplies must be able to operate independently for a sufficient length of time to power the encoder during microbreaks

(

≥

10ms).

3.2-3 Shielding

To ensure correct operation when the environment is subject to interference, it is necessary to choose an encoder with a metal coating referenced to machine ground of the connected equipment. The encoder must provide ground connection to the connection cable shielding.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2

Setup 3

3.3

Connecting the speed reference signals

3.3-1 Signal referencing

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Male connector seen from wiring side

CAY 41

Vref0+

Axis 0

Vref0-

Vref1+

Vref1-

Axis1

Vref2+

Vref2-

Vref2+

Axis 2

Axis 3

Vref2-

GND-ANA

(common)

CAY 21

Axis 0

Axis1 nc nc

GND-ANA

(common)

F

Connection of speed references :

There are four types of connection

• wiring with TSX CAP S9 connector and cover

• using a TSX CDP 611 cable

• wiring with output on terminal with Telefast ABE-7CPA01

• wiring with output to TAP MAS (distribution box)

3.3-2 Connecting using a TSX CAP S9

The user makes the connection by soldering directly onto the 9-pin Sub-D connector as shown in 3.3-1. Ensure that the cable shielding is correctly tightened onto the connector cap.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3

F

3.3-3 Connecting using a TSX CDP 611 cable

This pre-wired cable consists of a 9-pin Sub-D connector for connection to the

TSX CAY 21/41 module end with flying leads at the other end. 6m long, it consists of

24-gauge wires which correspond to the pins on the Sub-D connector. It is used to connect devices directly to the module. The various signals are identified using a color code. The shielding must be connected to the machine ground of the connected device.

TSX CDP 611 black blue white orange red yellow green pin

1

6

2

7

3

8

4 violet brown

9

5 signal

Vref0+

Vref0-

Vref1+

Vref1-

Vref2+

Vref2-

Vref3+

Vref3-

GND-ANA

Shielding axis 0 axis 1 axis 2 axis 3

The TSX CDP 611 cable is 6m long.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 4

Setup 3

3.3-4 Connecting to terminals with the Telefast pre-wired system

The Telefast 2 system is a range of products used for rapid connection of modules in the

TSX Micro and TSX Premium ranges. This system replaces screw terminals and provides a single-wire remote connection.

It is necessary to connect speed references to terminals when the speed drives are not close to each other. The Telefast pre-wired system simplifies setup by giving access to signals via screw terminals. The module is connected to the Telefast (reference

ABE-7CPA01) via a cable fitted with a 9-pin Sub-D connector at the module end and a

15-pin Sub-D connector at the Telefast end. This cable may either be a TSX CXP213 or a TSX CXP 613.

F

+ + – –

ABE-7CPA01

TSX CXP 213

TSX CXP 613

TSX CXP 213 cable : l = 2m

TSX CXP 213 cable : l = 6m

GND 6 8 s

Speed drive with

2-wire inputs ref common

GND

10 12 11 14 16 15 18 20 19 21 23

Connection to

GND-ANA

(terminals 5, 11,

15 and 19)

+ –

Vref0

+ –

Vref1

+ –

Vref2

+ –

Vref3

TSX CAY 41 extension

Speed drive with differential inputs common (0V) ref– ref+

GND

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 5

Correspondence between Sub-D connector pins and Telefast terminals

F

26

28

30

32

21

22

23

24

16

18

19

20

11

12

14

15

6

8

10

4

5

TELEFAST screw terminal

(Terminal no.)

2

10

3

11

4

12

5

13

6 nc nc nc nc nc

14 nc

15-pin Sub-D connector

(Pin no.)

1

2

1

6

2

7

3

8

4

9-pin Sub-D connector for the

TSX CAY 21/41 module

Type of signal

9

5

Vref0+

Vref0-

Vref1+

Vref1-

Vref2+

Vref2-

Vref3+

Vref3connect to terminal 23

GND-ANA note : nc = not connected

Terminal 23 of the lower Telefast terminal block (GND-ANA) must be connected to terminal 21 in order to distribute the GND-ANA to terminals 5, 11, 15 and 19.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 6

Setup 3

3.3-5 TAP MAS connection box

The connection box is used to assign the speed references from each speed drive to a particular port, enabling simple connection of several speed drives while ensuring good ground continuity.

Dimensions and fixing :

The TSX TAP MAS box is installed on an AM1 PA-type perforated plate or on a DIN rail with an LA9 D09976 fixing plate using two M3

×

8 or M3

×

10 screws.

F

AM1-PA...

AM1-DE/EP

=

2 x Ø 5,5

50 =

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 7

F

3.3-6 Connecting speed drives using the TAP MAS connection box

NUM MDLA modular speed drives can be connected to the TSX CAY21/41 module using a TSX TAP MAS connection box. Setup is simplified by the use of predefined cables and the connection box which directs the voltage references of the different axes in a simple manner.

Modular speed drive

NUM MDLA

TSX CAY 21/41

TSX CXP 223

J3

TSX TAP MAS

TSX CXP 213/613

Cables :

TSX CXP 223 : length = 2.5m

TSX CXP 213 : length = 2.5m

TSX CXP 613 : length = 6m male

TSX CXP 223

Sub - D 9-pin

1 Vref +

6 Vref -

5 GND-ANA male

Sub - D 25-pins

5 Vref +

18 Vref -

6 GND-ANA

Sub - D 9-pin

1 Vref +

6 Vref -

5 GND-ANA male

TSX CDP 611 black ref + blue ref brown GND-ANA shielding

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 8

Setup 3

3.4

Connecting counter signals

To ensure position measurement on a TSX CAY 21/ 41 module, each channel has a connector which is compatible with either incremental encoders or absolute encoders with SSI-type serial link. Each channel may be fitted with an encoder of a different type.

3.4-1 Signal referencing

CAY 21/41 modules can be connected either to incremental encoders or to absolute encoders with SSI-type serial link. In configuration mode the following functions are available.

• Two types of interface are possible for incremental encoders :

- RS 422/RS485 outputs with two outputs complemented by signal,

- 5V Totem Pole outputs,

• SSI absolute encoder with RS 485 standard interface.

A 15-pin Sub-D connector is assigned to each channel. It is also used to supply power to the encoder. These supplies are generated via the HE10 connector discrete + supply.

The encoder + supply feedback signal from the encoder enables accidental disconnection of the encoder to be detected.

F

SSI data+/A+

SSI data-/A-

Z+

Z-

CLKSSI+ encoder + supply (10...30V) encoder - supply (0V)

1

7

8

5

6

2

3

4

11

12

13

14

9

10

15

B+

B+

Encoder + supply feedback

CLKSSI-

5V encoder supply

1

3

2

4

5 V

0 V

10...30 V

0 V encoder supply

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 9

F

Connections :

Incremental encoder input A+ input Ainput Z+ input Z-

SSI absolute encoder SSI data+

SSI data-

5V encoder supply

1

2

4

5

1

2 input B+ input Bencoder supply 13 feedback

Clk data+

Clk data-

Encoder supply (10-30V)

+ supply (5V) 15

+ supply (10-30V) 7

- supply (0V)8

- supply (0V)8

10

11

6

14

3.4-2 Connecting an incremental encoder

The interface is RS 422 / RS 485 or totem pole type

TSX CAY 21/41 encoder supply feedback

10-30 V

5 V

0 V

7

8

5

6

1

2

3

4

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

4

2

1

3

5

6

8

12

10

ENCODER (*)

A+

A-

B+

B-

Z+

Z-

+ supply fdbk.

+ supply

- supply

(*) standard pin-out of an encoder with a 12-pin DIN connector.

Each signal (A+,A- for example) must be connected by a twisted pair. To reduce line voltage drops, it is recommended that each supply point is connected through a pair. The cable shielding must be connected to the machine ground at each end.

!

The DIN connector encoder + supply input must be connected to the 10-30V supply wire or to the 5V wire depending on the type of encoder used.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 0

3.4-3 Connecting an SSI absolute encoder

TSX CAY 21/41 encoder supply feedback

10...30 V

5 V

0 V

1

7

8

2

3

9

10

5

6

4

11

12

13

14

15

Setup 3

ENCODER

Data+

Data-

+ supply fdbk.(*)

CLKSSI+

CLKSSI-

+ supply

- supply F

!

The encoder supply must be connected to pin number 15 or 7 of the Sub-D connector depending on the encoder supply voltage.

(*) + supply feedback : encoder output which sends the supply voltage to the module enabling the module to detect the presence of the encoder.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 1

F

3.4-4 Connecting encoder supplies

+ + – –

+ + – –

Connection of auxiliary input sensor 24 VDC supply

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20

TSX CDP053 / 503 cable

Cable : length :

TSX CDP 053 : 0.5m

TSX CDP 103 : 1m

TSX CDP 203 : 2m

TSX CDP 303 : 3m

TSX CDP 503 : 5m

24 VDC supply

+24 V

0 V

102 101

5 VDC supply

0 V

100 101

+5 V

Important : the maximum length of the wires between the supply outputs and the

Telefast connecting pins must be less than 0.5m.

Only one supply is necessary if the same type of encoder is used on both channels.

Fuses :

This module has as standard several systems to protect against wiring errors and accidental short-circuits on the cable, such as :

- inversion of supply polarity,

- inversion of 5V <- -> 10/30V supplies,

- 10/30V short-circuit on the CLOCK signal of the serial link.

As the module cannot withstand for any length of time, the fuses must blow very quickly.

The fuses must therefore be "fast blow" type with 1A maximum rating. Supplies must have a limit current at such a level that the fuse can blow at the correct point.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 2

Setup 3

3.5

Wiring accessories

3.5-1 Encoder connection accessories

A number of accessories are available to simplify setup and installation. These accessories are used for prewiring the installation.

TSX CAP S15 cover kits with a 15-pin Sub-D connector enable the user to make a direct link to the installation. To simplify installation, the TSX TAP S15 05 provides an interface between the Sub-D connector and the 12-pin DIN connector. This accessory can be fitted on a DIN rail using clips, or in the wall of a cabinet with a seal and locknut. A 2.5m

TSX CCP S15 cable is used for connection to the module.

Examples :

TSX CAP S15

Incremental or absolute encoder

Incremental or absolute encoder

TSX CAP S15

F

5V RS 422 incremental encoder

5V RS 422 incremental encoder

TSX TAP S1505 TSX CCP S15

These accessories provide good signal and shielding continuity in adverse conditions.

The encoder connection cables are generally offered by the encoder suppliers.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 3

Precision with regard to 12-pin DIN connectors

The pins on these connectors are numbered in two different ways. Most encoders have an integrated 12-pin DIN base which is numbered in an anti-clockwise direction. The

TSX TAP S15 has a 12-pin female DIN connector numbered in an anti-clockwise direction. All user leads must be fitted with plugs numbered in a clockwise direction, which means that the pin numbers correspond exactly during wiring.

Encoder with anticlockwise port

coupling plugs

User lead

TSX TAP S15 05

F housing F M housing

M

8 9 1

7 12 10 2

6

11

3

5 4 clockwise

8 9 1

7 12 10 2

6

11

3

5 4

F

1 9 8

2 10 12 7

3

11

4 5

6 anti-clockwise

1 9 8

2 10 12 7

3

11

4 5

6

Pin references of the DIN and 15-pin Sub-D connectors on the TSX TAP S15 05

DIN SUB-D

Pin Signal Pin

1 B11

2

3

Supply feedback

Z+

13

4

4

5

6

7

Z-

A+

Anc

B+ nc

0V nc

5

1

2

Shielding must be continuous along the entire length of the connections, which must be connected to the machine ground at both ends.

8

9

10

11

10

8

12 5V 15

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 4

Setup 3

3.5-2 Mounting the TSX TAP S15 05

Mounting on Telequick plate

The angle bracket supplied is used to fix the TSX TAP S15 05 to an AM1-PA... type perforated plate or to any other support.

F

Mounting through the wall of a cabinet

The TSX TAP S15 05 can be fitted through the wall of a cabinet using its fixing nut. The seal ensures dust and damp protection between the inside and the outside.

max thickness = 5mm seal cut-out = Ø 37mm

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 5

Dimensions :

F

70.4

∅

5.5

27.4

43

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 6

Setup 3

Connecting to a NUM MDLA speed drive

The NUM 400V speed drive integrates all of the elements necessary for its operation.

To indicate position it has an output whose signals simulate the operation of an incremental encoder. The 2.5m or 6m TSX CXP 233 / 633 cable accessory is used for direct connection.

TSX CXP 233 / 633

NUM MDLA

J2

F

Cable : length :

TSX CXP 213 : 2.5m

TSX CXP 633 : 6m signal

A+

A -

B+

B -

14

4

Z+

Z -

13

3

encoder OK 12

OV encoder 8

J2

15

5

Note : in this case no encoder supply is necessary.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 7

3.6

Connecting sensors, preactuators and supplies without a speed drive

The TSX CAY 21 / 41 module is fitted as standard with dedicated I/O to ensure full operation of the motion control system, as well as providing the encoder supply.

F

3.6-1 Signal referencing

The connector is of the high density HE 10 type

C B

5 V 1

10...30 V 3

2 0 V

4 nc

I0 5

7

6 I1

I2

I0

8 I3

10 I1 9

I2 11 12 I3

Q0 13

Q0 15

14 nc

16 nc

24 V 17 18 0 V

24 V 19 20 0 V

Encoder supply input

Auxiliary inputs

Auxiliary inputs

Reflex output

Reflex output

Sensor supply input

CAY 21/41

B chann. 0.1

chann. 0 chann. 1 chann. 0 chann. 1 chann. 0.1

CAY 41

C chann. 2.3

chann. 2 chann. 3 chann. 2 chann. 3 chann. 2.3

Channels 2 and 3 are assigned to the TSX CAY 41 module

The auxiliary I/Os are assigned to the following functions :

• I0 = reference point cam input,

• I1 = emergency stop input (stop if no current at input),

• I2 = event input,

• I3 = recalibration input,

• Q0 = reflex output (solid state output).

• 0 V = auxiliary inputs and reflex outputs common.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 8

Setup 3

3.6-2 Telefast connection and wiring accessories

To connect this high-density connector, it is recommended to use the Telefast

ABE 7H16R20 discrete prewiring accessory together with the TSX CDP 053 / 503 cable, or the 20-wire, 3m TSX CDP 301 or the 5m TSX CDP 501 cables, consisting of an HE10 connector at one end and flying leads at the other.

Wiring with discrete Telefast

F

Telefast ABE 7H16R20

TSX CDP 053 / 503

Cable : length :

TSX CDP 053 : 0.5m

TSX CDP 103 : 1m

TSX CDP 203 : 2m

TSX CDP 303 : 3m

TSX CDP 503 : 5m

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 9

3.6-3 Signal availability on the TELEFAST screw terminal block

The terminal block below represents that of the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base. The signals are referenced using cable TSX CDP 053 / 503.

F

(1)

(2)

(1) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base, the position of the jumper defines the polarity of all

2•• terminals :

• Jumper in position 1 and 2 : 2•• terminals have + polarity,

• Jumper in position 3 and 4 : 2•• terminals have - polarity.

(2) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base it is possible to add an optional ABE-7BV20 bar to create a second sensor common (+ or - selected by the user).

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 0

Setup 3

Example of connecting sensors on auxiliary inputs and their supplies

This connection is made using a TELEFAST 2 :

ABE-7H16R20 connection sub-base s

+ + – –

24 VDC 0 VDC

+ + – –

Connection of auxiliary input sensor 24 VDC supply

TELEFAST 2

ABE-7H16R20

F

TSX CDP 053 / 503 cable

I0 I1

ABE-7BV20

(common -) channel 0

Connection of sensors to auxiliary inputs channel 1

I2 I3 Q0 I0 I1 I2 I3

Mechanical

contact

Q0

204 104

+

205 105

+

206 106

+

207 107 112 312

+

208 108

+

209 109

+

210 110

+

211 111

+

114 314

Rl Rl

204 104 205 105 206 106

+ + +

207 107 112 312

+

208 108 209 109 210 110

+ + +

211 111

+

114 314

Rl Rl 2-wire proximity sensor

204 104

+

304

–

205 105

+

305

–

206 106

+

306

–

207 107

+

307

–

112 312 208 108

Rl

+

308

–

209 109

+

309

–

210 110

+

310

–

211 111

+

311

–

114 314

Rl

3-wire

PNP proximity sensor

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 1

F

Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector

115

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

3

4

1

2

200...215

TELEFAST 20-pin HE10 screw term. blk.

connector

(Terminal no.) (Pin no.)

100 1

101 2

102

103

104

3

4

5

110

111

112

113

114

105

106

107

108

109

11

12

13

14

15

8

9

6

7

10

16

17

18

19

20

300...315

Type of signal

+ 5 VDC

- 0 VDC

+ 10…30 VDC reference point cam input I0 (channel 0) Auxiliary emergency stop input I1 (channel 0) inputs event input I2 (channel 0) channel 0 recalibration input I3 (channel 0) reference point cam input I0 (channel 1) Auxiliary emergency stop input I1 (channel 1) inputs event input I2 (channel 1) recalibration input I3 (channel 1) channel 1 reflex output Q0 (channel 0) nc reflex output Q0 (channel 1) nc (1)

Auxiliary input sensor supply

All 2 ii terminals at + 24 VDC

All 2 ii terminals at - 0 VDC

Encoder supply

Connection of sensor commons to :

+ 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 linked

- 0 VDC if terminals 3 & 4 linked

Terminals may be used as sensor common on optional ABE-7BV20 bar connected by wire to the common voltage.

note (1) nc = not connected

The same wiring is used in the CAY 41 module for channels 2 and 3.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 2

Setup 3

3.6-4 Connecting via TSX CDP 301 or 501 cable

Connecting via these cables gives a direct connection to the actuators, preactuators or terminals. The braid consists of twenty 22-gauge (0.34 mm 2 ) wires, and has an HE10 connector at one end and flying leads at the other, referenced via a color code

Cable :

TSX CDP 301 :

TSX CDP 501 : length :

3m

5m

F

HE10

1

3

5

7

9 10

6

8

2

4

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20 pre-wired cable brown yellow pink red violet red-blue white green gray blue black gray-pink brown-green white-green yellow-brown white-yellow gray-brown white-gray pink-brown white-pink

+5 VDC

0 VDC

+10...30 VDC nc

I0

I1

I2

I3

I0 chann.0

I1

I2

I3

Q0 nc

Q0 chann.1

nc

+24 VDC

0 VDC

+24 VDC

0 VDC

3 / 2 3

F

3.6-5 Wiring precautions

Inputs I0, I1, I2 and I3 are fast inputs and must be connected to the sensor by twisted wire if the sensor is volt-free contact type, or by shielded cables if it is a 2-wire or 3-wire proximity sensor.

This module is fitted as standard with devices to protect against short-circuits or voltage inversions. The module cannot however withstand a fault for any length of time and the fuses connected in series with the supplies give effective protection. The fuses must therefore be of the fast blow type with a maximum capacity of 1A. The supplies must provide sufficient power to blow the fuses.

Important note : wiring of solid state outputs Q0

The actuator is connected to output QO at its common point at supply 0V. If for any reason (poor contact or accidental disconnection) there is a break in the supply 0V of the output amplifier while the 0V of the actuators remains connected to the supply 0V, there may be an output current from the amplifier of a few mA which is sufficient to keep certain low-power actuators energized.

+ + – – s

+ + – –

I0 channel 0

I1 I2 Q0 I0 channel 1

I1 I2 Q0

204 104

+

205 105

+

206 106

+

112 312 208 108

+

209 109

+

210 110

+

Rl

114 314

Rl

Connecting using Telefast :

This is the most reliable type of connection provided the actuator common is connected to the bar of the 2•• common points (jumper in position 1-2). In this case there can be no break in the module common without breaking the actuator common.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 4

Setup 3

Connecting using TSX CDP 301/501 cable :

This type of connection requires very careful attention. Great care must be exercised during wiring, using for example cable ends at the screw terminals. If required it will be necessary to double up the connections to ensure permanent contacts. When the actuator supply is some distance from the modules and near to the actuator common, the connection between the common and 0V terminal of the module(s) may be accidentally broken.

TSX CAY 21/41

24 V

Q0

0V

F

24 V

Q0

0V

Critical wire

RL

A B

RL

Actuator supply

If there is a break in the supply cable segment between A and B, there is a risk of the

RL actuators remaining energized. If possible, double the 0V supply connections for the module(s).

With the TSX CDP 301/501 cable : white-pink

+24VDC white-gray

24 V

0 V

RL

TSX CDP 301 / 501 cable

0VDC gray-brown pink - brown

0VDC connection terminal

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 5

F

3.7

Connecting speed drive command signals

3.7-1 Signal referencing

The TSX CAY 21/41 module manages as standard the signals necessary for correct operation of the speed drives. This connector is used only for management of the 2 channels or 4 channels of the CAY 21/41 module.

COM0 nc

1

3

VALVAR1

COM2

5

7

2

4

6

8

VALVAR0

COM1 nc

VALVAR2

Relay outputs nc 9

VALVAR3

11

OK_VAR0

13

OK_VAR2

15

10 COM3

12 nc

14

16

OK_VAR1

OK_VAR3

Speed drive command inputs nc nc

17

19

18 0 V

20 0 V

24 V common

Auxiliary I/O supply

COMx - VALVARx : volt-free contact for speed drive validation

OK_VARx : speed drive command input

24V - 0V sensor supply

Each channel has a volt-free N/O contact.

COMx

VALVARx

To connect the HE10 connector, use the following wiring accessories : Telefast discrete

ABE-7H16R20 with TSX CDP 303 or TSX CDP 503 cable.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 6

3.7-2 Connecting using the TELEFAST pre-wired system

+ + – – s

24VDC supply

+ + – –

Setup 3

F

(*)

1 P4 0 P4

P4

100 200 201 101 112 301

24 V

REFEN

DROK

GND24

24 V

REFEN

DROK

GND24

103 203 204 104 113 303

For direct connection use a TSX CDP 301 or 501 cable.

See section 3.6-3.

(*) Strap between 1 and 2 : all terminals 200 to 215 are at +24 VDC.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 7

F

3.7-3 Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector

Type of signal

113

114

115

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

1

2

3

4

200...215

TELEFAST 20-pin HE10 screw term. blk.

connector

(Terminal no.) (Pin no.)

100

101

1

2

102

103

104

3

4

5

109

110

111

112

105

106

107

108

10

11

12

13

8

9

6

7

18

19

20

14

15

16

17

300...315

COM0

VALR0 nc

COM1

VALR1 nc

COM2

VALR2 nc

COM3

VALR3 nc

OK_VAR0

OK_VAR1

OK_VAR2

OK_VAR3

Auxiliary input sensor supply

All 2 ii terminals at + 24 VDC

All 2 ii terminals at - 0 VDC

contact closed =

speed drive enabled

ENCoder OK = encoder supply voltage present

Connection of sensor commons to :

+ 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 connected

- 0 VDC if terminals 3 & 4 connected

Terminals may be used as a sensor common on optional ABE-7BV20 bar note (1) nc = not connected

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 8

Setup 3

3.8

Module electrical characteristics

3.8-1 General characteristics

Maximum counting frequency :

SSI absolute encoder : CLK transmission frequency incremental encoder :

×

1

×

4

Current drawn on internal 5V

(fan running) CAY 21

CAY 41 typical

1.1A

1.5A

Current drawn on sensor/ preactuator 24V, outputs OFF

Current drawn by module on encoder 10/30V at 24V (2)

CAY 21

CAY 41

CAY 21

CAY 41 typical

15mA

30mA typical

11mA

22mA

Power dissipated in module

Isolation resistance

CAY 21

CAY 41 typical (3)

7.2W

10 W

> 10 MOhms at 500 VDC

1000 V rms 50 / 60 Hz for 1 min Dielectric strength with ground or PLC logic 0V

Operating temperature

Storage temperature

Relative humidity (without condensation)

Operating altitude

0 to 60

-25

°

°

C

C to 70

°

5% to 95%

< 2000 m

C

200KHz

500KHz

1MHz max

1.4A

1.8A

max

18mA

36mA max

20mA

40mA max (4)

11.5W

17 W

Note (1) : 250 kHz on input

Note (2) : Use of an absolute encoder and a single supply in 24V

Note (3) : normal conditions of use : one auxiliary input active per channel (at 24 V).

Note (4) : the "worst possibility" and extreme conditions : all auxiliary inputs active (at

30 V).

The module has a small internal fan to ensure correct operation across the whole temperature range. The fan is activated as necessary by a temperature sensor inside the module (triggered at 45

°

C external temperature).

It is possible to use TSX FAN external ventilation units if the temperature conditions around the module exceed the parameters above, see section 8 of part A1 of this document.

F

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2 9

F

3.8-2 Analog output characteristics

Parameters

Range

Actual range

Resolution

Value of LSB

Max. current from one output

Fallback value

Monotonicity

Differential linearity

Precision

Dielectric strength between channels and machine ground

Value

±

10.24

±

10.24

13 bits + sign

1.25

1.5

max

±

1

100

±

2

0.5

1000VAC

Unit

V

V mV mA

LSB

%

LSB

% F.S.

Each output is protected against short-circuits and overloads. If a fault occurs a signal is sent to the CPU via a status word. A short-circuit on these outputs will not damage the module.

The absence of the connector on the analog output is not monitored.

3.8-3 Counter input characteristics

Equivalent circuit diagram : example of input A

A+

220

Ω

10nF

190

Ω line check input A

A-

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3 0

Setup 3

Characteristics for 5V use

Electrical characteristics

Nominal voltage

Voltage limits

Nominal current

Input impedance (at 5 V)

Voltage in "On" state

Current in "On" state

Voltage in "Off" state

Current in "Off" state

Encoder / sensor voltage feedback check

Symbol

Un

U1

In

Re

Uon

Ion

Uoff

Ioff

Compatibility of inputs A, B and Z :

RS 422 / RS 485 line transmitter outputs with 7 mA current loop. Differential line check on each input.

A+

220

Ω

A-

Line check

Value

±

5

±

5.5

±

18

270

>=+2.4

> +3.7

<1.2

<1

Check presence

Unit

V

V mA

Ohms

V mA

V mA

F

5V supply, totem pole outputs.

Differential line check on each input.

A+ 220 Ω

A-

Line check

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3 1

Encoder + supply feedback input characteristics :

Ie encoder + supply feedback input

0V

F Electrical characteristics

Voltage in "On" state (OK)

Voltage limits

Input current (2.5 < Uok < 30

Symbol

Uok

Umax

Imax

Value

> 2.5

30

3

The presence of the encoder will be detected as long as the input is active.

Unit

V

V mA

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3 2

3.8-4 Auxiliary input characteristics

The auxiliary inputs have a 24V supply from a supply to the connector.

Equivalent circuit diagram :

24 V

I3

I2

I1

24V sensors / preactuators

Ie

Ie

I0

Voltage check

0 V

0V sensors / preactuators

Setup 3

F

Electrical characteristics

Nominal voltage

Voltage limits (1)

(including ripple)

Nominal current

Input impedance (at Unom)

Voltage in "On" state

Current at Uon (11V)

Voltage in "Off" state

Current at "Off" state

Immunity Off --> On (for I0, I2 and I3)

(for I1)

Immunity On -->Off (for I0, I2 and I3)

(for I1)

Dielectric strength with ground

IEC compatibility with sensors

3-wire / 2-wire proximity sensor compatibility

Input type

Logic type

Re

Uon

Ion

Uoff

Ioff ton

Symbol

Un

U1

Utemp (*)

In

Value

24

19 to 30

34

8

3

>=11

>6

<5

<2

0.1 to 0.2

1 to 4 ton 0.1 at 0.2

1 to 4

1500V rms 50 / 60 Hz for 1min type 2 all proximity sensors operating at 24VDC

Current sink

Positive (sink) ms ms

Unit

V

V

V mA

KOhms

V mA

V mA ms

3 / 3 3

F

3.8-5 Reflex output Q0 characteristics

Each position control channel has an output controlled by the processor which is used for the integrated control of one function of the axis being controlled. For example, control of braking between two movements, safety, etc. This is a solid state output with the load common at the sensor / preactuator 0V voltage. It is protected against overloads and short-circuits, and fault information is provided to the processor if a fault occurs.

Sensor / preactuator supply monitor

Command

Short-circuit fault monitor

+

24 V

Q0

–

Electrical characteristics

Nominal voltage

Voltage limits

Max for 1 hour / 24 hrs (Utemp)*

Nominal current

Max voltage drop when "On"

Leakage current

Max current at 30V and at 34V

Switching time

Dielectric strength with the ground

Compatible with DC inputs

IEC 1131 compatible

Short-circuit monitoring on each channel

Value

24

19 to 30

34

500

< 1

< 0.3

0.625

<500

1500 Vrms 50 / 60 Hz for 1 mn

All positive logic inputs where input resistance is less than 15KOhms yes

One signalling bit per channel

Unit

V

V

V mA

V mA mA

µ s

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3 4

Setup 3

Electrical characteristics

Reset :

• by application program

• automatic

Protection against overvoltages and short-circuits

Protection against channel overvoltages

Protection against polarity reversal

Power of filament lamp

Value one bit per channel written by program

Unit

Per current limiter and thermal tripping (0.7 < Id < 2 A)

Zener diode between outputs and +24V via inverted diode on the supply

10 W(max)

Note *

Utemp is the maximum voltage which can be applied to the module for 1 hour in one 24-hour operating period.

F

3.8-6 Monitoring the sensor / preactuator voltage

The module monitors the supply to the actuators / preactuators so that it can signal to the processor any malfunction which may cause incorrect operation.

Electrical characteristics

Voltage for OK state

Voltage for fault state

Immunity OK ---> Fault

Immunity Fault---> OK

Accept fault

Accept no fault

Symbol

Uok

Udef

Im.off

Im.on

Toff

Ton

Values

>18

<14

<1

<1

<10

<10

Unit

V

V ms ms ms ms

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3 5

3.8-7 Speed drive control input characteristics

The speed drive control auxiliary inputs have the same supply as the speed drive I/O.

The module does not monitor this supply, but any voltage drop below 5V on a

CTRL_VAR input may signal a speed drive fault to the processor.

F

OK_VAR

24 V

I3

I2

I1

I0

24V speed drive

0 V

0V speed drive

Electrical characteristics

Nominal voltage

Voltage limits (1)

(including ripple)

Nominal current

Input impedance (at Un)

Voltage for OK state

Current at Uon (11V)

Voltage for "Fault" state

Current at "Fault" state

Immunity OK --> Fault

Immunity Fault-->OK

Dielectric strength with ground

IEC 1131 compatibility with sensors

Logic type

Symbol

Un

U1

Utemp (*)

In

Values

24

19 to 30

34

8

Re

Uon

Ion

Uoff

Ioff toff

<1.5

1 to 4 ton 1 to 4

1500V rms 50 / 60 Hz for 1min type 1

Positive (sink)

3

>=11

>3.5

<5

Unit

V

V

V mA

KOhms

V mA

V mA ms ms

(*) Utemp : maximum voltage permitted for 1 hour in one 24-hour period.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3 6

Setup 3

3.8-8 Relay output characteristics

Each channel has one relay output.

Electrical characteristics

DC operating voltage

Permitted DC switching current

30V on resistive load

Minimum permitted load

Switching time

Dielectric strength :

• between contacts and between channels

• between contacts and ground

COMx

VALVARx

Values

5 to 30

200

1V / 1mA

<5

300VAC for 1min

1000VAC for 1 min

Unit

V mA ms

F

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3 7

F

3.9

Module display :

TSX CAY 21/41 modules have indicator lamps displaying the status of the module and the channels.

• Module status lamps (RUN, ERR, I/O)

The state of the three lamps on the front panel (off, flashing or on) indicates the module operating mode :

- RUN lamp : signals module operating state,

- ERR lamp : signals an internal module fault,

- I/O lamp : signals an external fault.

CH2

CH3 CH3 CH1

RUN ERR

I / O I/O

• Channel status lamps (CH i

)

TSX CAY 21/41 modules have 2 or 4 indicator lamps to display and diagnose the status of each channel.

These lamps are green.

Indicators

State On

RUN Normal operation

ERR

I/O

CH i

TSX CAY 21 :

CH0 and CH1

TSX CAY 41 :

CH0, CH1, CH2,

CH3

Flashing Off

— Module faulty or off

No fault Internal fault module failure

External fault

• wiring fault

• encoder supply and

10 / 30V supply fault

• absolute encoder fault (*)

Communication fault application absent, invalid or faulty execution

—

Channel is operational

No fault

Channel is not operating Channel not operating.

correctly because of :

•an external fault,

•a communication

fault,

•a process fault.

No configuration or incorrect configuration.

(*) application fault :

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3 8

4.1

Appendix

List of compatible SSI-type absolute encoders (tested) :

IVO brandname

• GM 400 0 10 11 01

24 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 25 data bits, 0 status bit, no parity.

• GM 401 1 30 R20 20 00

24 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 25 data bits, 1 status bit, even parity.

Hengstler brandname

• RA58-M/1212

24 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 24 data bits, 1 status bit, no parity.

Stegmann brandname

• AG 661 01

24 Volts, Gray, 0 header bit, 24 data bits, 0 status bit, no parity.

4 Appendix

F

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1

F

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 2

Stepper motor axis control

Setup

Contents

Part G

Section

1 Presentation

1.1

Introduction

1.1-1 Stepper motor axis control range

1.1-2 Set of two components

1.1-3 Setup software

1.2

Physical description

2 Functions

2.1

Functions

2.1-1 Configuring the axes

2.1-2 Adjusting the axes

2.1-3 Debugging

3 Setup

3.1

Setup

3.1-1 Basic configuration required

3.1-2 Installation procedure

3.1-3 General wiring instructions

3.2

Choice of translator

3.2-1 I/O interfaces

3.2-2 Translator interface power supply

3.2-3 Shielding

3.3

Connecting translator signals

3.3-1 Signal referencing

3.3-2 Connecting a translator using an RS 422/485 interface

3.3-3 Connecting a translator using an NPN open collector interface

Page

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/2

1/3

2/1

G

3/1

3/3

3/3

3/4

3/4

3/2

3/2

3/2

3/2

3/1

3/1

3/1

3/1

2/1

2/2

2/3

2/4

___________________________________________________________________________

G / 1

Stepper motor axis control

Setup

Contents

Part G

G

Section

3.4

Connecting sensors / preactuators and power supplies

3.4-1 Signal referencing

3.4-2 Connections

3.4-3 Connecting auxiliary I/O to the process

3.4-4 Connecting using a TSX CDP 301/ 501 cable

3.4-5 Connecting using the TELEFAST pre-wired system

3.4-6 Signal availability on the TELEFAST terminal block

3.4-7 Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector

3.4-8 Wiring precautions

3.4-9 Connecting using a cable

3.5

Module electrical characteristics

3.5-1 General characteristics

3.5-2 Translator input characteristics (Sub-D connector)

3.5-3 Translator outputs characteristics (Sub-D connector)

3.5-4 Auxiliary input characteristics (HE10 connector)

3.5-5 Brake output Q0 characteristics

4 Appendices

4.1

Appendices

4.1-1 List of translators compatible with CFY 11 / 21

Page

3/5

3/5

3/5

3/6

3/7

3/8

3/9

3/10

3/11

3/12

3/13

3/13

3/14

3/14

3/15

3/16

4/1

4/1

4/1

___________________________________________________________________________

G / 2

1 Presentation

1.1

Introduction

1.1-1 Stepper motor axis control range

FIP translator motor

The CFY 11/21 stepper motor axis control range for TSX model 57 PLCs is designed to meet the requirements of machine manufacturers.

It is designed for machines which require motion control via stepper motor together with simultaneous sequential control via a PLC.

1.1-2 Set of two components

Stepper motor axis control

There are two modules :

• a single-axis module with one translator control output and sensor / preactuator

I/O.

TSX CFY 11

• a 2-axis module with two translator control outputs and sensor / preactuator

I/O.

TSX CFY 21

___________________________________________________________________________

1/1

G

1.1-3 Setup software

PL7 Junior software can access screens to configure each axis and define elementary movements via a function library.

G

Screens for adjusting the axis parameters and setting up movements can also be accessed via PL7 Junior.

___________________________________________________________________________

1//2

Presentation 1

1.2

Physical description

Description of TSX CFY 11 and TSX CFY 21 stepper motor axis control modules

TSX CFY 11

Translator axis 0

Discrete I/O, translator check axis 0

G

TSX CFY 21

Translator axis 0

Translator axis 1

Discrete I/O, translator check axes 0 and 1

___________________________________________________________________________

1/3

G

___________________________________________________________________________

1//4

2 Functions

I

L

C

A

A

P

P

I

T

O

N

G

R

A

M

P

R

O

2.1

Functions

Block diagram of a stepper motor axis control system :

Processor CFY 11/21 module

Enable control

Control commands

Operating parameters

Status

Modes

Pulse generator

Cams and end stops

I

N

T

E

R

F

A

C

E

Application

Translator enable

Boost

Pulse +

Pulse - or direction

Translator check

Loss of step

Reactivation of loss of step check

Brake

Emergency stop

External stop

- limit switch

+ limit switch

Reference point cam

External event

G

CFY 11/21 stepper motor axis control modules provide for each axis :

• inputs

- translator check input

- loss of step check input

- + limit switch input

- - limit switch input

- reference point cam input

- event input

- emergency stop input

- external stop input

• outputs

- brake output

- pulse + output

- pulse - or direction output

- reactivation of loss of step check output

- boost output

- translator enable output

___________________________________________________________________________

2/1

Processing commands

Each movement, controlled by the PLC sequential program, is described by an SMOVE movement function in PL7 language. The CFY 11/12 module uses this SMOVE command to calculate a position setpoint / speed reference and generates movement pulses.

PL7 screens make it easy to adjust, debug and clearly display the status of the axes.

G

2.1-1 Configuring the axes

This screen is used to enter the parameters required to adapt the module operation to the machine axis characteristics and the technical characteristics of the power translators controlling the motor.

There is no default configuration in this screen. The configuration parameters cannot be modified by the program. Access is only possible via the programming terminal.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/2

Functions 2

2.1-2 Adjusting the axes

Adjustment parameters may be modified, either via the terminal (online or offline), or directly via the application program.

The operating parameters are :

• trajectory parameters : stop/start frequency, acceleration, soft stops, stop plateau duration,

• manual mode parameters : speed, reference point,

• brake output activation and deactivation delay times.

G

___________________________________________________________________________

2/3

G

2.1-3 Debugging

Debug mode can be accessed online and is used to control and observe axis behavior.

The information shown differs depending on the operating mode selected :

• Off mode

• Dir Drive mode

• Manual mode

• Automatic mode

The upper part of the screen gives information about the module and axis operating status : the lower part of the screen gives information about the state of the module inputs and the position of the axis with respect to the programmed target position. Different manual movement modes are available, including a command for creating a machine reference point.

___________________________________________________________________________

2/4

3 Setup

3.1

Setup

3.1-1 Basic configuration required

Stepper motor axis control modules can be installed in any slot of a TSX 57 rack. The power supply to the rack must be chosen according to the number of modules installed.

A TSX 57-10 processor can control up to 2 intelligent modules (CTY, CAY, etc). A TSX

57-20 processor can control up to 6 intelligent modules, ie. 6 TSX CFY 11/21 modules, giving a maximum of 12 axes per PLC.

3.1-2 Installation procedure

It is possible to install or remove a module without switching off the rack supply voltage to ensure a device remains available for use.

However, connection or disconnection of connectors to the translator power supplies is not recommended, as certain translators cannot tolerate such handling.

The auxiliary I/O connector can be disconnected while powered up without damaging the module. Nevertheless, for the safety of personnel it is recommended that auxiliary supplies are switched off before any disconnection.

G

The module and connector fixing screws must be tightened correctly in order to obtain good protection against electrostatic and electromagnetic interference.

3.1-3 General wiring instructions

The sensor and actuator power supplies must be protected against overloads or overvoltages by fast-blow fuses.

Use wires with an adequate cross-section to avoid line voltage drops or overheating.

Keep sensor and actuator cables away from any source of radiation caused by highpower electrical circuit switching.

All cables connecting translators must be shielded. Shielding must be of high quality and connected to the machine ground at both the module and translator ends. There must be continuity along the entire length of the connections. Only translator signals should be carried on the cable.

For performance reasons, module auxiliary inputs have short response times and it is thus important that these inputs have an adequate independent supply to ensure that the module continues to operate correctly in the event of brief power outage. It is recommended that regulated supplies are used as they ensure the consistency of actuator and sensor response times. The supply 0V must be connected to the machine ground as near as possible to the supply output.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1

3.2

Choice of translator

3.2-1 I/O interfaces

The main interfaces for connecting translators are :

- open collector outputs supporting a maximum of 30V,

- RS422/RS485 differential outputs,

- current sinking inputs (TTL type),

- RS422/RS485 differential inputs.

We recommend using translators with RS422/485 interfaces as this type of interface enables high frequencies to be generated while ensuring the greatest immunity to electromagnetic disturbance.

G

3.2-2 Translator interface power supply

The modules have an isolated 5V power supply which can power the translator interfaces if the translator does not provide power, as in the case of open collector output interfaces and TTL inputs. The 0V is common to both the inputs and the outputs, and must in all cases be wired between the module and the translator.

3.2-3 Shielding

To ensure correct operation of the module when the environment is subject to interference, shielding must be continuous along the entire length of the connector cables, and must be connected to machine ground at both ends of the cable.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2

Setup 3

3.3

Connecting translator signals

3.3-1 Signal referencing

6

7

4

5

1

2

3

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

8

10

11

12

4

9

1

2

3

13

14

5

6

8

15

7

+ pulses + outputs

–

+ pulses - (or direction) outputs

–

+ boost outputs

–

+ translator enable outputs

–

+

– reactivate loss of step check outputs translator check input loss of step check input isolated 0V isolated 5V nc : not connected

Each module output transmits an RS 485-type signal, and for each output there is thus a direct (+) signal and its complement (-). The inputs are TTL-compatible current sinking inputs. The 5V isolated supply is only available (if necessary) for the translator I/O interface. The 0V supply is common to both inputs and outputs. The 5V supply may only be used for translators with open collector outputs and TTL-type inputs (the 5V isolated supply is not supplied by the translator).

Physical interfaces of the module :

5 V driver

RS 485

+ output

- output input

G

The suggested type of connection is to solder the wires directly onto the connector : kit TSX CAP S15 comprising a Sub-D connector and a protective cover.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3

G

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

3.3-2 Connecting a translator using an RS 422/485 interface

A shielded cable containing 7 twisted pairs is recommended for connection. The + and

- wires for each module output signal must be connected to the same pair.

12

13

14

5

6

7 NC

0V 8

5V 15 NC

3

4

9

10

11

1

2

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

+

-

-

-

-

NC

NC

NC

Pulses +

Pulses - (or direction)

Boost

Translator enable

Reactivate loss of step check

Translator check

Loss of step check

TRANSLATOR

RS 422/RS485 compatible inputs

RS422/RS485 outputs

3.3-3 Connecting a translator using an NPN open collector interface

A single wire is used for each I/O signal. If the isolated 5V supply is not provided by the translator, the isolated 5V supply from the module must be used to supply the interface.

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

10

11

3

4

9

1

2

12

13

14

-

-

-

-

-

8

5V 15

5

6

7 nc

0V

+5V

Pulses +

Pulses - (or direction)

Boost

Translator enable

Reactivate loss of step check

Translator check

Loss of step check

TRANSLATOR

TTL/5V "source" compatible inputs

NPN open collector outputs

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 4

Setup 3

3.4

Connecting sensors / preactuators and power supplies

3.4-1 Signal referencing

CFY 21 reference point cam I0 emergency stop I1

+ limit switch I2 reference point cam I0 emergency stop I1

+ limit switch I2 brake Q0 brake Q0

Sensor / preactuator

24 V supply

1

3

5

7

9

11

10

12

13 14

2

4

6

8

15 16

17 18

19 20

I3 event

I4 external stop

I5 - limit switch

I3 event

I4 external stop

I5 - limit switch nc nc

Sensor / preactuator

0V supply inputs channel 0 inputs channel 1 output channel 0 output channel 1

G

The 0V connection for the sensors / preactuators should be connected within the module to machine ground by an R/C circuit with value : R = 10M

Ω

/ C = 4.7nF.

3.4-2 Connections

There are several possible solutions for connecting CFY 11 / 21 module sensors / preactuators. They may be connected directly via a TSX CDP 301 / 501 cable or via the discrete TELEFAST pre-wired system.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 5

G

3.4-3 Connecting auxiliary I/O to the process

For optimum performance, the event and reference point inputs have low immunity. The use of bounce-free contacts (DDP for exemple) is recommended.

CFY 21

Sensor / preactuator power supply

+ 24 V

0 V

1

3

5

7

9

8

10

11 12

2

4

6

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20 event reference point cam external stop emergency stop

- limit switch

+ limit switch same as channel 0 electro brake channel 0 electro brake channel 1

Q0

Q0

For reasons of personnel safety, emergency stop or limit switch contacts are normally closed.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 6

Setup 3

3.4-4 Connecting using a TSX CDP 301/ 501 cable

This cable enables direct connection to actuators, preactuators or any system with terminals. The cable consists of twenty 22-gauge wires (0.34 mm 2 ) with a connector at one end and color-coded flying leads at the other.

CFY 21 cable :

TSX CDP 301

TSX CDP 501 length :

3m

5m

G

HE10

1

3

5

7

9 10

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

2

4

6

8 white brown green yellow gray pink blue

red black purple gray-pink

red-blue white-green brown-green white-yellow yellow-brown white-gray gray-brown white-pink pink-brown reference point cam event emergency stop external stop

+ limit switch

- limit switch reference point cam event emergency stop external stop

+ limit switch

- limit switch brake Q0 channel 0 nc brake Q0 channel 1 nc

24V

0V

24V

0V channel 0 channel 1

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 7

G

3.4-5 Connecting using the TELEFAST pre-wired system

Connection is by means of a ABE-7H16R20 TELEFAST 2 sub-base.

CFY 21

TSX CDP 053 / 503

+ + – – s Sensor / preactuator

24 VDC supply

+ + – –

ABE-7H16R20

Wiring example :

Mechanical contact

I0 I1

Channel 0

I2 I3 Q0 I0 I1

Channel 1

I2 I3 Q0

200 100

+

202 102

+

204 104

+

201 101 112 312

+

206 106

+

208 108

+

210 110

+

207 107

+

114 314

Rl Rl

2-wire proximity sensor

200 100 202 102 204 104

+ + +

201 101 112 312

+

206 106 208 108 210 110

+ + +

207 107

+

114 314

Rl Rl

3-wire

PNP proximity sensor

200 100

+

300

–

202 102

+

302

–

204 104

+

304

–

201 101

+

301

–

112 312 206 106

+

Rl

306

–

208 108

+

308

–

210 110

+

310

–

207 107

+

307

–

114 314

Rl

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 8

Setup 3

3.4-6 Signal availability on the TELEFAST terminal block

The terminal block below represents that of the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base. The signals are referenced using the TSX CDP 053 / 503 direct connection cable.

(1)

(1) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base, the position of the jumper defines the polarity of all the

2•• terminals :

• Jumper in position 1 and 2 : 2•• terminals have + polarity,

• Jumper in position 3 and 4 : 2•• terminals have - polarity.

(2) On the ABE-7H16R20 sub-base it is possible to add an optional ABE-7BV20 jumper bar to create a second sensor common (+ or - selected by the user).

(2)

G

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 9

3.4-7 Correspondence between TELEFAST terminal blocks and HE10 connector

G

115

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

+ 24 VDC

- 0 VDC

3

4

1

2

200...215

TELEFAST 20-pin HE10 screw term. blk.

connector

(Terminal no.) (Pin no.)

100 1

101

102

2

3

103

104

105

4

5

6

110

111

112

113

114

106

107

108

109

11

12

13

14

15

9

10

7

8

16

17

18

19

20

Signal type

I0 reference point cam

I3 event

I1 emergency stop

I4 external stop

I2 + limit switch

I5 - limit switch

I0 reference point cam

I3 event

I1 emergency stop

I4 external stop

I2 + limit switch

I5 - limit switch

Brake output Q 0 nc

Brake output Q0 nc (1)

Sensor / actuator supply

All 2 ii terminals at + 24 VDC

All 2 ii terminals at - 0 VDC channel 0 channel 1 channel 0 channel 1

300...315

Connection of sensor commons to :

+ 24 VDC if terminals 1 & 2 linked

- 0 VDC if terminals 3 & 4 linked

On the optional ABE-7BV20 jumper bar, terminals may be used as sensor common, wired to the common voltage.

note (1) nc = not connected

Signals corresponding to channel 1 are not connected for a CFY 11 module.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 0

Setup 3

3.4-8 Wiring precautions

To ensure optimum performance, inputs I0 to I5 are fast inputs. If the actuator is a voltfree contact type, the inputs must be connected using a twisted pair, or a shielded cable if the sensor is a two or three-wire proximity sensor.

This module is fitted as standard with devices to protect against short-circuits or voltage inversions. However, the module cannot withstand a fault for any length of time and the fuses connected in series with the supplies give effective protection. The fuses must therefore be of the fast blow type with a maximum rating of 1A. The supplies must provide sufficient power to blow the fuses.

Important note : wiring of solid state outputs Q0

The actuator is connected to output QO at its common point at supply 0V. If for any reason (poor contact or accidental disconnection) there is a break in the supply 0V of the output amplifier while the 0V of the actuators remains connected to the supply 0V, there may be an output current from the amplifier of a few mA which is sufficient to keep certain low-power actuators energized.

G

+ + – – s

+ + – –

I0 I1 I2 Q0 I0 I1 I2 Q0

204 104

+

205 105

+

206 106

+

112 312 208 108

+

209 109

+

210 110

+

114 314

Rl Rl

Connecting using TELEFAST :

This is the most reliable type of connection provided the actuator common is connected to the jumper bar of the 2•• common points (jumper in position 1-2). In this case there can be no break in the module common without breaking the actuator common.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 1

G

3.4-9 Connecting using a cable

This type of connection requires very careful attention. Great care must be exercised during wiring, using for example cable ends at the screw terminals. In certain circumstances, it is necessary to double up the connections to ensure permanent contacts.

When the actuator supply is some distance from the modules and near to the actuator common, the connection between the common and 0V terminal of the module(s) may be accidentally broken.

TSX CFY 11/21

24 V

Q0

0V

24 V

Q0

0V

A

Critical wire B

RL RL

Actuator power supply

If there is a break in the supply cable segment between A and B, there is a risk of the

RL actuators remaining energized. If possible, double the 0V supply connections for the module(s).

With the TSX CDP 301/501 cable : white-gray

+24VDC white-pink

24 V

0 V

RL

TSX CDP 301 / 501 cable

0VDC gray-brown pink-brown

0VDC connection terminal block

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 2

3.5

Module electrical characteristics

3.5-1 General characteristics

Electrical characteristics

Maximum pulse frequency

Current drawn on internal 5V

Current drawn by module on sensor / preactuator 24V excluding sensor / preactuator current

Power dissipated in module

Values

187.316

CFY 11

CFY 21

KHz typical

510 mA

650 mA

CFY 11

CFY 21 typical

50 mA

100 mA

CFY 11

CFY 21 typical

3.8 W

5.6 W

> 10 M

Ω

at 500 VDC

1000V rms 50 / 60 Hz for 1min

Isolation resistance

Dielectric strength between "translator"

I/O and machine ground or PLC logic

Operating temperature

Storage temperature

Relative humidity (without condensation)

Operating altitude

0 to 60

°

C

-25

°

C to 70

°

C

5% to 95%

< 2000 m

Setup 3

G

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 3

3.5-2 Translator input characteristics (Sub-D connector)

These are current sinking inputs with negative logic.

diagram :

5 V

G

Ue

Characteristics

Nominal curent

(Ue = 0V)

Voltage in ON state

Voltage in OFF state

Immunity of loss of step input

Immunity of translator fault input symbol

Ie

Uon

Uoff

0 V value

4.5

2

3.6

15 to 30

3 to 10

Unit mA

V

V

µ s ms

3.5-3 Translator outputs characteristics (Sub-D connector)

These are isolated RS 422 / 485 type. There are two complementary outputs per signal.

Characteristics

Differential output voltage at R load <= 100

Ω

Short-circuit current

Permitted common mode voltage

Permitted differential voltage value

± 2

< 150

<= 7

<= 12 units

V

V

V mA

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 4

Setup 3

3.5-4 Auxiliary input characteristics (HE10 connector)

Equivalent circuit diagram :

24 V

I5

I3

I4

I2

I1

Ie

Ie

I0

0 V

Characteristics

Nominal voltage

Nominal voltage limits

(including ripple)

Nominal current

Input impedance (at Un)

Voltage for ON state

Current at Uon (11V)

Voltage for OFF state

Current for OFF state

Input immunity :

Reference point cam and event

Other inputs

IEC 1131 compatibility with sensors

Compatibility with 2 and 3-wire sensors

Input type

Logic type

Preactuator voltage check

Supply threshold OK

Supply threshold fault

Supply detection time

Supply OK

Supply fault symbol

Un

U1

Utemp (1)

In

Re

Uon

Ion

Uoff

Ioff ton/ toff (2) ton / toff value

24

19 to 30

34

7

3.4

>=11

> 6

< 5

< 2 mA

K

Ω

V mA

V mA unit

V

V

V

< 250

3 to 10

µ s ms type 2 all proximity sensors at 24 VDC current sink positive (sink)

> 18

< 14

V

V

< 30

> 1 ms ms

(1) Utemp : maximum permitted voltage for 1 hour in any 24-hour period.

(2) Inputs : reference point cam and event are fast inputs (response time < 250

µ s) in accordance with the maximum frequency of 187.316 KHz for translator control outputs.

G

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 5

3.5-5 Brake output Q0 characteristics sensor/preact.

supply check short-circuit fault check command

+

24V

Q0

–

G

Electrical characteristics

Nominal voltage

Voltage limits

Temporary voltage

Nominal current value

24

19 to 30

34 (1)

500 unit

V

V

V mA

Maximum voltage drop when ON

Leakage current when OFF

Load impedance

Maximum current at 30V and 34V

< 1

< 0.3

80 < Zon <15000

625

Switching time

Electro discharge time

< 250

< L/R

F < 0.6 /(LI 2 ) Maximum switching frequency on inductive load

Inductive input compatibility All inputs with Re less than 15 K

Ω and positive logic yes IEC 1131 conformity

Protection against overloads and short-circuits via current limiter and tripping

Short-circuit check on each channel thermal with signaling : 1 bit per channel

Reactivation : via program or automatic 1 bit per module

Hz

V mA

Ω mA

µ s s

Protection against channel overvoltages

Protection against polarity inversions

Permitted power of filament lamp

Preactuator voltage check

Voltage check reaction time

Zener diode (55V) between outputs and +24V via reverse-mounted diode on supply

8

OK if supply > 18 (rising) not OK if supply < 14 (falling)

NOK--> OK < 30

OK --> NOK > 1

W

V

V ms ms

(1) : maximum permitted voltage for 1 hour in any 24-hour period.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 6

4.1

Appendices

4.1-1 Translators compatible with CFY 11 / 21

Manufacturer

Phytron reference

MSD mini 172-70 POWER PACK

4 Appendices

G

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 1

G

___________________________________________________________________________

4 / 2

Index part G

Index

I

C

CFY 11/21

Adjusting the axes

Configuring the axes

Debugging

Functions

Physical description

G2/3

G2/2

G2/4

G2/1

G1/3

Characteristics

Auxiliary inputs

Brake output Q0

Modules, electrical

Translator inputs

Connecting

Auxiliary I/O

G3/15

G3/16

G3/13

G3/14

G3/6

Sensors / preactuators

Translator signals

G3/5

G3/3

Using TSX CDP 301/501 cable G3/12

Introduction

S

G1/1

Setup

Basic configuration

General wiring instructions

I/O interfaces

Installation procedure

G3/1

G3/1

G3/1

G3/2

G3/1

Shielding G3/2

Translator interface power supply G3/2

Stepper motor axis control

TSX CFY 11

TSX CFY 21

G1/1

G1/1

T

TELEFAST

Translator with NPN open collector interface

Translator with RS 422/485 interface

Translators compatible with

CFY 11 / 21

W

Wiring precautions

G3/8

G3/4

G3/4

G4/1

G3/11

B

___________________________________________________________________________

I / 1

___________________________________________________________________________

I / 2

Start-up/Diagnostics/Maintenance Contents

Part H

___________________________________________________________________________

Section

1 Display

1.1

Introduction

1.2

Display of PLC status

1.3

Display of module status

1.3-1 Discrete I/O modules

1.3-2 Analog and application-specific modules

1.3-3 Power supply modules

2 Start-up

2.1

Checking discrete I/O connections

2.2

PLC and module states on initial power-up

3 Troubleshooting and fault analysis

3.1

Troubleshooting using the processor status indicator lamps

3.2

Reminder of system bits and system words

3.2-1 System bits

3.2-2 System words

3/1

3/1

3/4

3/4

3/9

Page

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/2

1/2

1/3

1/6

2/1

H

2/1

2/2

___________________________________________________________________________

H / 1

H

Start-up/Diagnostics/Maintenance

Section

Contents

Part H

Page

___________________________________________________________________________

H / 2

1 Display

1.1

Introduction

Every module has indicator lights which assist setup, operation, diagnostics and maintenance of the PLC :

• display the PLC status on the processor module,

• display the status of each module (discrete I/O, application-specific module, power supply)

• display the channels for each discrete I/O module and some of the application-specific modules

• I/O channel diagnostics.

1.2

Display of PLC status

The 4 indicator lamps RUN, TER, I/O, ERR situated on the processor provide information, depending on their state (off, flashing or on), on the PLC operating mode :

RUN :

ERR :

I/O :

TER :

PLC Run/Stop

Processor or application fault

I/O fault (channel or module)

Traffic on the terminal port

RUN ERR

RUN I / ERR

TER I/O

H

ERR

(Red)

I/O

(Red)

State On

Indicator

RUN

(Green)

PLC running normally

Blocking fault (1) : processor module failed, system or supply fault

• I/O fault from a station module or I/O configuration fault.

• PCMCIA communication card failed or incompatible.

Flashing Off

PLC stopped PLC faulty, application absent or not valid.

Non-blocking fault (1) : No fault

• application absent, invalid or operating incorrectly

• PCMCIA memory card failed or incompatible, battery fault.

— No fault

TER

(Yellow)

Exchange in progress on terminal port (2)

— No exchanges in progress

(1) For more information on blocking or non-blocking faults, refer to section 3.1

(2) Traffic on the terminal port may give the impression that this indicator is flashing.

Note : during the self-tests, the RUN, ERR, and I/O indicator lamps flash.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1

1.3

Display of module status

1.3-1 Discrete I/O modules

• Module status indicator lamps : (RUN, ERR, I/O)

Three or four indicator lamps situated on each module provide information, depending on their state (off, flashing or on), about the module operating mode :

- RUN indicator : signals the module operating status,

- ERR indicator : signals an internal module fault,

- I/O indicator : signals an external fault,

- indicator + 32 : signals the display of channels 32 to 63 on modules with 64 channels.

• Channel status indicator lamps : (0 to i)

Depending on the type of module, 8, 16 or 32 indicator lamps display and provide diagnostics on the status of each module channel.

H

Indicator

State On

RUN Normal operation

Flashing Off

— Module faulty or powered off

No module fault ERR

I/O

Internal fault : module failure

External fault : overload, short-circuit, sensor/preactuator voltage fault

Channel at state 1

Communication fault

Terminal block fault No external fault

0...i

Channel faulty due to overload or short-circuit

Channel at state 0

Note : during the self-tests, the RUN, ERR, and I/0 indicator lamps flash.

8-channel modules 16-channel modules 32 or 64-channel modules

RUN ERR

I / O

RUN ERR

I / O

RUN

+ 32

ERR

I / O

5

6

3

4

7

0

1

2

5

6

3

4

7

0

1

2

11

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

5

6

3

4

7

0

1

2

11

12

13

14

15

8

9

10

19

20

21

22

23

16

17

18

27

28

29

30

31

24

25

26

(1)

1 / 2

Display 1

1.3-2 Analog and application-specific modules

Like discrete I/O modules, analog and application-specific modules (counter, axis control, etc) have indicator lamps which display the module status and channel status

(on certain modules).

• Module status indicator lamps (RUN, ERR, I/O)

CH2

CH3

CH0

CH1

RUN ERR

I / O

Three indicator lamps situated on each module give information, depending on their status (indicator off, flashing or on), about the module operating mode :

- RUN indicator : signals the module operating status,

- ERR indicator : signals an internal fault on the module,

- I/O indicator : signals an external fault,

• Channel status indicator lamps (CH i

)

Certain application-specific modules have 1, 2 or 4 indicator lamps which display and provide diagnostics for the status of each module channel.

TSX AEY / TSX ASY analog modules and TSX ISP Y100 weighing modules

State

Indicator

On Flashing Off

RUN

ERR

I/O

Normal operation

Internal fault module failure

External fault

• range overshoot

• sensor link fault

(TSX AEY 414 module)

— Module faulty or powered off

Communication fault on No module fault

TSX ASY analog output module and TSX ISP Y100 weighing module

Terminal block fault No external fault

CH i

No channel status indicator lamps

H

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 3

H

TSX CTY 2A/4A counter modules

State On

Indicator

RUN Normal operation

Flashing Off

— Module faulty or powered off

No module fault ERR

I/O

Internal fault module failure

External fault

• wiring fault

• encoder supply fault

• measurement overshoot

Communication fault

— No external fault

CH

TSX CTY 2A :

CH0 and CH1

TSX CTY 4A :

CH0, CH1, CH2,

CH3

Application fault (1).

Channel is operational Channel is not operating Channel is not in service : correctly due to :

• an internal fault,

(module absent or failed),

No configuration or incorrect configuration.

• an external fault,

(application fault),

• communication fault.

TSX CAY 21/41 axis control modules

State On

Indicator

RUN Normal operation

ERR

I/O

CH i

TSX CAY 21 :

CH0 and CH1

TSX CAY 41 :

CH0, CH1, CH2,

CH3

Flashing Off

— Module faulty or powered off

No module fault Internal fault module failure

External fault

• wiring fault,

• encoder/24 V supply fault,

• absolute encoder fault,

• speed drive fault,

Application fault (1).

Channel is operational

Communication fault

— No external fault

Channel is not operating Channel is not correctly due to : operational :

• an internal fault,

(module absent or failed),

• an external fault,

No configuration or incorrect configuration.

(application fault),

• communication fault.

1 / 4

Display 1

TSX CTY 11/21 stepper control module

State On

Indicator

RUN Normal operation

ERR

I/O

CH i

TSX CFY 11 :

CH0

TSX CFY 21 :

CH0, CH1

Flashing Off

— Module faulty or powered off

No module fault Internal fault module failure

External fault

• wiring fault

• 24 V supply or encoder

fault

• transporter fault,

Application fault (1)

Communication fault

—

Channel is operational

No module fault

Channel is not operating Channel is not correctly due to : operational,

• an internal fault, No configuration or incorrect configuration.

(module absent or failed),

• an external fault,

(application fault),

• communication fault.

H

TSX SCY 21600 communication module

Indicator

RUN

State On

Normal operation

ERR

CH0

Flashing Off

— Module faulty or powered off

Internal fault module failure

Communication fault with the connected device, configuration fault

No module fault

Channel is operational Channel is not operating Channel is not correctly due to : operational,

• an internal fault,

(module absent or failed),

• an external fault,

(application fault)

• communication fault,

(1) configuration, adjustment, OF control problems

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 5

1.3-3 Power supply modules

Each power supply module has a display block comprising :

• 3 indicator lamps (OK, BAT, 24V) on TSX PSY 2600/

5500 power supply modules for an AC supply,

• 2 indicator lamps (OK, BAT) on TSX PSY 1610/3610/

5520 power supply modules for a DC supply,

State On

Indicator

OK Normal operation

Flashing

—

OK

BAT

24 V

Off

Module powered off or output voltage outside monitoring range

Normal operation

H

BAT Battery fault : battery absent, spent, incorrectly fitted, not compatible.

24V

(only on modules for c supply)

Normal operation

—

— 24V sensor voltage outside monitoring range.

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 6

Section 2 2

2 Start-up

2.1

Checking discrete I/O connections

• Principle

This check consists of ensuring that :

- data originating from the sensor is taken into account by the corresponding inputs and the processor,

- commands from the processor are taken into account by the outputs and transmitted to the corresponding preactuators.

Activated outputs may cause machine movements. As a result, it is advisable to disconnect the power part before carrying out this check :

• remove the motor control power fuses,

• disconnect the hydraulic and pneumatic power generators

• then power up the PLC equipped with its discrete I/O modules

• Checking input connections without a terminal

This check is carried out by activating each sensor and checking that the corresponding input indicator lamp changes state. If it does not, check the wiring and that the sensor is operating normally.

• Checking I/O connections using a terminal

The use of a terminal enables I/O connections to be checked more thoroughly. To this end, an application (1) should first be loaded to the PLC from a programming terminal, even if it contains only the I/O configuration.

This check can be carried out with the PLC in RUN :

- either from an "ADJUST 117" adjustment terminal

- or from an FTX 417/507 terminal or PC equipped with PL7 Junior software which gives access to the debug functions (see the PL7 Junior software operating modes manual : TLX DM PL7J 12E).

Note :

This check can also be carried out with the complete application loaded in the memory. In this case, inhibit the MAST, FAST and event tasks to prevent the program from being processed, by setting system bits %S30, %S31, %S38 to 0.

- Checking inputs :

1 - activate each sensor and check that the corresponding input indicator changes state,

2 - check on the terminal screen that the corresponding input bit (%I

.i

) also changes state.

- Checking outputs : from the terminal, set each corresponding output bit (%Q

.i

) to 1 then to 0 and check that the corresponding output indicator lamp switches on and off and that the associated preactuator is activated and deactivated.

(1) no module must be declared in FAST task if the application is empty.

H

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1

Section 2

H

2.2

PLC and module states on initial power-up

PLC status : on power-up, the processor executes its self-tests then waits for an application transfer. The various processor states are indicated on the display block by the RUN, ERR, I/O, indicator lamps. The following diagram shows the procedure to be followed on initial start-up, depending on the state of the indicator lamps.

Power up the

PLC

State of processor indicator lamps

RUN ERR I/O

PLC self-tests

Processor fault

"PLC error "

RUN ERR I/O

No application in the PLC

"PLC not configured"

Transfer a valid application to the PLC

"PLC stopped"

Set the PLC to RUN

(see PL7-Junior documentation)

RUN ERR I/O

(see PL7-Junior documentation)

RUN ERR I/O

"PLC running"

RUN ERR I/O

"PLC software fault or HALT" status

Key lamp off lamp flashing lamp on

2 / 2

Processor fault

"PLC error"

RUN ERR I/O

Start-up 2

Description of the PLC states

PLC self-tests

The PLC processor executes its self-tests internally. The PLC does not control the process and cannot communicate via its terminal port (or networks). This state is signalled by all 3 indicator lamps RUN, ERR and I/O flashing.

"PLC error"

The processor is stopped after a hardware failure or system fault. The process is no longer controlled, communication is impossible and only a cold restart is possible (press the processor RESET button, move the memory card handle, etc). This state is signalled when the RUN indicator lamp is off and the ERR and I/O indicator lamps are on.

"PLC not configured"

The processor has started but does not contain any valid applications. It does not control the process but can communicate via its terminal port (or networks). This state is signalled when the RUN indicator lamp is off and the ERR indicator lamp is flashing.

"PLC software fault or HALT"

The application has changed to "watchdog timer overrun" or performed an unresolved

JUMP, a HALT instruction or a blocking fault has appeared. This state is signalled by the

RUN and ERR indicator lamps flashing.

"PLC stopped"

The PLC has a valid application which is stopped (the application is in an initial state when first powered up, tasks are stopped at the end of a cycle). The process commands are in fallback state. This state is signalled by the RUN indicator lamp flashing.

"PLC running"

The application operates normally in order to control the process. An application nonblocking fault (I/O fault or software fault) may also be present. This state is signalled when the RUN indicator lamp is on (and the I/O indicator lamp in the event of I/O faults).

H

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 3

H

Section 2

Module states : During the module power-up phase, modules can be in one of the following five states :

Power up the

PLC

State of module indicator lamps

RUN ERR

Module self-tests

Initial state

Module used

Module disconnected

Module failure

Key lamp off lamp flashing lamp on

Indeterminate

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 4

Start-up 2

Description of module states

Self-tests

On power-up, or reinitialization of the processor, the module runs its self-tests. This state is signalled by the RUN, ERR and I/O indicator lamps flashing.

Output state : safety value (state 0 for discrete I/O).

Initial state :

This is the normal module state, after the self-tests phase, when it is not being controlled by the application. This state is signalled when the RUN indicator lamp is on, the ERR indicator lamp is off and the I/O indicator lamp is on, flashing or off depending on the presence or not of an I/O fault.

Output state : safety value (state 0 for discrete outputs).

Module used

The module is used in the application, and its channels are controlled by control tasks

(MAST, FAST, event). This state is signalled when the RUN indicator lamp is on, the

ERR indicator lamp is off and the I/O indicator lamp is on, flashing or off, depending on the presence or not of an I/O fault.

The state of the outputs depends on the state of the task which controls them :

• state 0 if the controlling task has not been started,

• state 0 or 1 (value given by the application if the controlling task is in RUN),

• state at fallback value (configurable) if the controlling task is stopped in STOP, on a breakpoint (BKPT), on a HALT instruction or if system bit %S9=1.

Module disconnected

No more communication between the module and the processor (processor error or powered off, rack disconnected, etc). This state is signalled when the RUN indicator lamp is on, when the ERR indicator lamp is flashing and the I/O indicator lamp is on, flashing or off depending on the presence or not of an I/O fault.

This state is only controlled by the modules controlling the outputs. The other modules remain in the "module used" state in the event of a communication stop (discrete input modules for example).

Module failure

The module has an internal fault and has to be replaced. This state is signalled when the RUN indicator lamp is off, when the ERR indicator lamp is on and the I/O indicator lamp is in any state.

H

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 5

H

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 6

3 Troubleshooting and fault analysis

3.1

Troubleshooting using the processor status indicator lamps

The status indicator lamps situated on the processor inform the user about the PLC operating mode and also about any possible faults. Faults detected by the PLC concern :

• circuits in the PLC and/or its modules : internal faults,

• the process controlled by the PLC or the wiring to the process : external faults,

• the operation of the application executed by the PLC : internal or external faults.

Faults are detected during start-up (self-tests) or during operation (this is the case for the majority of hardware faults), during exchanges with the modules or upon the execution of a program instruction.

Certain "serious" faults require a PLC restart, with others, the user uses his discretion to decide on appropriate action, depending on the level of application required.

3 types of faults can be identified : non-blocking, blocking or processor faults.

• Non-blocking faults

This is an anomaly caused by an I/O fault or by the execution of an instruction. It may be processed by the user program and does not change the PLC status.

- Non-blocking faults linked to the I/O

A non-blocking fault linked to the I/O is signalled by :

. the I/O status indicator lamp of the processor being on,

. the I/O status indicator lamps of the faulty modules being on,

. the fault bits and words associated with the channel:

%Ixy.i.ERR bit = 1 indicates channel in default (implicit exchanges),

%MWxy.i.2 words indicate the type of channel faults (explicit exchanges),

. the fault bits and words associated with the module:

%Ixy.MOD.ERR bit = 1 indicates a module fault (implicit exchanges),

%MWxy.MOD.2 words indicate the type of module fault (explicit exchanges),

. system bits %S10 : I/O fault, %S16: I/O fault in the task in progress %S40 to %S47:

I/O fault in the rack, address 0 to 7 (see section 3.2).

Note: use of these bits and words with regard to the various applications: discrete I/O, counting, analog, etc ...is explained in PL7-Junior TLX DS PL7 12E documentation.

H

Status indicator lamps System

RUN ERR I/O bits

%S10

%S16

%S40 to

%S47

Faults

I/O faults: channel supply fault, channel tripped, module not conforming to configuration, out of order, module supply fault

I/O fault in a task

Rack I/O fault

(%S40: rack 0,.... %S47: rack 7)

Key Indicator lamp on Indeterminate state

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1

Section 3

- Non-blocking faults linked to program execution

A non-blocking fault linked to the program execution is signalled by setting to 1 any of the system bits %S15, %S18 and %S20.

Testing and setting these system bits to 0 is the responsibility of the user.

Faults Status indicator lamps System

RUN ERR I/O bits

%S15 = 1

%S18 = 1

%S20 = 1

Character string manipulation error.

Capacity overflow, error on floating point or division by 0

Index overflow

H

Note : The program diagnostics function, which can be accessed via PL7 Junior software enables certain non-blocking faults linked to the execution of the program to be rendered blocking (see

PL7 Junior manual TLX DM PL7J 12E part E - section 3.3). The type of fault is indicated in system word %SW 125.

• Blocking faults

These faults, caused by the application program, prevent the program from continuing to operate, but do not cause a system fault. When such a fault appears, the application stops immediately and changes to the HALT state (all tasks are stopped on the current instruction).

There are 2 ways of restarting the application :

- via the INIT command using PL7 Junior software,

- via the processor RESET pushbutton.

The application is then at its initial state : the data has its initial values, tasks are stopped at the end of the scan, the input image bits are updated and the outputs are set to fallback position ; the RUN command enables the application to be restarted.

A non-blocking fault is indicated by status indicator lamps (ERR and RUN) flashing and, depending on the type of fault, by the setting to 1 of one or both system bits %S11 and %S26. The type of fault is indicated in system word %SW 125.

Status indicator lamps System

RUN ERR I/O bits

%S11 = 1 Watchdog (overrun)

Faults

%S26 = 1 Overrun of grafcet activity table

Unresolved Grafcet step

Execution of HALT instruction

Execution of unresolved JUMP

Key : Indicator lamp on Indicator lamp flashing Indeterminate state

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

Diagnostic tools under PL7 Junior

The program diagnostics tool for PL7 Junior software shows "in plain language" the cause and origin of the change to a PLC blocking fault : watchdog overrun, character string fault, (see PL7 Junior manual TLX DM PL7 12E - part E - section 3.3).

The type of fault is indicated in system word %SW 125.

Fault type Meaning

Blocking Watchdog overrun

Grafcet activity table overrun

Unresolved Grafcet step

Execution of HALT instruction

Execution of unresolved JUMP

Non-blocking, Manipulation error on a character string rendered blocking Division by 0 during program Capacity overflow diagnostics Operation on floating point error

Index overflow

System bits

System word

%SW125

%S11 = 1 H'DEB0'

%S26 = 1 H'DEF7'

%S26 = 1 H'DEFE'

H'2258'

H'DEF8'

%S15 = 1 H'DEF1'

%S18 = 1 H'DEF0'

%S18 = 1 H'DEF2'

%S18 = 1 H'DE87'

%S20 = 1 H'DEF3'

H

• Processor faults

These serious faults (hardware or software) mean that correct operation of the system is no longer assured. They cause a PLC to stop in ERROR which requires a cold restart. To prevent a PLC fault occurring again, the next cold start will be forced to

STOP mode.

Status indicator lamps System word

RUN ERR I/O %SW124

H'80'

H'81'

Faults

System watchdog fault or wiring fault on BusX

Wiring fault on BusX

System code fault, interruption not expected,

System task stack overflow

PL7 Junior task stack overflow

Key : Indicator lamp on Indeterminate state

Processor fault diagnostics :

When the PLC has stopped due to a fault, it can no longer communicate with a diagnostic device. Data relating to faults can only be accessed after a cold start (see system word %SW124). In general this data cannot used by the operator. Only H'80' and H'81' data can be used to diagnose a wiring fault on BusX.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3

3.2

Reminder of system bits and system words

System bits %Si and system words %SWi provide information about the PLC status and can be used to control its operation. Some of these objects are managed entirely by the system, others are the user's responsibility. For more information on system bits and words refer to the PL7 Junior documentation (TLX DR PL7 12 E - section 3 of part B).

H

3.2-1 System bits

Bits

%S0

%S1

%S4 to

%S7

%S9

%S10

%S11

Function

Cold start

Warm restart

Time bases

Change of outputs to fallback state

I/O fault

Watchdog overflow

Description

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 :

• on power return with loss of data,

• by the user program,

• by the terminal,

• on changing the PCMCIA memory card

• by pressing the processor RESET button,

• by manipulating the memory slot cover or the handle of the PCMCIA memory card.

This bit is reset to 0 by the system after a normal program execution scan.

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 :

• on power return with data save,

• by the user program,

• by the terminal.

This bit is reset to 0 by the system at the end of the first complete scan and before the outputs are updated.

%S4 changes state every 5 ms (Time base = 10 ms),

%S5 changes state every 50 ms (TB = 100 ms),

%S6 changes state every 500 ms (TB = 1 s),

%S7 changes state every 30 s (TB = 1 min).

These bits are not synchronized with the PLC scan.

Normally at state 0, this bit can be set to 1 via the program or via the terminal.

%S9 = 1 : change to fallback state (0 or 1) depending on the choice made in configuration of all discrete and analog outputs,

%S9 = 0 : normal output update.

Normally at state 1, this bit is set to 0 by the system at the time of an I/O fault on one of the station racks.

This bit is reset to 1 by the system when the fault disappears.

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system as soon as the program execution time becomes greater than the maximum execution time (watchdog) declared at configuration. Such a fault causes the PLC to change to HALT (software fault).

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 4

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

System bits (continued)

Bits

%S13

Function

First scan

%S15

%S16

%S17

%S18

%S19

%S20

Character string fault

I/O task fault

Exit bit on a shift operation or arithmetic report

Arithmetic overflow or error

Task period overrun

(periodical scan)

Index overrun

Description

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system during the first scan after setting the PLC to

RUN.In the case of a cold restart, %S13 can only change to 1 after the RESET button on the processor has been pressed or after manipulation of the PCMCIA memory card handle or slot cover.

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system when the size of the destination zone for the transfer of a character string is insufficient.

This bit must be reset to 0 by the user.

Normally at state 1, this bit is set to 0 by the system during a fault on an I/O module configured in the task.

This bit must be reset to 1 by the user. Each task controls its own bit %S16.

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system :

• during a shift operation, contains the state of the last bit,

• when an overrun occurs with unsigned arithmetic.

This bit is reset to 0 by the user.

H

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system in the event of a capacity overflow during operation on a word :

• result greater than +32767 or less than -32768 (single word),

• result greater than +2147483647 or less than -2147483648

(double word),

• overflow or error during operation on a floating point. The

type of fault is given by the system word %SW17,

• division by 0,

• square root of a negative number,

• forcing a DRUM to a non-existent step,

• stacking a full register or unstacking an empty register.

This bit must be reset to 0 by the user.

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system in the event of an overrun of the time defined for the task during configuration or programmed in %SW0 /%SW1.

This bit is reset to 0 by the user. Each periodic task

(MAST, FAST) controls its own bit %S19.

Note : while the cause of the task time overrun persists, the task operates cyclically.

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system when the address of the indexed object becomes less than 0 or exceeds the number of objects declared during configuration.

This bit is reset to 0 by the user.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 5

H

System bits (continued)

Bits

%S21

%S21

%S22

%S23

%S26

%S30

Function

Grafcet initialization

Description

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to state 1 by :

• a cold restart (%S0 = 1)

• the user program exclusively in preprocessing,

• the terminal

At state 1, it causes the Grafcet to be initialized. The active steps are deactivated and the initial steps are activated.

It is reset to state 0 by the system at the end of preprocessing.

Grafcet initialization

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to state 1 by :

• a cold restart (%S0 = 1)

• the user program exclusively in preprocessing,

• the terminal

At state 1, it causes the Grafcet to be initialized. The active steps are deactivated and the initial steps are activated.

It is reset to state 0 by the system at the end of preprocessing.

Grafcet reset to Normally at state 0, this bit is managed by the user and can zero only be set to state 1 via the program during preprocessing.

At state 1, all active steps are deactivated.

It is reset to 0 by the system at the end of preprocessing.

Grafcet freeze Normally at state 0, this bit is managed by the user and can only be set to state 1 via the program during preprocessing.

Maintained at state 1 by the application program, it enables the Grafcet to remain in a given state (without changing). It must be reset to 0 only by program during preprocessing so that the Grafcet can change from the freeze situation.

Table overflow Normally at state 0, this bit is set to state 1 when the number of

(transition steps) possible steps or transitions has been exceeded.

An overflow causes the PLC to change to STOP. Starting execution (RUN) via the terminal must be preceded by an initialization (setting %S21 to 1) by the same terminal. It is thus reset to 0 on initialization of the terminal.

System words %SW20 and %SW21 contain the number of positions occupied in the Grafcet activity tables (%SW20 step positions, %SW21 transition positions). In the event of an overflow, the words %SW20 and %SW21 contain the number of positions corresponding to the scan before the overflow.

Activation/ Normally at state 1, this bit is managed by the user : deactivation of %S30 = 1, activation of master task, master task %S30 = 0, deactivation of master task.

%S31 Activation/ Normally at state 1, this bit is managed by the user : deactivation of %S31 = 1, activation of the fast task, fast task %S31 = 0, deactivation of the fast task.

This bit is inactive if the fast task is not programmed.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 6

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

System bits (continued)

Bits

%S38

%S39

%S40 to

%S47

%S50

%S51

%S59

%S67

%S68

%S80

Function

Activation/ deactivation of events

Loss of events

I/O faults

(racks)

Description

Normally at state 1, this bit is managed by the user :

%S38 = 1, activation of event-triggered processing,

%S38 = 0, deactivation of event-triggered processing.

This bit is inactive if no event is programmed as an event task.

This bit is set to 1 by the system to advise the application that one or more events have been lost following stack overflow.

This bit should be reset to 0 by the application.

Normally at state 1, each of these bits is set to state 0 on an

I/O fault of the corresponding rack :

%S40 for rack 0, %S41 for rack 1, ........, %S47 for rack 7.

Setting one of these bits to 0 causes :

• the %S10 general bit to be set to 0,

• the I/O indicator lamp of the corresponding rack and processor to light up,

• status module bit %Ixy.ERR to be set to 1.

They are reset to 1 when the fault disappears.

These various bits are used by the program to draw up the fault processing structure.

Updating of date and time by %SW50 to %SW53

Normally at state 0, this bit is managed by the user :

%S50 = 0, access to date/time by reading words

%SW50 to %SW53,

%S50 = 1, updating of date/time by writing words

%SW50 to %SW53.

Loss of time on the

This bit managed by the system indicates at state 1 either the absence of real-time clock, or that the system words real-time clock relating to the real-time clock have no significance; in this case the real-time clock must be reset. This automatically resets the bit to 0.

Updating date / time by %SW59

PMCIA memory card battery status

Normally at state 0, this bit is managed by the user :

%S59 = 0, the system does not manage word %SW59,

%S59 = 1, the system manages word %SW59,

Internal RAM backup battery status

Reset message counters

This bit, managed by the system, is used to check the backup battery for the PMCIA memory card (RAM type) :

%S67 = 0, battery present and operative,

%S67 = 1, battery missing or inoperative.

This bit, managed by the system, is used to check the backup battery for the data and the program in the RAM memory :

%S68 = 0, battery present and operative,

%S68 = 1, battery missing or inoperative.

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the user to reset the message counters %SW80 to %SW86.

H

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 7

H

System bits (continued)

Bits

%S90

%S100

Function

Updating the common words

Protocol on terminal port

Description

Normally at state 0, this bit is set to 1 by the system on receipt of common words from another station.

This bit is reset to 0 by the user.

This bit, managed by the system, takes the value 0 or 1 depending on the type of device connected to the terminal port :

%S100 = 0, UNI-TELWAY master protocol,

%S100 = 1, UNI-TELWAY slave or ASCII (character mode) protocol.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 8

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

3.2-2 System words

Words

%SW0

%SW1

%SW8

Function

Master task scan time

Fast task scan time

Description

Used to modify the master task time, defined during configuration, via the program or the terminal.

Time is expressed in ms (1 to 255 ms).

During cyclic operation %SW0 = 0.

Used to modify the fast task time, defined during configuration, via the program or the terminal.

Time is expressed in ms (1 to 255 ms).

This system word is not significant if the fast task is not programmed.

Control Used to inhibit reading the inputs for each of reading task task : inputs %SW8:X0 = 1 inhibit in the master task

%SW8:X1 = 1 inhibit in fast task

%SW9

%SW10

%SW11

%SW12

%SW13

%SW17

Control of updating task output

Detection of a cold restart, at the end of the first scan of a task

Watchdog duration

Terminal port

UNI-TELWAY address

Main station address

Fault status of operations on floating points

Used to inhibit updating the outputs of each task :

%SW9:X0 = 1 inhibit in the master task

%SW9:X1 = 1 inhibit in fast task

This word indicates a change to RUN after a cold start

Bit %SW10:X0 is associated with the MAST task,

Bit %SW10:X1 is associated with the FAST task (if it is programmed).

The value 0 of the current task bit means that it is executing its first scan after a cold start. Each bit is set to 1 after the associated task has been executed.

Contains the duration of the watchdog defined during configuration

It is expressed in ms (10 to 500 ms).

UNI-TELWAY address of the terminal port defined during configuration and loaded in this word on a cold start.

This word is updated by the system.

Indicates for the main network :

• the station number (low order byte) : 0 to 127,

• the network number (high order byte) : 0 to 63.

Indicates the type of fault on a floating point operation:

%SW17:X0 = 1 invalid operation

%SW17:X1 = 1 non-standard operand

%SW17:X2 = 1 division by 0 / the result is

± ∞

%SW17:X3 = 1 overflow / the result is

± ∞

%SW17:X4 = 1 underflow / the result is 0

%SW17:X5 to X15: unused, always at 0

%SD18

(%SW18 +

Absolute time

This double word is used to calculate the duration.

It is incremented by the system every 1/10th of a second

%SW19) counter (even when the PLC is in STOP).

%SW18 represents the least significant bits and %SW19 represents the most significant bits of word %SD18.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 9

H

H

System words (continued)

Words

%SW20

%SW21

%SW30

%SW31

%SW32

%SW33

%SW34

%SW35

%SW48

%SW49 to

%SW53

%SW54 to

%SW58

Function

Grafcet activity level

Validity table for Grafcet transitions

Master task execution time

Description

This word contains the number of active steps to be activated and deactivated for the current scan.

This word contains the number of enabled transitions and transitions to be enabled and disabled for the current scan.

Shows, for the master task, the execution time of the last PLC scan (in ms)

Max execution Shows, for the master task, the longest execution time of the PLC time for master scan since the last cold start (in ms).

task

Min execution Shows, for the master task, the shortest execution time of the time for master PLC scan since the last cold start (in ms) task

Fast task execution time

Shows, for the fast task, the execution time of the last PLC scan

(in ms)

Max execution Shows, for the fast task, the longest execution time of the PLC time of scan since the last cold start (in ms).

fast task

Min execution Shows, for the fast task, the shortest execution time of the PLC time of scan since the last cold start (in ms).

fast task

Number of events

Real-time clock function

Real-time clock function

Indicates the number of events processed since the last cold start.

Contains, in BCD, the current date / time value :

%SW49 : day of the week, 1 to 7 (00DD)

1 = Monday, ..., 7 = Sunday)

%SW50 : Seconds, 0 to 59 (SS00),

%SW51 : Hours, 0 to 23 / Minutes, 0 to 59 (HHMM),

%SW52 : Month, 1 to 12 / day of month, 1 to 31 (MMDD),

%SW53 : Century, 0 to 99 / Year, 0 to 99 (CCYY).

These words are managed by the system when %S50 = 0.

They can be accessed by the user in write mode when %S50 = 1.

Contains, in BCD, the date / hour of the last power supply fault or PLC stop :

%SW54 : Seconds, 0 to 59 (00SS)

%SW55 : Hours, 0 to 23 / Minutes, 0 to 59 (HHMM),

%SW56 : Month, 1 to 12 / day of month, 1 to 31 (MMDD),

%SW57 : Century, 0 to 99 / Year, 0 to 99 (CCYY).

%SW58 : day of the week on MSB,

1 to 7 (DD00) 1 = Monday, ..., 7 = Sunday)

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 0

Troubleshooting and fault analysis 3

System words (continued)

Words

%SW58

%SW59

%SW80 to

%SW86

%SW108

%SW109

Function

Code of last stop

Description

Contains the code of the cause of the last stop on the low order byte (00CC) :

%SW58 = 1, change from RUN to STOP by the terminal,

%SW58 = 2, stop on software fault (task overflow),

%SW58 = 4, power fault or power supply RESET button pressed,

%SW58 = 5, stop on hardware fault,

%SW58 = 6, stop on HALT instruction.

Adjustment of Contains 2 series of 8 bits for adjusting the current date/time.

current The adjustment is made on the rising edge of a bit.

date/time The adjustment word is validated by %S59.

Incrementation Decrementation Parameter bit %SW59:X0 bit %SW59:X1 bit %SW59:X2 bit %SW59:X8 bit %SW59:X9 bit %SW59:X10 day of the week seconds minutes bit %SW59:X3 bit %SW59:X4 bit %SW59:X5 bit %SW59:X6 bit %SW59:X7 bit %SW59:X11 bit %SW59:X12 bit %SW59:X13 bit %SW59:X14 bit %SW59:X15 hours day of month month year century

Message counters

%SW80 : number of messages transmitted by the system to the terminal port.

%SW81 : number of messages received by the system from the terminal port.

%SW82 : number of messages transmitted by the system to the

PCMCIA communication card.

%SW83 : number of messages received by the system from the

PCMCIA communication card.

%SW84 : number of telegrams transmitted by the system.

%SW85 : number of telegrams received by the system.

%SW86 : number of telegrams refused by the system.

Number of forced bits

Indicates the number of forced bits in the application.

Normally set to 0, it is updated by the system when forcing and unforcing bits in the application memory.

Forced analog Counts the number of analog channels forced to 0.

channel counter

H

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 1

H

System words (continued)

Words

%SW124

%SW125

%SW126 and

%SW127

Function

Type of processor fault

Description

Contains the last type of processor fault encountered.

At values H'80' and H'81', it is used to diagnose a wiring fault on BusX.

Read after PLC cold restart.

Contains the last type of blocking fault encountered (see section 3.1).

Type of blocking fault

Address of the blocking

Contains the address of the instruction which generated the blocking fault (information for internal use).

fault instruction %SW126 contains the offset of this address

%SW127 contains the base of this address

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1 2

Standards Contents

Service conditions Part I

___________________________________________________________________________

Section

1 Standards / service conditions

1.1

Standards

1.2

Service conditions and requirements linked to the environment

1.2-1 Normal service conditions

1.2-2 Transport and storage requirements

Page

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/1

1/2

I

___________________________________________________________________________

I/1

I

Standards Contents

Service conditions Part I

___________________________________________________________________________

Section Page

___________________________________________________________________________

I/2

1 Standards / service conditions

1.1

Standards

TSX Premium PLCs have been developed to conform to the main national and international standards regarding electronic industrial control system products :

• Specific PLC requirements : operational characteristics, immunity, ruggedness, safety, etc.

EN61131-2 (IEC1131-2), CSA 22.2, UL 508

• Merchant navy requirements of principal European bodies :

BV, DNV, GL, LROS, RINA, etc.

• Compliance with European Directives (low voltage, Electromagnetic Compatibility),

CE Marking.

• Electrical and self-extinguishing qualities of insulating materials :

UL 746C, UL 94, etc.

1.2

Service conditions and requirements linked to the environment

1.2-1 Normal service conditions

• Operating temperature/Humidity/Altitude

Ambient operating temperature

Relative humidity

Altitude

0

°

C to +60

°

C (IEC 1131-2 = +5

°

C to +55

°

C)

30% to 95% (without condensation)

0 to 2000 meters

• Supply voltages

Voltage nominal limit nominal -

24VDC

(1)

-

48VDC 100...240VAC

100-120/200-240VAC

19..30VDC

19..60VDC

90...264VAC

50/60 Hz

90..140/190..264VAC

50/60 Hz Frequency

Micro-breaks limit duration

≤

1 ms repetition

≥

1s

Total harmonic distortion -

Residual ripple i included

5%

-

-

≤

1 ms

≥

1s

5% -

47/63 Hz

≤

1/2 period

≥

1s

10%

-

47/63 Hz

≤

1/2 period

≥

1s

10%

(1) Possible up to 34 VDC, limited to 1 hour per day.

With TSX PSY 1610 and TSX PSY 3610 power supplies, and if relay output modules are used, this range is reduced to 21.6V...26.4V

I

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 1

I

• Mechanical withstand

- Immunity to vibrations :

Complies with IEC 68-2-6, Fc test.

- Immunity to shocks:

Conforming to standard IEC 68-2-27, Ea test.

• Electrostatic discharge withstand

- Immunity to electrostatic discharges :

Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-2, level 3 (1)

• HF interference withstand

- Immunity to electromagnetic radiation :

Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-3, level 3 (1)

- Immunity to bursts of rapid transients :

Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-4, level 3 (1)

- Immunity to shock waves :

Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-5 (1)

- Immunity to damped oscillatory waves :

Conforming to standard IEC 1000-4-12 (1)

(1) minimum level in the test conditions laid down in the standards

• LF interference withstand

Conforming to standard IEC 1131-2.

• TSX Premium PLC protective treatment

TSX Premium PLCs meet the "TC" treatment (1) requirements.

For installing in an industrial production workshop or in an atmosphere corresponding to "TH" treatment (2), TSX Premium PLCs must be installed in at least IP54 protection enclosures as defined by the IEC 664 and NF C 20 040 standards.

TSX Premium PLCs offer their own protection index IP20 (3). They can therefore be installed without enclosures in reserved access premises which do not exceed pollution level 2 (control room with neither machines nor dust-producing activity).

(1) "TC" treatment : all-atmosphere treatment.

(2) "TH" treatment : treatment for warm or humid atmospheres.

(3) When a position is not occupied by a module, a TSX RKA 02 protective cover must be placed over the position.

1.2-2 Transport and storage requirements

Conforming to the IEC 1131-2 requirements

Storage temperature - 25

°

C to +70

°

C

Relative humidity 5% to 95% (without condensation)

___________________________________________________________________________

1 / 2

Process Contents supply Part J

___________________________________________________________________________

Section

1 Presentation

1.1

General

1.2

Catalog

1.3

Physical description

1.3-1 TBX SUP 10 power supply block

1.3-2 TSX SUP 1101 power supply block

1.3-3 TSX SUP 1011/ 1021/ 1051 supply modules

1.4

Auxiliary functions

1.4-1 Parallel operation "with power optimization" mode

1.4-2 Redundancy / safety

2 Installation / Connections

2.1

TBX SUP 10 power supply block

2.2

TSX SUP 1101 power supply block

2.3

TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051 power supply modules

3 Characteristics

3.1

Electrical characteristics

3.2

Physical and environment characteristics

Page

1/1

1/1

1/2

1/4

1/4

1/4

1/5

1/8

1/8

1/9

2/1

2/1

J

2/2

2/5

3/1

3/1

3/3

___________________________________________________________________________

J / 1

Process supply

Section

Contents

Part J

Page

J

___________________________________________________________________________

J / 2

1 Presentation

1.1

General

The TBX SUP 10 and TSX SUP 1 ii

1 process power supply blocks and modules supply a  24 V to the peripherals of an application controlled by PLCs (TSX 37ii

, TSX 57ii

, etc). These peripherals include sensors, preactuators, encoders, operator terminals, loop controllers, indicator lamps, pushbuttons, pneumatic cylinders, etc.

The a 24 V supply can be provided by a 100/240 V, 50/60 Hz AC supply or a DC supply for certain types of power supply.

A wide range of process power supplies are available providing the user with the best possible solution for his requirements :

• Power supply blocks : 24 VDC / 1A, 10A, can be integrated into the cabinet or enclosure with mounting on a Telequick pre-slotted plate AM1-PA or AM1-DE200/

DP200 rail

• Power supply modules : 24 VDC / 1A, 2A, 5A, to TSX Premium PLC mechanical standard, can be integrated :

- on TSX RKY ii racks,

- into cabinet or enclosure, with mounting on Telequick pre-slotted plate AM1-PA or

AM1-DE200/DP200 rail.

Power supply blocks

Supply voltage 100..240VAC or 125VDC Supply voltage 100...120/200...240VDC

J

24VDC / 1A 24VDC / 10A

Power supply modules to TSX Premium PLC mechanical standard

Supply voltage 100...240 VAC or

125 VDC

Supply voltage 100...120

or 200...240 VAC

24VDC / 1A 24VDC / 2A 24VDC / 5A

___________________________________________________________________________

1/1

1.2

Catalog

• Power supply blocks

Type of supply Blocks

Input characteristics

Nominal voltage

Limit values

J

Frequency limit

Nominal input current

Output characteristics

Useful power a output voltage

Nominal current

Auxiliary functions

VLSV (1)

Paralleling (2)

100..240 VAC or 125 VDC

90...264 VAC or 88...56 VDC

47...63 Hz

0.4A

24 W

24 VDC

1 A

No

No

100...120 VAC or 200...240 VAC

85...132 VAC or 170...264 VAC

47...63 Hz or 360...440 Hz

3.5A

240 W

10 A

Yes

Yes with power optimization (3)

Redundancy

References

No

TSX SUP 10 TSX SUP 1101

(1) Construction characteristics conforming to standards IEC 950, IEC 1131-2, ensuring the safety of the user at the 24 V output, in terms of isolation between primary and secondary, maximum overvoltage on the output wiring and protection via the grounding circuit.

(2) Option of paralleling 2 power supply outputs of the same type, to provide an output current greater than the maximum authorized by a single supply.

(3) For 2 modules providing a total current of 100 %, each module supplies 50 % of the total. This improves the lifetime of the products.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/2

• Power supply modules to TSX Premium PLC standard

Type of supply Modules

Presentation 1

Input characteristics

Nominal voltage

Value limits

Frequency limit

Nominal input current

Output characteristics

Useful power a output voltage

Nominal current

Auxiliary functions

VLSV (1)

Paralleling (2)

Redundancy (4)

References

100...240 VAC or 125 VDC

85...264 VAC or 105...150 VDC

47...63 Hz or 360...440 Hz

0.4 A

100...120 VAC or 200...240 VAC

85...132 VAC or 170..264 VAC

0.8 A 2 A

26 W

24 VDC

1.1 A

53 W

2.2 A

120 W

5 A

Yes

Yes, with power optimization (3)

Yes

TSX SUP 1011 TSX SUP 1021

No

TSX SUP 1051

(1) Construction characteristics conforming to standards IEC 950, IEC 1131-2, ensuring the safety of the user at the 24 V output, in terms of isolation between primary and secondary, maximum overvoltage on the output wiring and protection via the grounding circuit.

(2) Option of paralleling 2 power supply outputs of the same type, to provide an output current greater than the maximum authorized by a single supply.

(3) For 2 modules providing a total current of 100 %, each module supplies 50 % of the total. This improves the lifetime of the products.

(4) Option of paralleling 2 power supply outputs of the same type, to provide an output current less than the maximum authorized by a single supply but ensuring availability of the output voltage even if one of the two modules becomes faulty.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/3

J

1.3

Physical description

1.3-1 TBX SUP 10 power supply block

1 Lamp indicating module power-up.

2 Screw terminal block for wiring the power supply voltages.

3 Identification label for the wiring terminals.

4 Module mounting lugs.

1.3-2 TSX SUP 1101 power supply block

J

7

1

5

7

4

___________________________________________________________________________

1/4

3

6

2

3

4

1

2

Presentation 1

1 Display block comprising an ON indicator lamp (orange) : lit if the supply is powered up

2 Display block comprising a 24V indicator lamp (green) : lit if the 24 VDC output voltage is present and correct

3 Cover to protect the terminal blocks

4 Screw terminal block for connection to the AC supply

5 Screw terminal block for connection to the 24 VDC output

6 Slots for cable clamp

7 Four fixing holes for M6 screws.

1.3-3 TSX SUP 1011/ 1021/ 1051 supply modules

• TSX SUP 1011 module

1 Support plate for mounting the supply module directly on an AM1-DE200/

DP200 rail or an AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate.

2 display block comprising:

- A 24V indicator lamp (green) : lit if the internal and output voltages are established and correct.

1

- An LSH indicator lamp (orange) "power optimization mode" : lit if the supply is operating in parallel mode with power optimization.

3 Cover to protect the terminal block

4 Screw terminal block for connection to the :

- AC or DC supply,

- 24VDC output.

4

5

5 Slots for cable clamp.

6

6 "NOR / LSH" switch on the rear of the module to control the power optimization device.

• NOR position : normal operation without power optimization (default position),

• LSH position : operation with power optimization.

2

3

J

___________________________________________________________________________

1/5

J

• TSX SUP 1021 /1051 modules

1

1 Support plate for mounting the supply module directly on an AM1-DE200/

DP200 rail or an AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate.

2 Display block comprising :

- A 24V indicator lamp (green) : lit if the internal and output voltages are correct.

- An LSH indicator lamp (orange) "power optimization mode" : lit if the supply is operating in parallel mode with power optimization. Indicator lamp present only on the TSX SUP 1021 module.

3 Cover to protect the terminal block.

4 Screw terminal block for connection to the :

- AC or DC supply,

- 24VDC output.

5 Slots for cable clamp.

6 100/220 V voltage switch. When the module is supplied, the switch is set at

220.

7 "NOR / LSH" switch on the rear of the module to control the power optimization device.

This switch is only present on the TSX SUP 1021 module

• NOR position : normal operation without power optimization (default position),

• LSH position : operation with power optimization.

6

7

4

5

2

3

___________________________________________________________________________

1/6

Presentation 1

• Support plate

Each TSX SUP 10 i

1 power supply module comes with a support plate for fixing the power supply : either on an AM1-DE200 or AM1-DP200 rail, or an AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate.

Each support plate can receive : either a TSX SUP 1021 or TSX SUP 1051 module, or one or two TSX SUP 1011 modules.

1

1 Three Ø 5.5 holes for mounting the support plate on a panel or AM1-PA preslotted plate at 140 mm centers.

4

3

2

2 Four Ø 6.5 holes for mounting the support plate on a panel or AM1-PA pre-slotted plate at 88.9 mm centers.

3 Two M4 holes for fixing one or more TSX

SUP 1011/1021/1051 power supply modules.

4 Slots for anchoring pins located at the bottom and rear of the module.

3

2

5

Notes :

• Each of these power supply modules can also be mounted on a TSX RKY ii rack replacing another module, with the exception of position PS, which must be used by a TSX PSY iii

power

1 supply module supplying rack modules.

• Plate support modules must be dismantled when performing the following operations :

- setting the "NOR/LSH" switch to LSH,

- mounting the plate on a panel or a pre-slotted AM1-PA plate,

- mounting the module on a TSX RKY iii

rack.

J

___________________________________________________________________________

1/7

J

1.4

Auxiliary functions

1.4-1 Parallel operation "with power optimization" mode

• On TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 modules

In this mode, two or more modules with the same reference are placed in parallel. The resulting voltage depends on the current drawn by the power supplies and the initial precision of the no-load voltage of each power supply module. The precision of load sharing results from the dispersion of the no-load voltage of each power supply and the dispersion of the load control device. It is approximately 25%.

In this mode, the output voltage is in the range 24 V

±

5%.

Example : Paralleling two power supplies to provide 1.6A.

V10 = no-load voltage supply 1

V20 = no-load voltage supply 2

Vpo= voltage resulting from paralleling supply 1 will provide 0.9A

supply 2 will provide 0.7A

V 20

V 10

V po

24 + 5%

24 - 5%

0 0.5

0.7

0.9

IS

1A

Parallel operation "with power optimization" is active when the NOR/LSH switch at the rear of the module is in the LSH position. The orange LED on the front of the module is lit when the mode is operational.

Current can be provided from 2 power supplies in parallel :

- 2.2 A with two TSX SUP 1011 power supplies,

- 4.4 A with two TSX SUP 1021 power supplies,

To use this mode, make the connections specified on sections 2.3

• On TSX SUP 1051 module and TSX SUP 1101 block

In this mode, two or more (modules or blocks) with the same reference can be placed in parallel. These power supply modules or blocks do not incorporate a diode in series with the output and therefore cannot be used in redundant configuration.

Unlike TSX SUP 1011/1021 modules, there is no mode switching. Connecting LSH terminals together from modules or blocks to be placed in parallel will cause automatic adjustment of the output current for each power supply as a function of the total current to be provided.

The connections specified in the sections below are required to operate this mode :

- 2.3, for the TSX SUP 1051 power supply module,

- 2.4, for the TSX SUP 1101 power supply block.

___________________________________________________________________________

1/8

Presentation 1

1.4-2 Redundancy / safety

The TSX SUP 1011 and TSX SUP 1021 power supplies incorporate a diode in series with the output (24V //) for paralleling. The point upstream from the diode (+24V), accessible at the terminal block, can be connected to a PLC input to provide an indication of the correct operation of the 2 power supplies.

Example : supply 1A with redundancy from the 2 TSX SUP 1011 power supplies.

Discrete inputs 1 and 2 of the PLC indicate the failure of one or other of the power supplies.

SUP

1011 24 V//

+ 24 V

– 0 V

1 A

DISCRETE

INPUT 1

Fuse

SUP

1011 24 V//

+ 24 V

– 0 V

DISCRETE

INPUT 2

Load

For power supplies operating in parallel, it is recommended to use the "power optimization mode" to ensure optimum lifetime of the 2 modules. Otherwise, the power supply with the higher output voltage will try to supply the maximum current with the other having practically no-load. The lifetime of the first supply will decrease more rapidly than that of the second supply.

J

___________________________________________________________________________

1/9

J

___________________________________________________________________________

1/10

2.1

TBX SUP 10 power supply block

• Dimensions / mounting

Section 2 2

2 Installation / Connections

74 100

113

The TBX SUP 10 power supply block should be mounted vertically to ensure optimal air flow within the block.

It can be panel-mounted, on an AM1-PA Telequick pre-slotted plate or AM1-DE200 /

DP200 rail.

• Connections

L

AC/DC

IN N s

–

24VDC

OUT +

Fu (1) c 100/240 V or a 125 V

Note

– + a 24 V/1 A

Primary : if the module is supplied with 100/240 V c , the phase and the neutral must be respected when wiring. Conversely, if the module is supplied with 125 V a , it is not necessary to respect the polarities.

Secondary : the - 24 V terminal (voltage of 0 V) must be connected to the ground at the output of the power supply module.

!

For safety of personnel, connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground with a green/yellow wire.

(1) External protection fuse on phase : 1A delayed 250 V for a single supply.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 1

J

Installation / Connections 2

2.2

TSX SUP 1101 power supply block

• Dimensions / mounting

The TSX SUP 1101 supply block can be mounted on an AM1 - PA plate or on a panel

• Mounting on a panel : drilling plan (dimensions in millimeters)

4 fixing holes (1)

8.75

207.3

224.8

8.75

(1) The diameter of the fixing holes must be large enough to take M6 screws.

• Mounting on an AM1-PA pre-slotted plate (dimensions in millimeters)

Fix the power supply block using four M6x25 screws + washers and AF1-EA6 clip nuts

AF1-EA6

J

135

16 8.75

207.3

224.8

8.75

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 2

Installation / Connections 2

• Connections

Normal connection input terminal block output terminal block

Sel

Sel

Sel

Sel

Fu (2) Fu (2)

L L

N s

Connection to a c 200..240 V supply c 200...240 V

N s

Connection to a c 100..120 V supply

Paralleling input terminal blocks

Lsh

+ 24 V

+ 24 V

+ 24 V

0 V c 100...120 V – 0 V

0 V s

Connection to a a 24V output output terminal blocks

Sel

Sel

(1)

N s

L

Fu (2)

Lsh

+ 24 V

+ 24 V

0 V

0 V s

Sel

Sel

(1)

Fu (2)

Lsh

+ 24 V

+ 24 V

0 V

+ 24 V

L

N 0 V – 0 V s s c 200...240 V

(1) Connection to be performed if the power supply is c 100...120 V

(2) External protection fuse on phase (Fu): 6.3A delayed action 250 V.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 3

J

Installation / Connections 2

Connection rules

Primary : respect the phase and the neutral when wiring.

!

For safety of personnel, a green/yellow wire must be used to connect the ground terminal of the module to the protective ground.

The " c power supply" and " a 24V output voltage" terminal blocks are protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.

In order to ensure 24 V VLSV isolation, use wires with :

• An operating voltage of

≥

600 VAC and a cross section of 1.5 mm 2 for connecting to the AC supply,

• An operating voltage of

≥

300 VAC and a cross section of 2.5 mm 2 for 24 V outputs and the ground.

J

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 4

Installation / Connections 2

2.3

TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051 power supply modules

• Dimensions / mounting

TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051 power supply modules

SUP 1011 SUP 1021/1051

Mounting support

16 8.72

4

56

120.2

36.5

Dimensions in millimeters

73

17.72

20

40

73.43

TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051 power supply modules can be mounted in the following ways :

Mounting on AM1-DE200 or AM1-DP200 rail or AM1-PA plate

Each power supply module comes mounted on a support for this type of mounting.

Dimensions in millimeters

147.2 (1)

136.2 (2)

(1) module + support + AM1-DE200 rail. This dimension becomes 139.7 with AM1-DP200 rail

(2) module + support mounted directly on an AM1-PA plate

Mounting on an AM1-D iiii rail

1 Check that the module is mounted

on the support

Mounting on an AM1-PA rail

1 Dismantle the module from

its support

2 Mount the combined module

+ support on the rail

2 Mount the support on the

AM1-PA plate

3 Mount the module on the support

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 5

J

Installation / Connections 2

Mounting the module on the support

Each power supply module has an integral support for mounting it directly on a DIN rail.

The support can take 1 or 2 TSX SUP 1011 power supply modules or 1 TSX SUP 1021/1051 power supply module. The mounting procedure is identical to that for a module mounted on a TSX RKY ii

rack (see Part A1 - section 5.4-1).

1 Fix the module pins in the slots on the lower part of the support.

2 Turn the module until it touches the support.

3 Tighten the screw on the upper part of the module to secure it to the support.

1 TSX SUP 1011

module

2 TSX SUP 1011

modules

1 TSX SUP 1021/1051 module

Mounting on a TSX RKY i i

Rack

TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051 power supply modules can be mounted in any of the positions on a TSX RKY i i rack with the exception of position PS which is reserved for the rack power supply module. If this is the case, the support is not used and must be dismantled.

Note:

The TSX PSY

iii

rack power supply module must be in position PS in order to supply the rack modules.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 6

J

Installation / Connections 2

• Connecting TSX SUP 1011/1021 power supply modules

Normal connection Paralleling

+ 24 V a 24 V

– 0 V

+ 24 V

0 V

N s

L

Fu

+

24 V 1 A

– c (1) a (2)

+ 24 V

0 V

N s

L

Fu

Fu = External protection fuse on phase

(Fu): 4A delayed action 250 V.

(1) 100...240VAC on TSX SUP 1011

100...120 / 200..240VAC on TSX SUP 1021

(2) 125 VDC, only on TSX SUP 1011

+ 24 V

0 V

N s

L

Fu c (1) a (2)

Connection rules

Primary : if the module is supplied with 100/240 V c , it is necessary to respect the phase and the neutral when wiring. Conversely, if the module is supplied with 125 V a , it is not necessary to respect the polarities.

!

For safety of personnel, a green/yellow wire must be used to connect the module terminal to the protective ground.

The power supply terminal block is protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.

In order to ensure 24 V VLSV isolation, use wires with :

• An operating voltage of

≥

600 VAC with a cross section of 1.5 mm 2 for connecting to the AC supply

• An operating voltage of

≥

300 VAC with a cross section of 2.5 mm 2 for the 24 V outputs and the ground.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 7

J

Installation / Connections 2

• Connecting TSX SUP 1051 power supply modules

Normal connection Paralleling

Lsh

+ 24 V

0 V

+ 24 V a 24 V

– 0 V

Lsh

+ 24 V

0 V

Fu

L

N s

100...120 V c

200...240 V N s

L

Fu = External protection fuse on phase

(Fu): 4A delayed action 250 V.

Lsh

+ 24 V

0 V

N s

L

Fu

Fu

+ 24 V

– 0 V

100...120 V c

200...240 V

J

Connection rules

Primary : respect the phase and the neutral when wiring.

!

For safety of personnel, a green/yellow wire must be used to connect the module terminal to the protective ground.

The power supply terminal block is protected by a cover which allows access to the wiring terminals. Wires exit vertically downwards. The wires can be held by a cable clamp.

In order to ensure 24 V VLSV isolation, use wires with :

• An operating voltage of

≥

600 VAC with a cross section of 1.5 mm 2 for connecting to the AC supply

• An operating voltage of

≥

300 VAC with a cross section of 2.5 mm 2 for the 24 V output and the ground.

___________________________________________________________________________

2 / 8

3 Characteristics

3.1

Electrical characteristics

Power supply blocks

Primary

Nominal input voltage

TBX SUP 10

24 V / 1A

Input voltage limit

V

V

Line frequency

Nominal input current (U = 100V)

Max inrush current

(1)

It max on power up (1) at 100 V at 240 V

Hz

A

A

A at 100 V As at 240 V As c 100 - 240 a 125 c 90...264

a 88...156

47... 63

0.4

3

30

0.03

0.07

I 2 t max on power up (1)

Power factor

Harmonic 3

Full load efficiency

Secondary at 100 V A 2 s at 240 V A

Useful power

Nominal output current

Output voltage / specified at 25

°

C

2

%

W

A

V s

2

2

0.6

10% ( ϕ

= 0

°

and 180

°

)

> 75

24

24

±

1

5 %

TSX SUP 1101

24V / 10A c 100...120/200...240

c 85...132/170...264

47...63/360...440

3.5

75

75

0.23

0.23

17

8.5

0.6

10% ( ϕ

= 0

°

and 180

°

)

> 80

240

10

24

±

1 %

Residual ripple (peak to peak)

Max HF noise (peak to peak)

Permitted AC supply microbreak period (2)

Protection Short-circuits against and overloads

Overvoltages

Paralleling mV mV ms

240

240

≤

10 in c

≤

1 in a continuous automatic reactivation peak limiting U > 36 no

≤

200

240

10 in c current limiting

V peak limiting U > 32 yes with power optimization

Serial connection no yes

(1) Values on initial power up, at 25

°

C. These elements should be taken into account when starting up for sizing protection devices.

(2) Nominal voltage for a repetition frequency of 1 Hz.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 1

J

J

Electrical characteristics (continued)

Power supply modules TBX SUP 1011

24 V / 1A

Primary

Nominal input voltage

Input voltage limit

Line frequency

Nominal input current

Max inrush current

(1)

It max on power up (1)

TSX SUP 1021

24 V / 2A

TSX SUP 1051

24 V / 5A at 100 V A at 240 V A at 100 V As at 240 V As

V c 100... 240 or a 125

V c 85..264 or a 105..150

Hz

A 0.4

c c

100...120/200...240

85...132/170...264

47...63 / 360...440

0.8

2

37

75

0.034

0.067

38

38

0.11

0.11

75

75

0.11

0.11

I 2 t max on power up (1)

Power factor

Harmonic 3

Full load efficiency

Secondary at 100 V A at 240 V A

Useful power (2)

Nominal output current (2)

Output voltage (0

°

C - 60

°

C)

Residual ripple (peak to peak)

Max HF noise (peak to peak) mV

Permitted AC supply microbreak period (3)

Start time on resistive load

Protection Shorts-circuits against and overloads

Internal overvoltages

2

2

% s s

0.63

2.6

0.6

> 75

4

2

0.6

10% ( ϕ

= 0

°

and 180

°

)

7.8

3.9

0.6

> 80

W

A

V

26 (30)

1.1

24

±

3 %

53(60)

2.2

120

5

24

±

3 % mV 150 200 mV 240 ms

≤

10 in c and

≤

1 in a> s < 1

≤

10 in c fallback to 0 and automatic recurrent limiting activation when error disappears a 105..150

V peak limiting U > 36 peak limiting U > 32

Paralleling yes with power optimization

Serial connection yes

(1) Values on initial power up, at 25

°

C. These elements should be taken into account when starting up for sizing protection devices.

(2) Useful power and output current at a ambient temperature of 60

°

C. Value between () = useful power in a ventilated enclosure or a temperature range of 0...+40

°

C.

(3) Nominal voltage for a repetition frequency of 1 Hz.

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 2

Characteristics 3

3.2

Physical and environment characteristics

Power supply modules / blocks

Connection to screw terminals

Max. capacity / terminal mm 2

Temperatures :

Storage

Operation

Relative humidity

Cooling

User safety

°

°

C

C

%

%

Dielectric strength :

Primary / secondary rms V

Primary / ground rms V

Secondary / Ground rms V

Isolation resistance:

Primary / secondary M

Ω

Primary / ground M

Ω

Leakage current

Electrostatic discharge immunity

TBX SUP 10

1 terminal per output

1 x 2.5

TSX SUP 1011 / 1021

TSX SUP 1051 / 1101

1011/1021/1051: 1 terminal/output

1101: 2 terminal/output

2x1.5 with cable end or 1 x 2.5

-25 to +70

+5 to +55

_

-25 to +70

0 to +60

5-95

By natural convection

VLSV

(EN 60950 and IEC1131-2)

50/60Hz- 1mn

1500

1500

500

≥

100

≥

100

I

≤

3.5 ms (EN 60950)

3500

2200

500

6 KV by contact / 8 KV in the air

(conforms to IEC 1000-4-2)

Electromagnetic field influence

Electromagnetic interference rejection

Shock wave

10 V/m (80 MHz to 1 GHz)

(conforms to FCC 15-A and EN 55022 class A)

Vibrations

Degree of protection

MTBF at 40

°

C H

(Lifetime) at 50

°

C H

Input : 4 kV MC, 2 KV MS Outputs: 2 kV MF, 0.5 kV MS

(conforms to IEC 1000-4-5)

1 mm 3 Hz to 13.2 Hz 1 g 57 Hz to 150 Hz

(conforms to IEC 68-2-6, FC test)

IP 20.5

100 000

IP 20.5, IP 21.5 terminal block

30 000

J

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 3

J

___________________________________________________________________________

3 / 4

General presentation

Terminal port communication

Discrete I/O : TSX DEY iiii / DSY iiii modules

Analog : TSX AEY iii / ASY iii modules

Communication : TSX SCY 21600 module and PCMCIA cards

Counting : TSX CTY 2A / CTY 4A modules

Axis control : TSX CAY 21/ CAY 41 modules

Stepper control : TSX CFY 11/ CFY 21 modules

Startup / Diagnostics / Maintenance

Standards and installation conditions

Process supplies

Index

F

G

D

E

A1

A2

B

C

H

I

J

B

___________________________________________________________________________

P / 1

P

P

A

ABE 6 SD 2520

ABE 7 CP A 03

ABE 7 CP A02

Acquisition cycle

C 3/13

C 3/13

C 3/13

C 3/11, C 4/11

Adaptor sub-base B 6/2

Addressing discrete I/O channels A1 7/1

Addressing racks in a PLC station A1 2/5

Aligned value

Alignment offset

Altitude

C 3/7, C 4/7

C 3/7

I 1/1

Ambient temperature

Analog input modules

I 1/1

C 3/1

Analog/digital conversion C 3/11, C 4/11

Application backup A1 7/14

Application memory

Application protection

AUX connector

A1 7/12

A1 7/13

A2 1/1

AUX terminal port A1 3/5, A2 1/1

Auxiliary inputs on TSX CTY .A modules

Capture E 2/8

Confirm

Enable

E 2/3

E 2/8

Line monitoring input - ERPS

E 2/4, E 2/9

Preset

Reset

Axis control range

E 2/7, E 2/3

E 2/3

F 1/1

Physical description

TSX CAY 21

TSX CAY41

F 1/3

F 1/1

F 1/1

B

Backup battery

Blocking faults

A1 4/4

H 3/2

Built-in protection for modules

BusX extension cables

B 2/8

A1 2/4, A1 2/8

C

Cable

TSX SCP CD 1030

TSX SCP CM 4030

TSX SCP CU 4030

TSX SCP CU 4530

TSX SCP CX 2030

D 3/7, D 3/8

D 3/22

D 3/20

D 3/21

D 3/9

TSX SCY CU 6030

TSX SCY CU 6530

Cable ends

Cable routing

Cable shielding

Capacitive load

CFY 11/21

Adjusting the axes

Configuring the axes

Debugging

Functions

Physical description

Channel addressing

Character mode connection

D 2/7

D 2/7

B 5/1

C 2/2

C 2/1

C 5/7

Characteristics

Auxiliary inputs

Brake output Q0

Integrated channel

Module electrical

Translator inputs

Characteristics of discrete I/O modules

TSX /16T3

TSX DEY 08D2 / 16D2

B 4/1

B 4/7

B 4/1

TSX DEY 16A2 B 4/2

TSX DEY 16A2/16A3/16A4/16A5 B 4/3

TSX DEY 16D3 B 4/1

G2/3

G2/2

G2/4

G2/1

G1/3

B 1/12

D 3/24

D 2/2

G3/15

G3/16

D 2/2

G3/13

G3/14

TSX DEY 16FK B 4/4

TSX DEY 32D2K/TSX DEY 64D2K B 4/5

TSX DSY 08R4D B 4/9

TSX DSY 08R5 / 16R5

TSX DSY 08R5A

B 4/8

B 4/10

TSX DSY 08S5/TSX DSY 16S4 B 4/11

TSX DSY 08T2/16T2/08T22 B 4/7

TSX DSY 32T2K/TSX DSY 64T2K B 4/12

Characteristics of the fan module A1 8/7

Characteristics of TSX PSY power supplies A1 4/7

Checking discrete I/O connections H 2/1

Inputs H 2/1

Outputs

Choice of encoder

Encoder power supply

Output interface

H 2/1

F 3/2

F 3/2

F 3/2

TSX CAP S9 F 3/3

Cold junction compensation C 4/3, C 4/11

Cold start A1 7/15

TSX SCP CX 4030 D 3/24 Common mode voltage C 4/11

TSX SCY CM 6030 D 2/9, D 2/11 Communication fault C 3/9, C 4/9, C 5/6

___________________________________________________________________________

P / 2

Index

Communication with an operator panel A2 1/2

Compatibility of preactuators and discrete network

Connection via Modem

Connections

D 3/20

D 3/8

F 3/10 outputs

Compatibility of sensors and discrete inputs

B 3/5

B 3/5

Incremental encoder

Connector pinout

Control events

Conversion time

Counter outputs

Up/down counting

Counter outputs - TSX CTY .A

F 3/10

C 3/12

A1 7/10

C 3/11, C 5/7

Conductor type

Connecting

Auxiliary I/O

Command signals

C 2/1

F 3/3

G3/6

F 3/26

E 2/9

Connecting sensors and

preactuators

Counter signals

F 3/18

F 3/9

Upcounting or downcounting

Crosstalk

Crosstalk between channels

E 2/4

C 4/12

C 5/7

NUM MDLA speed drive

Speed reference signals

SSI absolute encoder

F 3/17

F 3/3

F 3/11

TAP MAS box

Telefast pre-wired system

F 3/7

F 3/5

Translator signals G3/3

Using a TSX CDP 310/501 cable G3/12

Current consumed on 24 VR

Current consumed on 5 V

Current consumption of PCMCIA cards

Current consumption of

TSX SCY 21600

Current outputs

C 1/2

C 1/2

D 3/28

D 2/13

C 5/7

Using a TSX CDP 611 cable F 3/4

Using TSX CDP 301 or 501 cable F 3/23

Connecting the fan module A1 8/6

Current shunt

Cyclic execution

C 3/8

A1 7/3

Connection D 3/7

D

Encoder supplies F 3/12

F 3/13

Devices which can be connected to

TSX CAP S15

D 3/26

TSX P ACC01 A2 2/5

TSX FPP 10

D 3/25

Diagnostics H 3/3

TSX FPP 20

D 3/7

Dielectric voltage C 4/11

TSX SCP 111

D 3/9

Digital filter C 4/11

TSX SCP 112

D 3/20

Digital/analog conversion C 5/4

TSX SCP 114

J 2/7

Dimensions A1 5/2

TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051

B 6/8

Dimensions of the fan module A1 8/3

Connection cables

D 2/12

Discrete I/O connection B 5/1

Connection in Character mode

Discrete I/O display and

Connection of TSX PSY iiii power

A1 6/6 diagnostics B 3/10 supply modules

Discrete I/O module connections B 5/4

Connection of the integrated channel D 2/6

D 2/7

TSX DEY 08D2 B 5/5

To the UNI-TELWAY fieldbus

TSX DEY 16A2/16A3/16A4/16A5 B 5/8

Connection of TSX PSY iiii power

A1 6/2

TSX DEY 16D2 B 5/6 supplies

TSX DEY 16D3 B 5/7

Connection of TSX PSY iiii power

A1 6/4

TSX DEY 16FK B 5/10 supply modules

TSX DEY 32D2K B 5/12

Connection pinouts - TSX CTY .A

E 3/10

TSX DEY 64D2K B 5/13

15-pin SUB-D HD

E 3/11

TSX DSY 08R5 B 5/18

20-pin HE 10

TSX DSY 08R5A / 08R4D B 5/19

Connection to the Jbus/Modbus

D 2/9

TSX DSY 08S5 / 16S4 B 5/21 fieldbus

TSX DSY 08T2/08T22 B 5/15

Connection to the Modbus/Jbus bus D 3/22

TSX DSY 08T31 B 5/16

Connection to the UNI-TELWAY

___________________________________________________________________________

P / 3

B

P

P

TSX DSY 16R5

TSX DSY 16T2

TSX DSY 16T3

TSX DSY 32T2K / 64T2K

Discrete inputs and outputs

Display

B 5/18

B 5/15

B 5/16

B 5/23

B 1/1

A1 3/8

Display block C 3/10, C 4/10, C 5/6

Display of module status H 1/2

Analog modules

Application-specific modules

H 1/3

H 1/3

Discrete I/O modules

Power supply modules

Display of PLC status

H 1/2

H 1/6

H 1/1

ERR

I/O

RUN

TER

Distributed line adaptation

Downcounting

TSX CTY .A module

Downcounting channels

TSX CTY 1A/2A modules

Downcounting inputs

TSX CTY .A module

Dynamic performance

H 1/1

H 1/1

H 1/1

H 1/1

D 2/8

E 2/1

E 2/3

E 2/3

D 3/11

External cold junction compensation C 4/28

External shunt C 4/27

F

Fallback value

Fallback/Maintain outputs

Fan modules

Fast cycle

FAST task

Filter coefficient

C 5/3

C 5/5

A1 8/1

C 3/3

A1 7/8

C 3/4

C 3/3 Filtering inhibited

Fitting the RAM memory backup battery

Fixing racks

Forcing outputs

Full scale

Functions

A1 5/7

A1 5/3

C 5/3

C 3/11, C 4/11

F 2/1

F 2/3 Adjusting the axes

Block diagram of an axis control system

Configuring the axes

Debugging

Fuse protection

F 2/1

F 2/2

F 2/4

B 2/8

G

E

F 3/29

F 3/35

F 3/30

General wiring rules for discrete

inputs B 3/2

Electrical characteristics

Monitoring the sensor voltage

Of analog outputs

Ground connections

Grounding the modules

Grounding the racks

A1 6/1

A1 6/1

A1 6/1

Of auxiliary inputs

Of relay outputs

Of speed drive control inputs

F 3/33

F 3/37

F 3/36

Grouping of conductors C 2/2

I

Electrical ranges

-13..63 mV range

±

10 V range

±

5 V range

0..10 V range

0..20 mA range

0..3850 Ohms range

C 4/11

C 4/17

C 4/13

C 4/14

C 4/14

C 4/16

C 4/18

Inductive load

Initial power-up

Module states

PLC status

Input adaptor

Inserting PCMCIA memory card

Inserting/removing I/O modules

C 5/7

H 2/2

H 2/2

B 6/2

A1 5/8

B 1/9 0..400 Ohms range

0..5 V range

1..5 V range

4..20 mA range

Encoding the terminal block

Event management

Event-triggered tasks

Extendable racks

C 4/17

C 4/15

C 4/15

C 4/16

C 2/1

B 2/5

A1 7/10

A1 2/1, A1 2/2

Inserting/removing modules

Insertion of TSX PSY power supplies

Installation

C 2/1

A1 4/6

Basic configuration

Installation rules

F 3/1

A1 5/1

Installation TSX PSY power supply A1 4/6

___________________________________________________________________________

P / 4

Index

Installing discrete I/O modules B 1/9

Installing the battery on a PCMCIA memory card A1 5/9

Internal cold junction compensation C 4/28

Internal conversion resistance C 3/11

Internal faults

Internal RAM memory

C 3/9, C 4/9, C 5/5

A1 3/6, A1 4/4

Isolation C 3/11, C 5/7

J

Junction box

TSX SCA 62

TSX SCA50

L

D 3/21

D 2/11

Module self-tests

Module used

Module TSX DSZ 08T2

Modules

Monitoring preactuator voltage

Monitoring presence of the terminal block

Monitoring sensor voltage

Monitoring Short-circuit and

Overload

Monotonicity

Mounting fan modules

Mounting modules

Mounting racks

Mounting terminal blocks

Mounting the TSX TAP S15 05

Multidrop

Multirange input module

Multitask application structure

H 2/4

H 2/4

B 5/22

B 3/1

B 2/7

B 2/7

B 2/7

B 2/7

C 5/7

A1 8/4

A1 5/5

A1 5/3

A1 5/5

F 3/15

D 3/10

C 4/1

A1 7/7

Labelling discrete I/O modules

Latching inputs

Leakage current

Line terminator

Linearization

B 1/10

B 2/4

C 5/7

A1 2/4, A1 2/9

C 4/11

Link

SCP 112 / April 5000/7000 PLCs D 3/14

Multidrop D 3/11

Point to point D 3/10

Loading an application "backup" A1 7/14

N

Network architecture

Network documentation

Non-blocking faults

Linked to program execution

Normal cycle

Number of analog modules

D 1/1

D 1/1

H 3/1

H 3/2

C 3/3

C 1/1 M

Maintain value

Marking module positions

Marking racks

MAST master task

Master mode

Maximum error

Measurement filtering

Measurement sampling

Micro-cuts

Modbus architecture

Modem on terminal port

Module addresses

Module diagnostics

C 5/3

A1 2/11

A1 2/11

A1 7/8

A2 2/6

C 3/11, C 4/11

C 3/4, C 4/5

C 3/3, C 4/3

I 1/1

D 2/11

A2 1/7

A1 2/6

B 2/6

Module display

Module functions

Module identification

Module states

Initial state

Module disconnected

Module failure

F 3/38, E 4/14

C 3/1, C 4/1, C 5/1

C 1/3

H 2/4

H 2/4

H 2/4

O

Open lugs

Opening the cover

Operating modes

Output fallback state

B 5/1

B 5/1

A1 7/15

B 2/2

Output loads

Output power supply

Output protection

Overcurrent permitted

C 5/1

C 5/7

C 5/7

C 4/11

Overshoot monitoring C 3/4, C 4/3, C 5/3

Overshoot values C 4/4

Overvoltage permitted C 4/11

P

PCMCIA cards

Connection

Connection accessory

Description

Display

D 3/1

D 3/4

D 3/5

D 3/3

D 3/6

___________________________________________________________________________

P / 5

B

P

P

Mounting

Precautions

Presentation

D 3/5

D 3/4

D 3/1

Protocols

References

D 3/1

D 3/4

Visual diagnostics D 3/6

PCMCIA memory cards A1 3/6, A1 7/18

PCMCIA SCP 114 consumption D 3/20

Performance of the TSX Premium A1 8/8

Periodic execution A1 7/5

Permissible overvoltage

PLC states

PLC error

C 3/11

H 2/2

H 2/3

PLC not configured

PLC running

PLC self-tests

PLC software fault or HALT

PLC stopped

PLC station

Point-to-point connection

H 2/3

H 2/3

H 2/3

H 2/3

H 2/3

A1 2/4

D 3/9

Positioning the racks

Power consumption table

Power supply alarm relay

A1 5/1

A1 4/11

A1 4/4

Power supply failure and return

Power supply interlocking

A1 7/16

A1 6/10

Power supply RESET button A1 7/18

Power supply RESET pushbutton A1 4/5

Precision

Process diagnostics

Process power supply

Paralleling

Power optimization

Redundancy / safety

Support plate

TBX SUP 10

TSX SUP 1011/ 1021/ 1051

TSX SUP 1031/1061/1121

TSX SUP 1101

Process power supply characteristics

TBX SUP 10

C 4/12

B 2/6

J 1/1

J 1/9

J 1/9

J 1/9

J 1/7

J 1/4

J 1/5

J 1/4

J 1/8

TBX SUP 1011

TSX SUP 1021

TSX SUP 1051

Process power supply connections

TBX SUP 10

TSX SUP 1011/1021/1051

TSX SUP 1101

Process power supply dimensions

J 3/1

J 3/2

J 3/2

J 3/2

J 2/1

J 2/6

J 2/3

TBX SUP 10

TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051

TSX SUP 1101

Process power supply mounting

TBX SUP 10

TSX SUP 1011 / 1021 / 1051

TSX SUP 1101

Processor characteristics

Processor faults

Processor installation

Processor mounting

Processor RESET button

Processor RESET pushbutton

J 2/1

J 2/5

J 2/2

J 2/1

J 2/5

J 2/2

A1 3/11

H 3/3

A1 3/4

A1 3/4

A1 7/18

A1 3/7

Processors

Programmable input filtering

Protecting the outputs

A1 3/1

B 2/3

B 2/1

Protection of relay output contacts B 2/9

Pt100 Class A probe C 4/3

R

Range overshoot C 3/9,C 3/11,C 4/8,C 5/4

Range selection C 3/4, C 4/3

RC network C 5/7

Reactivating outputs

Realtime clock

Recalibration

Recalibration range

B 2/1

A1 3/9

C 3/8, C 4/8

C 4/8

Recommendations for use on discrete

I/O B 3/1

Rejection in common mode C 4/13

Rejection in serial mode

Relative humidity

Relay output adaptor

C 4/13

I 1/1

B 6/3

Resolution

Response to cold start

C 3/11

A1 7/19

Retrieving an application "backup" A1 7/14

Return to factory parameters C 3/8

RS 232 D physical support

RS 485 physical support

D 3/7

D 3/13

S

Scan time C 4/3

Selecting a power supply module A1 4/11

Self-tests

Sensor alignment

Sensor connection

Sensor link fault

C 3/9, C 4/9

C 3/7, C 4/7

C 4/27

C 4/5, C 4/8

___________________________________________________________________________

P / 6

Index

Sensor link monitoring C 4/5

Sensors not referenced to ground C 2/2

Sensors referenced to ground C 2/2

Sensors usable on TSX CTY .A

Upcounting input

Service conditions

E 3/3

I 1/1

Set outputs to 0

Setting the PLC to RUN/STOP

Setup

Basic configuration

C 5/5

A1 7/2

F 3/1, G 3/1

F 3/1, G 3/1

Installation procedure

I/O interfaces

Shielding

F 3/1, G 3/1

G 3/2

G 3/2

Translator interface power supply G 3/2

Wiring instructions F 3/1, G 3/1

Sharing the I/O B 2/2

Signal referencing

Single line adaptation

Single task application structure

Solid state adaptor

Standard display

Standard format

Standard racks

F 3/9

D 2/10

A1 7/3

B 6/2

C 3/6, C 4/6, C 4/7

C 1/1

A1 2/1, A1 2/2

Standards C 3/11, C 4/11, D 1/2, I 1/1

Status indicator lamps C 3/10,C 4/10,C 5/6

Stepper motor axis control G1/1

TSX CFY 11

TSX CFY 21

Summary of connection cables

System bits

System words

G1/1

G1/1

D 3/27

H 3/4

H 3/9

T

Task monitoring

TELEFAST

TELEFAST 2

Temperature display

A1 7/9

C 3/13, G 3/8

B 6/1

C 4/7

Temperature drift

Temperature probe current

C 3/11

C 4/11

Temperature probe ranges C 4/11, C 4/19

TER connector

TER terminal port

A2 1/1

A1 3/5, A2 1/1

Terminal block fault C 3/10, C 4/9, C 5/6

Terminal block label

Terminal block pinout

C 1/3

C 4/26, C 5/8

Terminal port

Terminal port characteristics

A1 3/5, A2 1/1

A2 1/16

Terminal port, communication

Character string

Modem connection

Operator panel

UNI-TELWAY master/slave

Terminal port connections

Adjustment terminal and operator

A2 1/3

A2 1/7

A2 1/2

A2 1/3

A2 1/4 panel

Character string

Operator panel

A2 1/6

A2 1/12

A2 1/6

Programming / adjustment terminal A2 1/5

TSX model 40 master PLC type A2 1/11

UNI-TELWAY inter-device

UNI-TELWAY inter-PLC

UNI-TELWAY master

UNI-TELWAY slave

A2 1/10

A2 1/9

A2 1/7

A2 1/8

Terminal port pin connection

Thermocouple ranges

A2 1/17

C 4/12, C 4/20

Translator with NPN open collector interface G 3/4

Translator with RS 422/485 interface G 3/4

Troubleshooting H 3/1

TSX P ACC 01 isolation box

TSX AAK2

A2 1/1

C 4/27

TSX BLY 01 C 1/1

TSX BLY 01 terminal block C 4/26, C 5/8

TSX CAP 030

TSX CAP S15

TSX CAP S9

TSX CDP 611

TSX CTY .A characteristics

Auxiliary inputs

C 3/13

F 3/13

F 3/3

F 3/4

Auxiliary outputs

Counting input

Modules

TSX CTY .A connections

ABE-7CPA01 sub-base E 4/1

ABE-7H08R10/16R20 sub-bases E 4/5

Counting sensors E 3/19

E 3/12 Encoders

TSX CTY .A general rules

Installation

E 3/7

E 3/9

E 3/4

E 3/4

Wiring

TSX CTY 1A/2A counter modules

TSX CTY 1A/2A supply

Auxiliary sensors

Encoder

E 3/23

E 3/23

E 1/1

E 3/24

E 3/24

___________________________________________________________________________

P / 7

B

P

P

TSX CXP 213

TSX CXP 223

TSX CXP 233

TSX CXP 613

TSX CXP 633

TSX FPP 10

TSX FPP 20

"ERR" indicator lamp

TSX FPP 20 PCMCIA

TSX P ACC 01 box

TSX P ACC 01 connections

To the UNI-TELWAY bus

To TSX 57ii PLCs

TSX P ACC 01 box connectors

TSX P ACC 01 configuration

TSX P ACC 01 connection between two PLCs

F 3/8

F 3/8

F 3/17

F 3/8

F 3/17

D 3/26

D 3/25

D 3/6

D 3/2

A2 2/1

A2 2/3

A2 2/3

A2 2/3

A2 2/9

A2 2/4

A2 2/8

A2 2/2

A2 2/2

A2 2/7

A1 3/1

A1 3/1

A1 4/3

A1 4/1

TSX P ACC01 dimensions

TSX P ACC01 fixing

TSX P ACC01 slave mode

TSX P57 10 processor

TSX P57 20 processor

TSX PLY power supply catalog

TSX PSY iiii power supplies

TSX PSY iiii power supply modules

TSX PSY power supply display

TSX RKA 02 protective cover

TSX RKY iii racks

TSX SCA 50

TSX SCA 62

TSX SCP 111

TSX SCP 112

TSX SCP 114

TSX SCP CC 1030

TSX SCP CD 1030

TSX SCP CM 4030

TSX SCP CU 4030

TSX SCP CU 4530

TSX SCP CX 203

TSX SCP CX 4030

TSX SCP PCMCIA

Assembly

Configuration

Dimensions

Indicator lamps

Module locating device

Slot

D 3/5

D 3/3

D 3/3

D 3/6

D 3/3

D 3/1

A1 4/1

A1 4/5

A1 2/10

A1 2/1

D 2/11

D 3/21

D 3/7

D 3/9

D 3/20

D 3/8

D 3/7

D 3/22

D 3/20

D 3/21

D 3/9

D 3/24

TSX SCY 21600

Description

Insertion / removal :

D 2/1

D 2/1

D 2/3

Installation

Presentation

TSX SCY 21600 module consumption

D 2/3

D 2/1

D 2/13

TSX SCY 21600 visual diagnostics D 2/4

TSX TAP S1505 F 3/13

U

UNI-TELWAY architecture

Up/down counting

TSX CTY .A module

Up/down counting inputs

TSX CTY .A module

Upcounting

TSX CTY .A module

Upcounting channels

TSX CTY 1A/2A

Updating the outputs

User display

User memory structure

Using negative logic

V

Voltage outputs

W

D 2/9

E 2/2

E 2/6

E 2/1

E 2/3

C 5/4

C 3/6, C 4/6

A1 7/12

B 3/8

C 5/7

Warm restart A1 7/16

Wiring accessories

TSX CAP S15

F 3/13

F 3/13

TSX TAP S15 05 F 3/13

Wiring precautions E 3/22, F 3/24, G 3/11

Writing to the outputs C 5/3

___________________________________________________________________________

P / 8

W913293950302A 05 TSXDM57E

Schneider Electric Industries SAS

Headquarters

89, bd Franklin Roosevelt

F - 92506 Rueil Malmaison Cedex http://www.schneider-electric.com

Owing to changes in standards and equipment, the characteristics given in the text and images in this document are not binding us until they have been confirmed with us.

Printed in Italy October 2003